project manual - planwellpes 22 1008 hangers and supports for plumbing piping issue 008 pes 22 1010...

PHASE II PROJECT C-4

EAST SIDE FACADE

PROJECT MANUAL

DETROIT REGIONAL CONVENTION FACILITY AUTHORITY

ONE WASHINGTON BLVD. DETROIT, MI 48226

ARCHITECTS:

SDG ARCHITECTS + PLANNERS

FORD BUILDING SUITE 103 615 GRISWOLD

DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48226

SDG PROJECT NO: 11105.52

DETROIT REGIONAL CONVENTION FACILITY AUTHORITY COBO CENTER PROJECT C-4 1 WASHINGTON BOULEVARD COBO CENTER: EAST SIDE FACADE DETROIT, MI, 48226 SDG PROJECT NO. 11105.52

Table of Contents 00 0001 - 1

© SDG Associates, LLC Issue 009

SECTION 00 0001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: SDG 01 1000 Summary Issue 009 SDG 01 2200 Unit Prices Issue 009 SDG 01 2300 Alternates Issue 009 SDG 01 2500 Substitution Procedures Issue 009 SDG 01 2900 Payment Procedures Issue 009 SDG 01 3300 Submittal Procedures Issue 009 SDG 01 4000 Quality Requirements Issue 009 SDG 01 4523 Testing & Inspection Services Issue 009 SDG 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls Issue 009 SDG 01 5721 Indoor Air Quality Controls Issue 009 SDG 01 6000 Product Requirements Issue 009 SDG 01 7300 Cutting and Patching Issue 009 SDG 01 7700 Closeout Procedures Issue 009 SDG 01 7800 Closeout Submittals Issue 009 SDG 01 7810 Project As-Built Documents Issue 009 SDG 01 7820 Operation and Maintenance Data Issue 009 SDG 01 7839 Project Record Documents Issue 009 SDG 01 7900 Demonstration & Training Issue 009

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: ROS 02 4119 Selective Demolition Issue 008

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: RDA 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete Issue 008 ROS 03 5400 Cast Underlayment Issue 008

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: ROS 04 4201 Dimension Stone Cladding Issue 008

DIVISION 05 - METALS BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: RDA 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing Issue 008 RDA 05 3100 Steel Decking Issue 008 ROS 05 4000 Cold Formed Metal Framing Issue 008 RDA 05 5300 Metal Gratings Issue 008 ROS 05 7000 Ornamental Metal Issue 008 ROS 05 7300 Ornamental Railings Issue 008




ROS 05 7500 Ornamental Formed Metal Issue 008

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: ROS 06 1000 Rough Carpentry Issue 008

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: ROS 07 1413 Fluid Applied Waterproofing Issue 008 ROS 07 4150 Composite Panels Issue 005 ROS 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Issue 008 ROS 07 8110 Spray Fire-Resistance Materials Issue 008 ROS 07 8410 Through-Penetration Firestop System Issue 008 ROS 07 8450 Fire Resistant Joint System Issue 008 ROS 07 9200 Joint Sealants Issue 008

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: ROS 08 8100 Glazing Issue 008

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: ROS 09 2900 Gypsum Board Issue 008 ROS 09 6813 Carpet Tile Issue 008 ROS 09 9120 Interior Painting Issue 008 ROS 09 9600 High Performance Paintings Issue 005

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: NOT USED

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: SDG 11 0135 Animated Sign Issue 009

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: NOT USED




DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: ROS 14 4200 Wheelchair Lift Issue 008

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: PES 21 0553 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping & Equipment Issue 008 PES 21 0600 Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods Issue 008 PES 21 1000 Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems Issue 008 PES 21 1008 Hanger and Supports for Fire Protection Issue 008

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: PES 22 0513 Common Work Results for Plumbing Issue 008 PES 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Issue 008 PES 22 0600 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods Issue 008 PES 22 0720 Plumbing Piping Insulation Issue 008 PES 22 1008 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping Issue 008 PES 22 1010 Plumbing Systems and Specialties Issue 008

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: PES 23 0513 Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment Issue 008 PES 23 0523 Valves Issue 008 PES 23 0548 Vibration/Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equip. Issue 008 PES 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Issue 008 PES 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Issue 008 PES 23 0600 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods Issue 008 PES 23 0720 HVAC Insulation Issue 008 PES 23 0800 Commissioning of HVAC Issue 008 PES 23 0900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC Issue 008 PES 23 1008 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Issue 008 PES 23 2100 Hydronic Piping and Specialties Issue 008 PES 23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Casing Issue 008 PES 23 3600 Air Terminal Units Issue 008

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: NOT USED




DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: PES 26 0501 Minor Electrical Demolition Issue 008 PES 26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Issue 008 PES 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Issue 008 PES 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Issue 008 PES 26 0534 Conduit Issue 008 PES 26 0535 Surface Raceways Issue 008 PES 26 0536 Cable Trays Issue 008 PES 26 0537 Boxes Issue 008 PES 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems Issue 008 PES 26 2200 Low-Voltage Transformers Issue 008 PES 26 2416 Panelboards Issue 008 PES 26 2717 Equipment Wiring Issue 008 PES 26 2726 Wiring Devices Issue 008 PES 26 2813 Fuses Issue 008 PES 26 2818 Enclosed Switches Issue 008 PES 26 5100 Interior Lighting Issue 008

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: PES 27 2100 Data Communications Network Equipment Issue 008

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: NOT USED

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: NOT USED

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: ROS 32 3913 Bollards Issue 003

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: NOT USED




ADDITIONAL REPORT MATERIAL BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE: NOT USED

APPENDICES BY: SECTION: DESCRIPTION: CURRENT ISSUE:


Summary 01 1000 - 1


SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. See the Bid Solicitation prepared by the Detroit Regional Convention Facility Authority Capital Improvements team.

B. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Work phases. 3. Use of premises. 4. Owner's occupancy requirements. 5. Specification formats and conventions.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Authority Project C-4 1. Project Location: Cobo Center, 1 Washington Boulevard, Detroit, Michigan

48226 2. The actual site is exterior to the building on the east side, facing Washington

Boulevard, integral with a new glass canopy as shown on the drawings.

B. Owner: The facility is leased from the City of Detroit. References to Owner mean the Detroit Regional Convention Facility Authority, who is actually the lessee. 1. Owner's Representative and sole authority on contract matters: Gary Brown

(TeL: 313 363-5856) 2. Cobo Center Representative for the work and for coordination with ongoing

building activities: Tom Tuskey, (Tel: 313 877-8250).

C. Architect: SDG Associates, LLC (Melvin Cross: Tel: 313 961-9000 extension 107).

D. Contract Administration: Detroit Regional Convention Facility Authority. P

E. Project: The work comprises the supply, installation, warranty and maintenance of a fully operational Animated Sign. The proposed “Animated Sign” is approximately 178’-0” by 35’-0” – see drawings. It is to be a medium that can display video images from the building exterior and yet allow daylight into the building interior at the same location. It is to be set behind and seen through a glazed canopy. The glazing is low-iron glass for maximum light transmittance. It is to be a sufficient distance inside the glazing to allow for glass cleaning and LED replacement. As it forms the exterior wall of Cobo Center, transparency is important to allow views out and daylight into the building. A solid or partially solid video wall would be unacceptable due to the impact of such a wall on the interior environment in Cobo Center’s main concourse.

F. The system shall have a proven record of successful installations. References for a minimum of three fully operational installations similar in scale to that being proposed at Cobo Center shall be provided with the bids.


Summary 01 1000 - 2


G. It is understood systems meeting the required performance standards may vary in details. The documents are written around one such proprietary system as the basis of design. Other systems providing the required performance will be acceptable. To allow the differences between the systems to be clearly understood, each bidder shall submit complete details of their proposed system including a form which is to be completed to show a direct comparison with the basis of design system.

1.3 WORK PHASES

A. The Work shall be conducted in a single phase in 2013. It is to be carried out in conjunction and coordination with the glass canopy. The glazing for the canopy has already been contracted to the Enclos Corporation.

B. Work within occupied Cobo Center is to be scheduled to the approval of the Authority and is not to disrupt the ongoing operations. It is particularly important not to carry out work within occupied Cobo Center when scheduled events are occurring. A schedule of such events can be obtained from the Authority. The Animated Sign site is exterior to Cobo Center and will be fenced allowing work during Cobo Center events. However some work relating to operation of the Animated Sign will occur within Cobo Center.

C. Avoid work that would cause excessive noise when events are occurring in Cobo Center. Coordinate this type of work schedule with Cobo Center.

1.4 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated on drawings.

a. All work is to be limited to the exterior fenced area, except for required access to Cobo Center to construct necessary operational system.

b. Do not move equipment and material through interior public areas. c. Utility shut-downs (if required) shall be at times approved by Cobo Center.

Shut downs affecting Cobo Center shall be outside normal working hours and at times when events are not occurring in Cobo Center.

2. Owner Occupancy: Cobo Center will be in continuous use by the public. Work activities of any nature shall not interfere with Cobo Center operations, shall not create a hazard to the public use of the facility or employees, and shall not reduce the quality of the public’s experience of the facility. This includes avoidance of vibration and excessive noise.

3. Driveways and Entrances: Work shall not interfere with the use of Cobo Center’s driveways and entrances.

4. Safety: Work shall not reduce the safety provisions of Cobo Center including but not limited to avoidance of blocking means of egress, avoidance of disruption to safety and fire protection systems, and avoidance of creation of hazardous conditions.


Summary 01 1000 - 3


1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the immediately adjacent existing building during entire construction period. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing building exits.

1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system and format. 1. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all

Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the

context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 1000


Unit Prices 01 2200 - 1


SECTION 01 2200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method.

1.2 COSTS INCLUDED

A. Unit Prices included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit.

1.3 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED

A. Quantities indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount.

1.4 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES

A. Measurement methods delineated in the individual specification sections complement the criteria of this section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section govern.

B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by Owner's Field Representative.

C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required.

D. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord.

1.5 PAYMENT

A. Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities of Work that is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the Owner's Field Representative, multiplied by the unit price.

1.6 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements.

1.7 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. See Bid Form for List of Unit Price Items.


Unit Prices 01 2200 - 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION


Alternates 01 2300 - 1


SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1 - Composite Metal Panels: 1. Indicate in the bid form the amount to add or deducted. Base bid includes Glass

Fiber Reinforced Gypsum. Alternate No 1 is to add or delete amount for use of Composite Metal Panels.

2. Base Bid Item: Section 09 2713 and Drawing number A10.060A. 3. Alternate Item: Section 07 4264 and Drawing number A10.060A.

B. Alternate No. 2 - Low Iron Glass: 1. Indicate in the bid form the amount to add or deducted. Base bid includes Non

Low Iron Glass. Alternate No 2 is to add or delete amount for use of Low Iron Glass.

2. Base Bid Item: Section 05 7313. 3. Alternate Item: Section 05 7313.

C. Alternate No. 3 - Point of Use Hot Water Heaters and Piping: 1. Indicate in the bid form the amount to add or deducted. Base bid includes Hot

Water Heater and Piping system at toilet rooms. Alternate No 3 is to add or delete amount for Point Use Water Heaters .


D. Alternate No. 4 - Fire Protection Density. 1. Indicate in the bid form the amount to add or deducted. Base bid includes Fire

Protection System designed base on NFPA 13 minimum sprinkler density. Alternate No 4 is to add or delete amount for Fire Protection System designed base on Highly Protected sprinkler density.


E. Alternate No. 5 - Interior Stone Veneer. 1. Indicate in the bid form the amount to add or deducted. Base bid includes natural

stone veneer at interior. Alternate No 5 is to add or delete amount for aluminum honeycomb reinforced natural stone veneer at interior.



Alternates 01 2300 - 2



PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION


Substitution Procedures 01 2500 - 1


SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for requirements for submitting

comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Should a contractor wish to submit a substitution for consideration, they may do so as an alternate, with all of the requirements of this section, for consideration subsequent to the bid due date. The contractors are to bid the contract documents as they have been prepared. The Architect will not consider any substitution request during the bid process.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit one copy (PDF Format) of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation

cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications

needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner, if any, and separate contractors, if any, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.




g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building codes in effect for Project.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven business days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify the Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 10 business days of receipt of request, or seven business days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 10 business days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request through the Construction

Manager for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:




a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the

Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.



Payment Procedures 01 2900 - 1


SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative

forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's

construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect through Construction Manager at

earliest possible date but no later than ten business days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of

values: a. Project name and location. b. Owner’s Project designation. c. Name of Architect. d. Architect's project number. e. Contractor's name and address. f. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G702 and G703.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of Contract Sum.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work

where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.




7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Verify with Owner that temporary facilities and other major cost items that

are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect based on the terms itemized in the Agreement between the Owner and the construction Manager.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as forms for Applications for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction

schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued

before last day of construction period covered by application.

F. Transmittal: Submit five signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording

appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.




1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's primary staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete

and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and

proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and

Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of date of Substantial

Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.


Submittal Procedures 01 3300 - 1


SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.

C. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

D. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the

Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow

additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect




will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 business days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal, or bind in a blank sheet for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label, title block,

or attached blank sheet. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Where this is not possible, such as product data sheets, provide “Submittal Review Sheet “ bearing information label described in the following paragraph 3 with sufficient space, 6 by 8 inches, for Contractor’s review and Architect’s submittal review and action codes.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project title and number b. Date submitted. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Identify the submittal type as Information or Review. m. Other necessary identification.

E. Contractor’s Review Comments: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. Each submittal should contain its’ completed transmittal form and document containing items for review by a single discipline covering a single specification section. Multi-disciplined submittals will not be accepted.




H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittal in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent

of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN" or

“IMPLEMENT EXCEPTIONS TAKEN.”

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities.

J. Use for Construction: Use only submittals with code indicating "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN" or “IMPLEMENT EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” by action of the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Only submit product data when specifically requested under each section of the Project Manual. The Architect without review or action will discard any other Product Data submitted. Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed

data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are

applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency.

4. Number of Copies: Submit one copy (PDF format) of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy (PDF format) with review status. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include

the following information, as applicable:




a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. f. Templates and patterns. g. Schedules. h. Notation of coordination requirements. i. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. j. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. k. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (PDF format).

3. Number of Copies: Submit one copy (PDF format) of each submittal. Architect will return one copy (PDF format) denoting review status.

D. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

E. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

F. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

G. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit one copy (PDF format) of subcontractor list, unless

otherwise indicated. Architect will not return any copies.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals as required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit one copy (PDF format) of each submittal, unless

otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes

signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. SUBMITTALS WITHOUT THE CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL STAMP AND SIGNATURE AS ABOVE WILL BE RETURNED BY THE ARCHITECT WITHOUT REVIEW. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SCHEDULE DELAYS RESULTING FROM PRESENTATION OF A SUBMITTAL WITHOUT THE APPROVAL STAMP AND SIGNATURE.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Submittal’s review is limited to checking for conformance with the information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. The Contractor and/or Construction Manager remains totally responsible for all dimensions, quantities, construction methods and means, technique, sequences in the work, and procedures. Submittal review codes and appropriate action to be taken, are as follows: 1. “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN”: Work may proceed. 2. “IMPLEMENT EXCEPTIONS TAKEN”: Work may proceed. 3. “REVISE AND RESUBMIT”: Correct and resubmit; work may proceed. 4. “REJECTED”: Do not proceed with the work. Revise submittal in accordance with

the notations and resubmit without delay. 5. “NO ACTION”: Submittals not requested, returned without review. Submittals not

prepared in compliance with “Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures”, returned without review. Submittal not corrected with previous notations, returned without review.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it. The Architect may return it for a specific action if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

END OF SECTION 01 3300


Quality Requirements 01 4000 - 1


SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other

quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.




1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems. 1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed

in the designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.

2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.




5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and

testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies

with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of

product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those




performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.




B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified

testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed

to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that

requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit

a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Construction Manager and not required by

the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having

jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Construction Manager in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, promptly of irregularities or deficiencies

observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ

tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether

tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or

approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing

and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.




5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control

procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


Testing & Inspection Services 01 4523 - 1


SECTION 01 4523 - TESTING & INSPECTION SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. Contractor shall employ Independent Testing Agency/Laboratory to perform testing services. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in this Section under heading SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Owner's Field Representative, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage ; 2003 (part of AAMA 501).

B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ; 2005.

C. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ; 2007a.

D. ASTM A 435/A 435M - Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates; 1990 (Reapproved 2007).

E. ASTM A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ; 2008a.

F. ASTM A 898/A 898M - Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural Shapes ; 2007.

G. ASTM C 31/C 31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ; 2008.

H. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ; 2005.

I. ASTM C 109/C 109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens) ; 2007.




J. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete ; 2005a.

K. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method ; 2007.

L. ASTM C 567 - Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete ; 2005a.

M. ASTM C 828 - Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines ; 2006.

N. ASTM C 924 - Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method ; 2002.

O. ASTM C 969 - Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines ; 2002.

P. ASTM C 1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms ; 2007.

Q. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) ; 2007.

R. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3(2,700 kN-m/m3) ; 2007.

S. ASTM D 2166 - Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil ; 2006.

T. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ; 2006.

U. ASTM E 548 - Standard Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence ; 1994.

V. ASTM E 605 - Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members ; 1993 (Reapproved 2006).

W. ASTM E 736 - Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members ; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).

X. ASTM E 1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference ; 2000.

Y. ASTM E 1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers ; 1996 (Reapproved 2008).

Z. ASTM E 1212 - Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies ; 2004 (Reapproved 2008).




AA. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel ; 2008.

BB. Code of Federal Regulations - 29CFR1910.7 - Definitions and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL); 2003.

CC. ICC (MBC) - Michigan Building Code ; 2006.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Owner's Field Representative.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by NRTL, NVLAP, or testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of work and for completed work.

H. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities

must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of corresponding generic name.




J. Experienced: When used with entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed minimum of number, as specified, of previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Owner's Field Representative for decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Owner's Field Representative for decision before proceeding.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

B. Reports: Testing Agency shall prepare and submit certified written reports that include: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and

testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected work complies

with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.




C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Licensed Professional Engineer Qualifications: Licensed professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations

governing the work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: NRTL, NVLAP, or independent agency with experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 1212; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: Nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29CFR1910.7. 2. NVLAP: Testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: Authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.




I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies and mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project without prior written permission of Owner's Field Representative.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Owner's Field Representative, Construction Manager, and Owner. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with following requirements, using materials indicated for completed work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Owner's Field Representative or Owner. 2. Notify Owner's Field Representative and Owner seven days in advance of dates

and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Owner's Field Representative's and Owner's approval of mockups before

starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 48.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide quality control services as required to perform testing and inspection in accordance with Contract Document and Michigan Building Code Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Special Inspections.

B. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage qualified testing agency to perform these services.




1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

C. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified

testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed

to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when work that

requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit

a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having

jurisdiction, when they so direct.

D. Provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced work that failed to comply with Contract Documents.

E. Cooperate with Owner, Owner's Field Representative, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ

tests are conducted. 2. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether

tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service to Owner, Owner's Field Representative and Contractor.

F. Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 2. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 3. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.




H. Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the work 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Owner's Field Representative, testing

agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the work where tests and inspections are required.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Owner will engage qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control

procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform work.

2. Notifying Owner's Field Representative, Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Owner's Field Representative and Owner, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare Record of Tests and Inspections. Include: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Owner's Field Representative. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Owner's Field Representative's and Owner's reference during normal working hours.




3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements - Alteration Projects.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Section 32 1100 - Base Courses. 1. Perform compaction density testing on compacted aggregate subbase course in

accordance with ASTM D 1557. 2. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing

uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor").

B. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving. 1. See Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete for concrete testing.

C. Section 03 3000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1. Test Cylinders:

a. Obtain four (4) test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each type of concrete placed each day.

b. Made, cured, and tested in accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39. c. Mark and store cylinders under cover, completely protected until ready for

shipment to laboratory. d. Density test for lightweight concrete in accordance with ASTM C 567. e. Test one cylinder of each set for 7-day and two for 28-day strength, and

retain fourth cylinder for further testing if needed. f. Consistency of concrete slump.

1) Not to exceed as specified under Section 03 3000 heading, Concrete Types, unless using water-reducing or high range water-reducing admixture at site.

2) Slump tests. a) In accordance with ASTM C 143. b) Required with test cylinders and for control of concrete.

g. Air Content. 1) Test in accordance with ASTM C 173. 2) Required with test cylinders.

2. Test Reports shall include: a. Name of project. b. Location of placement.




c. Date placed and date tested. d. Temperature. e. Type of concrete. f. Quantities of material (including water per batch of concrete). g. Brand of concrete. h. Slump. i. Air content. j. Temperature of concrete. k. Weight per cubic foot of concrete. l. Yield. m. Modulus of rupture (pounds per square inch). n. Compressive strength (pounds per square inch).

3. Material Testing: See Section 03 3000, heading, Source Quality Control. 4. Welding of Reinforcement.

a. Verify proper materials and procedures. b. Provide continuous inspection of welding.

5. Ready Mixed Concrete. a. When requested qualified inspector shall be present at plant during mixing

and when deliveries of concrete or materials are being made for this Project.

b. Each delivery of concrete shall be accompanied by a form in duplicate (one for Owner's Field Representative and one for Contractor), signed by laboratory inspector, verifying contents of form comply with Specifications and accepted mix design.

c. Inspector will ensure materials, including total water content, are correctly proportioned and comply with Specifications and accepted mix design.

d. Section 03 3120 – Structural Concrete - Slabs on Ground. 6. Sign Contractor's Structural Concrete - Slabs on Ground Placement

Documentation Report. 7. Attend Structural Concrete - Slabs on Ground Preinstallation Meeting.

D. Section 03 3500 – Concrete Finishing. 1. Monitor placing and finishing operations. 2. Testing and acceptance of flatness and levelness tolerances:

a. In accordance with provisions and procedures of ASTM E 1155. b. Measuring apparatus and calculation of F-numbers, as described in ASTM

E 1155. c. Floor tolerance measurements, made within 48 hours after completion of

each slab pour. d. Tolerance measurements, precede removal of shores and forms. e. Test sample measurement lines, not made within 2 feet of test section

boundary, construction joint, floor penetration or other discontinuity. f. Results of floor profile tests, distributed within 72 hours after each slab

pour.

E. Section 03 5300 – Concrete Topping. 1. Bond tests: See Section 03 5300. 2. Test lightweight concrete floor fill mixture at point of placement.




a. Do not rod cylinder, but rather hand tamp side of form. 3 inch by 6 inch cylinders shall be used.

b. Protect cylinders from weather and disturbance. After 24 hours, carefully move samples to moist cure. Air dry samples for at least one day prior to compressive strength testing. Cylinders shall neither be oven dried, or compressive tested in moist condition.

c. Prepare and distribute results of tests.

F. Section 03 0130 – Maintenace of Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1. Field testing and survey.

a. Assess amount and severity of deterioration. b. Estimate quantity of each required repair type.

2. Field inspection. a. Verify proper materials and procedures.

G. Section 04 2000 – Unit Masonry. 1. Prism tests.

a. Testing shall include tests in advance of beginning operations and at least one field test during construction per each 5000 square feet of wall, but not less than three tests for each building.

b. Make not less than three prism specimens for each test. c. Compressive strength, establish by testing prisms in accordance with

ASTM C 1314, Method A. d. Ultimate compressive strength at 28 days for masonry prisms: Not less

than 1500 psi. e. Protect and handle each specimen constructed at jobsite in manner that

mortar joints are not disturbed during transportation. f. Age of each test specimen: 28 days when tested.

H. Section 05 1200 – Structural Steel. 1. Shop Inspection:

a. Submit weekly reports, three copies to Owner, one to Owner's Field Representative, one to Owner's Field Representative's Field Representative, and one to Contractor.

b. Indicate on each shop inspection report, the report number, date, Architect-Engineer's project number and title, Owner's, Owner's Field Representative's, Erector's, and Contractor's names, and shall state tonnage received, fabricated, and shipped as of that date, and the following: 1) Steel inspected for surface defects, fold, twists, and straightness. 2) Members requiring bearing ends have full square finished bearing. 3) Stiffeners are in full contact at both ends for plate girders and at ends

shown in contact for seats and rolled sections. 4) Connection angles and plates to connect skewed members have

been bent hot. 5) Shop painting is in accordance with Specifications. 6) Prior to shipment, members inspected mark, INSPECTED, by

inspector.




7) Welds inspected for size, length, location, quality, and group marked by shop inspector after acceptance.

8) Welder's qualifications verified. 9) Steel has been properly cleaned and free from rust, water, oil, scale,

dirt, and paint, before welding. 10) Proper methods were employed when setting up work to ensure tight

fit without displacement of component parts after welding, together with complete penetration of weld metal to root of joints.

11) Inspector was in attendance at initial welding operations for each type of welded joint or connection while welds or fusion were being made in passing of metal from electrode to base metal. Continued welding operation was checked daily.

12) Welds carefully examined for defects and irregularities, e.g., undercutting, overlap, lack of fusion at edges, lack of penetration, place cracks adjacent to or behind weld, water cracks and cracks in weld metal, slag inclusion.

13) Inspect each complete and partial penetration groove weld, multipass fillet weld, and single pass fillet weld greater than 5/16 inch.

14) Ultrasonically test base metal thicker than 1-1/2 inches, where subject to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, for discontinuities behind and adjacent to such welds after joint completion. Accept or reject any material discontinuities on basis of ASTM A 435 or A 898 (Level I criteria) and criteria established by Owner's Field Representative.

15) Report reasons for rejection of member or weld, method of correction, and inspector's acceptance of corrected work.

c. Check compliance of material with requirements of Contract Documents with regard to quality of material, size, and length of members, including their straightness and alignment.

d. Examine steel fabricated for this Contract at every shop fabricating steel under this Contract

e. Inspection of welding shall be performed in accordance with provisions of AWS D1.1.

f. Inspection of welding shall be performed by testing engineers certified by AWS.

g. Inspect and accept fabricated material before shipment. Acceptance does not relieve Steel Contractor from replacing or correcting defective material or workmanship found, including errors in dimensions of finished pieces.

2. Field Inspection: a. Submit weekly reports, three copies to Owner, one to Owner's Field

Representative, one to Owner's Field Representative's Field Representative, and one to Contractor.

b. Indicate on each field inspection report, report number, date, Owner's Field Representative's project number and title, Owner's, Owner's Field Representative's, Erector's, and Contractor's names, and shall state tonnage received and erected as of that date, and the following: 1) Field inspector shall ascertain:

a) Members were not damaged during transportation and storage.




b) Members are erected and connected with good workmanship and according to requirements of Contract Documents.

c) Damaged portions of shop coat are repaired. d) Touch-up paint is applied to bolts, welds, and faying surfaces. e) Members are cleaned and ready to receive field coat of paint.

2) Unless otherwise indicated, inspection of high-tensile bolts shall be performed in accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Joints, Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.

3) Test at least 10 percent but not less than one bolt in each connection.

4) If test indicates insufficient tightening of a bolt tested, every bolt in the particular connection shall be checked.

c. Inspect welding of reinforcing material to existing trusses in accordance with provisions of AWS D1.1. Include the following: 1) Welder's qualifications verified. 2) Welding equipment checked for proper capacity, current, and size of

electrode, and in accordance with Specifications. 3) Steel was properly cleaned and free from rust, water, oil, scale, dirt,

paint, or similar foreign material before welding. 4) Proper methods were employed when setting up work to ensure tight

fit without displacement of component parts after welding, together with complete penetration of weld metal to the root of joints.

5) Inspector was in attendance during initial welding operations for each type of welded joint or connection while welds or fusion were being made in passing of metal from electrode to base metal.

6) Operation was checked daily. 7) Each weld was carefully examined for defects and irregularities, e.g.,

undercutting, overlap, lack of fusion at edges, lack of penetration, place cracks adjacent to or behind weld, water cracks and cracks in weld metal, slag inclusion.

8) Reasons for rejection of member or weld, method of correction, and inspector's acceptance of corrected work.

d. Inspect steel erection, include the following: 1) Members erected, plumbed, connected, inspected, and accepted. 2) Columns plumbed without use of shims. 3) Grout pads and anchor rods checked and accepted for uniform

bearing and alignment by structural steel erector. 4) Steel inspected for twist and straightness. 5) Verification that no members had been damaged during transport

and storage, and checked against plans for piece marks and location. a) Members are properly erected and connected according to

requirements of Contract Documents. b) Distance from face of column or supporting member to end of

beam is not greater than 9/16 inch for end bearing of seated connections.

c) Field painting is in accordance with Specification. d) Each column splice has been inspected for true and full

bearing.




e) Statement in final report that every member has been inspected by inspector.

f) Reasons for rejection of member, method of correction, and inspector's acceptance of corrected work.

6) High-tensile bolting. a) Inspection of field assembled high strength bolts shall ensure

requirements of Paragraphs 2 and 3 of AISC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts are met in the work.

b) Inspection shall ensure spline drives have been sheared off. c) With Contractor, test minimum of three bolts each day for each

grade, diameter, and type being used in the work on a bolt tension calibrator.

d) Upon completion of above three tests, apply torque wrench to nut in the untightening direction until just below minimum tension value is indicated on calibrator. Then retighten nut until required minimum tension reading is observed on calibrator. Value shall be considered the basis for torque readings of installed bolts.

e) Replace bolts found loose due to bolt yielding with unused bolts. A bolt has yield when nut cannot be turned by hand at every point along thread. Loose bolts shall be retightened to specified tension value.

I. Section 05 2100 – Steel Joist Framing. 1. Field inspector shall ascertain:

a. Members were not damaged during transportation and storage. b. Members are erected and connected with good workmanship and

according to requirements of Contract Documents and Erection drawings. c. Damaged portions of shop coat are repaired. d. Touch-up paint is applied to bolts, welds, and faying surfaces.

J. Section 05 3100 – Steel Decking. 1. Inspect - profile and gauge of material is in accordance with Contract

Documents. 2. Inspect - fastener size, spacing and location is in accordance with Contract

Documents and Erection drawings.

K. Section 07 4213 – Metal Wall Panels - Profile. 1. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on drawings for

compliance with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Water-Spray Test: After completing the installation of 75-foot-by-2-story minimum area of metal wall panel assembly, test assembly for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 in a 2-bay area directed by Owner's Field Representative.




L. Section 07 8100 – Applied Fireproofing. 1. Inspect the installed fireproofing after application and curing for integrity, prior to

its concealment. Ensure that actual thicknesses, densities, and bond strengths meet requirements for specified ratings. a. Test thickness in accordance with ASTM E 605 as described by

International Building Code. b. Test density in accordance with ASTM E 605. c. Test bond strength in accordance with ASTM E 736 as described by

International Building Code.

M. Section 07 8413 – Penetration Firestopping. 1. Inspect through-penetration firestop systems and prepare test reports. 2. State in each report whether inspected through-penetration firestop systems

comply with or deviate from requirements.

N. Section 07 8450 – Fire-Resistant Joint Systems. 1. Inspect fire resistant joint systems and prepare test reports. 2. State in each report whether inspected fire resistant joint systems comply with or

deviate from requirements.

O. Section 08 4413 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls. 1. Test installed curtain wall for water leakage in accordance with COORDINATE

TEST WITH SECTION 08 4413 END OF SECTION


Temporary Facilities & Controls 01 5000 - 1


SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Temporary facilities and controls are further described in the Bid Solicitation.

B. This Section includes additional requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless indicated otherwise below. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Contractor must coordinate all work with Cobo Center to avoid any disruption to ongoing building activities.

C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Contractor is responsible for verifying loading on all Owner’s circuits and panels being used for the work, for ensuring that none are overloaded, and for ensuring that the Owner’s ongoing operations are not disrupted. Contractor must coordinate all work with Cobo Center to avoid any disruption to ongoing building activities.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Contractor shall be entirely responsible for restoring all existing permanent facilities used temporarily for construction activities to their original state at the completion of the project. The original state shall be defined as a clean fully-operational undamaged state unless the Contractor specifically points out a defect prior to utilizing the facility for construction purposes. All such defects must be recorded photographically with the Owner’s signature and date on each prior to use of areas and systems for construction activities. Failure to record defects will entitle Cobo Center to claim each defect resulted from the construction activities.

B. Protection of Existing: The existing infrastructure system adjacent to the work area and sub-surface in the work area shall be carefully protected. Similarly the existing exterior




building enclosure shall be carefully protected if necessary to avoid exterior or structural damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber and Plywood: All lumber and plywood utilized in the work shall be fire retardant treated per AWPA C20 and C27.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: No provisions required. It is assumed the contractor will use vehicles for this limited time contract.

B. Storage Facilities: Material storage will not be permitted within the adjacent Cobo Center per Fire Code requirements for this occupied building. Exterior storage shall not block fire department access, means of egress from the occupied areas, or ongoing Cobo Center operations. Exterior storage shall be limited to areas within fenced zones. Storage areas shall be agreed with the Owner prior to deliveries.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Provide temporary portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately, result in minimum interference with performance of the Work, and result in no interference with ongoing Cobo Center activities and operations. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. Cobo Center will have ongoing operations and will be open to the public during the entire contract period.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with the Owner for time when existing services can be interrupted, if

necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Maintain in full operation. Avoid blockages.

C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore any facilities to remain outside the demolition area unchanged by the work to the condition existing before initial use.




1. Use of the Owner’s existing water service shall not interfere in any way with the ongoing operations of Cobo Center During the construction period the Cobo Center will be open to the public. The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of visitor experience is not diminished including use of public toilets, drinking fountains, etc. The visitors (and the Cobo Center staff) shall not be exposed to any hazardous conditions or reduction in water quality.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Use of Owner's sanitary facilities within Cobo Center will not be permitted. Temporary construction use facilities will be available in one of the fenced construction areas adjacent to Cobo Center.

E. Ventilation: Carry out the work so that it will not have a harmful effect on existing building systems (condition or operation), or on the adjacent environmental conditions of this continuously-open publicly-accessible facility.

F. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.

G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as approved by the

Owner. 2. Install temporary power such that it does not interfere with the ongoing

operations of Cobo Center. Provide an installation that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed, existing building systems (condition or operation), or on the adjacent conditions and level of safety in this continuously-open publicly-accessible facility.

H. Lighting: Provide all necessary lighting to carry out the work and as required by code.

I. Telephone Service: The Contractor shall not have access to the Cobo Center telephone system. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone. 1. Develop a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire

departments, Cobo Center emergency contacts, Contractor's home office, Architect's office, Owner's office, and Principal subcontractors' home offices.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Parking: Contractor will be permitted to park one vehicle on the land east of Cobo Arena. Other personnel shall use the adjacent public parking at their expense.

B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Signs are not permitted except as listed below. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and equipment

access.

C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. The area around such containers is to be kept clean at all times.




Debris and waste is not to be placed outside the waste containers. The use of the Cobo Center’s waste containers and waste disposal facilities is prohibited.

3.4 FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air and water contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. The public will occupy this facility during the entire construction period. The public (and the Cobo Center staff) shall not be exposed to any potentially hazardous condition.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

C. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in all areas of the Cobo Center.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of

Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."



Indoor Air Quality Controls 01 5721 - 1


SECTION 01 5721 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction.

B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy.

C. Testing indoor air quality before commencement of construction; existing building areas only.

D. Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction.

E. Testing air change effectiveness after completion of construction.

1.2 PROJECT GOALS

A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts

and equipment from construction dust. 3. Establish condition of existing ducts and equipment prior to start of alterations.

B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed

products leading to indoor air pollution.

C. Ventilation: HVAC system has been designed to achieve the minimum requirements for ventilation specified in ASHRAE 62.1 with air change effectiveness of 0.9 or greater.


A. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size ; 2007.

B. ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Ventilation For Acceptable Indoor Air Quality ; 2010.

C. ASHRAE Std 129 - Measuring Air-Change Effectiveness ; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002).

D. SMACNA (OCC) - IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction ; 2007.




1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products.

B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified.

C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter.

D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 for submittal procedures.

B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction as a guide. 1. Submit not less than 10 days before start of construction. 2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust. 4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas. 5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control. 6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of

ventilation, use of permanent HVAC systems, types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters.

7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures.

C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors, moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times.

D. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report.

E. Air Contaminant Test Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. 2. Locations and scheduling of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail. 4. Test instruments and apparatus. 5. Sampling methods.

F. Air Contaminant Test Reports: Show: 1. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 2. Test values for each air sample; average the values of each set of three. 3. HVAC operating conditions. 4. Certification of test equipment calibration. 5. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results.




G. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. 2. Description of test spaces, including locations of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail; state whether tracer gas decay or step-up will be

used. 4. Test instruments and apparatus; identify tracer gas to be used. 5. Sampling methods.

H. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Reports: Show: 1. Include preliminary tests of instruments and apparatus and of test spaces. 2. Calculation of ventilation effectiveness, E. 3. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 4. Test values for each air sample. 5. HVAC operating conditions. 6. Other information specified in ASHRAE 129. 7. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results.


A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC content.

B. Auxiliary Air Filters: MERV of 8, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the

building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable

packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame.

B. When working in a portion of an occupied building, prevent movement of air from construction area to occupied area.

C. HVAC equipment and ductwork may NOT be used for ventilation during construction: 1. Provide temporary ventilation equivalent to 1.5 air changes per hour, minimum.




2. Exhaust directly to outside. 3. Seal HVAC air inlets and outlets immediately after duct installation.

D. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms.

E. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts,

tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and

conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete.

F. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters.

G. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures.

3.2 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT

A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both.

B. Perform building flush-out before occupancy.

C. Do not start flush-out until: 1. All construction is complete. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning is

not necessary. 4. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.

D. Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside air until a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied. 1. Obtain Owner's concurrence that construction is complete enough before

beginning flush-out. 2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and interior relative

humidity no higher than 60 percent. 3. If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of

the specified contaminants is conducted during flush-out, start flush-out over. 4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, supply a

minimum of 25 percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy, and: a. Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy. b. Continue ventilation during all occupied periods.




c. Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot or design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater.

E. Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing.

3.3 AIR CONTAMINANT TESTING

A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both.

B. Perform air contaminant testing before starting construction, as base line for evaluation of post-construction testing.

C. Perform air contaminant testing before occupancy.

D. Do not start air contaminant testing until: 1. All construction is complete, including interior finishes. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.

E. Indoor Air Samples: Collect from spaces representative of occupied areas: 1. Collect samples while operable windows and exterior doors are closed, HVAC

system is running normally as if occupied, with design minimum outdoor air, but with the building unoccupied.

2. Collect samples from spaces in each contiguous floor area in each air handler zone, but not less than one sample per 25,000 square feet; take samples from areas having the least ventilation and those having the greatest presumed source strength.

3. Collect samples from height from 36 inches to 72 inches above floor. 4. Collect samples from same locations on three consecutive days during normal

business hours; average the results of each set of three samples. 5. Exception: Areas with normal very high outside air ventilation rates, such as

laboratories, do not need to be tested. 6. When retesting the same building areas, take samples from at least the same

locations as in first test.

F. Outdoor Air Samples: Collect samples at outside air intake of each air handler at the same time as indoor samples are taken.

G. Analyze air samples and submit report.

H. Air Contaminant Concentration Determination and Limits: 1. Carbon Monoxide: Not more than nine parts per million and not more than two

parts per million higher than outdoor air. 2. Airborne Mold and Mildew: Measure in relation to outside air ; not higher than

outside air. 3. Formaldehyde: Not more than 50 parts per billion. 4. Formaldehyde: Measure in micrograms per cubic meter, in relation to outside

air; not more than 20 micrograms per cubic meter higher than outside air.




5. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): Not more than 500 micrograms per cubic meter.

6. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): Measure in micrograms per cubic meter, in relation to outside air ; not more than 200 micrograms per cubic meter higher than outside air.

7. Particulates (PM10): Not more than 50 micrograms per cubic meter. 8. Total Particulates (PM): Measure in micrograms per cubic meter, in relation to

outside air; not more than 20 micrograms per cubic meter higher than outside air.

3.4 VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS TESTING

A. Perform ventilation effectiveness testing before occupancy.

B. Do not begin ventilation effectiveness testing until: 1. HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing has been satisfactorily completed. 2. Building flush-out or air contaminant testing has been completed satisfactorily. 3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.

C. Test each air handler zone in accordance with ASHRAE 129.

D. If calculated air change effectiveness for a particular zone is less than 0.9 due to inadequate balancing of the system, adjust, and retest at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION


Product Requirements 01 6000 - 1


SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General product requirements.

B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.

C. Product option requirements.

D. Substitution limitations and procedures.

E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference

standards.

C. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

D. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

E. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.

F. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.

2.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Basis of Design: Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

2.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 1. See Section 01 2500 for Substitution Procedures.

3.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.

B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas.

D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.




3.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.

H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 1. Touch-up and repair finish where marred or damaged, leaving surface in good

condition at Project completion. END OF SECTION


Cutting & Patching 01 7300 - 1


SECTION 01 7300 - CUTTING & PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. See other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of

substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.




5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. Space to be handed oover to the Owner broom clean and ready for immediate occupancy, fully capable of fulfilling its intended function.



Closeout Procedures 01 7700 - 1


SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Cleaning. 3. Record documents.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Substantial Completion shall be requested after two weeks on continuous uninterrupted successful operation of the Animated Sign. Should it be necessary to access the project site after the dates indicated for completion, then the Contractor shall be responsible for arranging such access with ongoing subsequent construction activities. The Contractor shall be responsible to all costs relating to this requirement for access.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection to verify Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with

construction tools, and similar elements. 2. Complete cleaning requirements

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will proceed with inspection. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items to be corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final

Completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. At completion of Project C-4 in its entirety.

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. All punch list items must be completed within the period indicated in the contract.


Closeout Procedures 01 7700 - 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Broom clean only in work area. Hand wash Animated Sign.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Entire work area to be “broom clean” without any debris whatsoever.

B. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

C. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers for cleaning.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

3.2 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide “red marked” documents showing location and size of each utility capped. END OF SECTION 01 7700


Closeout Submittals 01 7800 - 1


SECTION 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Section 01 3300 - Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples.

B. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.

D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner's Field Representative with claim for final Application for Payment.

B. Permit Drawings: Provide to the Owner’s Field Representative one of the three original and complete sets of signed and sealed project drawings as submitted to, and approved by the Department of Buildings and Safety of the City of Detroit. 1. Drawings to bear the Architects signed and sealed imprint along with the seals

and signatures of all City of Detroit officials who have examined and approved these documents.

2. These drawings are to include the approved drawings for all the trades along with any separate drawings developed for site and site utility work.

3. Submittal of these signed and sealed drawings does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to also deliver to the Owner a full and complete set of Project Record [As-Built] drawings.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of

contents before start of Work. Owner's Field Representative will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within 10 days after acceptance.

3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Owner's Field Representative comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

D. Warranties and Bonds:




1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following Record Documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

C. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings.




3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture

designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.

E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed.

C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.

D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and




emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.

K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.

L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

N. Include test and balancing reports.

O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare electronic and paper versions of manual as described below.

B. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.

C. Prepare Data in the Form of an Instructional Manual. 1. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 2. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Air and water balance reports. 4. Certificates.

3.6 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.




B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

C. Co-execute submittals when required.

D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. END OF SECTION


Project As-Built Documents 01 7810 - 1


SECTION 01 7810 - PROJECT AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.

B. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Contractor As-Built Prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. As-Built Prints: Maintain one set of prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark As-Built Prints to show the actual installation where

installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up As-Built Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would

be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the

markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of

showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

3. Mark As-Built sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.




4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT AS-BUILT DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT AS_BUILT DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 AS_BUILT SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,

and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information

necessary to provide a record of selections made.

2.3 AS_BUILT PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes

in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS AS-BUILT SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project As-Built Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project As-Built Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.




B. Maintenance of As-Built Documents and Samples: Store As-Built Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project As-Built Documents for construction purposes. Maintain As-Built Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project As-Built Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



Operation & Maintenance Data 01 7820 - 1


SECTION 01 7820 - OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and

finishes.

B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments, if any, within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3

copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.




D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness

necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text

pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in

labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.

B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.




D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for




maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment:

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions that detail essential maintenance procedures:

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and

maintenance manuals.

E. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



Project Record Documents 01 7839 - 1


SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

a. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy set along with PDF electronic files of marked-up record prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

b. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and one set of annotated

PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation

varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would

be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect and Construction Manager.




When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as

the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: DWG Version 2004 or compatible with 2004 operating in Microsoft

Windows operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record

prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for

resolution.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate

electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor.

1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,

and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information

necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Specifications].

1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.




1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data.

1.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittal as paper copy and scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's[ and Construction Manager's] reference during normal working hours.



Demonstration & Training 01 7900 - 1


SECTION 01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION & TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections.

B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. All software-operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Plumbing equipment. 4. Electrical systems and equipment. 5. Items specified in individual product Sections.

C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for: 1. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes. 2. Fixtures and fittings. 3. Items specified in individual product Sections.


A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of attendees. 1. Submit to Owner's Field Representative for transmittal to Owner. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session:

a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate

training. f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations,

hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such as slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to

be provided by Contractor.




C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that

are not included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and

maintenance data.


A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or

installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with

necessary qualifications.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL

A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.

B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.

C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration

for other season within six months.

D. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

3.2 TRAINING - GENERAL

A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.

B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.

C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.

D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved




by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up" time.

E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation;

backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory

information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.

F. Product- and System-Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and

constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-

down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance.

4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.

5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures.

6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid

voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of

manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.

G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days.

END OF SECTION

DETROIT REGIONAL CONVENTION FACILITY AUTHORITY COBO CENTER PROJECT C-4 1 WASHINGTON BOULEVARD COBO CENTER: EAST FAÇADE RENOVATION DETROIT, MI, 48226 ROSSETTI PROJECT NO. 2013-015

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 1

© ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 02 4119 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-

tions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

1. ANSI A10.6-90: Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition.

B. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency. C. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association International.

1. NFPA 241-04: Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner

ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and

reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm. B. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed




and salvaged.

C. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site im-provements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selec-tive demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work

similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before begin-

ning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having ju-risdiction.

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid de-lays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. A. Owner will occupy the building near selective demolition areas. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted either inside or outside of Cobo Center.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against

damage during selective demolition operations.




1. Confer with Construction Manager before removal of any fire suppression

equipment. 2. Fire suppression equipment in demolition areas is to be isolated as required from

the remainder of the building fire suppression system in order to maintain the complete operational integrity of the fire suppression system throughout the rest of Cobo Center, all of which will be occupied for the duration of this work.

3. Maintain all the requisite fire-protection facilities in service in the areas of Cobo Center which are part of the area of selective demolition operations. All such fire protection equipment to be provided, located and maintained in accordance with all applicable Cobo Center insurance programs and as required by the local authorities having jurisdiction.

Where any question of intent remains, verify extent of demolition with Construction Manager prior to start of any removal of that area or item.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or dam-

aged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warran-ties.

1.9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept construction waste.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of se-

lective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be re-

moved and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing

any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of struc-ture or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. OSHA regulations require an engineering survey before selective demolition begins.




F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings. G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition

activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division

1 Section "Summary." B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility

services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before pro-

ceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal opera-

tions to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1

Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Coordinate any work which infringes upon a public R.O.W. of any kind with all agencies having jurisdiction over this type of work. Secure all permits and clearances for this type of work before start of work.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent in-

jury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area

and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of ex-

isting construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."




C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction be-ing demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new con-

struction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cut-ting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring ex-isting finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At con-cealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to im-

pose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equip-

ment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new ma-

terials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials nec-




essary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures

with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of con-crete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,

using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled,

or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demo-

lition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition opera-tions began.

END OF SECTION

DETROIT REGIONAL CONVENTION FACILITY AUTHORITY COBO CENTER

PROJECT C-4 1 WASHINGTON BOULEVARD

COBO CENTER: EAST FAÇADE RENOVATION DETROIT, MI, 48226

ROBERT DARVAS ASSOCIATES, P.C., PROJECT NO. 13031

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ROBERT DARVAS ASSOCIATES, P.C.

03 3000 - 1 Issue 008

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete

materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.

2. Foundation walls.

3. Slabs-on-grade.

4. Suspended slabs.

5. Concrete toppings.

6. Building walls.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Section "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of

specially finished formed concrete.

2. Division 03 Section "Concrete Topping" for emery- and iron-aggregate concrete floor

toppings.

3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

5. Division 32 Section "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and

walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume;

subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.






03 3000 - 2 Issue 008

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,

and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating

compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

F. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

4. Curing compounds.

5. Floor and slab treatments.

6. Bonding agents.

7. Adhesives.

8. Vapor retarders.

9. Joint-filler strips.

10. Repair materials.

G. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified

Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and

equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities."






03 3000 - 3 Issue 008

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as

documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -

Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through

one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding

Code--Reinforcing Steel."

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified.

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

manufacturers specified.






03 3000 - 4 Issue 008

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed.

c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of

concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane

of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in

diameter in concrete surface.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: [ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420)]

[ASTM A 706/A 706M], deformed bars.

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel

wire into flat sheets.






03 3000 - 5 Issue 008

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater

compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated

wire bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] or [III]

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class [C] or [F].

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Provide aggregates from a single source with

documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications

and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch in footings, [3/4 inch for balance of work.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium

chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.






03 3000 - 6 Issue 008

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

Products:

a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm.

b. Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm.

c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film.

d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;

Aquafilm.

e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film.

f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar.

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid.

h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con.

j. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm.

k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.

l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.

m. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm.

n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.

o. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid.

p. Unitex; Pro-Film.

q. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Monofilm ER.

r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

1. [Available ]Products:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.

b. Burke by Edoco; Aqua Resin Cure.

c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.

d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;

W.B. Resin Cure.

e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).

f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX.

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.






03 3000 - 7 Issue 008

h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear.

k. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E.

l. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Resi-Chem Clear Cure.

m. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure WB 30.

n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309.

o. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Maxcure Resin Clear.

p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit

requirements, and as follows:

1. Types [I and II, non-load bearing] [IV and V, load bearing], for bonding hardened or

freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

C. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized steel

sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm)

thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion

of concrete or debris.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.

4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

5. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.






03 3000 - 8 Issue 008

6. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica

Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not

exceeding 10 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of

cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for

placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a

water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written

instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: as required on the drawings.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or

plasticizing admixture 1 inch

4. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:


2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. Select slump limit from two

options in subparagraph below or revise to suit Project.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent, plus or minus 1 percent at point of delivery

D. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:


2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd.






03 3000 - 9 Issue 008

3. Slump Limit: [4 inches (100 mm)] [5 inches (125 mm)], plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: [5-1/2] <Insert number> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of

delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

5. Air Content: [6] <Insert number> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery

for [1-inch (25-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal maximum aggregate size.

6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

7. Steel-Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, at a rate of [50 lb/cu. yd. (29.7 kg/cu. m)] <Insert weight>.

8. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended

rate, but not less than [1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m)] [1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m)]

<Insert dosage>.

E. Concrete Toppings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:


2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content 520 lb/cu. yd.

3. Slump Limit: [4 inches plus or minus 1 inch

F. Building Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi at 28 days.

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116], and furnish batch ticket information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure

can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.






03 3000 - 10 Issue 008

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to

prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous

locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and

Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and

other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.






03 3000 - 11 Issue 008

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50

deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-

removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 65 percent of its 28-day

design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without

loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply

new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete

surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of

shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to

distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will

induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and

provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643

and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to

manufacturer's written instructions.






03 3000 - 12 Issue 008

C. Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with [granular fill] [fine-graded granular material],

moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm)

or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).

1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over

granular fill.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack

weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with

wire.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair

coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten

epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

G. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material

according to ASTM A 780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel

reinforcement.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.






03 3000 - 13 Issue 008

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

3. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened

or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-

fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch . Repeat grooving of contraction joints after

applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete

when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before

concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch

(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07

Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.






03 3000 - 14 Issue 008

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of

weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.

Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of

concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration

to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and

other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified

limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view or covered by additional

architectural finish.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface

irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be

covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.






03 3000 - 15 Issue 008

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where

indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete

surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform

color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing

process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, re-straightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-

floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4

inch (6 mm) in 1 direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small

or inaccessible to power driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

Repeat float passes and re-straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular

texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied

or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of

trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that

would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,

carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-

finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly

trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-

grade.






03 3000 - 16 Issue 008

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [where

ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method]. While concrete is

still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and

elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish

with Architect before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish where

indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's

written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over surface in 1

or 2 applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface.

2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.

3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water

to expose slip-resistive aggregate.

H. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to

surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate recommended by manufacturer.

2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface

by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow power

floating with a second dry-shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing

remainder of material, and embed by power floating.

3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound

recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after

final finishing.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,

after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with

in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to

complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and

terminations slightly rounded.






03 3000 - 17 Issue 008

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as

shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,

complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-

weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing

operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and

bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the

remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped

at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than

seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project..






03 3000 - 18 Issue 008

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair

damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging

concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer

unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of

floor covering used on Project].

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity

of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until

construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in

formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove

and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling

and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make

edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-

coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before






03 3000 - 19 Issue 008

bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured

in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and

standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher

than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.

Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather

edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low

areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor

elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,

square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.

Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.

Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without

coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.

Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and

loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.






03 3000 - 20 Issue 008

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's

approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and

inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Verification of use of required design mixture.

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50

cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd., or

fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform

additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for

each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite

sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.






03 3000 - 21 Issue 008

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure one set of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite

sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi.

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain

Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete

testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive

strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking

strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency

may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with

ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply

with the Contract Documents.

E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of

finishing.

END OF SECTION 033000


Cast Underlayment 03 5400 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 03 5400 – CAST UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL


A. Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment and Trowel-applied floor underlayment. 1. Cementitious type.


A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens).

B. ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars.

C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and product limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on surface preparation.

C. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with min-imum three years of documented experience.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure, freezing, and ambient temperature greater than 105 degrees F.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete.

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 48 hours before, during and 72 hours after installation of underlayment.

C. During curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Underlayment: Blended cement mix, that when mixed with water in accordance with manufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following proper-ties: 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi after 28 days, tested in accordance with ASTM

C109/C109M. 2. Flexural Strength: Minimum 1000 psi after 28 days, tested in accordance with ASTM

C348. 3. Density: Maximum 125 lb/cu ft. 4. Final Set Time: 1-1/2 to 2 hours, maximum. 5. Thickness: Feather edge to maximum 3-1/2 inch.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in accord-ance with ASTM E84.

7. Underlayment (CUL-A), Self-Leveling. a. Acceptable products.

1) Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.: Ardex K-15: www.ardex.com. 2) Dayton Superior Chemical Division: EconoLevel:

www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. 3) Euclid Chemical Company: Floorstone: www.euclidchemical.com 4) Maxxon Corporation: Level-Right Self-Leveling Floor Underlayment:

www.maxxon.com. 5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

8. Underlayment (CUL-B), Trowelable, For General Use. a. Acceptable products.

1) Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.: Ardex SD-P: www.ardex.com. 2) Dayton Superior Chemical Division: Sure Finish:

www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. 3) Maxxon Corporation: Level-Right FeatherEdge: www.maxxon.com. 4) TEC: VersaPatch: www.tec.com. 5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials.

C. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type.

D. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer.

2.02 MIXING

A. Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum bi-products, or other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Concrete: Mechanically prepare steel troweled concrete to create a textured surface necessary to achieve the best bond; acceptable methods include bead blasting and scarifying. Do not use acid etching.

B. Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth.

C. Vacuum clean surfaces.

D. Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry.

E. Close floor openings.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Place material onto substrate. Do not retemper or add water.

C. Place and screed while the material is still highly flowable.

D. Be careful not to create cold joints.

E. Wear spiked shoes while working in the wet material to avoid leaving marks.

F. Place to required thickness, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

G. For final thickness over 1-1/2 inches, place underlayment in layers. Allow initial layer to harden to point where material has lost its evaporative moisture. Immediately prime and begin applica-tion of subsequent layer within 24 hours.

H. Place before partition installation.

I. Where additional aggregate has been used in mix, add top layer of neat mix (without aggre-gate), if needed to level and smooth surface.

J. If fine, feathered edge is desired, steel trowel edge after initial set, but before it is completely hard.

K. Underlayment (CUL-A), Self-Leveling. 1. Use to build up thickness or to form flat, level and smooth base surface. 2. Smoothly apply composition and feather out edges. 3. Compatible with flooring adhesive to be used over underlayment. 4. Apply in single layers from featheredge to not greater than 1 inch and not more than 3

inches with aggregate. 5. Substrate shall be solid, clean and free of oil, grease, wax, latex compounds, curing com-

pounds, dust and foreign matter. 6. Prime substrate with primer recommended by manufacturer. 7. Mix underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 8. Add well washed and fine graded gravel 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch if required by thickness of un-

derlayment. 9. Add resilient emulsion in high stress areas or over wood, old adhesives or metal as rec-

ommended by manufacturer. 10. Pour liquid and spread in place to adequately cover high points. 11. If aggregate makes it necessary to install final layer of underlayment only, apply when first

layer has set to walkable hardness but is not dry. 12. Allow material to self-level.

L. Underlayment (CUL-B), Trowelable, For General Use. 1. Use to build up thickness or form flat, level and smooth base surface. 2. Apply in single layers from featheredge to not greater than 1 inch. 3. Substrate shall be solid, clean and free of oil, grease, wax, latex compounds, curing com-

pounds, dust and foreign matter. 4. Prime substrate with primer recommended by manufacturer. 5. Mix underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 6. Add well washed and fine graded sand for thicknesses over 1/2 inch. 7. Apply with float to level. 8. When underlayment starts to harden, steel trowel to required smoothness.

3.04 CURING

A. Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached.

B. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Independent testing agency will perform field inspection and testing, as specified in Section 01 4523.

B. Placed Material: Agency will inspect and test for conformance to specification requirements.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and cracking.

B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces. END OF SECTION


Dimension Stone Cladding 04 4201 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 04 4201 – DIMENSION STONE CLADDING PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cut marble veneer at exterior and interior walls (Existing or Match existing).

B. Metal anchors and supports.

C. Joint sealing.


A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants


A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

C. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

E. ASTM C97 - Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone.

F. ASTM C99 - Standard Test Methods for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone.

G. ASTM C170 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone.

H. ASTM C503 - Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone.

I. ASTM C880 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone.

J. Michigan Building Code, 2009 edition.

K. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual; Marble Institute of America, Inc.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section to verify project requirements, substrate conditions and installation instructions.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. For Information 1. Product Data: Provide product specifications and installation instructions.

a. Test Data: For the stone material being proposed for the project, submit independent laboratory certified test reports for compressive strength, flexural strength, modulus of rupture, absorption and thermal hysteresis. If no thermal hysteresis test data is available, submit certification that the thickness of the stone supplied is sufficient to restrain the differential expansion induced by exposure to solar heat gain.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

b. Dowels, anchors, and accessories. c. Expansion joint material.

C. For Review. 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions and details for installation, showing

anchorages, head, jamb, and sill opening details, joint locations, corner details, and joint-ing methods.

2. Samples: For each stone species, submit two stone panel samples 12 by 12 inches in size, illustrating color range and texture, markings, surface finish, and grain. Where antic-ipated variation cannot be represented in two samples, provide an adequate number of samples to represent expected effect in installation.

3. Submit stone fabricator's installation instructions and field erection or setting drawings; in-dicate panel identifying marks and locations on setting drawings.


A. Design anchors and supports under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in Michigan. 1. Design anchors to resist positive and negative wind pressures and other loads as required

by applicable code. 2. Design anchor attachment to stone with a factor of safety of 5:1. 3. Design each individual anchor with a factor of safety in vertical dead-load-bearing direc-

tion of 4:1 and in horizontal lateral-load-bearing direction of 2:1.

B. Perform work in accordance with MIA Dimensional Stone Design Manual.

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

D. Stone Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum ten years of documented experience. 1. Stone Fabricator shall verify the suitability of the selected stone as the exterior cladding

component of the system design as indicated on the drawings.

E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum ten years of documented experience.

1.07 MOCK-UP

A. Construct stone cube mock-up for attachment, including stone anchor accessories, corner con-dition. Include sealer applied to wall.

B. Locate where directed.

C. Mock-up may remain as part of Work.


A. Store stone panels vertically on edge, resting weight on panel edge.

B. Protect stone from discoloration.

C. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, uno-pened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, construction activities and other hazards.



ROSSETTI Issue 008


A. During temporary storage on site, at end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements. 1. Anchor system.

a. Contract Documents do not indicate support of stone, generally match existing an-chor system for each typical condition.

b. Design proper anchoring, dowelling and cramping of work in keeping with standard practices.

2.02 INSTALLERS

A. Acceptable Firms: 1. Booms Stone Co., Redford, MI 48239. www.boomsstone.com. 2. Wolverine Stone Co. Warren, MI 48088. www.wolverinestoneco.com.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Stone ( Match existing) 1. General.

a. Best quality of respective kind. b. Uniform in color. c. Even in texture. d. Free from vents, shakes, and other defects that would impair strength or durability, or

mar appearance.

2.04 ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Other Components in Contact with Stone: Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304 for exterior stone. Galvanized steel, ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized after fabrication per ASTM A123/A123M is acceptable for interior stone work. 1. Sizes and configurations: As required for vertical and horizontal support of stone and ap-

plicable loads. 2. Wire ties are not permitted. 3. Criteria.

a. Contract Documents indicate support of stone by shelf angles and loose steel and generally anchor system for each typical condition.

b. Design proper anchoring, dowelling and cramping of work in keeping with standard practices.

B. Support Components not in Contact with Stone: Stainless steel, ASTM A167, Type 304 for ex-terior stone. Galvanized steel, ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized after fabrication per ASTM A123/A123M is acceptable for interior stone work.

C. Setting Buttons and Shims: Plastic type.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

D. Flashings: Stainless steel with hemmed edge and clipped corners.

E. Weep/Cavity Vents: Preformed plastic tubes .

F. Expansion Joint Filler. 1. 1/2 inch thick where indicated. 2. Closed cell PVC or neoprene sheet filler material. 3. Acceptable products.

a. Everlastic Vinyl Gasket by Williams Products Inc., Troy, Michigan 48084 www.williamsproducts.net.

b. NS - Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, New York 11788. www.h-b.com.

c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Sealant: Specified in Section 07 9200. Joint sealants shall be non-staining type and pretested for compatibility with natural stone panel facing selected.

H. Waterproofing. 1. Acceptable products.

a. Thoroseal Foundation Coating by Thoro, a division of BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio 44122 www.buildingsystems.basf.com.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Supports: Stainless steel, Type 304. 3. Bolts, washers, and nuts: Stainless steel, Type 304.

I. Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces.

2.05 STONE FABRICATION

A. Exposed surfaces: Match existing finish.

B. Back surfaces: Sawn or roughly dressed finish to approximate true plane.

C. Accurately cut to shapes and dimensions.

D. Cut washes in strict accordance with details, true-to-line, perfectly matched at joints and with profiles of sharp, true edges.

E. Plane surfaces absolutely flat.

F. Curved surfaces: Continuously curved and true-to-line.

G. External corners: Square profile.

H. Exposed arrises: In true alignment and slightly eased to prevent snipping.

I. Moldings, washers, and drips: Uniform in profile throughout their entire length.

J. Beds and joints: Uniform width of 1/4 inch unless noted otherwise.

K. In stones which project more than 1/2 inch, cut drip slot not less than 3/8 inch wide and 1/4 inch deep for full width of projection.

L. Slope exposed top surfaces of stone surfaces for natural wash, cut in strict accordance with de-tails, true to line, perfectly matched at joints, and with profiles of sharp true edges.

M. Cut holes and sinkages for anchors, cramps, and dowels.

N. Locate holes for handling devices only in unexposed surfaces.

O. Panel Size: As indicated on drawings.

P. Fabrication Tolerances: In accordance with MIA Dimensional Stone Design Manual.

Q. Fabricate units for uniform coloration between adjacent units and over full area of installation.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate conditions and site conditions are ready to receive work of this Section.

B. Verify items built-in under other sections are properly located and sized.

C. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements by field measurements before fabrication.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements that will mark or damage exposed surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General. 1. Furnish hoisting machinery, power, tools, scaffolding, and materials necessary for installa-

tion of stone panel system. 2. Install dowels, anchors, and accessories. 3. Make joints as shown on details. 4. Additional joints will not be allowed, unless accepted by Owner's Field Representative. 5. Joints shall have uniform width of 1/4 inch, unless otherwise shown on details. 6. Stone shall not have marks of setting tools, spalls, scratches, stains, mars, or deface-

ments. 7. Patching or concealing of defects with any composition or by adhering let-in piece will not

be allowed. 8. Remove defective stones.

B. Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back-up. Lap end joint mini-mum 6 inches and seal watertight.

C. Erect stone in accordance with stone supplier's instructions and erection drawings.

D. Install panels in proper alignment in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.

E. Coordinate panel installation with wall flashings and other components of construction.

F. Install anchors and place setting buttons to support stone and to establish joint dimensions.

G. Seal joints indicated with sealant. Perform sealant work in accordance with requirements of Section 07 9200.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Positioning of Elements: Maximum 1/4 inch from true position.

B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 50 feet.

C. Maximum Variation Between Face Plane of Adjacent Panels: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in any two stories.

E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch maxi-mum.

F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet, or a quarter of nominal joint thick-ness, whichever is less.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3.05 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any item not so indicated on Drawings.

B. Do not impair appearance or strength of stone work by cutting.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove excess sealant upon completion of work.

B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

C. Use nonmetallic tools in cleaning operations.

D. Replace damaged panels or repair with Owner's Field Representative's approval. 1. Repair chipped and scratched surfaces per manufacturer's guidelines as approved by the

Owner's Field Representative.

E. Use of sandblasting, wire brushes, or acids is forbidden. Do not clean when there is danger from frost or until frost is entirely out of stone.

F. Starting from top, brush down stone with dry stiff fiber brushes, using clean water for removal of light surface coatings of dirt. Where stone is marred by dirt, clean by methods which will re-move stains.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed product's finished surface from damage and harmful contaminants during con-struction.

END OF SECTION





STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ROBERT DARVAS ASSOCIATES, P.C.

05 1200 - 1 Issue 008

SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Architecturally exposed structural steel.

3. Prefabricated building columns.

4. Grout.


1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures

and administrative requirements.

2. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors.

3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined

as structural steel.

4. Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for

surface preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.

B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed

structural steel in the Contract Documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.






05 1200 - 2 Issue 008

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment drawings.

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with

requirements:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.

2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

3. Shop primers.

4. Non-shrink grout.

E. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification

Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for

Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding

Code--Steel."

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic

Design

3. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections."

4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

5. Coordinate finish painting requirements with Division 09 painting Sections.

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."






05 1200 - 3 Issue 008


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become

dry or rusty before use.

2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or

structures as directed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying

the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for

installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M Grade 50

B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade [B] structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: as shown on the drawings

2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts;

ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain

2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible-washer type.






05 1200 - 4 Issue 008

a. Finish: Plain

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished

carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.

C. Un-headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36

1. Configuration: as shown

2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.

3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

4. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.

5. Finish: Plain

D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36


2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.


4. Finish: Plain

E. Threaded Rods: A 572/A 572M, Grade 50



3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C

2.3 PRIMER

A. Refer to Architectural finishing specifications

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate

according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's

"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected.

3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.






05 1200 - 5 Issue 008

4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including

tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for

structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel.

1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including

pitting, rust, scale and roughness.

2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,

treating, and shop priming.

C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.

D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-

SP 1, Solvent Cleaning

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of

other work through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes

or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,

appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally

exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances.






05 1200 - 6 Issue 008

a. Grind butt welds flush.

b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.

2.7 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. General: Prefabricated building columns consisting of load-bearing structural-steel members

encased in manufacturer's standard insulating concrete for fire protection and enclosed in an

outer non-load-bearing steel shell.

1. Concrete Fill: Manufacturer's standard-mix structural concrete, with a minimum 28-day

compressive strength of 5000 psi, machine mixed and mechanically vibrated during

placement to produce concrete fill free of voids.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building column listed and labeled by UL or

another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings

indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: [4] [3] [2] hours.

C. Column Configuration: Provide columns of sizes and shapes indicated. Fabricate connections

to comply with details shown or as required to suit type of structure indicated.

D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

prefabricated building columns that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prefabricated building

columns by one of the following:

1. Black Rock Column, Inc.

2. Dean, George H. Inc.

3. Fire-Trol Division; Dean Lally L.P.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces:

1. Priming shall be in accordance with the Architectural finish requirements.

2. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded, surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-

critical connections, surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials, or galvanized

surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and

spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and

standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."






05 1200 - 7 Issue 008

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

3. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning."

4. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

5. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning."

6. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

7. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."

8. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

9. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not

less than 1.5 mils.

D. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

E. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, non-asphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting

System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry

film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and

inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the

Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested

and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing

agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.






05 1200 - 8 Issue 008

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,

bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with

requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural

steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in

intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,

connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-

place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's

"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural

Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design.

B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing

materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface

of base and bearing plates.

1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as

required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or

bearing plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no

voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply

with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel]

within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be






05 1200 - 9 Issue 008

in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug

welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection[ unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut

sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1].

H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be

enlarged to admit bolts.

I. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: as required on the drawings.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,

appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and

"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design

for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on

surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally

exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-

through on exposed steel surfaces.

a. Grind butt welds flush.

b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.






05 1200 - 10 Issue 008

3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel

Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design”, manufacturer's written

recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire-

resistance rating indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the

following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be

accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the

Contract Documents.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according

to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing

plates and abutting structural steel.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 09 painting

Sections.






05 1200 - 11 Issue 008






STEEL DECKING ROBERT DARVAS ASSOCIATES, P.C.

053100 - 1 Issue 008

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Composite floor deck.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill.

2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear

connectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,

pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

C. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for

testing indicated.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding

Code - Sheet Steel."

C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according

to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members."






053100 - 2 Issue 008


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Steel Deck:

a. ASC Profiles, Inc.

b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group.

c. Consolidated Systems, Inc.

d. DACS, Inc.

e. D-Mac Industries Inc.

f. Epic Metals Corporation.

g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.

h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.

i. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division.

j. Roof Deck, Inc.

k. United Steel Deck, Inc.

l. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc.

m. Verco Manufacturing Co.

n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs

and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite

Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated,

and with the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60

zinc coating.

2. Profile Depth: As indicated.

3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated

4. Span Condition: As indicated






053100 - 3 Issue 008

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with

requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000

psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of

profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same

material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile as indicated.

G. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.

H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, [0.0598 inch (1.52 mm)] [0.0747

inch (1.90 mm)] thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.

I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: [ASTM A 780] [SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film

containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in

SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned

and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract

side-lap interlocks.






053100 - 4 Issue 008

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting

panels.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting

through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical

fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface

diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch nominal.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an

average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches) apart.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels

between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches and as

follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel

screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of [1-1/2

inches or as shown, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting

structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,

according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and

sides of deck.






053100 - 5 Issue 008



perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and

Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

corrected work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck

with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.



Cold-formed Metal Framing 05 4000 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 05 4000 – COLD-FORMRD METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing.


A. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute.

1. North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2001.

2. Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions. 3. Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design. 4. Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design.

B. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers.

1. ASCE 7-02: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM A 653-02a: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM C 1107-02: Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

D. AWS - American Welding Society.

1. AWS D1.3-98: Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

E. SSPC - The Society for Protective Coatings.

1. SSPC-Paint 20-82 (Revised 1991): Paint Specification No. 20: Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I,

"Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"). 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable building codes and ASCE 7-02. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections

greater than the following:

a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing at Brick Veneer: Horizontal deflection of 1/720 of the wall height.

b. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing at Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height.

c. Deflection between supports shall not be more than those listed in paragraphs a. and b. above.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or

overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and an-chors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tol-erances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed

Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

2. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that

each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:

1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to prac-

tice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering ser-vices of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installa-tions of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding

Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing iden-tical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the

Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during deliv-ery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid con-

densation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following:

1. Clark Steel Framing. 2. Dale/Incor. 3. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 4. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST50H (ST340H). 2. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent.

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection or Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc

coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 50 (340), Class 1 or 2. 2. Coating: G90 (Z275).

2.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness:

a. 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) at brick veneer. b. 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) at metal wall panels.

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, un-

punched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward

and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attach-ment to stud web.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched,

with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for 1-story structures and 1 inch (25

mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges

designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary struc-ture, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm). b. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for 1-story structures and 1

inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm). b. Flange Width: Insert dimension equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width

plus 1 inch (25 mm).

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise

indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Hole reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-

steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM



ROSSETTI Issue 008

A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated

from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified inde-pendent testing agency.

1. Hilti ICBO 2388 or equal as approved by Architect.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel

drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout contain-ing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching.

D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufac-

turer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fas-

tening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not per-mitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw

penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fas-tening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection

stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum al-lowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as

needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect re-maining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and

the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of

foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field as-sembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing -

General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent require-ments are indicated.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting struc-

ture.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabri-cated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fas-

tening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and comply-ing with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track

or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in in-tensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, un-disturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent con-nections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Inde-

pendently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inacces-sible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard

punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maxi-mum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan

location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheath-ing or other finishing materials.

3.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs

as follows:



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or

warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 3. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not

more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip an-

gles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified re-

quirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine com-pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and in-stalled cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION





METAL GRATINGS ROBERT DARVAS ASSOCIATES, P.C.

055300 - 1 Issue 008

SECTION 055300 - METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal bar gratings.

2. Metal frames and supports for gratings.


1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for structural-steel framing system

components.

2. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and

railings.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 30 lbf/sq. ft.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.


A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."






055300 - 2 Issue 008


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

gratings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop

Drawings.

1. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete

inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or

masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Metal Bar Gratings:

a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation.

b. All American Grating, Inc.

c. Barnett/Bates Corp.

d. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited.

e. Fisher & Ludlow.

f. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V.

g. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company.

h. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division.

i. Ohio Gratings, Inc.

j. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc.

k. Tru-Weld.

l. GS Metals Corp.

m. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company.

n. Morton Manufacturing Company.

o. Unistrut Corporation.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.






055300 - 3 Issue 008

B. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select

fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A and, where

indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and,

where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.

D. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1

E. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy that

is welded.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field

splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling

limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units

for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius

of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas

on exposed surfaces.

C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to

support indicated loads.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.






055300 - 4 Issue 008

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and

space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to

support indicated loads.

2.6 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Welded Steel Grating: Refer to Structural drawings for type.

1. Steel Finish: [Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. of

coated surface].

2.7 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Provide sub-framing, if required, to be attached to the

structural steel framing, as shown on the drawings. Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and

bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive

gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to

receive hardware and similar items.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings.

B. Galvanize steel sub-frames and supports .

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip

process complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary

for securing gratings to in-place construction.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.






055300 - 5 Issue 008

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating

standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances

and standard anchoring details.

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners

indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation

conditions shown.

C. Attach non-removable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same;

otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



Ornamental Metal 05 7000 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 05 7000 – ORNAMENTAL METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ornamental metal fabrications.


A. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

1. AAMA 2605-02: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Proce-

dures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM A 276-00a: Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 2. ASTM A 666-00: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 3. ASTM A 743-98: Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Cor-

rosion-Resistant, for General Application. 4. ASTM B 26-01: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 5. ASTM B 36-01: Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. 6. ASTM B 62-02: Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 7. ASTM B 151-00: Specification for Copper-Nickel-Zinc Alloy (Nickel Silver) and Copper-

Nickel Rod and Bar. 8. ASTM B 209-01: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 9. ASTM B 221-00: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded. 10. ASTM B 247-00: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings, and

Rolled Ring Forgings. 11. ASTM B 249-01: Specification for General Requirements for Wrought Copper and Cop-

per-Alloy Rod, Bar, Shapes and Forgings. 12. ASTM B 455-01: Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded Brass) Extruded

Shapes. 13. ASTM B 584-00: Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Ap-

plications. 14. ASTM D 1187-97 (Reapproved 2002): Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use

as Protective Coatings for Metal. 15. ASTM E 488-96: Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Ele-

ments. C. AWS - American Welding Society.

1. AWS D1.2-97: Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. 2. AWS D1.6-00: Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

D. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations.

1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-01: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings. E. MPI - Master Painters Institute.

1. MPI # 79-00: Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer.

F. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials. B. Shop Drawings: For ornamental metal. Include plans, elevations, component details, and at-

tachments to other work. Indicate materials and profiles of each ornamental metal member, fit-tings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

C. Samples: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design including mechanical fin-

ishes.


A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of ornamental metal specified in this Section by

the same firm that fabricated it. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing ornamental metal similar to that indi-

cated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as suffi-cient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying organic

coatings of type indicated to aluminum extrusions and employing competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements.

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."


A. Store ornamental metal inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and mason-

ry, and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidi-ty.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

B. Deliver and store cast-metal products in wooden crates surrounded by sufficient packing mate-

rial to ensure that products will not be cracked or otherwise damaged. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with or-

namental metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for ornamental metal items. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ORNAMENTAL METAL FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ornamental metal work by the

following: 1. Local Fabricators as approved by Architect.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller

marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 2.3 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finish-

er for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each alu-minum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.

B. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52. C. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003-H14. D. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6. E. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20. B. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Aluminum Items: Aluminum fasteners. 2. Stainless-Steel Items: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, select fasteners of

type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to other types of construction indicated.

C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting components and for attaching ornamental met-

al items to other work, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated

from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy

welded. 1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be weld-

ed and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Brazing Rods: For copper alloys, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal

to be brazed and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings machine

swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum



ROSSETTI Issue 008

amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation.

C. Form ornamental metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and

accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or other-

wise impairing work. E. Form simple and compound curves in bars and extruded shapes by bending members in jigs to

produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed sur-faces.

F. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius

of approximately 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

G. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be

exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. H. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. I. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Weld and braze

behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

K. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that impair

strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for rec-

ommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, tempo-

rary protective covering before shipping. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Asso-

ciation for designating aluminum finishes. B. High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish:

cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coatings; Organic Coating:



ROSSETTI Issue 008

manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhib-itive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Pre-pare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.11 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. B. Unless otherwise indicated, grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish indicated, free of

cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directionally textured finishes with long dimension of each piece.

C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4 finish. D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter

and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of ornamental metal. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure ornamental metal to in-place

construction. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install ornamental metal. Set products accurately

in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels. Provide tem-porary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated,

with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting, welding, and grind-ing are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of ornamental metal, restore finishes to elim-inate evidence of such corrective work.

D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with

such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses. F. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove

protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be per-formed at same location. 1. Retain protective coverings intact; remove coverings simultaneously from similarly fin-

ished items to preclude nonuniform oxidation and discoloration. G. Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual shielded

metal arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds, and for methods used in correcting welding work. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed welded joints smooth and restore finish to match finish of adjacent surfaces.

H. Field Brazing: Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures, appearance and quali-

ty of brazing, and methods used in correcting brazing work. Braze connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop brazed because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed brazed joints smooth and restore finish to match finish of adjacent surfaces.

I. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap,

rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths. B. Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that leaves an

undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample.

C. Protect finishes of ornamental metal from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by ornamental metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.

D. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION


Ornamental Railings 05 7300 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 05 7300 – ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.5 SUMMARY

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Glass-supported railings in a channel base.


B. AA - Aluminum Association, Inc.

C. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

1. AAMA Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12: Structural Properties of Glass. 2. AAMA 611: Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

D. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM C 1107: Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 2. ASTM C 1172: Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. 3. ASTM E 488: Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry El-

ements. 4. ASTM E 894: Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems

and Rails for Buildings. 5. ASTM E 935: Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Sys-

tems and Rails for Buildings. 6. ASTM B 26/B 26M: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 7. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 8. ASTM B 221: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

E. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.


F. SSPC - The Society for Protective Coatings.

1. SSPC-PA 1: Paint Application Specification No. 1.



ROSSETTI Issue 008


B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable de-sign working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12, "Struc-tural Properties of Glass."

2. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ul-timate tensile strength divided by 1.95.

C. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (730 N/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m).

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails.

D. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other det-rimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (49 degrees C), ambient; 180 deg F (82 de-grees C), material surfaces.

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis



ROSSETTI Issue 008

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their prepa-ration.

D. Samples: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including mechanical fin-ishes. Top cap and bracket, mitered corner of handrail all in specified finish.

E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

1.9 MOCK-UP

B. No mock-up of glass rail assemblies is required. Match Glass Railing Assemblies provided and install as part of the C-1, Atrium – Arena project.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or anoth-er certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manu-facturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass com-plies.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.


B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Draw-ings.

1.12 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and di-rections for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-ing:

1. Julius Blum & Co., Inc.: www.juliusblum.com.

2. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh: www.blumcraft.com.

3. Clearail, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio 44125.

4. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.: www.crlaurence.com.

5. Livers Bronze Co., Inc.: www.liversbronze.com.

6. Tempglass Group, Inc., Perrysburg, Ohio 43551.

7. Substitutions: See Section 01 2500.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 ALUMINUM

B. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finish-er for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each alu-minum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.

C. Extruded Bars and Shapes, Including Extruded Tubing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

E. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Glass (GL-1). Glass Railings

1. Quality: Float, ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Select (Q3). 2. Comply with governing safety glazing laws, and permanently labeled as re-

quired by CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3. Base Glass: Clear, Low Iron (Base Bid). 4. Appearance: Clear, Low Iron (Base Bid). 5. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 6. Edges: Seamed and polished. 7. Heat Treatment: Tempered, ASTM C1048.

B. Base - Recessed.

1. Cast aluminum. 2. Matching covers and end caps, where indicated on drawings. 3. Include anchoring devices. 4. Basis of design product: Mill Aluminum Base Shoe B5 Series by C.R. Laurence

Co.

D. Top Cap.

1. 0.875 by 1-1/2-inch flat top U-channel. 2. Stainless steel, No. 6 non-directional finish. 3. Basis of design product: GRCF5 by C.R. Laurence Co.

E. Wall Mounted Handrail.

1. Same size and finish as auxiliary handrail. 2. Stainless steel concealed fasteners, No. 6 non-directional finish. 3. Locate where indicated on drawings.

F. Fabrication.

1. Stainless steel, grind, brush or polish welded surfaces to match adjacent factory finish.

2. Auxiliary handrail. a. Continuous with smooth, uniform surface on top and sides for entire length,

without sharp corners, projections, or irregularities. b. Free from blemishes or defects that affect durability, strength, or appear-

ance. c. Fabricate railings in longest lengths possible. If splices are required, locate

above bracket. d. Single piece to be supported by 3 glass balustrade panels.

G. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Provide glazing cement, setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails.

1. Glazing Cement: Provide nonshrinking organic cement designed for curing by passing an electric current through metal subrail holding glass panel, as standard with manufac-turer.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2.5 FASTENERS

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construc-tion indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical torque-controlled, or expansion anchors, fab-ricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for in-terior and exterior applications.

C. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

2.7 FABRICATION

B. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

C. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellane-ous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless other-wise indicated.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

I. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or ma-sonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

2.8 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

B. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glazing panels.

1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.


B. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for rec-ommendations for applying and designating finishes.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippa-ble, temporary protective covering before shipment.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticea-ble variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Asso-ciation for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Mechanical Finish: AA-M3x (Mechanical Finish: as specified); sand top rails, hand-rails, and intermediate rails in 1 direction only, parallel to length of railing, with 120- and 320-grit abrasive. After installation, polish railings with No. 0 steel wool immersed in paste wax, then rub to a luster with a soft dry cloth.

D. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS

B. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written in-structions.

1. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert glass into base channel and bond with glazing cement.

a. Support glass panels in base channel at quarter points with channel-shaped set-ting blocks that also act as shims to maintain uniform space for glazing cement. Fill remaining space in base channel with glazing cement for uniform support of glass.

2. Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before securing in po-sition.

3. Erect glass railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized tech-nical personnel.


B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

C. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed rail-ing assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and condi-tions in the completed Work. Railings will be tested according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with performance requirements.

D. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Archi-tect and will comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to deter-mine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.3 CLEANING

B. Clean and polish glass.

C. Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3.4 PROTECTION

B. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substan-tial Completion.

C. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF SECTION


Ornamental Formed Metal 05 7500 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 05 7500 – ORNAMENTAL FORMRD METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Round column covers. 2. Wall cladding.


A. AA - Aluminum Association, Inc. B. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

1. AAMA 611-98: Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

C. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM B 209-09: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM C 665-06: Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 3. ASTM C 920-05: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM D 1056-00: Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded

Rubber. 6. ASTM D 1187-97 (Reapproved 2002): Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use

as Protective Coatings for Metal. 7. ASTM E 136-04: Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750

deg C. 8. ASTM E 488-96 (Reapproved 2003): Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete

and Masonry Elements.

D. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Movements: Provide interior ornamental formed-metal assemblies that allow for ther-mal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of



ROSSETTI Issue 008

joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calcula-tion on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

C. Corrosion Control: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of ornamental formed metal. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of components and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Samples: Units or sections of units showing colors, textures, including mechanical finishes, and

patterns for each type of ornamental formed-metal product indicated. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing ornamental formed metal similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver ornamental formed-metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped to-gether in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.

B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction contiguous with ornamental formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for ornamental formed-metal items. Furnish setting draw-ings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

B. Coordinate installation of ornamental formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that

wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the ef-fects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.


A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in ornamental formed metal and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by ornamental formed-metal manufacturer.

1. ASTM D 1056, Type 1, Class A, grade as recommended by gasket manufacturer to ob-

tain seal for application indicated. 2. Closed cell polyurethane foam, adhesive on two sides, release paper protected.

B. Sealants, Exterior: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone, polyurethane, or polysulfide sealant; of

type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in ornamental formed metal and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by ornamental formed-metal manufac-turer.

C. Fasteners: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless

otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting ornamental formed-metal items and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indi-cated.

D. Structural Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors fabricated from

corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified inde-pendent testing agency.

E. Nonstructural Anchors: Provide powder-actuated fasteners, metal expansion sleeve anchors or

metal impact expansion anchors of type, size, and material necessary for type of load and in-stallation indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Use nonfer-rous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors for exterior installations for corrosion resistance.

G. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by ornamental formed-metal manufacturer.

H. Laminating Adhesive: Compatible with substrate; noncombustible after curing.

2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL



ROSSETTI Issue 008

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble ornamental formed-metal items in shop to greatest extent possi-

ble to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of ornamental formed-metal items with those

of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush sur-

faces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch (12 mm) wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a ra-dius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) and support with concealed stiffeners.

D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as

needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and suffi-cient strength for indicated use.

1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining

sheets in flush alignment.

E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoin-ing construction. Reinforce ornamental formed-metal items as needed to attach and support other construction.

F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and acces-

sories needed to install ornamental formed-metal items. 2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for rec-ommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible.

After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet finish.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, tempo-

rary protective covering before shipping.

D. Apply anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are ac-ceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are ac-ceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

A. Stainless steel, No. 6 non-directional finish.



ROSSETTI Issue 008


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-ments for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of ornamental formed metal.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place ornamental formed-metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adja-cent construction.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws

where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.

D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, sealants, and flashings, as the Work progress-

es, to make exterior ornamental formed-metal items weatherproof.

E. Corrosion Protection: Apply nonmelting/nonmigrating-type bituminous coating or other perma-nent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deteriora-tion of either material or finish.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of ornamental formed-metal items from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


Rough Carpentry 06 1000 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 06 1000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1. Preservative treatment of wood. 2. Fire retardant treatment of wood. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Miscellaneous panels.


A. ALSC - American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. B. APA - The Engineered Wood Association. C. AWPA - American Wood-Preservers Association.

1. AWPA C2-02: Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by

Pressure Processes. 2. AWPA C20-02: Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. 3. AWPA C27-02: Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. 4. AWPA C31-02: Lumber Used out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously Protected

from Liquid Water - Treatment by Pressure Processes. D. ASME - American Society for Mechanical Engineers International.

1. ASME B18.2.1-96: Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series). 2. ASME B18.6.1-81 (Reaffirmed 1997): Wood Screws (Inch Series).

E. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM A 153-05: Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A 307-04: Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile

Strength. 3. ASTM A 563-06: Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 4. ASTM B 633-98: Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 6. ASTM D 6007-02: Standard Test Method for Determining Formaldehyde Concentration in

Air from Wood Products Using a Small Scale Chamber. 7. ASTM D 6330-98(2003): Standard Practice for Determination of Volatile Organic Com-

pounds (Excluding Formaldehyde) Emissions from Wood-Based Panels Using Small En-vironmental Chambers Under Defined Test Conditions.

8. ASTM E 488-96 (Reapproved 2003): Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

9. ASTM E 1333-96(2002): Standard Test Method for Determining Formaldehyde Concen-trations in Air and Emission Rates from Wood Products Using a Large Chamber.

10. ASTM F 1667-03: Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples. F. DOC - U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology.

1. DOC PS 1-95: U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. DOC PS 20-94: American Softwood Lumber Standard.

G. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council. H. ICC - International Code Council, Inc.

1. Michigan Building Code. 2. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; NES NER-272-89: Pneumatic or Mechanically Driven Sta-

ples, Nails, P-Nails and Allied Fasteners for Use in All Types of Building Construction.

I. SPIB - The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 1. Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certi-fication by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physi-cal properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit

stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in ef-

fect for Project: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.

1. Lumber of other species or grades, or graded by other agencies, is acceptable provided

structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products speci-fied.

B. Engineered Wood Products:

1. Determine formaldehyde concentrations in air from wood products under test conditions of temperature and relative humidity in accordance with ASTM D 6007 or ASTM E 1333.

2. Determine Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), excluding formaldehyde, emitted from manufactured wood-based panels in accordance with ASTM D 6330.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air

circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for mois-

ture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed siz-es for dry lumber.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in con-

tact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15

percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the

ALSC Board of Review.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

D. Application: Treat the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber), AWPA C27 (ply-

wood). 1. Fire Retardant Treatment: Interior Type, Class A, low hygroscopic, chemical treatment

pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke develop-ment rating of Class A/Class 1. Provide Pyro-Guard manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Dricon by Hickson Corp., or Exterior Fire-X by Hoover Treated Wood Products.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and in-

specting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood panels.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes, S4S/rough (unsurfaced). C. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry or MC15. D. Miscellaneous Blocking and Nailers:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PANELS A. Concealed Plywood: DOC PS 1, C-C Plugged, exterior grade. B. Electrical Component Mounting: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified

in this Article for material and manufacture.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where

indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capabil-

ity to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as de-termined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspect-ing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class

Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fit-

ted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Lo-cate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other con-struction.

B. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with func-tion of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in Michigan Building Code.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated

and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfac-

es, unless otherwise indicated.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3.3 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, com-

plying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum.

B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (0.7 mm/m) maximum. END OF SECTION


FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 1413 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 07 1413 – FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing.


A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency ; current edition.

B. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension.

C. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers.

D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 - for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials.

D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of fluid-applied waterproofing membranes with five years of experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of fluid-applied waterproofing with minimum five years of experience.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until cured.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1.6 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cold-Applied, Water-Based Asphalt Emulsion Waterproofing Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.: www.carlisle-ccw.com. 2. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; MEL-ROL LM: www.wrmeadows.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Water-Based Asphalt Emulsion Waterproofing: 1. Cured Thickness: 60 mils (0.060 inches), minimum. 2. Suitable for installation over concrete substrates. 3. Elongation: 1000 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. 4. VOC Content: Less than 20 g/L when tested in accordance with 40 CFR 59

Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.02 per inch, measured in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M. 6. Peel Adhesion: According to ASTM D412, for the following substrates.

a. High Density Polyethylene Film: 12.2 pound-inches. b. Concrete and Concrete Masonry: 14.1 pound-inches. c. Glass Fiber Mat Faced Gypsum Board: 13.1 pound-inches.

7. Adhesion: Greater than 150 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D4541. 8. Products:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; BarriCoat-R: www.carlisle-ccw.com.

b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; MEL-ROL LM: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Under-Tile Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane: Specifically designed for bonding to concrete, backer boards, and plywood under ceramic tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Equivalent products made by manufacturers listed above are also acceptable. 2. Material: Trowel-applied water-based acrylic membrane, 25 mils thick, minimum,

with continuous polyester fabric reinforcement. 3. ICC-ES approved.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Surface Conditioner: Compatible with membrane compound; as recommended by membrane manufacturer.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system.

C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials.

D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean.

C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.

D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.

E. Install cant strips at inside corners.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum thickness.

B. Apply primer or surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.

C. At joints and cracks less than 1/2 inch in width including joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces, apply 12 inch wide strip of joint cover sheet.

D. At joints from 1/2 to 1 inch in width, loop joint cover sheet down into joint between 1-1/4 and 1/-3/4 inch. Extend sheet 6 inches on either side of expansion joint.

E. Center joint cover sheet over joints. Roll sheet into 1/8 inch coating of waterproofing material. Apply second coat over sheet extending minimum of 6 inches beyond sheet edges.

F. Extend membrane over cants and up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter minimum 6 inches above horizontal surface for first ply and 4 inches at subsequent plies laid in shingle fashion.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

G. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at corners, intersections, and angles.

H. Install flexible flashings and seal into waterproofing material. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings.

I. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install counter-flashing over all exposed edges.

3.4 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD

A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.

B. Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.

C. Adhere protection board to substrate with compatible adhesive.


A. Owner will provide testing services in accordance with Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. Contractor shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing.

END OF SECTION

E DETROIT REGIONAL CONVENTION FACILITY AUTHORITY COBO CENTER PROJECT C-4 1 WASHINGTON BOULEVARD COBO CENTER: EAST FAÇADE RENOVATION DETROIT, MI, 48226 ROSETTI PROJECT NO. 2013-015

Composite Panels 07 4150 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 005

SECTION 07 4150 COMPOSITE PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal-faced composite panels. 2. Panel accessories.


A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

1. AAMA 501.1-94: Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors for Water Pene-tration Using Dynamic Pressure.

B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM B 209-96: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM B 221-96: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and

Tubes. 3. ASTM C 481-99: Standard Test Method for Laboratory Aging of Sandwich Construction. 4. ASTM C 920-98: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM C 1311-95: Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. 6. ASTM D 1781-99: Standard Test Method for Climbing Drum Peel for Adhesives. 7. ASTM D 2244-93: Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Meas-

ured Color Coordinates. 8. ASTM D 4214-98: Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 9. ASTM E 119-98: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 10. ASTM E 283-91: Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Win-

dows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen. 11. ASTM E 330-97: Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,

and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 12. ASTM E 331-96: Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

C. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. 1988.



ROSSETTI Issue 005

D. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1993 (Addendum 1997).

E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Metal-faced composite panel assemblies shall comply with performance re-quirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal-faced composite panel assembly, including comprehensive engi-

neering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design cri-teria indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Provide metal-faced composite panel assemblies capable of withstanding

the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward.

2. Deflection Limits: Metal-faced composite panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with hor-

izontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material sur-

faces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual compo-nents and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts and elevations of metal panels; details of

edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, clo-sures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finish-

es.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.



ROSSETTI Issue 005

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indi-cated below.

1. Metal Wall Panels: (3) 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, clo-

sures, and other metal wall panel accessories.

a. Include four-way joint for composite panels.

2. Trim and Closures: (3) 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed acces-sories.

3. Accessories: (3) 12-inch (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Certification: Affidavit certifying that panels meet or exceed requirements specified and certified by Structural Engineer registered in state where project is located.

G. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of metal-faced composite wall panels.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer registered in state where project is located.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified by metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer to fabricate and

install manufacturer's wall panel system.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel through one source from a single manufac-turer.

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal-faced composite wall panels identical to

those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of an-

other qualified testing agency.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Divi-sion 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency repre-

sentative, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's person-nel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's



ROSSETTI Issue 005

written instructions. 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between

and attachment to structural members. 5. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and in-

specting if applicable. 6. Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and after in-

stallation. 7. Review panel observation and repair procedures after metal panel installation. 8. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy

of record to each participant. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver components, sheets, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface

damage.

C. Store metal-faced composite panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated cov-ering. Store metal-faced composite wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal-faced composite wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Do not allow storage space to exceed 120 deg F (49 deg C).

D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity,

except to extent necessary for period of metal wall panel installation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members by field measurements before metal

panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel assemblies with other trades work. 1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:



ROSSETTI Issue 005

a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years (2) from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alclad alloy 3105 H25 for painted finishes, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.

1. Coil coated KYNAR® 500 or HYLAR® 5000 based Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) resin, or an

acceptable substitute.

a. Surface Finish and Color both sides of panel: Refer to Finish Schedule.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by manufactur-er for type of use and finish indicated.


A. Fasteners: Screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of factory-applied coating.

1. Exposed Fasteners for Composite Panels: Stainless steel with heads matching color of metal

wall panels by means of factory-applied coating.

2.3 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal-faced composite wall panels fabricated from two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid modified fire retardant (FR) polythene core of extruded thermoplastic material formed in a continuous process. The core material shall be free of voids and/or air spaces and not contain foamed insulation material. Products laminated sheet by sheet in a batch process using glues or adhesives between materials shall not be acceptable.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-

ing:



ROSSETTI Issue 005

a. Kovach Building Encolsure (Basis-of-Design). b. Alusuisse Composites, Inc.; Alucobond. c. Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc.; Alpolic. d. Reynolds Metals Company; Reynobond PE.

B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch (0.50-mm-) thick, coil-coated

aluminum sheet facings.

1. Panel Thickness: 0.234 inch (6 mm). 2. Core: solid modified fire retardant (FR) polythene. 3. Exterior Finish both sides: Coil coated KYNAR® 500 or HYLAR® 5000 based Polyvinyli-

dene Fluoride (PVDF) resin.

C. Attachment System Components: Formed from material compatible with panel facing.

1. Include manufacturer's standard extrusions with panel stiffeners, panel clips and anchor chan-nels.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal panel assembly including clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimension-al and structural requirements.

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and

buckle. 2. Fabricate wall panels with panel stiffeners as required to maintain fabrication tolerances and to

withstand design loads.

B. Fabricate metal panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.

C. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no glues

or adhesives or batch process by laminating each sheet using glues or adhesives between dis-similar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.

1. Bond Integrity: Minimum 40 inch-pounds/inch (584 N/m) (peel strength), when tested in ac-

cordance with ASTM D 1781 after aging in accordance with ASTM C 481, Cycle B. 2. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached to

back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape. 3. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of

core material.



ROSSETTI Issue 005


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommen-dations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations

of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal wall panel installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 NOT USED 3.3 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Erect panels plumb, level, and true.

B. Panels shall be erected in accordance with an approved set of shop drawings.

C. Anchor panels securely per engineering recommendations and in accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary thermal movement and structural support.

D. Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, dented, abraded, and broken members.

E. Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection in a manner which would damage the finish, decrease strength, or result in visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Return compo-nent parts which require alteration to shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement with new parts.

F. Separate dissimilar metals and use gasketed fasteners where needed to eliminate the possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action between metals.

3.4 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install attachment system required to support panels includung panel clips, and anchor channels.

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and

panel-system joint seals.



ROSSETTI Issue 005

3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/8 inch in 20 feet, noncumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/16-inch offset of ad-joining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 074150


Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 6200 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 07 6200 – SHEET MATAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:

1. Flashings, counterflashings.


A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM A 653B-99: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM B 32-96: Specification for Solder Metal. 3. ASTM B 749-97: Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 4. ASTM C 920-98: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM C 1311-95: Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. 6. ASTM D 4586-00: Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.

B. FMG - FM Global.

1. FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1B49: Perimeter Flashing.

C. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.


D. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

E. SSPC - The Society for Protective Coatings.

1. SSPC B Paint 12-82 (Revised 1991): Paint Specification No. 12: Cold Applied Asphalt

Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,

thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fas-tener disengagement.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist ro-tation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base en-gineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (48.8 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (82.2 deg

C), material surfaces. C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to

building interior. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material de-

scriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and

dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, in-

cluding fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of

size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: 12 inches (305 mm) long. Include fasteners and other

exposed accessories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose

work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and

attachment to structural members. 4. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish



ROSSETTI Issue 008

copy of record to each participant. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flash-

ing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent

bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated cover-

ing. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construc-

tion to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS

A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; core steel,

shop pre-coated with fluoropolymer coating as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazed Alumi-num Curtain Walls."


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,

separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flash-ing and trim installation.

B. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape

with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, and

polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited move-ment.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with perfor-

mance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks

and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Form nonmoving seams in accessories with flat lock seams, except where otherwise in-

dicated. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric

sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot

be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal

flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet, minimum 12 inches (305

mm) wide, interlocking with sheet. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and

FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

H. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. I. Fabricate corners from one piece with each leg extended to column centerline; seam for rigidity,

double seal with sealant. J. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form

drip. 1. Flashing greater than 4 inches (101 mm) in vertical exposure: 18 gage (1.2 mm).

K. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (51 mm) over roofing gravel. Return and

brake edges.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for rec-

ommendations for applying and designating finishes.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strip-pable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are ac-

ceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are ac-ceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, di-

mensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely an-

chored. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thick-

ness of 15 mil. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, pro-

tect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat

seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fas-

teners. Bend tabs over fasteners.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

G. Fasteners: Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners.

1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.

H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less

than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When am-bient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4.4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting propor-tionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

I. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Drawing Details:

1. Figure 4-3C and 4-3D: Counterflashing systems. 2. Figure 4-15: Roof penetration flashing, structural steel.

J. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weather-

ing. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim

are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated be-

yond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with

specified requirements. END OF SECTION


Spray Fire-Resistance Materials 07 8110 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 07 8110 – SPRAY FIRE-RESISTANCE MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1. Concealed cementitious sprayed fire-resistive materials. 2. Exposed cementitious sprayed fire-resistive materials 3. All recently exposed steel and newly installed steel members requiring fireproofing per

the MBC are to receive 2hr rated spray applied fireproofing unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS


1. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E 119: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E 136: Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750

Degrees C. 4. ASTM E 605: Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-

Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members. 5. ASTM E 736: Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials

Applied to Structural Members. 6. ASTM E 759: Test Method for Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material Ap-

plied to Structural Members. 7. ASTM E 760: Test Method for Effect of Impact Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materi-

al Applied to Structural Members. 8. ASTM E 761: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material

Applied to Structural Members. 9. ASTM E 859: Test Method for Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials (SFRM)

Applied to Structural Members. 10. ASTM E 937: Test Method for Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material

(SFRM) Applied to Structural Members. 11. ASTM G 21: Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to

Fungi. B. AWCI - Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries.

1. AWCI Technical Manual 12-A: Standard Practice for the Testing and Inspection of Field

Applied Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: An Annotated Guide. C. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations.

1. 40 CFR 763, Subpart E: Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1. Fire Resistance Directory. 2012.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Concealed Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Applied to surfaces that are concealed from view

behind other construction when the Work is completed. B. Exposed Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when

the Work is completed and surfaces that are accessible through acoustical panel ceilings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:

1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying sprayed fire-

resistive material. 2. Extent of sprayed fire-resistive material for each construction and fire-resistance rating,

including the following: a. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of struc-

tural components and assemblies. c. Designation of restrained and unrestrained conditions based on definitions in

ASTM E 119, Appendix X3 as determined by a qualified professional engineer. 3. Treatment of sprayed fire-resistive material after application.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of colored, exposed sprayed fire-resistive material

indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of colored, exposed sprayed fire-resistive material, two

Samples, each 4 inches (101 mm) square, of each color, texture, and material formulation to be applied. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets show-ing the full range of variations expected.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of sprayed fire-resistive material, signed by product manu-

facturer. F. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer in-

dicating the following: 1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates. 2. Materials have been verified by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer to be com-

patible with substrate primers and coatings. 3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for proposed sprayed fire-resistive materials. I. Research/Evaluation Reports: For sprayed fire-resistive materials. J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by sprayed

fire-resistive material manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its sprayed fire-resistive materials to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Authorities Hav-

ing Jurisdiction (AHJ), with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. C. Source Limitations: Obtain sprayed fire-resistive materials through one source from a single

manufacturer. D. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged

by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for perfor-mance and test methods. 1. Sprayed fire-resistive materials are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the

applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency accepta-ble to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

2. Testing is performed on specimens of sprayed fire-resistive materials that comply with la-boratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive materials, including application of accelerant, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.

E. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test

for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for

coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with sprayed fire-resistive material.

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Hav-ing Jurisdiction (AHJ). Identify bags containing sprayed fire-resistive materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Au-thorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), for sprayed fire-resistive material serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. G. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method

specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." H. Preinstallation Conference: Convene one week before starting work of this section. Conduct

conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Manage-ment and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to sprayed fire-resistive ma-terials including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination re-

quirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufac-

turers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.

B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and dis-

card materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, aboveground, and kept dry until ready for use. Remove

from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply sprayed fire-resistive material when ambient or sub-

strate temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat is provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of sprayed fire-resistive mate-

rial. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive mate-rial dries thoroughly.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed fire-resistive materials with other related work

specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the

environment. 2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive

material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation.

3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.

4. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

5. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping as been completed.

6. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-resistive material until application of fire protection is completed.

7. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective appli-cations.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the fol-lowing: 1. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or de-

laminating of sprayed fire-resistive materials from substrates. 2. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's

maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investi-gated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably fore-seeable under conditions of normal use.

B. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCEALED CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: For concealed applications of sprayed fire-resistive materials, provide manufacturer's

standard products complying with requirements indicated for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Concealed Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: a. Grace, W. R. & Co., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6s. b. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15. c. Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products; Cafco 300. d. Mandoval Vermiculite Products, Inc.

C. Material Composition: As follows:

1. Cementitious sprayed fire-resistive material consisting of factory-mixed, dry formulation of

gypsum or portland cement binders and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.

D. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to

attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows:



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) for average and individual densities regardless of density indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Sec-tion 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."

2. Thickness: Provide minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indi-cated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm), per ASTM E 605: a. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) or

greater, the minimum allowable individual thickness of sprayed fire-resistive mate-rial is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch (6 mm).

b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch (25 mm) but more than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm), the minimum allowable individual thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material is the greater of 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) or 75 percent of the design thickness.

c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m)

3. Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736 under the following

conditions:

a. Field test sprayed fire-resistive material that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material.

b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving sprayed fire-resistive material are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736.

c. Minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material tested in laboratory shall be 0.75 inch (19 mm).

4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. (35.9 kPa) as determined in the laboratory per

ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material tested shall be 0.75 inch (19 mm) and minimum dry density shall be as specified, but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m)

5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.27 g/sq. m) in 24 hours per

ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material is 0.75 inch (19 mm), maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m), test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours.

9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the fol-lowing surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.

2.2 EXPOSED CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: For exposed applications of sprayed fire-resistive materials, provide manufacturer's

standard products complying with requirements indicated for material composition and for mini-mum physical properties of each product listed, measured by standard test methods referenced with each property.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Exposed Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material:

a. Grace, W. R. & Co.--Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type Z106G. b. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 22. c. Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products.; Cafco 400. e. Mandoval Vermiculite Products, Inc.

C. Exposed Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate

formulation; or chloride-free formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application, complying with the following requirements: 1. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance

ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Dis-placement Method," but with an average density of not less than 22 lb/cu. ft. (352 kg/cu.m).

2. Bond Strength: 434 lbf/sq. ft. (21 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736. 3. Compressive Strength: 51 lbf/sq. in. (351 kPa) per ASTM E 761. 4. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 5. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 6. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 7. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.27 g/sq. m) per ASTM E 859. 8. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136. 9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the fol-

lowing surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.

10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 11. For exterior applications of sprayed fire-resistive material, provide formulation approved

for surfaces exposed to exterior. 2.3 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with sprayed fire-resistive

materials and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency ac-ceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product,

provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Di-

rectory," for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736. 2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteris-

tics of sprayed fire-resistive material per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and in-specting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of sprayed

fire-resistive material. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish

required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material manufactur-er's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other an-chorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive sprayed fire-resistive mate-rial.

E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-

resistance designs indicated, approved by manufacturer of intumescent mastic coating fire-resistive material.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply

with fire-resistance designs indicated, approved by manufacturer of intumescent mastic coating fire-resistive material. Include pins and attachment.

G. Topcoat: Type recommended in writing by manufacturer of each sprayed fire-resistive material

for application over concealed and exposed sprayed fire-resistive materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-

ments for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satis-factory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related ma-

terials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill

scale, dirt, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materi-als with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended con-struction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.

B. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to

verify that substrates are free of oil, rolling compounds, and other substances capable of inter-fering with bond.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during

application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt,

oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, loose mill scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer

unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive sprayed fire-resistive material.

D. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove any surface imperfections that could af-

fect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of sprayed fire-resistive material. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.


A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, ap-

plication procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

B. Apply sprayed fire-resistive material that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1

"Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and proce-dures affecting test results.

C. Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and fire-resistive material

manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive mate-rial. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer. Attach lathing accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment to substrate.

D. Coat substrates with adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to achieve

fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufac-turer for material and application indicated.

E. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

Unless otherwise recommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.

F. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying opera-

tion in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method rec-ommended in writing by sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer.

G. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants,

apply sprayed fire-resistive material that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3.4 INSTALLATION, CONCEALED SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. Apply concealed sprayed fire-resistive material in thicknesses and densities not less than those

required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials" Article.

B. Apply topcoat to concealed sprayed fire-resistive material where indicated.

3.5 INSTALLATION, EXPOSED SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. Apply exposed sprayed fire-resistive material in thicknesses and densities not less than those

required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if indicated. 1. For steel beams and bracing, provide a thickness of not less than 1 inch (25 mm). 2. For metal floor or roof decks, provide a thickness of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material and

matching Architect's sample or, if none, finish approved for field-erected mockup. C. Apply exposed cementitious sprayed fire-resistive material to produce the following finish:

1. Spray-textured finish.

D. Cure exposed cementitious sprayed fire-resistive material according to product manufacturer's

written recommendations to prevent premature drying. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested

work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of sprayed fire-resistive ma-

terial shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of sprayed fire-resistive material for the next area until test re-sults for previously completed applications of sprayed fire-resistive material show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for ap-proved fire-resistance design. 1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. (93 sq. m) area, or

partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. (0.09 sq. m) sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) per ASTM E 605.

2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structur-al framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."

4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. (929 sq. m) area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.

5. If testing finds applications of sprayed fire-resistive material are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to de-termine extent of noncompliance.

C. Remove and replace applications of sprayed fire-resistive material where test results indicate

that it does not comply with specified requirements for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both.

D. Apply additional sprayed fire-resistive material per manufacturer's written instructions where test

results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine com-

pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Pro-

ject, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean ex-posed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect sprayed fire-resistive material, according to advice of product manufacturer and Install-

er, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Coordinate application of sprayed fire-resistive material with other construction to minimize

need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect sprayed fire-resistive material and patch any damaged or removed areas.

D. Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected.

END OF SECTION


Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 07 8410 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 07 8410 – THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-

resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing pene-trating items.



1. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E 814: Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 3. ASTM E 2174: Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops.

B. FMG - FM Global.

1. FMG 4991-01: Approval of Firestop Contractors.

C. ITS - Intertek Testing Services.

1. Directory of Listed Products. 2002.

D. OPL - Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.

1. Directory of Listed Building Products, Materials, & Assemblies. 2002.

E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 1479: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops (ANSI). 2. Fire Resistance Directory. 2012.


A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including

both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to require-ments indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls, fire partitions, fire barriers and smoke bar-riers.

2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with ratings determined per

ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical dam-

age, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-

resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (101 mm) in width and ex-

posed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread

and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction

condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. In-clude firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting

agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration

firestop system, along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applica-

ble, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design des-

ignation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product man-

ufacturer.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Ap-

proval of Firestop Contractors." B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration

and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply

with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Arti-cle: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified

testing and inspecting agency is UL, OPL, ITS, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to Authorities Having Juris-diction (AHJ).

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems comply-ing with the following requirements: a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of quali-

fied testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference

to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:

1. UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2. OPL in its "Directory of Listed Building Products, Materials, & Assemblies." 3. ITS in its "Directory of Listed Products."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 MOCK-UP

A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project.

1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall or floor

constructions, install one assembly for each different combination. 2. Where firestopping is intended to fill a linear opening, install minimum of 1 linear ft.

B. Obtain approval of authority having jurisdiction before proceeding. C. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work. D. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not ac-

cepted. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened con-

tainers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manu-



ROSSETTI Issue 008

facturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deteriora-

tion or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural

means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration

firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

through-penetration firestop systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop

system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed

behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-

penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following: 1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) 2. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. (3M) 3. Johns Manville. (JM)

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one an-

other; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by



ROSSETTI Issue 008

through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are need-

ed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.

2.3 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES

A. Firestopping at Uninsulated Metallic Pipe and Conduit Penetrations, of diameter 4 inches (101

mm) or less: Any specified acceptable material manufacturers meeting requirements. 1. Floor and Block Walls: UL Design No. CAJ1000 Series. 2. Gypsum Corridor and Separation Walls: UL Design No. WL1000 Series.

B. Firestopping at Combustible Pipe and Conduit Penetrations, of diameter 4 inches (101 mm) or

less: Any specified acceptable material manufacturers meeting requirements. 1. Floor and Concrete Block Walls: UL Design No. CAJ2000 Series. 2. Gypsum Corridor and Separation Walls: UL Design No. WL2000 Series.

C. Firestopping at Insulated Metallic Pipe and Conduit Penetrations, of diameter 4 inches (101

mm) or less: Any specified acceptable material manufacturers meeting requirements. 1. Floor and Concrete Block Walls: UL Design No. CAJ5000 Series. 2. Gypsum Corridor and Separation Walls: UL Design No. WL5000 Series.

D. Firestopping at Cable Tray Penetrations: Any specified acceptable material manufacturers

meeting requirements. 1. Floor and Concrete Block Walls: UL Design No. CAJ4000 Series. 2. Gypsum Corridor and Separation Walls: UL Design No. WL4000 Series.

E. Firestopping at Cable Penetrations, not in Conduit or Cable Tray: Any specified acceptable ma-

terial manufacturers meeting requirements. 1. Floor and Concrete Block Walls: UL Design No. CAJ3000 Series. 2. Gypsum Corridor and Separation Walls: UL Design No. WL3000 Series.

F. Firestopping at top of wall including Control and Expansion Joints (without Penetrations): Any

specified acceptable material manufacturers meeting requirements. 1. Between Top of Fire-Rated Walls and Bottom of Slab or Metal Deck Above: UL Design

No. HWD0000 Series and HWD1000 Series. 2. Manufacturers: Flexible and sprayable seal; 3M Firedam by 3M or AS105 for Perimeter

Joints by STI. 3. Mineral Wool: 8 lb. (3.6 kg) density mineral wool.

G. Firestopping Between Edge of Floor Slab and Curtain Wall (without Penetrations): Glass fiber

or mineral fiber safing insulation; Omega Point Design No. CEJ130P through CEJ141P or CW-S-2003.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Provide flexible seal with compression/extension of plus/minus percent of original joint width; 3M Fire Dam Spray for Perimeter Joints by 3M or Perimeter Joints by STI.

2. Mineral Wool: 8 lb. (3.6 kg) density mineral wool. 3. Miscellaneous Items and Accessories: As required by tested UL system.

H. Temporary Firestopping: Intumescent pillows; UL Design No. CAJ4000 Series or WL4000 Se-

ries, F Rating 1-1/2 hour. 2.4 MATERIALS

A. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and com-

patible silicone sealant; conforming to the following: 1. Elongation: 50 percent. 2. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 3. Color: As selected by Architect.

B. Fiber Packing Material: Mineral fiber packing insulation; conforming to the following:

1. Density: 8 lb./cu. ft. (128 kg/cu. m). 2. Manufacturers:

a. Thermafiber. b. Fibrex.

C. Firestop Devices: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and sheet stainless steel jacket.

1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent; suitable for pedestrian traffic. 2. Manufacturers:

a. STI; SpecSeal SSC Collars. b. 3M; Fire Barrier PPD. c. JM; PPD Collars.

D. Intumescent Caulk: Compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain; conforming to

the following: 1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M; FireBarrier CP 25 WB plus. b. STI; SpecSeal SSS 100 Sealant.

E. Intumescent Putty: Compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain; conforming to

the following: 1. Potential Expansion: Minimum 500 percent. 2. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 3. Color: Black. 4. Manufacturers:

a. STI; SpecSeal Putty. b. 3M; Fire Stop Putty.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

F. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows; conforming to the following:

1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2. Manufacturers:

a. STI; SpecSeal SSB Firestop Pillows or equal as approved by Architect.

G. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design.


A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting perfor-mance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration fire-

stop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the fol-lowing requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materi-

als that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capa-

ble of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop sys-

tem manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contact-

ing adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Re-

quirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming

materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop sys-tems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrat-

ing items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and pene-

trating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach la-

bels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (152 mm) of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is at-tempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify

Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect

through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they

comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING



ROSSETTI Issue 008

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufac-turers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION


Fire Resistant Joint System 07 8450 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 07 8450 – FIRE RESISTANT JOINT SYSYTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Section 07 8413 - Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.


A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2010b.

B. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

C. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

D. UL 263 - Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials; 2012.

E. UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; 2012.


A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure fire-resistive joint systems are installed in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.

E. Schedule pre-installation meeting not less than two weeks prior to start of firestopping installation and associated work. 1. Meet at Project Site. 2. Parties in attendance.

a. Owner’s representative. b. Owner's Field Representative. c. Construction Manager. d. Firestopping Contractor. e. Firestopping manufacturer’s representative. f. Installers of associated work, including architectural, mechanical, electrical, and

communications. g. Other parties concerned with performance of firestopping, including authorities

having jurisdiction. 3. Agenda.

a. Review submittals for each specific condition.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

b. Review each condition specific firestopping material and installation method. c. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed. d. Inspect and discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate to be

encountered. e. Discuss preparation work required to be performed by other trades.

4. Report. a. Construction Manager shall record discussion, including agreement or

disagreement on significant matters. b. Furnish copies of report to all parties present within five days after meeting date.

5. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of meeting determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date and time to reconvene meeting.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 –for submittal procedures.

B. For Review. 1. Shop drawings.

a. For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed and relationships to adjoining construction.

b. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

C. For Information. 1. Product data.

a. For each type of product indicated. 2. Test Reports.

a. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From fire-resistive joint system manufacturer indicating the following. 1) Materials forming joint substrates have been tested for compatibility and

adhesion with fill materials. 2) Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and

substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 3. Certificates.

a. For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer. b. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and

inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

c. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system.


A. Source Limitations. 1. Obtain fire-resistive joint systems for each kind of joint and construction condition

indicated through one source from single manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications. 1. Experience

a. Firm experienced in installing fire resistant joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with record of successful in-service performance.

b. Not less than 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing. 1. Submit to fire-resistive joint system manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples

of materials that will contact or affect fill materials. a. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other

specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of fill materials to joint substrates. 1) Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist

during installation. b. Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint

substrates, forming materials, and miscellaneous materials. c. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing result to prevent delaying work. d. For materials failing tests, obtain fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written

instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics. 1. Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with following requirements and those

specified in Part 2 article "Systems." a. Fire-resistance tests are performed by qualified testing and inspecting agency.

Qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested in accordance with UL 2079.

c. Provide rated systems complying with following requirements. 1) Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified

testing and inspecting agency. 2) Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing

system designations listed by following. a) UL Fire Resistance Directory.


A. See Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

C. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1.8 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 – Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in Fire-Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire-Containment System headings, available from following manufacturers. 1. Hilti Corp.: www.us.hilti.com. 2. Rectorseal: www.rectorseal.com. 3. Specified Technologies Inc.: www.stifirestop.com. 4. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. 5. Tremco Fire Protection Systems: www.tremcofirestop.com.

2.2 SYSTEMS

A. Fire Resistant Joint Systems (FRJS). 1. For joints installed in or between fire-resistive rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies

and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies, protect with approved fire-resistant joint systems produced and installed to resist passage of fire for time period not less than required fire-resistance rating of wall, floor or roof in or between which it is installed.

2. Joints not requiring fire-resistant joint systems a. Floors where joint is protected by shaft enclosure. b. Floors within atriums where space adjacent to atrium is included in volume of

atrium for smoke control purposes. c. Control joints not more than 0.625 inch in width and tested in accordance with

ASTM E119 or UL 263. 3. Fire Test Criteria: In accordance with UL 2079. 4. Approved Fire-Resistant Joint Systems: In accordance with UL (FRD) Joint Systems

(XHBN).

B. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (PFCS). 1. For voids created at intersection of exterior curtain wall assemblies and fire-resistance

rated floor or floor/ceiling assemblies, securely seal with approved materials. 2. Fire Test Criteria: Capable of preventing passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to

ignite cotton waste where subjected to ASTM E119 time-temperature fire conditions under minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water column (2.5 Pa) for time period at least equal to fire-resistance rating of floor assembly.

3. Approved perimeter fire containment systems: In accordance with UL (FRD) Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG).

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. 1. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint

substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with article "Systems." Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.

3. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with following limits for VOC content when calculated according to South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. a. Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Sealant primers for nonporous substrates: 250 g/L. c. Sealant primers for porous substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems. 1. Where UL-classified perimeter fire-containment systems are indicated, they refer to

alphanumeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product category XHDG.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning. 1. Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-

resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and following requirements. a. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with

adhesion of fill materials. b. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing

optimum bond with fill materials. c. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. d. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming. 1. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system

manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. 2. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed

surfaces.

C. Masking Tape. 1. Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting

adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials.

2. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 2 article "Systems" and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce following results. 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as

required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing work, finish to produce smooth,

uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Inspecting Agency. 1. Owner will engage qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive joint

systems and to prepare inspection reports. 2. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems

comply with or deviate from requirements. 3. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued and inspecting agency has approved installed fire-resistive joint systems.

4. If deficiencies are found, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION


Joint Sealants 07 9200 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 07 9200 – JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants. 5. Preformed joint sealants. 6. Acoustical joint sealants. 7. Joint sealant backings and miscellaneous materials. 8. Low-emitting materials for sealants and sealant primers.



1. ASTM C 834-00: Specification for Latex Sealing Compounds. 2. ASTM C 919-98: Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 3. ASTM C 920-01: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM C 1193-00: Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM C 1247-98: Test Method for Sealants Exposed to Continuous Immersion in Liq-

uids. 6. ASTM C 1248: Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants. 7. ASTM C 1311: Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. 8. ASTM C 1330: Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Ap-

plied Sealants. 9. ASTM E 90: Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss

of Building Partitions and Elements. B. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations.

1. 21 CFR 177.2600: Rubber Articles Intended for Repeated Use. 2. 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D-07: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Stand-

ards for Architectural Coatings. C. FS - Federal Specification.

1. FS TT-S-00230C(2), 2 Feb. 1970: Sealing Compound; Elastomeric Type, Single Compo-

nent (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings or Other Structures).



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to

Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erect-

ed. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative

present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Proce-dure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate sepa-

rately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Re-peat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include da-

ta on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing ad-hesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with re-quirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

1. Include low-emitting materials for sealants and sealant primers used inside the weather-proofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.

B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full

range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufac-

turer.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

D. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each seal-

ant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. E. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a

qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation

methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Pre-construction Testing" Article.

G. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for in-

stallation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manu-

facturer. C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicat-

ed to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

D. Use only non-staining sealant in stone panel joints.

1.7 PRE-SEALANT CONFERENCE AND PROTOTYPE INSTALLATION

A. Arrange a conference at project site not more than 10 working days nor less than 2 working

days before the commencement of sealant work, to review the specifications, details, job condi-tions, priming and application requirements, materials protection and scheduling. Architect and sealant manufacturer's representative including the supervisor of sealant work will attend. Make joint tour of job immediately before meeting. Installer will conduct conference and issue meeting record to all participants.

B. Immediately following joint sealant discussion, install each type of joint sealant, using exact ma-

terials and procedures agreed upon in pre-sealant conference. Provide sealant color as ap-proved from submitted samples: 1. Install exact materials as required for project mockups.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). Silicones are approved to -20



ROSSETTI Issue 008

deg F (-28.8 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applica-

tions indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates. 1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or re-

place elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant

manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years for silicones like Dow Corning 756SMS, 790, 791,

and 795. 3. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years nonstain warranty for silicones with Dow Corning

756SMS and 790. C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from

the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manu-

facturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by struc-tural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric con-

taminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the

weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for

each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifica-tions for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that

will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project and offer a nonstain warranty.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in re-

peated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type A - General Purpose Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756SMS, 790, 791, 795, CCS, and CWS. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. c. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal. d. Tremco; Spectrem 3.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Color: Custom, as selected by Architect.

B. Type B - Bathtub/Tile Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant: Comply with ASTM C

920. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Color: White, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS



ROSSETTI Issue 008

A. Type C - Interior Floor Self-Leveling Pourable Urethane Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.


a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201. b. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL-1. c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 6. Colors: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

B. Type D - Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.


a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 500. b. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II. c. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-270. d. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 50 or 25, as indicated. 4. Additional Movement Capability: 40 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in

compression for a total of 65 percent movement. 5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 6. Color: Custom colors as selected by Architect.

C. Type E - Multicomponent Self-Leveling Pourable Immersible Urethane Sealant: Comply with

ASTM C 920. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II. b. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 880 GB. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 2 SL. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 245.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and I (immersible), Class 1. 5. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type G - Latex Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade

NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



ROSSETTI Issue 008

a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. c. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. d. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type F - Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1311.


a. Schnee-Moorehead, Inc.; Acryl-R Acrylic Sealant. b. Tremco Incorporated; Mono 555.

2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 deg F (-25 to 82 deg C). 4. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to 50.

2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type J - Preformed Expanded Foam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precom-

pressed, open-cell foam sealant that is manufactured from high-density urethane foam impreg-nated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent; is factory produced in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; is coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhe-sive and covered with protective wrapping; develops a watertight and airtight seal when com-pressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complies with the following: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. b. Willseal USA, LLC; Wilseal 250. c. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard. d. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.

2. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and com-

patible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. a. Density: Manufacturer's standard.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type H - Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard

nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building con-struction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.




ROSSETTI Issue 008

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible

with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),

O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant per-formance:

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manu-

facturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint sur-faces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to pro-mote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with re-

quirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to com-



ROSSETTI Issue 008

ply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint seal-ants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capa-ble of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free com-pressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufac-

turer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by clean-ing methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling with-out disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between seal-

ants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow op-

timum sealant movement capability.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or cur-

ing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise in-

dicated. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after re-

moving protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a con-tinuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at pe-rimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (305 m) of joint length for each type of elas-

tomeric sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (305 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per

each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull TabMethod B, Exposed Surface Finish Hand Pull TabMethod C, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Flap or Method D, Water Immersion in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;

do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Re-peat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying

with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified require-

ments. 5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were in-

stalled, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same proce-dures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or non-

compliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by meth-

ods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type A or D; colors as selected

by Architect. B. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Type E. C. Exterior Wall Expansion Joints: Type A or D. D. Joints Between Concrete Panels and Between Panels and Adjacent Work: Type A, D or J. E. Control, Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and Adjacent Work:

Type A or D. F. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type A, D or J where indicated. G. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames, Aluminum Frame and Curtain Wall, and Adjacent Work

(except masonry): Type A or D.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

H. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type E. I. Non-Movement Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type F or G; colors as

selected by Architect. J. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type C or E. K. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls:

Type B. L. Interior Exposed and Concealed Acoustical Joints: Type H.

END OF SECTION


Glazing 08 8100 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 08 8100– GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those speci-

fied in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Glazed handrails.


A. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

1. AAMA 800-92: Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants.

B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

1. ANSI Z97.1: Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and

Methods of Test. C. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM C 509: Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Mate-

rial. 2. ASTM C 542: Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets. 3. ASTM C 716: Specification for Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill Glazing Materials. 4. ASTM C 864: Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting

Blocks, and Spacers. 5. ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 6. ASTM C 1021: Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building Sealants 7. ASTM C 1036: Specification for Flat Glass. 8. ASTM C 1048: Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and

Uncoated Glass. 9. ASTM C 1087: Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with

Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems. 10. ASTM C 1115: Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Acces-

sories. 11. ASTM C 1172: Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. 12. ASTM C 1281: Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications. 13. ASTM C 1330: Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Ap-

plied Sealants.


Glazing 08 8100 - 2

ROSSETTI Issue 008

14. ASTM E 774: Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

15. ASTM E 1300: Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings.

D. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations. 1. 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 2. 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D-01: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards

for Architectural Coatings.

E. FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association. F. GANA - Glass Association of North America.

1. Glazing Manual. 2. Laminated Glass Design Guide. 3. Engineering Standards Manual.

G. SGCC - Safety Glazing Certification Council.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produces primary, fabricated, or etched and pattern glass, as

defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind

and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gas-kets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in con-struction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm

glass thicknesses by analyzing project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed, heat treated, etched, or patterned) required to meet or exceed specified performance criteria.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the fol-

lowing maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (48.8 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (82.2 deg

C), material surfaces.


Glazing 08 8100 - 3

ROSSETTI Issue 008

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current

sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than three Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for correc-

tive measures including the use of specially formulated primers. 1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

1. For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed state-ment of VOC content.

B. Glass Samples: Submit three samples 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm) in size of glass units. C. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for insulating glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this section.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for this project; whose work has resulted in glass installa-tions with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited ac-

cording to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.


Glazing 08 8100 - 4

ROSSETTI Issue 008

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufactur-

er for each product and installation method. G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing

with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities hav-ing jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to pre-

vent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate tempera-ture conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning lami-nated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those al-lowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL


Glazing 08 8100 - 5

ROSSETTI Issue 008

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thick-nesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tem-pered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

2.2 NON-INSULATED GLASS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-

ing: 1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Visteon Glass Systems.

B. Clear Float Glass: Clear, annealed.

1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent glass, flat, Class 1 clear, Quality-Q3 glaz-

ing select. 2. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1, Qual-

ity-Q3 glazing select. C. Heat-Treated Float Glass.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion paral-

lel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality-Q3 (glazing select),

Class 1, Kind HS (heat-strengthened). D. Safety Glass: Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering.

1. Laminated with 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C 1172. 2. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1, Qual-

ity-Q3 glazing select. 3. Comply with ANSI Z97.1.

E. Tempered Glass: Clear, fully tempered with horizontal tempering.

1. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Type FT (fully tempered), Quality-Q3 glazing select. 2. Comply with ANSI Z97.1.

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other

requirements specified. B. Interlayer: Interlayer material, polyvinyl butyral sheets, clear or in colors, and of thickness indi-

cated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.


Glazing 08 8100 - 6

ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Plastic Interlayer: 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) thick, unless otherwise noted.

C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and

air or glass pockets with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demon-strated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for select-ing glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, unless otherwise indicated. C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agen-

cies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applica-tions and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.9 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pres-

sure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive

on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a

full bead of liquid sealant. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS


Glazing 08 8100 - 7

ROSSETTI Issue 008

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application in-dicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufac-

turer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant perfor-mance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that

listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for pro-

ject, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with writ-ten instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with sys-tem performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces

square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.


A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and off-

sets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.



Glazing 08 8100 - 8

ROSSETTI Issue 008

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so

that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to pro-

vide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thick-nesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass

from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge dam-age or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by pre-

construction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publica-tions, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clear-ances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thick-ness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to re-quirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.


Glazing 08 8100 - 9

ROSSETTI Issue 008

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gas-

ket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by

gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clear-ance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed stream-ers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonper-manent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction opera-

tions. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at

frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from

natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.6 SCHEDULE OF EXTERIOR GLASS TYPES

A. GL-1: 1/2" (13 mm) Float Glass Low-Iron (Refer to Ornamental Railings Section 057300).

END OF SECTION


Gypsum Board 09 2900 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 09 2900– GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Trim accessories, joint treatments, and auxiliary materials. 3. Recycled content and low-emitting materials.



1. ASTM B 221-02: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

2. ASTM C 36/C 36M: Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. 3. ASTM C 475/C 475M: Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board. 4. ASTM C 630/C 630M: Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. 5. ASTM C 665: Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame

Construction and Manufactured Housing. 6. ASTM C 840: Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 7. ASTM C 919: Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 8. ASTM C 931/C 931M: Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board. 9. ASTM C 954: Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness.

10. ASTM C 1002: Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases.

11. ASTM C 1047: Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.

12. ASTM C 1177C 1177M: Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.

13. ASTM C 1396C 1396M: Specification for Gypsum Board. 14. ASTM E 90: Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission

Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 15. ASTM E 119: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 16. ASTM E 413 (Reapproved 1999): Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, include printed statement of VOC content.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an in-dependent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identi-

cal to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufac-turer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold

damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, dis-coloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postcon-sumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 25 percent by weight.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

B. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area

and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation.

B. Regular Type:

1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

C. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.

1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (16 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and remova-

ble strip covering slot opening.

C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of

ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials

specified. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compati-

ble with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) pro-duced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer recy-

cled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 22 percent by weight.

E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent pan-els not less than one framing member.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,

etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke rat-ings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.743 sq. m.) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch (6 to 9.5 mm) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abut-

ments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch (6 to 13 mm) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached

to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Foil-Backed Type: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest ex-

tent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless



ROSSETTI Issue 008

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses

of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indi-

cated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (406 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers verti-cally (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, un-less otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer ei-ther vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.

D. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,

across curved surface plus 12-inch (305 mm) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (305 mm) o.c.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasten-ers used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fas-tener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for

tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for

use as exposed soffit board.

F. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instruc-tions.

G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construc-tion, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, dis-

coloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION


CARPET TILE 09 6813 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 09 6813 CARPET TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY


1. Carpet tile with glue-down installation. 2. Installation accessories. 3. Recycled content and low-emitting materials.


A. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists.

1. AATCC 16-98: Colorfastness to Light. 2. AATCC 134-01: Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets 3. AATCC 165-99: Colorfastness to Crocking: Carpets - AATCC Crockmeter Method 4. AATCC 174-98: Antimicrobial Activity Assessment of Carpets.

B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials International.

1. ASTM C 423-02a: American Society for Testing and Materials, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

2. ASTM D 1335-98: Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings 3. ASTM D 2646-02: American Society for Testing and Materials, Standard Test Meth-

ods for Backing Fabric Characteristics of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings. 4. ASTM E 648-03: American Society for Testing and Materials, Standard Test Method

for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

5. ASTM F 710-03: American Society for Testing and Materials, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

6. ASTM F 1869-03: Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

C. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations.

1. 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D-2002: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Stand-ards for Architectural Coatings.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

D. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute.

1. CRI 104-02: Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial Carpet.

E. ISO - International Organization for Standardization.

1. ISO 2551 (Aachen Test)-81: Machine-Made Textile Floor Coverings - Determination of Dimensional Changes in Varying Moisture Conditions

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on

physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods.

1. Recycled Content:

a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product.

b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project.

c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of re-cycled content product in the assembly by weight.

d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly.

2. Local/Regional Materials:

a. Sourcing Location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery;

indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site.

b. Manufacturing Location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.

c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materi-als; include materials cost only.

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or man-ufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each compo-nent. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product.

3. VOC Data:

a. Adhesives:

1) Submit manufacturer's product data for adhesives. Indicate VOC limits of

the product. Submit MSDS highlighting VOC limits. 2) Submit Green Seal Certification to GS-36 and description of the basis for

certification. 3) Submit manufacturer's certification that products comply with SCAQMD

#1168. 4) Submit verification that product is an Approved Adhesive Product under

the Carpet and Rug Institute's Green Label Program.

b. Carpet: Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with Carpet and Rug Institute's Green Label Indoor Air Quality program.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

c. Fire hazard classifications shall meet or exceed the following as

determined in accordance with listed procedures. 1. Timed burning tablet in accordance with CPSC 16 CFR Part 1630: Pass. 2. Smoke density in accordance with NFPA 258: 450 or less. 3. Critical radiant flux in accordance with ASTM E 648: 0.45 watts /sq.cm.

or greater for exit ways and 0.22 watts/sq.cm. or greater for rooms segregated from exit ways.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, and locations where cutouts are re-quired in carpet tiles.

2. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 3. Existing flooring materials to remain. 4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern of installation. 8. Pattern type, location, and direction. 9. Pile direction. 10. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 11. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 12. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label

each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch (305 mm) long Samples.

D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated in schedules.

E. Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Instal-

lation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classifica-tion indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).



ROSSETTI Issue 008


A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section

7.12, "Ventilation."

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to

bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manu-facturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet

tile, install carpet tile before installing these items. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing

to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to fail-ure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.

1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products in-

stalled and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indi-

cated, but not less than 10 sq. yd (8.3 sq. m). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As indicated on Finish Legend.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2.2 CARPET TILE

A. Carpet Tile CPT-1 1. Manufacture: Shaw Contract Group 2. Style: Welcome II Tile 3. Style Number: 5T031 4. Color: Black Chocolate #31751 5. Size: 24” x 24” 6. Construction: Needlebond Hobnail 7. Fiber: Pet Polyester

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when calculat-

ed according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting car-pet tile performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile in-stallation and comply with requirements specified.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 or ASTM F1869

Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other

materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, and carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instruc-

tions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written in-structions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible

with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use me-chanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Pro-ceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104.

B. Installation Method: Glue-down; install every tile with releasable adhesive.

C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furni-

ture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, re-

movable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cut-ting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner

recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installa-

tions."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


Interior Painting 09 9120 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 09 9120 – INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. Use products specified in this section to finish all interior surfaces exposed to view, unless oth-

erwise indicated, including but not limited to the following: 1. Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Opening frames and trim. 3. Access and equipment cabinets. 4. Mechanical piping, hangers, and supports. 5. Electrical conduit, junction boxes, and other equipment. 6. All shop-primed items. 7. Low-emitting materials for paints.

B. Do not paint the following:

1. Items specified or provided with factory finish. 2. Items indicated to receive other finish. 3. Items indicated to remain naturally finished. 4. Stainless steel or anodized aluminum. 5. Equipment nameplates, fire rating labels, and operating parts of equipment. 6. Acoustical materials. 7. Concealed piping, ductwork, and conduit.

C. Materials and products having factory-applied primer are not considered factory finished. D. For paint systems, see Schedules at end of Section. E. For colors and finish, see Finish Legend, except for colors for mechanical and electrical color

coding. 1.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. MPI - Master Painters Institute.

1. MPI Approved Products List. 2. MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.

B. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations. 1. 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D-02: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Stand-

ards for Architectural Coatings.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Include low-emitting materials for paints, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designa-

tions indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products

List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum of ten (10) years documented experience.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with min-

imum five (5) years documented experience and approved by the coating manufacturer. D. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish

selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aes-thetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of

each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m.) b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services

have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark sam-

ples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg

F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Extra Materials: Supply for each finish coating material, color, and finish specified, two (2) gal-

lons (7.5 L) of coating material, in sealed one (1) gallon (3.8 L) containers, marked with color and finish identification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-

ing: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 5. Precision coatings, inc. 6. Pratt and Lambert.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufac-turers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with

the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC content not more

than 250 g/L.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. 6. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.

C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints

and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1, 2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.

D. Colors and Finish: Refer to Finish Legend. E. Coating Application Accessories: Specified in this section or in coating manufacturer's applica-

tion instructions, including but not limited to thinners, sealers, primers, cleaning agents, etching agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. B. Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.

2.6 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.

2.7 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1). B. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3). C. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).

F. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6).


A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finish-

es and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and con-

ditions. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be paint-

ed. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identifica-tion, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required

to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.

Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if mois-

ture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's writ-ten instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in

writing by paint manufacturer. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fab-

ricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood

filler. Sand smooth when dried. I. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and

sanded smooth. J. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfac-

es. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furni-ture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide suffi-cient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occu-

pied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets. e. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. f. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting. 2. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field paint-

ing. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any

time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with reject-ed materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompati-ble.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by wash-

ing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or de-

faced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Interior Ferrous Metal Substrates: (3) coat system.

1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. d. Colors and Finish: Refer to Finish Legend.

B. Interior Pipe Lines Substrates: (2) coat system.

1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd metal primer. b. Topcoat: Interior latex. c. Colors and Finish: Refer to Finish Legend.

C. Interior Galvanized-Metal Substrates: (3) coat system.

1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.3A.

a. Prime Coat: Galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. d. Colors and Finish: Refer to Finish Legend.

D. Interior Gypsum Board Substrates: (3) coat system.

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. d. Colors and Finish: Refer to Finish Legend.

END OF SECTION


HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 9600 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 005

SECTION 09 9600 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing.


A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency ; current edition.

B. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 2006a.

C. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers; 2009.

D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 - for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials.

D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of fluid-applied waterproofing membranes with five years of experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of fluid-applied waterproofing with minimum five years of experience.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until cured.



ROSSETTI Issue 005

1.6 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cold-Applied, Water-Based Asphalt Emulsion Waterproofing Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.: www.carlisle-ccw.com. 2. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; MEL-ROL LM: www.wrmeadows.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Water-Based Asphalt Emulsion Waterproofing: 1. Cured Thickness: 60 mils (0.060 inches), minimum. 2. Suitable for installation over concrete substrates. 3. Elongation: 1000 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. 4. VOC Content: Less than 20 g/L when tested in accordance with 40 CFR 59

Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.02 per inch, measured in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M. 6. Peel Adhesion: According to ASTM D412, for the following substrates.

a. High Density Polyethylene Film: 12.2 pound-inches. b. Concrete and Concrete Masonry: 14.1 pound-inches. c. Glass Fiber Mat Faced Gypsum Board: 13.1 pound-inches.

7. Adhesion: Greater than 150 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D4541. 8. Products:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; BarriCoat-R: www.carlisle-ccw.com.

b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; MEL-ROL LM: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Under-Tile Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane: Specifically designed for bonding to concrete, backer boards, and plywood under ceramic tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Equivalent products made by manufacturers listed above are also acceptable. 2. Material: Trowel-applied water-based acrylic membrane, 25 mils thick, minimum,

with continuous polyester fabric reinforcement. 3. ICC-ES approved.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Surface Conditioner: Compatible with membrane compound; as recommended by membrane manufacturer.



ROSSETTI Issue 005

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system.

C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials.

D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean.

C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.

D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.

E. Install cant strips at inside corners.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum thickness.

B. Apply primer or surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.

C. At joints and cracks less than 1/2 inch in width including joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces, apply 12 inch wide strip of joint cover sheet.

D. At joints from 1/2 to 1 inch in width, loop joint cover sheet down into joint between 1-1/4 and 1/-3/4 inch. Extend sheet 6 inches on either side of expansion joint.

E. Center joint cover sheet over joints. Roll sheet into 1/8 inch coating of waterproofing material. Apply second coat over sheet extending minimum of 6 inches beyond sheet edges.

F. Extend membrane over cants and up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter minimum 6 inches above horizontal surface for first ply and 4 inches at subsequent plies laid in shingle fashion.



ROSSETTI Issue 005

G. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at corners, intersections, and angles.

H. Install flexible flashings and seal into waterproofing material. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings.

I. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install counter-flashing over all exposed edges.

3.4 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD

A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.

B. Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.

C. Adhere protection board to substrate with compatible adhesive.


A. Owner will provide testing services in accordance with Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. Contractor shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing.

END OF SECTION


Animated Sign 11 0135 - 1


SECTION 11 0135 - ANIMATED SIGN

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SYSTEM TO BE PROPOSED

A. The scope of this section is the supply, installation, warranty and maintenance of a fully operational Animated Sign as further described below and shown on the drawings.

B. The proposed “Animated Sign” is approximately 178’-0” by 35’-0” – see drawings. It is to be a medium that can display video images from the building exterior and yet allow daylight into the building interior at the same location. It is to be set behind and seen through a glazed canopy. It is to be a sufficient distance inside the glazing to allow for glass cleaning and LED replacement. As it forms the exterior wall of Cobo Center, transparency is important to allow views out and daylight into the building. A solid or partially solid video wall would be unacceptable due to the impact of such a wall on the interior environment in Cobo Center’s main concourse.

C. The system shall have a proven record of successful installations. References for a minimum of three fully operational installations similar in scale to that being proposed at Cobo Center shall be provided with the bids.

D. It is understood the systems meeting the requirements of this section are proprietary and to meet the required performance vary in details. This section is written around one such proprietary system as the basis of design. Other systems providing the required performance would be acceptable. To allow the differences between the systems to be clearly understood, each bidder shall complete and submit with their bid the form included as Part 4 highlighting the differences from the basis of design system. Failure to submit this form will deem the bid unresponsive. This completed form will be considered a part of the Animated Sign contract.

E. In addition to the proposal forms required, the bidders shall also submit the following in a bound volume with information under the tabs as indicated, Supporting information can be separate from the bound volume, but the bound volume must contain responses to each item: 1. TAB 1: Form attached in Part 4 with column completed with details of proposed

system. This is for comparison with the basis of design. 2. TAB 2: Complete description of the system showing compliance with

performance criteria. 3. TAB 3: Complete description of software to be utilized with the system. 4. TAB 4: Complete description of required supports assumed in the bid to be by

others.




5. TAB 5: A statement that shall include a detailed description of the necessary equipment, software and its mode of operation, including a statement on formats for the Owner/Customer-produced images and video.

6. TAB 6: A statement that shall indicate what equipment and software would be necessary to simultaneously display the Owner/Customer-produced images and Owner/customer-produced video on other video displays throughout Cobo Center including but not limited to permanently fixed video displays and temporary event-related displays.

7. TAB 7: A statement that shall describe the expected maintenance, its frequency and the methods to be employed including access requirements.

8. TAB 8: Details and contact information for three reference projects of similar size and scope to Cobo Center project that have been fully operational.

9. TAB 9: Sample warranty. 10. TAB 10; Sample maintenance agreement. 11. TAB 11: Letter confirming willingness to install and subsequently remove a

sample of the proposed Animated Sign (approximately 12’-0” x 12’-0”) to be located in Cobo Center behind an existing glass wall at floor level. Sample to be fully operational with video. Sample to have proposed brightness. Sample installation and removal to be at no cost to the Authority.

12. TAB 12: Electrical power requirements and location. 13. TAB 13: Data raceway sizes and location.

F. The contract will be awarded on the basis of the best value to the Authority in the Authority’s sole opinion. Cost, system performance and system appearance will all be taken into consideration.

G. Failure to comply with certain of the criteria may not necessarily excluded systems from consideration. However failure to comply with the following will eliminate systems from consideration:

a. Transparency: 57% openness is desired. Systems with less that 50% openness will not receive further consideration.

b. Brightness: 9000 nits is desired. Systems with less brightness may be considered including review of samples on site. After review of samples on site, the Authority may reject systems that are considered in the Authority’s sole opinion to not have sufficient brightness. Should less brightness be deemed acceptable, all bidders will be afforded the opportunity to quote the lower brightness requirements.

H. Electrical power supply: Bidders are to assume an adequate electrical power supply will be provided by others to a disconnect (or disconnects) on one (or both) of the primary support columns shown on the drawings at an elevation required by the Animated Sign Contractor.

I. Data connections: Bidders are to assume suitable data raceways will be provided by others on one (or both) of the primary support columns shown on the drawings at an elevation required by the Animated Sign Contractor.

J. The Animated Sign operating system is to be installed in the Cobo Center Operator Offices located on level 144 at gridlines F and 5. Raceways and the required cabling




will be provided by others between the Animated Sign data connection on the primary columns and the operating location. A suitable desk and electrical power outlet will be provided by others at the operating location. Everything else to achieve a fully operational Animated Sign system is to be included by the Bidder and provided/installed by the Animated Sign Contractor. This includes all necessary operational and programming computer equipment.

K. Animated Sign Equipment: Bidders are to assume any necessary provision for housing Animated Sign equipment on the primary support columns will be provided by others. The provision and installation of all Animated Sign equipment will be the responsibility of the Animated Sign Contractor.

1.3 SUMMARY OF REQUIRED SYSTEM

A. Expected criteria for the Animated Sign are as follows: 1. The size of the Animated Sign is 178’-0” x 35’-0” as shown on the drawings. 2. The Animated Sign shall appear as a solid video screen to observers farther than

twenty feet from the face of the exterior canopy. Verification of this requirement will require short-listed bidders to install a sample piece of the system (size approximately 12’-0” x 12’-0”) in Cobo Center behind the existing glass exterior wall at floor level. This is to be done at Bidder’s expense and the Authority shall have no responsibility for those costs. The Authority will provide electrical power at no cost.

3. From the interior the Animated Sign shall appear transparent with a minimum 57% openness. It shall allow views out and daylight in. Verification of this requirement will require short-listed bidders to install a sample piece of the system (size approximately 12’-0” x 12’-0” in Cobo Center behind the existing glass exterior wall at floor level. This is to be done at Bidder’s expense and the Authority shall have no responsibility for those costs.

4. The Animated Sign shall function satisfactorily in an ambient temperature range from -4oF to +150oF.

5. The LEDs shall have a minimum 70,000 hours operating life at 9,000 nits. 6. Pixel pitch shall be approximately 50mm vertical x 42.50mm horizontal. 7. Resolution; 243 vertical, 1,140 horizontal. 8. 6 LEDs per pixel; 2 red, 2 green, 2 blue. 9. Color processing: 48(3x16) Bit. 10. Scanning speed: 1,000 Hz. 11. Max. viewing angle: 110o horizontal, 50o vertical. 12. Brightness: 9,000 Nits. 13. Animated Sign thickness – no greater than 3 inches. 14. Data interface: RJ-45 (Venus 7000). 15. Weight – less than 3 lbs/ft2. 16. Warranty: 2-year on all components. 17. Operation: Animated Sign shall include all equipment and software necessary to

display static Owner/Customer-produced images and Owner/Customer-produced video. Bidders shall provide a Statement that shall include a detailed description of the necessary equipment, software and its mode of operation, including a statement on formats for the Owner/Customer-produced images and video.




18. Operation: Bidders shall provide a Statement that shall indicate what equipment and software would be necessary to simultaneously display the Owner/Customer-produced images and Owner/customer-produced video on other video displays throughout Cobo Center including but not limited to permanently fixed video displays and temporary event-related displays.

19. Maintainability: The Animated Sign shall be maintainable. Bidders shall provide a Statement that shall describe the expected maintenance, its frequency and the methods to be employed including access requirements.

20. The Animated Sign will be installed behind glazing but will still be in a exterior environment. It is to be designed to satisfactorily perform in the ambient temperature changes to be expected and to have details and be of materials that resists corrosion and avoids degraded performance due to moisture.

21. The interior of the glass canopy may be pressure washed. The Animated Sign must resist the effects of this.

B. The basis of design system includes woven metal mesh media screen, with LED light sources fabricated integral to metal fabric, and accessories. Other systems will be considered that meet the performance criteria including openness.

C. System Design: a. The Work of this Section shall include all engineering, labor, materials,

tools, equipment, appliances and services required to manufacture, deliver, and furnish all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work as shown on the Contract Documents, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions.

b. Installation of a steel backer structure is included with woven metal mesh media screen system installation by installer selected by Animated Sign Contractor. All items not shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work shall be provided by the Animated Sign Contractor.

c. The extent of the Animated Sign is shown on the building elevations, sections and floor plans of the Contract Documents and includes a fully operational, structurally sound, system.


A. Delegated Design: Design Animated Sign system to be self supporting, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Include details of all support to be provided by others with bid. Anything not stated at that time will be by the Animated Sign Contractor.

B. The Animated Sign is proposed to be installed behind a glass curtain wall supported off a structure by others. Short-listed bidders will be asked to submit anticipated loads to be imposed on the supporting structure.

C. Structural Performance: System shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Design Loads: Weight of screens and anticipated live loads.




1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each system component.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for entire system, including that supporting equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and the following: 1. Operating clearances for serviceable components, to include:

a. Slaves (Data Converters). b. Master Box, for distribution to slaves. c. Switching Cabinet:

2. Requirements for supporting structures and components. Verify capacity of each component to support loads.

3. Locations of equipment components, switches, and controls. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination / Equipment Layout Drawings: 1. Indicate locations of Animated Sign equipment and connections to utilities. 2. Key equipment using designations indicated on other Submittals. 3. Include plans and elevations; clearance requirements for equipment access and

maintenance; details of equipment supports; and utility service characteristics. 4. Include details of seismic bracing for equipment. 5. Coordinate all work under various Sections of the Specifications to assure that no

interferences occur in the areas for which such drawings have been required and that necessary clearances are provided.

6. Installation of the equipment of this Section shall not proceed until required drawings have been reviewed.

7. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1:50.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For Animated Sign showing compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

F. Training: Complete details of training program.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Animated Sign including operation and maintenance manuals.

H. Project Testing Schedule: Description of methodology for performance testing prior to completion. Animated Sign shall operate successfully for two weeks before Substantial Completion is to be requested.

I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

J. Maintenance: Sample proposed maintenance agreement.





A. Unless accepted otherwise by the Engineer, use manufacturers and installers that employ a Quality Management System complying with the program described in ISO 9001-2000, or similar system.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be approved in writing by the manufacturer. Provide details of installer’s previous experience with similar Animated Signs.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system. 2. Animated Sign Contractor to provide and install operating computer. If necessary

as required by software upgrades, the operating computer shall also be upgraded to ensure system operates at maximum efficiency and to maximum potential of software.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous with Animated Sign by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of Animated Sign that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, faulty operation of LED equipment. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Initial Acceptance of Installation.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance: Animated Sign contractor shall provide two years of maintenance under the basic contract. Maintenance shall include the following: 1. Failures repair including, but not limited to, faulty operation of LEDs and LED

equipment. 2. Correction of system operation problems including but not limited to software

problems.




3. Provision and installation of software upgrades as available during the maintenance period.

B. Maintenance response shall be within twenty four hours of the notification of a minor failure (e.g. individual LED failure) or within three hours of notification of total system failure.

C. Extended maintenance: Bidders shall include the costs on an annual basis for a further five years maintenance agreement

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers / Products: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product and manufacturer listed as Basis-of-Design or comparable product.: a. GKD-USA, Inc., North American division of GKD - Gebr. Kufferath AG

(Basis-of-Design). 1) Shawn Crismond GKD-USA, Inc., 825 Chesapeake Drive,

Cambridge, MD 21613..Ph-410.901.8416.. Fx-410.221.0544, [email protected].

b. Or other system that can meet performance requirements and criteria.

2.2 WOVEN METAL FABRIC

A. Woven Metal Mesh: For basis of design system woven fabric of stainless steel and its woven-in round profiles, open along the front into which light emitting diodes. 1. Product: GKD Tigris Mesh; or equal.

a. Tigris, Flexible, one direction b. Material AISI Type 316 stainless steel c. Open area: 57% d. Weight: 6.49 kg./sq.m (1.33 lbs/sq.ft) e. Thickness: 6.5mm (0.244-in) f. Cable Diameter: 2.0mm (0.075-in) g. Rod Diameter: 3.0mm (0.115-in) h. Center to center, cable: 85.0mm (3.125-in) i. Center to center, rod: 10.0mm (0.4375-in) j. Maximum width: 8m (26-ft.)

B. Fabricated Media Screen: 1. Product: GKD 6 LED per Pixel Mediamesh; or equal.

a. LED’s: LED’s installed in mesh’s woven-in round profiles with a waterproof seal.




2. Properties: Sample Data Sheet Shown:

Description Value Units a. Display Size – Square Feet: 6230 SF b. Display Size (vertical): 35 ft c. Display Size (horizontal): 178 ft

d. Pixel Configuration: 2 Red, 2 Green, 2 Blue

RGB

e. Pixel pitch (vertical): 50.00 mm f. Pixel pitch (horizontal): 42.50 mm g. Resolution (vertical): 243 Pix h. Resolution (horizontal): 1140 Pix i. Color Processing: 48(3x16) Bit j. Scanning Speed: 1000 Hz

k. Data Interface: RJ-45 Venus 7000

l. Pixel per Square Meter: 471 Pix/m2

m. Total Amount Pixel 241714 Total pixels

n. LED per Square Meter 2824 LED/m2 o. Total Amount LEDs 1450280 Total led p. Brightness (Iv / Square Meter) 9000 Nits q. Max. Viewing Angle (horiz./vertic.) 110/50 Degrees r. Viewing Distance Video: 20 Ft s. Voltage: 100-240 VAC t. Max. Power per Square Meter: 371.52 Watt/m2 u. Average Power Consumption: 104.98 kWh v. Total Max. Power Requirement: 218700 W w. Protection Rate: 67 IP x. Ambient Temperature: -40-49 C y. Av. Weight per Square Meter: 9.17 Kg/m2 z. Total Weight: 5400 Kg

2.3 ELECTRONICS

A. Assembly: The horizontal profiles or mesh containing the pixels are interconnected in groups of eight or fewer, with insulated cables that are inserted into the edges of the mesh. After installation, these profile groups are connected to control units integrated into the building’s structure and networked with a central server inside the building, which supplies the profiles with power and display data.

B. Slaves (Data Converters): Data distribution to horizontal assemblies. Waterproof boxes located in converter channel.

C. Master Box: Box with distribution to slaves, with input from power and data stream.




D. Switching Cabinet: As required by manufacturer to meet required performance criteria.

E. Computer: As required by manufacturer to meet required performance criteria.

F. Software: As required by manufacturer to meet required performance criteria.

2.4 ATTACHMENT METHODS

A. General: 1. Attachment methods for woven metal mesh media screen shall be compatible

with application, panel size, structural characteristic, scale, and your design intent.

2. Design includes woven metal mesh media screen and all hardware as well as engineering calculations and shop drawings.

3. Methods for attaching metal fabrics: a. Tensioned: This method in combination with eyebolts, nuts and brackets

apply the proper pre-tension to the metal fabric. This pre-tension force, in addition to the forces of impact, snow, ice and wind, must be considered when sizing the hardware and substructure. 1) Woven-In Round Bar with Eyebolts: 2) Flats with Clevises 3) Flats with Flat-Eye 4) Others as Approved by Manufacturer

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for supporting members, blocking, installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of stage-curtain work. Examine inserts, clips, blocking, or other supports required to be installed by others to support tracks and battens.


3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install Animated Sign according manufacturer’s and fabricator’s written instructions.

3.3 WIRING

A. Power Wiring: 1. Install wiring in accordance with codes and standards applicable to jurisdiction for

hardwired connections. Install wiring in raceways except cable and plug connections. All components and assemblies are to be appropriately certified and/or labeled.

2. Install power wiring with a separate neutral for each output circuit from main dimmer and for each house and stage lighting circuit.




B. Signaling, Remote-Control and Power-Limited Circuits: 1. Comply with requirements in accordance with codes and standards applicable to

jurisdiction for installation of wiring. Install wiring in raceways except cable and plug connections. All components and assemblies are to be appropriately certified and/or labeled.

2. Remote-control circuits associated with emergency lighting control shall be installed complying with Class 1 Circuit standards in NFPA 70.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes and in terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures.

E. Support components and accessories in accordance with codes and standards applicable to jurisdiction

F. All wiring and raceways are to be concealed unless indicated otherwise in bid proposal.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections.

B. Perform Tests and Inspections: All images shown on the Animated Sign must comply with the Authority’s Policy on Animated Sign Displays (available from the Owner) and with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least

seven days’ advance notice. Undertake tests in presence of Owner and /or Owner designated representative.

2. Visual and Mechanical Tests and inspections: a. Inspect each fixture, outlet, module, control, and device for defects, finish

failure, corrosion, physical damage, labeling by an NRTL, and nameplate. b. Exercise and perform operational tests on mechanical parts and operable

devices according to manufacturer’s written instructions. c. Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench. d. Verify proper protective device settings, fuse types, and ratings. e. Record results of tests and inspections.

3. Electrical Tests: Perform tests according to manufacturer’s written instructions. a. Continuity tests of circuits. b. Operational Tests: Comply with manufacturer’s printed Project testing

schedule. Record observations of media mesh performance. 4. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a

label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and individual.

C. Media mesh will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.




1. Prepare a schedule of connections by number; indicate circuits, connected components, and control-channel assignments. Prepare written reports of tests and observations. Report defective materials, workmanship, and unsatisfactory test results. Include records of repairs and adjustments made.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain Animated Sign.

PART 4 - FORM TO BE SUBMIITED WITH BID

4.1 COMPARISON WITH BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Submit Part 4 Form on following page with bids.




CRITERIA BASIS OF DESIGN UNITS PROPOSED

SYSTEM

a. Display Size (area) 6230 SF

b. Display Size (vertical) 35 ft

c. Display Size (horizontal) 178 ft

d. Pixel Configuration: 2 Red, 2 Green, 2 Blue RGB

e. Pixel pitch (vertical): 50 mm

f. Pixel pitch (horizontal): 42.5 mm

g. Resolution (vertical): 243 Pix

h. Resolution (horizontal): 1140 Pix

i. Color Processing: 48(3x16) Bit

j. Scanning Speed: 1000 Hz

k. Data Interface: RJ-45 Venus 7000

l. Pixel per Square Meter: 471 Pix/m2

m. Total Amount Pixel 241714 Total pixels

n. LED per Square Meter 2824 LED/m2

o. Total Amount LEDs 1450280 Total led

p. Brightness (Iv / Square Meter) 9000 Nits

q. Max. Viewing Angle

(horiz./vertic.) 110/50 Degrees

r. Viewing Distance Video: 20 Ft

s. Voltage: 100-240 VAC

t. Max. Power per Square Meter: 371.52 Watt/m2

u. Average Power Consumption: 104.98 kWh

v. Total Max. Power Requirement: 190826 W

w. Protection Rate: 67 IP

x. Ambient Temperature: -89 C

y. Average weight per square me-

ter 9.17 Kg/m2

z. Total Weight: 4712 Kg

aa. TRANSPARENCY (openness) 57 %

bb. Warranty 2 Years

cc. Maintenance 2 Years




4.2 See Section 1.2.D for additional items to be submitted with bids.

4.3 All submissions with bids when accepted in writing by the Owner will form a part of the contract requirements.



Wheelchair Lift 14 4200 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 008

SECTION 14 4200 – WHEELCHAIR LIFT

PART 1. GENERAL

SCHEDULE 0 - SECTION INCLUDES

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Commercial wheelchair lifts.

SCHEDULE 1 - RELATED SECTIONS

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and includ-ing disconnect and fused switches at machine room.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Division 16 Sections for standby power source, transfer switch, and connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer switch to controller.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for tel-ephone service to elevators.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for elevator ma-chine foundation, and pit.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - Section 096813 - Carpet: Floor finish in cab.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - Section 13850 - Detection and Alarm: Fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices.

SCHEDULE 2 - REFERENCES

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B-29.2 - Chain Stand-ards for Inverted Tooth (Silent) Chains and Sprockets.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform and Stairway Chair Lifts.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)".

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facili-ties.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.

SCHEDULE 3 - REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Fabricate and install work in compliance with applicable jurisdictional authorities.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - File shop drawings and submissions with local authorities as the in-formation is made available. Company pre-inspection and jurisdictional authority inspections and permits are to be made on timely basis as required.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

SCHEDULE 4 - SUBMITTALS

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1.1 Preparation instructions and recommendations. 1.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 1.3 Installation methods.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Shop Drawings: Provide a complete layout of lift equipment detailing dimensions and clearances as required.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - Selection Samples: For each finish product specified requiring selec-tion of color or finish, two complete sets of color charts representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

SCHEDULE 5 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Installer Qualifications: 1.1 Skilled tradesmen shall be employees of the installing contractor approved by the

manufacturer, with demonstrated ability to perform the work on a timely basis. 1.2 Execute work of this section only by a company that has adequate product liability in-

surance.

SCHEDULE 6 - DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having ju-risdiction.

SCHEDULE 7 - PROJECT CONDITIONS

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and venti-lation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install sys-tems under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

SCHEDULE 8 - WARRANTY

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Coverage - this warranty applies to the repair or replacement, at Manufacturer's option, of parts that fail due to defective material or workmanship. Manufac-turer may, at its option, provide factory reconditioned parts. This warranty is provided to the final purchaser of the product and is transferable. The Manufacturer's warranty does not cover labor charges for the removal, repair or replacement of warranty parts but such costs shall be covered for a period of 36-month by Authorized Dealer's warranty from date of sub-stantial completion.

1.1 The manufacturer shall offer a 36-month limited warranty on parts from date of sub-

stantial completion.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Savaria, which is located at: 2 Walker Drive, Brampton, ON, Canada, L6T 5E1; Toll Free Tel: 800-661-5112; Tel: 905-791-5555; Fax: 905-791-2222; Email: request info; Web: www.savaria.com

B. Substitutions: permitted as approved by Architect.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 COMMERCIAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT

A. Hydraulic Vertical Platform Lifts: Savaria V1504-Prestige Enclosure: 1. Model: Type 4

B. Hydraulic Vertical Platform Lift: The lift described here is a vertical platform lift consisting of a hydraulic tower with a lifting platform. The platform is made to accommodate a wheelchair user or a person with impaired mobility. The lift can be used indoor and in commercial appli-cation.

C. Work described in this section includes providing equipment, incidental material and labor required for complete, operable roped hydraulic wheelchair lift installation. Lifts shall be erected, installed, adjusted, tested and placed in operation by lift system manufacturer, or manufacturer's authorized installer. 1. Lifts shall be in accordance:

a. ASME A18.1 and ADAAG compliant (USA) b. ASME A18.1 and A117.1 compliant (USA) c. ASME 18.1 only (USA)

D. The following preparatory work to receive the lifts specified in this section is part of the work of other sections: 1. Permanent 120 VAC, 20 amp single phase power to operate lift to be provided from a

lockable fused/cartridge type disconnect switch with auxiliary contacts for battery op-eration. Refer to drawings for permanent power specifications and location of discon-nects. Temporary power may be provided to expedite installation of lift.

2. Provide rough openings per lift contractor's shop drawings. 3. Provide substantial, level pit floor slab as indicated on the lift contractor's shop draw-

ings.

E. Characteristics: 1. Rated Load: 750 lb (340 kg). 2. Rated Speed: 20 fpm (0.10 m/s). 3. Car Dimensions: 36 inches W by 48 inches D (914 mm by 1219 mm) 4. Levels Serviced: 2 5. Car Configuration: 90 degree exit. 6. Travel: Approx. 9ft to be field verified 7. Pit Depth: 3” 8. Installation Environment Indoor (interior install) 9. Stainless Steel Finish 10. Operation: Constant pressure. 11. Power Supply: 110 volt, 20 amps, 1 phase, 60 Hz. 12. Drive System: 2:1 Roller chain hydraulic.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

13. Emergency Power: a. Battery operation in down direction – Standard. b. 24VDC Battery raising and lowering

14. Controller: Relay logic based controller. 15. Motor/Pump: 1HP (112 kw), gear type 16. Manual Lowering: Outside the hoistway at lower landing.

F. Car Enclosure: Half-inch structural tempered glass and no visible frame to a minimum of 108 inches (1067 mm) above upper landing and no roof.

G. Doors and Gates: 1. First landing door:

a. Door type: 80” low profile aluminum door with a concealed electro/mechanical in-terlock.

b. Flush closing operation with enclosure side. c. Operation: Automatic - Surface 24 volt door opener with battery back-up for low

profile aluminum door. d. Door Width: 36 inches (889 mm)

2. Upper landing door/gate: a. Door/gate type:

1) 80” low profile aluminum door with a concealed electro/mechanical interlock. b. Flush closing operation with enclosure side. c. Operation: Automatic - Surface 24 volt door opener with battery back-up for low

profile aluminum door. d. Door/Gate Width: 36 inches (889 mm)

H. Call Stations: Provide flush, surface or door frame mounted landing call/send stations. 1. Call stations will be: Keyed (removable in on/off position)

I. Car Operation: 1. Car Operating Panel shall consist of constant pressure buttons, emergency

stop/alarm button, on/off key switch and emergency LED light mounted on a remova-ble stainless steel panel (Type 304 #4 Stainless Steel Finish).

2. Auxiliary lighting: The car shall be equipped with a battery operated LED light fixture. The battery shall be the rechargeable type with an automatic recharging system.

3. Telephone: The car shall be equipped with a ADA Hands free phone.

J. Pumping Unit and Control: 1. The pumping unit and control shall be enclosed in the tower. The controller and pump

unit shall be pre-wired and tested prior to shipment. The controller is to be relay logic based operation for ease of maintenance and service. Pump unit shall incorporate the following features:

2. Adjustable pressure relief valve. 3. Manually operable down valve to lower lift in the event of an emergency. This valve

shall be activated from outside of the hoistway through a keyed box. 4. Pressure gauge isolating valve, manually operable. 5. Gate valve to isolate cylinder from pump unit. 6. Electrical solenoid for down direction control. 7. Emergency Operation - A manual lowering device shall be located outside the hoist-

way in a lockable box positioned at a lower landing.

K. Cylinder And Plunger: 1. The cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe of sufficient thickness and suitable

safety margin. The top of the cylinder shall be equipped with a cylinder head with an



ROSSETTI Issue 008

internal guide ring and self-adjusting packing. 2. The plunger shall be constructed of a steel shaft of proper diameter machined true

and smooth. The plunger shall be provided with a stop electrically welded to the bot-tom to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder.

L. Roller Chains: Two No.50 roller chains with 5/8 inch (16 mm) pitch. Minimum breaking strength 6100 lb (2773 kg) each.

M. Leveling Device: 1. The lift shall be provided with an anti-creep device which will maintain the carriage

level within 1/2 inch (12 mm) of each landing. 2. All limit switch and leveling device switches shall be located in a position to be inac-

cessible to unauthorized persons. They shall be located behind the mast wall and be accessible through removable panels.

N. Guide Yoke: The 2:1 guide yoke/sprocket assembly shall be supplied with idler sheaves, roller guide shoes, bearings and guards.

O. Terminal Stopping Devices: Normal terminal stopping devices shall be provided at top and bottom of runway to stop the car positively and automatically.

P. Guide Rails and Brackets: Steel 'C'' guide rails and brackets shall be used to guide the plat-form and sling. Guide rails shall form part of the structural integrity of the unit and be integral to the mast enclosure, ensuring stability and minimum platform deflection when loaded.

Q. Car Sling: Car sling shall be fabricated from steel tubing 44 inches (1116 mm) high with ad-equate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure. Roller guide shoes shall be mounted on the top and bottom of the car sling to engage the guide rails. Guide shoes shall be roller type with 3 inches (76 mm) diameter wheels. Nylon guide shoes shall not be used for better ride quality and durability.

R. Wiring: All wiring and electrical connections shall comply with applicable codes. Insulated wiring shall have flame-retardant and moisture-proof outer covering and shall be run in con-duit or electrical wire ways if located outside the unit enclosure. Quick disconnect harnesses shall be used when possible.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until hoistway and machine room has been properly prepared.

B. Site dimensions shall be taken to verify that tolerances and clearances have been main-tained and meet local regulations.

C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfac-tory preparation before proceeding preparation.

D. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

E. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.



ROSSETTI Issue 008

3.3 LIFT INSTALLATION

A. Install all the components of the lift system that are specified in this section to be provided, and that are required by jurisdictional authorities to license the lift.

B. Trained employees of the lift contractor shall perform all installation work of this section.

C. Adjust lift for proper operation and clean unit thoroughly.

D. Instruct users in operation procedures and Owner's maintenance person in trouble-shooting and maintenance procedures.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION




PES PROJECT NO. 13-011

IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 - 1

© PES GROUP, P.C. Issue 008

SECTION 21 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 3000 – Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. For Information.

1. Product data.

a. Pipe markers.


A. Refer to Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and handling requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ASSEMBLIES

A. Pipe Markers.

1. Furnish and apply custom-made pipe markers to piping defined as follows.

a. Piping exposed to view.

1) Piping exposed to view includes piping located in equipment rooms or in spaces that do not conceal the piping.

2) For piping exposed in the Ballroom, Atrium and Prefunction Ceiling refer to architectural Room Finish Schedules for specific direction on painting and labeling

b. Piping located above suspended ceilings.

c. Piping located in accessible shafts.

d. Underground metallic piping.

2. Pipe markers shall identify fluid handled by each system.

3. Markers for insulated pipe and for bare pipe sized 3/4 inch and larger shall indi-cate direction of fluid flow.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Fire Suppression Identification (Piping).

1. Markers for pipe sized 3/4 inch and larger.

a. Unless otherwise specified, comply with requirements of ANSI A13.1.

b. Background of markers shall be color coded.

c. Legends shall be in long form or they may be abbreviated only if they are in common, everyday usage and not prone to misinterpretation.

d. Directional arrows shall point away from legend.







e. Pipe markers shall be plastic and coated to resist smudging and damage from water and weather.

f. Pipe markers shall be snap-on or strap-on type.

g. Acceptable manufacturers.

1) W.H. Brady, Quick-Labels.

2) Craftmark Identification Systems, Specmark.

3) Emed.

4) Marking Services, Inc.

5) Seton, Setmark.

6) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements

2. Markers for bare pipe smaller than 3/4 inch nominal size.

a. Circular brass tags identifying service and suspended by means of brass jack chains.

1) Legends shall be largest type which can be accommodated.

b. Snap-on labels specifically made for small diameter pipe and tubing.

c. Acceptable manufacturers.

1) W.H. Brady, Style No. 28.

2) Craftmark Identification Systems.

3) Emed.


5) Seton, Valve Tags.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Fire Suppression Identification (Piping).

1. Apply pipe markers for piping specified to be painted, after painting has been completed.

2. Prior to application of snap-on labels, or brass tags, remove debris and dust from contact surfaces.

3. Unless otherwise specified, locate pipe markers in accordance with Article 3.1 of ANSI A13.1, except with 50 foot maximum intervals.

4. Furnish and install markers on piping at connections to equipment.


6. Prior to application of pipe markers, snap-on labels or brass tags, remove dust and debris from pipe surface.

7. Install pipe markers as follows.

a. At access panels or doors.

b. Adjacent to valves and branch connections.

c. On both sides of floors, ceilings, and walkways.

d. At major changes in direction.

e. At maximum intervals of 25 feet on straight lengths of pipe .

f. At termination points.







g. At connections to equipment.

8. Arrow and marker placement shall furnish unobstructed visibility from floor level.


A. Check factory installed nameplates for readability.

1. Remove paint smears.

2. Where nameplates are illegible, arrange for replacement by equipment manufac-turer.

B. Check directional arrows and apply corrected labels and arrows, where errors are found.

END OF SECTION





BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS 21 0600 - 1


SECTION 21 0600 – BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND

METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 21 1000 - Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems.


A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ; 1998 (R2006).

B. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes ; 2006.

C. ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe ; 2004.

D. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ; 1999 (Reapproved 2004).

E. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ; 2007.

F. ASTM A105/A105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Ap-plications ; 2005.

G. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ; 2004.

H. ASTM A181/A181M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General-Purpose Piping ; 2006.

I. ASTM A197/A197M - Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron ; 2000 (Reap-proved 2006).

J. ASTM A 234/A 234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service ; 2007.

K. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ; 1984 (Reapproved 2004).

L. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal ; 2004.

M. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) ; 2009.

N. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ; 2003a.

O. ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Ap-plications ; 2008.

P. ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting ; 2005.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 – Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. For Review.







1. Shop drawings.

C. For Closeout.

1. Project Record Documents.

a. Piping systems tests.


A. Qualifications.

1. For pipe welding: Welding procedures and welder or welding operator perfor-mance shall be qualified in accordance with ASME B31.9.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Fire suppression system components shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

B. Pressure Gauges.

1. Standard, 6 inch, round gauge with cast aluminum case finished in dull black and fitted with chrome plated ring, or stainless steel case and ring, graduations rang-ing from zero to twice minimum working pressure on line served, and gauge cock.

2. Include brass or steel siphon on pressure gauges for steam lines.

3. Equip pressure gauges installed on pumped lines with pulsation dampeners.

4. Acceptable products.

a. Ametek, U.S. Gauge Division: No. 5105-S.

b. Ashcroft: No. 1010.

c. Trerice: No. 600.

d. Weiss Instruments: NF6S Series.

e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Floor and Wall Sleeve Materials.

1. Furnish and install sleeves for pipes penetrating building construction.

2. Furnish and install Schedule 40 black steel sleeves for aboveground interior wall penetrations.

3. Furnish and install Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for floor penetra-tions.

4. Size sleeves for pipe lines 4 inches and smaller, not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than pipe passing through.

5. Size sleeves for pipe lines larger than 4 inches, not less than one pipe size larger than pipe passing through.

6. Sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to clear bare or insulated pipe by not less than 1/4 inch all around, and large enough to pass full movement of piping due to expansion or contraction.







7. Firestopping: Refer to Division 7 for firestopping materials and installation re-quirements.

8. Expandable seals: Mechanically expandable, segmented neoprene inserts.

a. Acceptable products.

1) Calpico: Sealing Linx.

2) Flexicraft Industries: Pipe Seal.

3) Metraflex: Metraseal.

4) Thunderline: Link Seal.

5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Caulking.

1. Nonhardening, heat resistant compound.


a. Interchem Presstite: No. 579.64.

b. Foster Acoustical Sealer: No. 95-44.

c. United States Gypsum: Acoustical Sealant.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Dielectric Fittings: Insulating dielectric unions, flanges, or waterways.

1. Acceptable manufacturers.

a. Epco.

b. Victaulic

c. Watts.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 2500 - Substitutions.

F. Flashing/Counterflashing Materials.

1. Sheet copper, 16 ounces per square foot, in accordance with ASTM B370.

2. Lead flashing, 4 pound sheet lead in accordance with FS QQ-L-201F(2).

G. Floor and Ceiling Plates.

1. Pipes sized 2 inches and smaller, chromium plated, cast brass, adjustable plates.

2. Pipes sized 2-1/2 inches and larger, adjustable cast iron or pressed steel plates.

H. Flange Gaskets and Bolting.

1. Gasket, Type GASK1: Compressed, nonasbestos, synthetic fiber blend, suitable for service, 1/16 inch thick.

a. Acceptable manufacturers.

1) Gasket Resources, Inc.

2) Garlock: Blue-gard.

3) Klinger.


2. Bolting, Type BOLT1: Machine bolts in accordance with ASTM A307, Grade B and hex nuts in accordance with ASTM A563.

I. Pipe Thread Compounds.

1. Furnish and install compounds compatible with service, service temperature, and pipe material specified for service.

2. Compounds containing lead are prohibited.







2.02 MATERIALS

A. Type GS-1FP, Galvanized Steel Pipe.

1. Pipe, 16 inches and smaller: Schedule 40, ASTM A53 and ASME B36.10M, gal-vanized steel.

2. Fittings: 175 psi WWP, ASME B16.3 and B16.4 malleable iron or cast iron, screwed.

3. Unions: 250 pound, malleable iron, screwed, ground joint.

4. Flanges: 125 pound, ASTM A126 and ASME B16.1, cast iron.

5. Grooved fittings: Match coupling, ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, duc-tile iron.

6. Grooved couplings: 300 pound minimum, ASTM A47, malleable iron, or ASTM A536 ductile iron, with ASTM D2000, EPDM, slip-on rubber gaskets and coupling bolts and nuts. Snap lock or plain end type couplings are prohibited.

7. Grooved fittings and couplings.


1) Anvil International, Inc.: Gruvlok Fig. 7000 or 7001.

2) Victaulic: Style 77, 177, 107H, and 07 (flexible or rigid).

3) Star Pipe Products: C-1, C-3 or C-7.


8. Note: Use galvanized malleable iron or galvanized cast iron fittings, unions, and flanges for water deluge fire protection system.

B. Type BS-1FP, Black Steel Fire Protection Pipe.

1. Pipe, 16 inches and smaller: Schedule 40, ASTM A53, black steel.

2. Fittings, screwed: 175 pound, ASTM A126, cast iron or ASTM A197, malleable iron.

3. Fittings, flanged: 175 pound, ASTM A126, cast iron.

4. Fittings, butt weld: Standard, ASTM A234, black steel.

5. Unions, screwed: 250 pound, ASTM A197, malleable iron, ground joint.

6. Flanges, welded: 150 pound, ASTM A181, forged steel.

7. Grooved fittings: Match couplings, ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron.

8. Grooved flanges: 175 pound couplings, ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron.

9. Grooved couplings: 300 pound minimum, ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron, with EPDM gaskets and coupling bolts and nuts. Snap lock or plain end type grooved couplings are prohibited.



1) Anvil International, Inc.: Figs. 7000 and 7401.

2) Victaulic: Styles 77, 107H, 07, and 177.

3) Star Pipe Products: C-1, C-3 or C-7.








PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Aboveground Pipe.

1. Refer to specific piping systems sections for additional requirements.

2. Install piping in direct, straight, workmanlike manner, concealed where possible, and properly graded.

3. Particular attention shall be paid to Owner's requirements for clearance.

4. Piping in finished rooms shall be concealed.

5. Piping shall not project beyond walls or steel lines, or hang below slabs more than is absolutely necessary.

6. Fluids shall circulate freely, without noise, and with no evidence of leaks, trapping, or air binding.

7. After installation, clear each section of pipe of debris and obstructions.

8. Unless indicated otherwise or to facilitate drainage, take branches from top of mains or at 45 degree angle above horizontal.

9. Valve branch lines to equipment close to main, unless otherwise shown.

10. Length of pipe used in offsets between risers and mains shall be sufficient to fa-cilitate expansion and pitched back to main to furnish proper drainage at all times.

11. Offset piping to avoid interferences, increase headroom, improve appearance of pipe work, and to properly drain piping, in manner acceptable to Owner's Field Representative.

12. Openings in pipe shall be kept closed during construction with cast iron or mallea-ble iron caps or plugs.

13. Make pipe connections to allow flexibility of pipe movement during expansion and contraction.

14. Install piping so strain and weight will not harm equipment at connections.

15. Branch connections for steel pipe.

a. Make branch connections with tees, weldolets, or threadolets, where main exceeds branch by two pipe sizes or more.

b. Branch connections shall be made with tees, laterals, or crosses, where main and branch are of equal size, or where main exceeds branch by one pipe size.

c. Mitered fittings in steel pipe systems will not be accepted.

16. Install unions at intervals and locations where they will facilitate disconnection and removal of piping, at screwed valves, at connections to equipment, and elsewhere as shown.

17. Install flanged joints at valves, equipment, and other final connections 2-1/2 inch-es in size and larger.

18. Flanges shall be true faced and placed perpendicular to axis of pipe.

19. Remove raised face of pipe flanges connecting to flat faced, cast iron, flanged valves.

20. Paint one side of flange gaskets with graphite and oil before placing into position.

21. Gaskets shall cover full space inside of flange bolt holes, and no part may extend beyond inside diameter of pipe.

22. Apply pipe thread compound to male threads only.







23. Floor and ceiling plates.

a. Install where pipes pass through finished floors, walls, ceilings, and partitions.

b. Where insulation is carried through pipe sleeve, completely cover insulation and sleeve.

B. Pipe Welding.

1. Perform steel pipe welding in accordance with ASME B31.9 and applicable re-quirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Pipe ends requiring butt welds.

a. Ream free of burrs and bevel 37 degrees, plus or minus 2 degrees.

b. Center pipe ends and locate 1/8 inch apart, plus or minus 1/32 inch.

c. Before applying welding beads, make not less than 4 equally spaced tack welds between pipe end.

d. Clean each bead thoroughly before starting following pass.

3. Remove welds found to be defective.

a. Replace defective welds with nondefective welds to ensure compliance with Contract provisions without additional cost to Owner.

b. Peening of defective welds or applying additional beads to defective welds are not acceptable methods of repair.

4. Furnish fire blankets to protect building structure, services, materials, and equip-ment.

5. Furnish and install protective curtains or shields to protect personnel from weld-er's flash.

C. Grooved Joints.

1. Install grooved fittings and couplings as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Use only those grooved couplings specified. Substitution of other model, style, size, or rating of couplings or fittings is prohibited.

3. Roll grooving of piping is prohibited for use in galvanized steel pipe systems.

D. Pressure Gauges.

1. Install pressure gauges in fittings. Drilling and tapping of pipe wall for connections is prohibited.

2. Locate gauges in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in visible loca-tions for easy reading from normal operating levels.

E. Sleeves and Seals.

1. Set sleeves in concrete work in position before concrete is poured, and maintain them in position until concrete is set.

2. Holes for sleeves in existing concrete shall be cored.

3. Sleeves through walls shall extend minimum of 1/2 inch beyond wall flange.

4. Install floor sleeves for exposed risers or equipment services flush with ceiling, with planed square ends extending 2 inches above finished floor.

5. Extend floor sleeves for pipe risers in finished areas to extend to uniform height of not more than 2 inches above finished floor.

6. Pipes located within pipe shafts and chases do not require sleeves.

7. Where indicated, seal space between pipe and sleeves in exterior walls, water-tight, by packing with oakum and caulking with lead.

8. Caulking.







a. Caulk pipes passing through interior partitions and walls, airtight around their circumference on both sides of partition.

b. Apply caulking between pipe sleeve and exterior surface of pipe or pipe insu-lation.

c. Apply caulking beads in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

d. Unless manufacturer's instructions state otherwise, make sealant beads not thinner than 1/8 inch nor thicker than 3/8 inch.

e. Use of general purpose, oil base, caulking compounds, of putties and of plas-ter will not be accepted for sealing of pipe penetrations.

F. Flashings/Counterflashings.

1. Size flashing flange minimum of 6 inches larger than outside diameter of pipe, or minimum of 24 inches square, and extend sleeves up around pipes to height of not less than 10 inches above roof line, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install flashing/counterflashing.

3. Where copper flashing is indicated, solder flange and sleeve watertight.

4. Install copper counterflashing with stainless steel draw bands.

G. Welding to Building Structure.

1. Welding to building structure is not allowed, unless otherwise specified or specifi-cally accept by Owner's Field Representative.

2. If so specified or accepted, comply with following requirements.

a. Unless otherwise noted, welding and workmanship shall be governed by AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings in conjunction with AWS D1.1.

b. Allowable stress in field applied welds using E70 Series and A36 steel.

1) Tension or compression : Same as base metal.

2) Shear: 15,800 pounds per square inch.

c. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, or other foreign material.

d. Before welding, painted surfaces shall have paint removed to expose clean steel surface.

e. Special attention is called to requirement that maximum size of fillet weld that may be assumed in design of connection shall ensure that stresses in adja-cent base material do not exceed allowable value for this material.

f. No weld transmitting calculated stress shall be less than 3 inches in length, and no intermittent welds shall be less than 2 inches in length.

g. No welds shall be applied to flanges of tension members perpendicular to di-rection of stress.

h. Turn side and end fillet welds around corners for a minimum length of twice nominal size of weld.

i. To ensure compliance, detail shall be indicated on shop drawings.

j. Length of end returns is not be included in calculated weld length.

k. No welding or other operation involving use of flame, arcs, or sparking devic-es will be allowed without written permission of Owner's representative.

l. Welds found be in nonconformance to requirements of AWS D1.1 shall be repaired or replaced according to Workmanship section of AWS D1.1 without cost to Owner.

H. General Pipe Testing Requirements.







1. Prior to acceptance of work, test all completed piping systems, in accordance with applicable governing codes, and in presence of Owner's Representative.

a. Furnish necessary equipment and materials, and make necessary test con-nections required to execute tests.

b. Make tests before piping surfaces are concealed or insulated.

c. Use standard piping plugs, caps, valves, and blind flanges for sealing off pip-ing for testing.

d. Removal of system component, including plugs and caps, to ascertain whether or not test media has reached all parts of system if purging or vent valves are not installed during construction, may be required by Owner's Field Representative.

e. Remove components from piping systems during testing whenever compo-nent may sustain damage due to test pressure or test media.

f. After completion of test, reinstall component and reapply test at component pressure rating.

g. Check system components and valves for functional operation under system test pressure.

2. Pressure tests, when specified, shall be carried out in accordance with ASME B31.9.

3. Take necessary precautions to vent expansive force of compressed air trapped during high pressure hydrostatic testing to preclude injury and damage.

4. If testing demonstrates leakage.

a. Determine source(s) of leakage, repair or replace defective materials and workmanship, and retest installation until specified requirements are complied with.

b. Replace leaking gasket joints with undamaged gaskets and flange bolting.

c. Destroy removed gaskets and bolting.

5. For hydrostatic tests: Use only potable water.

6. Pneumatic testing.

a. Use compressed air, carbon dioxide, or nitrogen, unless otherwise specified or accepted.

b. Preliminary testing at 5 psi shall require swabbing joints with soap solution and subsequent observation for bubbles.

7. Upon completion of work, but before final acceptance, operate systems for period of two days, for purpose of testing and satisfying all requirements, when directed by Owner's Field Representative.

8. Prepare and maintain test records of all piping systems tests.

a. List Owner and Contractor personnel present, dates, test gauge identification numbers, ambient temperatures, pressure ranges, rates of pressure drop, and leakage rates.

b. Deliver two record copies of acceptance tests to Owner after acceptance.

9. Refer to Sections listed under heading, Related Sections, for requirements specif-ic to individual piping systems.

I. Flushing and Purging General Requirements.

1. Install temporary and permanent piping, equipment, and materials required for flushing and purging work.

2. Flushing and purging of add-on system into existing system is strictly prohibited.







3. After flushing and purging, valves and strainers shall be removed and cleaned of debris before replacing.

4. Coordinate cleaning of connections to existing systems through Owner's Field Representative.

5. Flush and purge systems after successful pressure testing.


A. Check that pressure, temperature, and flow measuring devices are placed in correct locations. Make modifications to ensure compliance.

B. Check scale ranges of individual instruments. Expected normal reading shall be near middle of scale. Replace instruments not conforming to this requirement.

C. Verify that piping systems have been flushed and filled.

D. Check valve packings. Adjust or replace leaking valve packings.

E. Verify piping alignment at flexible connections or expansion joints, in hot and cold con-dition. Correct misalignment, where joints are found to squirm.

END OF SECTION





WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 1000 - 1


SECTION 21 1000 – WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 21 0500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression.

B. Section 21 0600 - Basic Fire Protection Materials and Methods.

C. Section 21 1008 - Hangers and Supports for Fire Protection.

D. Division 26 - Electrical.


A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping ; 2007 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).

B. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ; 1999 (Reapproved 2004).

C. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ; 1984 (Reapproved 2004).

D. ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Ap-plications ; 2008.

E. FM P7825 - Approval Guide ; current edition.

F. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems ; 2007.

G. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory ; current edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. For Review.

a. Shop Drawings.

1) Location and elevation of.

(a) Water supply piping.

(b) Automatic sprinkler riser location.

2) Fabrication of overhead system network.

2. For Information.

a. Product data.

1) Alarm check valve.

2) Dry pipe valve.

3) Alarm and supervisory devices.

4) System identification nameplates.

5) Sprinkler heads.

6) Pipe hangers and supports.

b. Design data.

1) Hydraulic calculations and associated drawings for fire protection sys-tem.







c. Test reports.

1) Test certificates for hydrostatic testing of system in accordance with NFPA 13.

d. Certificates.

1) Test of sprinkler network.

2) Underwriters Laboratories listed equipment.

3. For Closeout.

a. Operation and Maintenance Data.

1) Spare parts lists.


A. Hydraulically design systems according to criteria indicated on drawings.

B. Minimum sprinkler operating pressure: 7 psi.

C. Maximum water velocity in pipe: 32 feet per second.

D. Prepare hydraulic calculations on form sheets in accordance with NFPA 13.

E. Restate and include basic design data and criteria, work sheets, summary sheets, and supply and demand curves.

F. Clearly indicate hydraulic areas and reference points.

G. Submit calculations, for each area, to prove design area chosen is most hydraulically remote or most hydraulically demanding area.

H. Work shown on drawings is schematic or diagrammatic only. Scales and figure di-mensions are approximate and are given for estimating purposes.

I. Drawings indicate general scheme for sprinkler system design. Call exceptions to scheme to Owner's Field Representative's attention, before proceeding with work.

J. Work shall be supervised and performed by personnel regularly engaged in installation of fire protection systems conforming to UL or NFPA Standards. Submit supervisor or installer evidence of qualification, upon request.

K. Furnish FM approved or UL listed devices and materials where FM approved or UL listed devices and materials are available.


A. Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and handling requirements.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.







PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEMS

A. Automatic Sprinkler System (Wet).

1. Pipe and fittings.

a. Galvanized or black steel pipe and fittings in accordance with NFPA 13.

2. Valves.

a. General service fire protection valves.

B. Automatic Sprinkler System (Dry).

1. Pipe and fittings.

a. Galvanized steel pipe and fittings in accordance with NFPA 13.

2. Valves.

a. General service fire protection valves.


A. General Service Fire Protection Valves.

1. Valves listed are standard Specifications for fire protection service.

2. Where revisions or clarifications are required to establish specific requirements for systems on this project, these are specified under respective service listed.

Type Rating Size Material Remarks OS and Y

gate valve 175 psi Through 2

inch Bronze

threaded Wedge disc Ken-

nedy Fig. 66 OS and Y

gate valve 175 psi 2-1/2

through 14 inch

Iron flanged Double disc Ken-nedy Fig. 68

NRS gate valve

175 psi 4 through 14 inch

Iron mechani-cal joint

Double disc Ken-nedy Fig. 71X

Globe valve 200 pound WOG

Through 2 inch

Bronze threaded

Renewable disc Kennedy Fig. 97-

SD Angle valve 200 pound

WOG Through 2 inch

Bronze threaded

Renewable disc Kennedy Fig. 98-

SD Check valve 200 pound

WOG Through 2 inch

Bronze threaded

Regrindable seat Kennedy Fig. 440-

SD Check valve 175 psi 2-1/2

through 12 inch

Iron body flanged

Bronze disc Ken-nedy Fig. 126A

Check valve 175 psi 4 through 8 inch

Cast iron body

Wafer type Mueller Model A-2102

Butterfly valve

175 psi 4 through 12 inch

Ductile iron EDPM seat

Gear operated Kennedy No. 911







3. Kennedy valve or Mueller valve figure numbers are used to establish style, quali-ty, and weight.


a. Crane.

b. Jenkins.

c. Kennedy.

d. Mueller.

e. Nibco.

f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Fire Protection Specialty Valves.

1. Alarm check valves.

a. Variable pressure, spring loaded, clapper type.

b. Rubber faced clapper, hand hole covers, required trim, and main drain sys-tem.

c. Moving parts constructed of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or EPDM.

d. Design clapper to prevent accumulation of dirt.

e. Acceptable manufacturers.

1) GEM

2) Reliable.

3) Victaulic.

4) Viking.


2. Dry pipe valves.

a. Low differential type with accelerator, automatic air control, including trim-mings, filters, air relief valves, regulators, pressure gauges, and drains.

b. Acceptable manufacturers.

1) GEM

2) Reliable.

3) Victaulic.

4) Viking.


C. Fire Protection Hose Valves and Stations.

1. Class I fire hose valves.

a. 2-1/2 inch, heavy-duty angle valve with replaceable stem and valve seat, male outlet threads conforming to local standards, full flow override, designed for 300 psi working pressure.

b. Rough brass finish valve body.

1) Furnish polished chrome plated cap and chain for outlet.

c. Furnish adjustable, pressure restricting valves, set at 100 psi and having full flow override.

d. Acceptable manufacturers.

1) Fire End & Croker Corporation.

2) Guardian Fire Equipment.

3) Potter-Roemer, Model 4085.


D. Alarm and Supervisory Devices.







1. Water flow alarm switches.

a. Vane type with adjustable retard, suitable for 175 psi working pressures.

b. 2 single pole-double throw switches.

c. Acceptable products.

1) Potter Electric, Model VSR-F.

2) System Sensor, Model WFD.


2. Valve supervisory switches.

a. Includes cover and tamper screws, with single side conduit entry.

b. 2 single pole-double throw switches.


1) Potter Electric, Model VSR-F.

2) System Sensor, Model OSY2 or PIBV2.


E. Nameplates.

1. Furnish NFPA 13 approved nameplates for hydraulically designed systems, indi-cating system designation, area served, and design characteristics.

2. Acceptable product.

a. Seton, Style SPH.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Inspector's Test Connections.

1. Includes test pipe and valved connection of not less than 1 inch diameter, termi-nating in smooth bore, brass outlet, and discharging as indicated.

G. Sprinkler Heads.

1. Furnish and install sprinkler heads and piping required to make job complete in areas defined in Specification and as designated on drawings.

2. Contract shall be all inclusive and based upon furnishing and installing everything necessary and required for satisfactory and approved installation of fire protection systems, and shall conform with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Furnished concealed head sprinklers in finished areas

4. Exposed construction sprinklers.

a. Extra large orifice type with standard bronze finish.

5. Furnish sprinklers in area indicated, with following temperature rating.

a. Exposed construction area, 286 degrees F.

b. Office areas and toilet rooms, 165 degrees F,

6. Furnish and install as directed by Owner's representative, steel sprinkler emer-gency cabinets, each containing 12 automatic sprinklers and appropriate wrench-es.

7. Stock of extra sprinklers shall include proportionate quantities of types and tem-perature ratings installed.

8. Total number of spare sprinklers shall not be less than 3 percent of total number installed.


a. ASCOA Fire Systems.

b. Gem.

c. Reliable.







d. Victaulic.

e. Viking.


H. Pipe Hangers and Supports.

1. Furnish pipe supports and hangers in accordance with requirements specified in Section 22 0529 and as detailed on drawings.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings.

1. Except as otherwise specified, furnish pipe and fittings for fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA 13.

2. Grooved fittings: ASTM A47 malleable iron, pressure rated to match coupling.

3. Grooved flanges: ASTM A536 ductile iron, rated at 175 pounds.

4. Grooved couplings: ASTM A47 malleable iron or ASTM A536 ductile iron with ASTM D2000 EPDM slip-on rubber gaskets, coupling bolts and nuts, and rated for not less than 300 pounds.

5. Snap lock or plain end type couplings are prohibited.

6. Install rigid couplings for vertical pipe risers.


a. Anvil, Gruvlok Figs. 7000 or 7001.

b. Victaulic, Styles 75 or 77.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Water Pressure During Construction.

1. To maintain pressure, temporarily blank off open ends of sprinkler lines or mains from fire protection risers, as installation progresses.

2. Keep systems not subject to freezing in service during installation shutdown peri-ods.

B. Pipe Systems.

1. Install piping and appurtenances in accordance with applicable provisions of NFPA 13, ASME B31.1, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Pitch pipe to drain at riser.

3. Avoid low or trapped points.

4. Install discharge drains at each sprinkler riser and where sprinklers are trapped.

5. Install flanged connections at base of risers, at alarm check valves or dry pipe valves, at fittings where feed mains or cross mains to each floor leave riser or supply main, at feed end of long runs of pipe, and at control valves.

6. Segmentally welded steel fittings or welded mitered joints will not be accepted.

7. Where branch is one or more sizes smaller than run, make welded branch con-nections with standard weight connectors.








1) Weld-o-lets by Bonney Forge and Tool Works.

2) Thread-o-lets by Wheeling Machine Products.

3) Branchlets by Allied Piping Products.


8. Where grooved joints are acceptable, install only those grooved couplings and fit-tings specified.

9. Substitution of other model, style, size, or rating of couplings, flanges, or fittings is prohibited.

C. Alarm and Supervisory Devices.

1. Install and adjust electric water flow alarms to prevent false alarm due to pressure surges within closed sprinkler pipes.

2. Install alarm bells where indicated.

3. Install alarm and supervisory devices ready for wiring.

4. Wiring not included.

5. Locate inspector's test connections at accessible point not over 7 feet above floor.

6. In areas of exposed construction, install automatic sprinklers below ductwork and other obstructions, sized over 48 inches in width, in accordance with NFPA 13.

7. After finish painting, install reflective paint numerals or letters, identifying each au-tomatic sprinkler riser, as directed by Owner.

8. Install nameplates on hydraulically designed systems.

9. Install nameplates on automatic sprinkler risers for hydraulically designed sys-tems.

D. Pipe Hanger and Support.

1. Install hangers and supports as specified in Section 21 1008 and as detailed on drawings.

2. Space hangers in accordance with NFPA 13.

3. Secure supports, for piping under exposed concrete construction, to concrete work with concrete inserts.

4. Locate inserts on the forms before concrete is poured or use hard cased expan-sion shields.

5. Wooden, lead, or plastic plugs used for fastening, are prohibited.


A. Test and Acceptance.

1. Test fire protection system in accordance with applicable requirements specified in Section 21 0600 and as specified in this Section.

2. Upon completion of work, notify proper insurance authorities and Owner's repre-sentative.

3. Arrange to have authorized inspector in attendance when final job inspections and tests are conducted.

4. All parts of completed sprinkler networks shall be hydrostatically pressure tested at 200 pounds per square inch for minimum 2 hour period.

5. Furnish certificate giving results of each test.

6. Test, flush, and repair aboveground piping in walls, slabs, or sleeves, in presence of insurance authority specified, before concealing.







7. Purge automatic sprinkler systems of trapped air by operating inspector's test connection.

8. Test and actuate electric water flow alarm devices for alarm sensitivity and per-formance.

END OF SECTION





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION 21 1008 - 1


SECTION 21 1008 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE

PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. AISC (COMM) - Commentary on the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design ; 1989.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel ; 2008.

C. ASTM A575 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades ; 1996 (Reapproved 2007).

D. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel ; 2008.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. For Review.

1. Shop drawings.

a. Pipe hanger and support installation details, including details and locations of seismic or sway bracing, pipe anchors, and anchor bracing.

b. Include dimensioned location and method of attachment to building structure.

c. Where pipe hangers cannot be hung from building structure, submit proposed method of installing additional structural steel that connects to building struc-ture.


A. Qualifications.

1. Supplemental steel welding procedures, in accordance with section, Qualification, of AWS D1.1.

2. Only welders who have successfully passed examination for this class of work shall be employed to execute structural strength welds.

3. Examination shall have been within past six months, unless welder has been making this type of weld after passing test within two years, as specified under qualification procedures of AWS D1.1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Adjustable Swivel Ring Hangers.

1. Heavy steel construction with swivel nut and locknut.


a. B-Line, Fig. B3170.

b. Carpenter and Paterson, Fig. 800.







c. Anvil International Inc., Fig. 69.


B. Clevis Hangers.

1. Heavy steel with adjustable nut and locknut.

2. Include spreaders on cross bolts of hangers for pipe sized 10 inches and larger.






C. V-Clevis Hangers.




b. Carpenter and Paterson, Fig. 200VT.


D. Trapeze Hangers.

1. Two-structural channels, back to back, with spacers welded at least on each end, at top and bottom of channels.

2. Size channels with consideration to total weight to be supported, overall span be-tween hanger rods, and so as not to deflect more than 1/240 of span (5/16 inch in 6 feet 3 inches).

3. Assume piping to be supported is full of water.

4. Submit detailed drawings for Owner's Field Representative review.

E. Beam Clamps for Pipe 2 Inches and Smaller.

1. Side type.


1) B-Line: Fig. B3045.

2) Carpenter and Paterson: Fig. 18.

3) Anvil International Inc.: Fig. 217.


2. Side I type.





3. Adjustable type.






F. I-Beam Clamps.

1. For pipe sized 2-1/2 through 12 inches, with swing nuts.










3) Anvil International Inc.: Fig. 133 and 134.


G. Hanger Rods.

1. Threaded, hot rolled, steel rod conforming to ASTM A36 or A575.

2. Hanger rod may be continuously threaded.

3. Use of rod couplings is prohibited.

H. Hanger Rod Anchors.

1. Secure supports for piping under exposed concrete construction, to concrete work with concrete inserts.


a. Hilti: Kwik Bolt TZ.

b. Powers Fasteners: Power-Stud and SD2.

c. Simpson Strong Tie-Strong Bolts.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 2500 - Substitutions.

3. Wooden, lead, or plastic plugs used for fastening are prohibited.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Pipe Hanger and Supporting Materials.

1. Represent minimum requirements for mechanical work in general.

2. Furnish hanger and supporting materials meeting seismic requirements of local codes and governing authorities. See Section 01 4100 - Regulatory Require-ments - Seismic Control.

3. Furnish Factory Mutual approved or Underwriters Laboratories listed Hanger and supporting materials for Fire Protection work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install hanger and supporting materials in accordance with specified requirements, and in accordance with seismic requirements dictated by local codes and governing au-thorities.

1. Submit typical details and locations for review.

B. C-clamps without retainer clips and heat-treated spring steel clips that bite into building steel are prohibited as means of fastening pipe hangers to building structure.

C. Clamps that result in eccentric loads (twisting moments) on structural members of building, except for piping sized 2 inches and smaller, are also prohibited.

D. Support piping from building structural frame, not from roof deck, permanent metal forms for concrete floors, concrete slabs (unless indicated otherwise), or from other pipe, duct, or equipment.

E. Contractor's attention is directed to drawing details and building structural framing lay-out that may require hanger spacing more frequently than spacings shown in table be-low.







1. Loading at any support point shall not exceed 1000 pounds, unless specifically in-dicated otherwise.

Screwed or welded steel pipe (liquid or vapor)

Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Minimum Rod Size 1/2 to 1 inch 8 feet 3/8 inch 1-1/4 through 2 inches 10 feet 3/8 inch 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches 12 feet 1/2 inch 4 and 5 inches 12 feet 5/8 inch 6 inches 12 feet 3/4 inch 8 and 10 inches 12 feet 7/8 inch

Grooved end steel pipe (liquid or vapor)

Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Minimum Rod Size 1/2 to 1 inch 8 feet 3/8 inch 1-1/4 through 2 inches 10 feet 3/8 inch 2-1/2 to 3 inches 12 feet 1/2 inch 4 inches 12 feet 5/8 inch 6 inches 12 feet 3/4 inch 8 and 10 inches 12 feet 7/8 inch

F. Fire Protection Piping.

1. Smaller than 4 inches: Install adjustable swivel ring type or clevis type hangers.

2. 4 inches and larger: Clevis type hangers.

G. Pipes Supported Individually From Structural Steel.

1. Support horizontal pipes running perpendicular to steel joists or trusses, building roof purlins or floor beams (not T's) by means of beam clamps.

2. Beam clamps for supporting pipe sized 2 inches and smaller, hung from steel joists or trusses, purlins or floor beams, (not T's) may be one of following.

a. Side beam clamp.

b. Side I-beam clamp.

c. Adjustable beam clamp.

3. Support horizontal pipes running parallel to steel joists or trusses, purlins or floor beams (not T's) as specified above for piping running perpendicular, except where vertical truss member precludes hanging from purlin in concentric manner. Under these circumstances, piping shall be supported as specified for trapeze supports.

H. Trapeze Supports.

1. Trapeze supports may be used to support one or more pipes grouped together and hung from building steel as detailed on drawings.

2. Select beam clamp size and corresponding rod size for given trapeze support so as not to exceed loads scheduled on drawings.

3. As option to hanging piping from trapeze support using hanger devices specified, trapeze support below piping may be used as means of support.







4. When this option is used, pipe shall be secured to trapeze support with standard U-bolts and locknuts.

I. Vertical Pipe Supports.

1. Support vertical runs of pipe not subject to appreciable expansion with wrought steel clamps securely clamped to risers.

2. Support and laterally brace at each floor level, but at intervals not to exceed 16 feet.

J. Where necessary for proper system functioning, brace piping and supports against re-action sway and vibration.

K. For concentrated loads, such as valves, reduce allowable span proportionately.

L. Vertical risers shall be supported independently of connected horizontal piping when-ever practical, with fixed supports at base and at intervals to accommodate system range of load and thermal conditions, and shall be guided for lateral stability.

1. Only one rigid support shall be installed for risers subjected to expansion at ap-proximately 1/3 point from top, unless otherwise indicated.

M. After piping systems have been installed, tested, and placed in satisfactory operation, firmly tighten hanger rod nut and jam nut and upset threads to prevent movement of fasteners.

N. Welding to Building Structure.

1. Welding to building structure is not allowed, unless otherwise specified or specifi-cally accepted by Owner's Field Representative



b. Allowable stresses in field applied welds using E70 Series and A36 steel.

1) Tension or compression: Same as base metal.


O. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, or other foreign material.

P. Before welding, painted surfaces shall have paint removed to expose clean steel sur-face.

1. Special attention is called to requirement that maximum size of fillet weld that may be assumed in design of connection shall ensure that stresses in adjacent base material do not exceed allowable value for this material.

Q. No welds transmitting calculated stress shall be less than 3 inches in length, and no in-termittent welds shall be less than 2 inches in length.

R. No welds shall be applied to flanges of tension members perpendicular to direction of stress.

S. Turn side and end fillet welds around corners for minimum length of twice nominal size of weld.

T. Length of end returns is not to be included in calculated weld length.

U. No welding or other operation involving use of flame, arcs, or sparking devices will be allowed without written permission of Owner's Field Representative.







V. Welds found to be in nonconformance to requirements of AWS D1.1 shall be repaired or replaced according to workmanship section of AWS D1.1 at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION





COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0513 - 1


SECTION 22 0513 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. ASTM C109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars; 2005.

B. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes; 2005.

C. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes ; 2001.

D. ASTM C827 - Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementi-tious Mixtures; 2001a (Reapproved 2005).

E. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) MG 1 - Motors and Generators ; 2003.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) ; 2008.

H. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act, latest edition.


A. Coordinate installation of plumbing, piping, fire protection and ductwork including as-sociated support systems with existing systems and supports and other building trades, equipment, and systems, so as to avoid interferences between individual trades and between trades and building construction.

B. Design of fire protection, plumbing, mechanical and electrical systems in ceiling space and truss space has been coordinated to avoid interferences between major compo-nents of each system.

1. Final coordination of components shall be performed by installation contractors.

2. Vontract documents include suggested ceiling space and truss space zoning con-cepts to assist contractors in final coordination.

C. Prepare plumbing installation drawings for purpose of coordination with other trades. Sheet metal contractor shall be responsible for collecting installation documentation from mechanical, electrical, and information technology (IT) trades and create coordi-nation drawings.

D. General Contractor shall distribute final coordination drawings to all contractors.

1. General Contractor shall schedule periodic coordination meetings to resolve inter-ferences.

2. Upon mutual agreement to the overall coordination by all contractors involved, contractors shall revise their installation drawings to reflect agreed upon location of their respective services.







3. Plumbing contractor shall revise coordination drawings after interferences have been resolved.

4. Fabrication and installation of plumbing shall not commence until coordination drawings have been finalized.

E. Plumbing that is not installed according to final coordination drawings shall be correct-ed at Contractor’s expense.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 3300 – Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures

B. For Information.

1. Certificates.

a. Motors for motor operated equipment.

C. For Closeout.


a. Power and control circuits of assembly, including ladder type elementary schematic diagrams, and interconnection wiring diagrams, having numbered terminal and wire numbers corresponding to designations on terminal strips and control components.

b. Complete electrical sequence of operation corresponding to control diagrams.

2. Operation and Maintenance Data.

a. Equipment operation and maintenance instructions, each set separately bound in a hard cover, 3-ring binder containing same type paper sheets for all items, and consisting of the following sections.

1) Description of system.

2) Installation and operating instructions.

3) Maintenance requirements for equipment.

4) Controls and adjustments.

5) Parts lists.

6) System electrical wiring diagrams.

b. Obtain information from manufacturers of major equipment and control sys-tems on firms that are factory authorized for maintenance and repair services.

c. List containing following information.

1) Type of equipment or system.

2) Name, address, and telephone number of authorized service organiza-tion, including phone number designated for receiving service calls dur-ing nonbusiness hours.

3) Names of personnel responsible for receiving or responding to requests for service calls.


A. Use vendors and equipment manufacturers capable of furnishing local support.

B. Materials and equipment shall be purchased for this project with manufacturer's full warranty, and certified as specified manufacturer's products. Unacceptable are surplus







materials from other projects, obsolete or discontinued products, and products rebuilt, remanufactured, or altered in materials, markings, labels, or nameplates.

C. Furnish equipment that is listed and labeled.

1. Listed and Labeled as defined in NEC Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications, a Nationally Recognized Testing La-boratory (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. While Owner's Field Representative's drawings and Specifications propose to be com-plete in all respects as to layout, type of equipment, and materials, drawings and Spec-ifications are not intended to serve as detailed system or equipment location drawings.

E. Prepare detailed piping, sleeve, or insert installation drawings, and equipment location drawings.

F. Submit detailed pipe and equipment supports indicating location of miscellaneous steel and building steel connections.

G. System drawings shall locate each system in relation to other systems, to electrical work, and to building structure.

H. Mark drawings to identify function of each item, location, and proposed system where item is to be installed.

I. Include Contract drawing on which item is shown and page in Specifications where item is described.

J. If code designation letters are used to identify the specific design of submitted equip-ment and components, and if code designations are not clearly defined in manufactur-er's published literature, submit glossary identifying in complete detail the meaning of code designations used.

K. Factory furnished equipment and controllers shall be designed to prevent power line disturbances, such as spikes, harmonics, and other irregularities in sine wave configu-ration of fundamental.

L. Furnish filters or other devices that limit back feeding of disturbances into power sup-ply system and limiting harmonics content to not more than 3 percent of fundamental.

M. Voltage spikes shall not exceed 150 percent of peak system voltage.

N. If equipment is found to destabilize building power supply, furnish, install, and inter-wire, at no change in Contract price, manufacturer accepted devices and circuits to re-store power system stability.


A. Deliver.

1. To site in original unopened containers and pallets bearing manufacturer's name and brand.

2. Affix labels to products, pallets, and containers.

3. Delivered products and containers without complete labels may be rejected.

B. Store.

1. On level, aboveground platforms.

2. Keep containers dry and free from dust and other airborne contaminants.

3. Protect stored absorptive material from moisture damage.







4. Promptly remove adhesives and adhesive tapes from material and equipment sur-faces, where prolonged contact could damage surfaces.

C. Piping Systems.

1. Cover threaded pipe, fitting, and valve ends with thread protectors.

2. Support stored pipe to prevent permanent deformation from ovalizing, crushing, or sagging.

3. Protect machined surfaces from nicks, dents, scratches, and abrasions, and pro-tect valve yokes, stems, handwheels, operators, and linkage from undue stresses.

4. Protect piping from dust and moisture.

D. Equipment.

1. Deliver in cartons, crates, or on sleepers.

2. Hoist, transport, rig, and store equipment to prevent damage.

3. Seal openings to prevent entry of dust, dirt, water, and other contaminants.

4. Store boxed equipment on shelves.

5. Crated equipment and equipment mounted on sleepers may be stored on ground, if no part of equipment comes in contact with ground or with water.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Electrical System Characteristics.

1. Electrical supply.

a. Power: 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, and 120 volts, single phase, 60 hertz.

b. Control: 120 volts and lower, single phase, 60 hertz, and 24 volt direct cur-rent.

2. Furnish and install for package, self-contained equipment.

a. Electrical components.

1) Factory mounted.

2) Factory piped.

3) Factory wired.

(a) Wiring mounted on external surfaces of equipment factory installed within conduit.

4) Totally interconnected.

b. Load side power connections.

c. Mechanical and electrical controls.


A. Motors.

1. Motor characteristics.

a. Ball bearing type.







b. Rating equal to or greater than brake horsepower of connected load.

c. Service factor: 115 percent of nameplate rating when operated in 40 degrees C ambient.

d. Deliver rated load continuously from 10 percent below to 10 percent above rated voltage without decrease in expected motor life.

e. Supply standard fractional size, single phase motors with resilient base mounting.

f. Open, dripproof motors for.

1) General application within the building.

2) Enclosed applications within unit housing (not in airstream).

g. Totally enclosed fan-cooled motors.

1) For outdoor installation where exposed to weather.

2) Where located within the air stream of supply or exhaust fans.

h. Motors Used With Variable Speed Drives.

1) Coordinate with variable speed drive manufacturer.

2) Class F or Class H insulation and Class B minimum temperature rise.

3) Sized to reflect extra duty required by high harmonic content of variable speed drive output waveform.

4) Shaft voltage.

(a) Verify compatibility with drive by measuring shaft voltage upon commissioning and start-up.

(b) Furnish shaft grounding system installed on each motor.

2. Motors rated.

a. 1/4 horsepower and larger: 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz.

b. Under 1/4 horsepower: 115 volt, single phase, 60 hertz.

3. T-frame, integral horsepower motors rated 200 hp and less.

a. Severe-duty, high-efficiency design.

1) When tested in accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, rated in ac-cordance with NEMA, MG1-12.53A.

2) Show nominal efficiency on motor nameplates.

3) Nominal efficiencies defined by NEMA, MG1-12.53B and following table.

T-Frame Motors

Nameplate Horsepower

Nominal Efficiency


Nominal Efficiency

1/8 - 15 92.4 1/6 - 20 93 1/4 - 25 93.6 1/3 - 30 93.6 1/2 - 40 94.1 3/4 - 50 94.5 1 85.5 60 95 1-1/2 86.5 75 95.4 2 86.5 100 95.4 3 89.5 125 95.4 5 89.5 150 95.8 7-1/2 91.7 200 96.2







10 91.7 300 96.2


a. A.O. Smith Century.

b. Baldor.

c. General Electric Co.

d. Howell Electric Motors.

e. Lincoln.

f. Reliance Electric.

g. Siemens.

h. Toshiba.

i. U.S. Electrical Motors.

j. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Housekeeping Pads.

1. Furnish and install anchor plates, foundation bolts, nuts, and washers for setting of equipment.

2. Construct of 2500 psi concrete mixture, shaped to accommodate equipment it supports, with smooth top surface and 1 inch beveled edges, sized not less than 4 inches above floor level and 2 inches beyond perimeter of supported equipment or equipment bedplate.

3. Furnish anchor plates, bolts, nuts, washers, and bolt inserts required for secure mounting of equipment.

4. Locate anchor bolt inserts in pouring forms prior to pouring concrete foundations and concrete housekeeping pads.

5. Maintain inserts in position and in proper alignment during pouring and setting of concrete.

6. Anchor bolts shall be screwed into inserts prior to concrete pour in order to main-tain insert bolt holes free of concrete.

7. Wood, fiber, or lead insert plugs are prohibited.

B. Grouting.

1. Furnish and install grout for setting of equipment bases, rails and bedplates, and pipe supports located on building floors, concrete slabs, foundations, inertia blocks, and housekeeping pads.

2. Cementitious grout.

a. Consist of premixed, prepackaged materials supplied by manufacturer, re-quiring only the addition of potable water.

b. Performance criteria (high-flow epoxy grout).

1) Zero shrinkage when tested in accordance with ASTM C827.

2) Effective bearing area not less than 95 percent in hardened state, when measured in accordance with ASTM C827.

3) Compressive strength of not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109.

4) Containing no metallic particles, aluminum powder, or expansive cement.








1) L and M Construction Chemicals, Crystex.

2) Master Builders, Masterflow 928 and 713.

3) U.S. Grout, Five Star Grout.

4) Dayton Superior, Sure-Grip High Performance Grout.


3. Epoxy-based grout.

a. Pourable, 100 percent solids epoxy system consisting of 3 premeasured, prepackaged components.

b. Performance criteria (regular epoxy grout).

1) Suitable for installation in annular spaces of 2 inches and greater.



4) Compressive strength measured in accordance with ASTM C579, Meth-od B.

(a) Not less than 5000 psi at 24 hours.

(b) Not less than 10,000 psi at 7 days.

5) Maximum thermal coefficient of expansion, 0.00003 inch per inch per degree F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531.

c. Acceptable products (regular epoxy grout).

1) Dayton Superior, Sure-Grip Epoxy Grout.

2) L and M Construction Chemicals, Epo Grout.

3) Master Builders Technologies, Brutem 19 Grout.

4) Philadelphia Resins, Chockfast Orange Grout.

5) U.S. Grout, Five Star Epoxy Grout.


4. High-flow epoxy grout

a. Performance criteria (high flow epoxy grout).

1) Suitable for installation in annular spaces of less than 2 inches.






5) Maximum thermal coefficient of expansion, 0.00003 inch per inch per degree F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C531.

b. Acceptable products (high flow epoxy grout).

1) Master Builders Technologies, 650 High Flow and Brutem 19-HF.

2) Philadelphia Resins, Chockfast Gray Grout.

3) U.S. Grout, Five Star Speed Epoxy Chock.








PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Disposal of Removed Materials and Equipment.

1. Take possession of and remove from Owner's premises, materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not reinstalled.

2. Clean, protect from damage, and deliver to Owner, materials and equipment indi-cated to be removed and not reinstalled.

B. Painting.

1. Include Section 09 9100 for painting plumbing work.

2. Equipment shall be either factory prime coated or factory finish painted.

3. Perform touch up where factory prime coat or factory finish have been scratched, abraded, dulled, or otherwise damaged or rendered unsightly.

4. Touch up shall restore original finish as to color, texture, and gloss, and shall be indistinguishable from original finish.

C. Openings in Building Structure.

1. For new piping, tubing, and conduit openings in existing concrete.

a. Locate reinforcing bars prior to coring hole by x-ray or other approved means.

b. Do not cut reinforcing bars.

c. Furnish and install pipe sleeves and caulk sleeves in position.

d. Cut piping, tubing, and conduit openings in existing masonry by coring or with drill points and chisels.

2. For piping, tubing, and conduit openings in new concrete.

a. Furnish and install sleeves in concrete formwork and maintain their position during pouring and setting of concrete.

b. Where concrete floors incorporate permanent metal forms, cut forms and in-stall sleeves to penetrate metal forms.

3. For piping, tubing, and conduit openings in new masonry.

a. Furnish sleeves to jobsite, for installation in other Sections.

b. Coordinate location of sleeves with masonry work.

D. Cut Openings for Piping.

1. In smoke baffles, draft curtains, or vertical metal deck closures neat and straight, without dents or jagged edges.

2. Opening sizes shall not be larger than piping passing through them.

3. Close unused openings with metal siding or sheet metal, securely fastened to baf-fle faces.

E. Patch existing floor slabs removed under this Contract.

F. Work on Existing Ceilings.

1. Existing suspended ceilings removed and replaced under another Contract.

2. Remove, protect from damage or soiling, and store components of existing sus-pended ceilings that interfere with work in existing ceiling spaces.

3. After completion of work inside of ceiling spaces, restore removed ceilings to orig-inal condition.

4. Furnish and install new ceilings and suspension systems, where existing ceilings are damaged or marred.







5. Perform work to minimize damage and to leave ceilings in best possible condition.

6. Work shall be done by experienced personnel regularly employed as installers by manufacturers of suspended ceiling systems.

7. Existing suspended ceilings will be specified to be removed and replaced under other Divisions of these Specifications.

G. Systems and Equipment.

1. Where Contract requires work to exceed standards required by applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or other statutory provisions, perform and complete work in accordance with Contract requirements.

2. Install systems and equipment in accordance with Shop Drawings reviewed by Owner's Field Representative.

3. Coordinate installation of piping, ductwork, and mechanical equipment with work of other Sections to avoid interferences.

4. To minimize interference with Owner's operations, consult with Owner's Repre-sentative as to methods of carrying on work.

5. Resolve interferences with other work.

6. Avoid system intrusion into occupied space, unsightliness, and clutter.

7. Maintain clearances for installation, operation, expected motion, actuation, servic-ing, removal, and reinstallation of system components and equipment.

8. Arrange piping systems for uniform specified pitch, for complete drainability, and for ready ventability.

H. Grouting of Equipment Bases, Rails and Bedplates, and Pipe Supports.

1. Perform grouting in accordance with requirements of grout manufacturer.

2. Cure concrete surfaces for minimum of 14 days prior to placing grout.

3. Clean and roughen surfaces to ensure bond of grout to concrete.

4. Clean anchor sleeves of debris and moisture.

5. Furnish and install forms, including chamfer edge strips around perimeter of equipment prior to placing grout.

6. After equipment has been set in place, leveled, shimmed, and anchored, grout anchor bolt sleeves and allow to set 24 hours before completing grouting of equipment base.

7. Apply grouting to base to ensure support for entire contact area of base.

8. Work grout with push rods or link chains until air pockets are eliminated.

9. After grout has acquired initial set, remove shim plates and jacking bolts and fill voids with grout.

10. After grout has cured, remove forms and trim grout to ensure smooth finish.

11. Tighten anchor bolts prior to start of equipment and retighten following initial equipment operation.


A. General.

1. Upon completion of work, prior to testing, conduct final inspection and ensure fix-tures, equipment, and piping have been cleaned and placed in complete and sat-isfactory working order.

B. Equipment.







1. Furnish manufacturer's factory authorized service for adjustments and start-up, where required for preservation of guarantees.

2. Do not jog or start equipment until completion of factory authorized service.

3. Clean and degrease equipment.

4. Check nameplates for readability.

a. Remove paint smears.

b. Where nameplates are illegible, arrange for replacement by equipment manu-facturer.

5. Motor driven equipment.

a. Start equipment and make sure thermal overload protection will not shut down motor during acceleration period.

b. Check motors for direction of rotation.

c. Obtain assistance where required to reverse motor rotation.

d. Check identification, instruction, and warning labels.

e. Prepare lubrication schedule and deliver this schedule to Owner.

f. Schedule for each piece of equipment to include.

1) Locations for lubricant application.

2) Type of lubricant.

3) Lubricating device.

4) Quantity of lubricant to be dispensed during each application.

5) Frequency of lubrication.

g. Check for factory applied lubrication and add lubricant where required.

h. In particular, make sure extended lubricating lines are completely filled.

i. Check bearing seals.

1) Replace blown seals with seals complying with Contract criteria.

2) Check associated bearings for foreign matter and damage.

3) Flush and relubricate, or furnish and install seals complying with Contract criteria.

j. Turn equipment shafts by hand to check for binding or rough bearing action.

1) Investigate causes of binding and rough bearing action.

2) Repair, adjust, or furnish and install components complying with Contract criteria to achieve proper operation.

3) In particular, furnish and install roller and ball bearings complying with Contract criteria if bearings exhibit evidence of race pitting, brinelling, rust, or discoloration.

k. Check rotating equipment for smooth operation.

l. Rebalance or replace rough running equipment.

m. Confirm shaft voltages are 3 volts or less to ground for motors used with vari-able speed drives.

6. Flush out corrosion inhibiting compounds, where applied by manufacturer to pre-vent deterioration in transit and storage.







7. Witness and certify Acceptance Document for each piece of equipment and each system.

END OF SECTION





IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553 - 1


SECTION 22 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. ANSI A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. For information.

1. Product data.

a. Pipe markers.

b. Equipment identification labels.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Pipe Markers.




2) For piping exposed in the Ballroom, Atrium and Prefunction Ceiling refer to architectural Room Finish Schedules for specific direction on painting and labeling



d. Underground metallic piping.

e. Underground nonmetallic piping.




A. Plumbing Identification (Piping).














g. Acceptable manufacturers.




4) Seton, Setmark.












B. Equipment Identification and Duplicate Motor Nameplate Data.

1. Laminated white plastic nameplates with black engraved letters.


a. W.H. Brady.

b. Craftmark Identification Systems.

c. Marking Services, Inc.

d. Seton.

e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Plumbing Identification (Piping).






















B. Mechanical Equipment.

1. Label in accordance with Owner's requirements.

2. When electric motor location renders nameplate data inaccessible, install dupli-cate motor nameplate data in easily accessible location on equipment.






END OF SECTION





BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 0600 - 1


SECTION 22 0600 – BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND

METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 22 0513 - Common Work Results for Plumbing.

B. Section 22 0523 - Valves for Plumbing Systems.

C. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

D. Section 22 0720 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.

E. Section 22 1008 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

F. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment.

G. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures

H. Division 26, Electrical.

I. Section 31 0000 - Earthwork for Buildings.


A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ; 2005.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ; 1998 (R2006).

C. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ; 2001 (R2005).

D. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes ; 2006.

E. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ; 1999 (Reapproved 2004).

F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ; 2007.

G. ASTM A105/A105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Ap-plications ; 2005.

H. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ; 2004.

I. ASTM A135/A135M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe ; 2006.

J. ASTM A181/A181M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General-Purpose Piping ; 2006.

K. ASTM A197/A197M - Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron ; 2000 (Reap-proved 2006).

L. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service ; 2007.







M. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ; 1984 (Reapproved 2004).

N. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal ; 2004.

O. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) ; 2002.

P. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ; 2003a.

Q. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ; 2006.

R. ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Ap-plications ; 2008.

S. ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting ; 2005.

T. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ; 2008.

U. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ; 2006.

V. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 ; 2004.

W. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plas-tic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ; 2006.

X. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 ; 2002.

Y. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ; 2004.

Z. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications ; 2005.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 – Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. For Review.

1. Shop drawings.

a. Electric heat tracing.

C. For Information.

1. Product data.


2. Manufacturer’s instructions.


D. For Closeout.


a. Piping systems tests.

b. Underground piping system.

1) Establish and record locations and grades of underground piping sys-tems in accordance with drawings.







2) Indicate, by dimensions, work installed and actual locations of branches and bends.

3) Keep field notes, in orderly manner, ready for inspection by Owner's Field Representative.

4) Before trenches are backfilled, record location and elevations of utilities inaccessible upon completion of job.

5) Record location, elevations, and sizes of pipe after installation.

6) Make layouts to same scale as corresponding Contract drawings with larger scale details for clarity.

7) Give dimensions to site grid lines.


A. Qualifications.


2. For supplemental steel welding procedures.

a. In accordance with section, Qualification, of AWS D1.1.

b. Only welders who have successfully passed examination for this class of work shall be employed to execute structural strength welds.

c. Examination shall have been within past 6 months, unless welder has been making this type of weld after passing test within 2 years, as specified under qualification procedures of AWS D1.1.

B. All casings used for fittings, coupling housings, and valve bodies shall be date stamped for Quailty Assurance and traceability.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Plumbing materials and components shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

B. Concrete.

1. Compressive strength at 28 days: 3500 psi.

2. Minimum cement content: 550 pounds per cubic yard.

3. Maximum water/cement ratio: 0.50.

4. Maximum slump: 4 inches.

5. Minimum Modulus of Rupture at 28 days: 525 psi.

6. Air-entrained with air content of 7 percent, plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.

7. Proportioning and average required strength for mix design, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.

8. Aggregates, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.







C. Underground Corrosion Protection Materials.

1. Millwrap materials.

a. Coal tar pipeline primer.

b. Plasticized pipeline enamel.

c. Fiberglass wrapper, 0.015 inch thick.

d. Perforated organic or fiberglass felt wrapper, 15 pound, coal tar saturated.

e. Kraft paper wrapper, 50 to 60 pound.

2. Tape wrap.

a. Pressure sensitive, adhesive backed, polyvinyl chloride, or polyethylene tape, 0.020 inch thick.

b. Acceptable products.

1) Denso Products: Denso Tape.

2) Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing: Scotchwrap.

3) Polyken Division of the Kendall Co.: Tapewrap.


3. Hot tape wrap.

a. Woven synthetic fabric impregnated with bitumen.

b. Acceptable product.

1) Tapecoat Company: Tapecoat.


4. Pipe sheath.

a. Polyethylene and mastic sheath, in accordance with ASTM D2103.


1) Energy Coating: X-Tru-Coat.

2) Raychem: Chemelex.


5. Pipe joint sheath.

a. Heat shrunk, 1-piece, thick wall, polyethylene sleeve with inside adhesive coating.


1) Raychem: Thermofit TPS.


D. Type CISP-NH, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, No Hub.

1. Pipe and fittings: ASTM A888 and CISPI 301, cast iron soil pipe, no hub joints.

a. Marked with collective trademark of Cast Iron Pipe Institute.

2. Joints: CISPI 310 no hub with neoprene, 1-piece, sleeve type gaskets and stain-less steel shield and bands.

E. Type CISP-HS, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Hub and Spigot.

1. Pipe and fittings: ASTM A74 and CISPI 301, cast iron soil pipe, hub and spigot, service weight.

a. Marked with collective trademark of Cast Iron Pipe Institute.

2. Joints, oakum and lead packed, or ASTM C564, preformed neoprene, 1-piece, compression type.

F. Type PVC, Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Schedule.

1. Pipe: Schedules 40 and 80, ASTM D1785, polyvinyl chloride.

2. Fittings: Schedule 40, ASTM D2466, socket or threaded, polyvinyl chloride.







3. Solvent cement: ASTM D2564, manufacturer's standard.


a. Genova.

b. Nibco/Chemtrol.

c. George Fischer Sloane, Inc.

d. Spears Manufacturing Company.


G. Type CPVC, Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM F441.

2. Fittings.

a. Schedule 80, screwed or socket-type, ASTM F437 or ASTM F439.

b. Schedule 40, socket-type, ASTM F438.

3. Solvent cement and primer: Manufacturer's standard, ASTM F493.


a. Nibco/Chemtrol.

b. George Fischer Sloane, Inc.

c. Spears Manufacturing Company.


H. Type PVC-DWV, Polyvinyl Chloride Drainage Pipe.

1. Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM D1785 or ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride.

2. Fittings: Schedule 40, ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride drainage pattern.

3. Solvent cement, ASTM D2564, manufacturer's standard.


a. Genova.

b. Nibco/Chemtrol.

c. George Fischer Sloane, Inc.

d. Spears Manufacturing Company.


I. Type GS-DWV, Galvanized Steel Drainage Pipe.

1. Pipe: Standard weight, ASTM A53, galvanized steel.

2. Fittings: ASTM A126, cast iron, recessed drainage, screwed.

3. Grooved Fittings: Standard weight, ASTM A47, galvanized malleable iron or ASTM A536, galvanized ductile iron.

4. Grooved Couplings: ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron, with slip-on rubber gasket and coupling bolts with nuts.

a. Lightweight, snap lock, side outlet or plain end type couplings, and mechani-cal tees are prohibited.

b. Couplings that require drilling of holes into pipe are prohibited.

5. Grooved Fittings: Standard weight, ASTM A47, galvanized malleable iron.

6. Grooved couplings.

a. Standard weight.

b. ASTM A47, malleable iron with slip-on rubber gasket and coupling bolts with nuts.

c. Lightweight, snap lock, side outlet or plain end type couplings, and mechani-cal tees are prohibited.

d. Couplings that require drilling of holes into pipe are prohibited.









1) Anvil International, Inc.: Gruvlok Fig. 7401 or 7004 HPR.

2) Victaulic: Style 77 or ZeroFlex, Style 07, Style 177, or Style 107H.

3) Star Pipe Products: C-4 Rigid Coupling, C-1 or C-7 Flexible Couplings.


J. Type GS-1, Galvanized Steel Pipe.

1. Pipe.

a. Through 10 inches: Schedule 40, ASTM A53, galvanized steel.

2. Fittings: 150 pound, ASTM A 197, galvanized, malleable iron, screwed.

3. Unions through 2 inches: 250 pound, galvanized, malleable iron, screwed, ground joint brass to iron.

4. Couplings through 2 inches: Standard, ASTM A 53, galvanized steel.

5. Flanges: 3 inches and larger, 125 pound, ASTM A126, cast iron.

6. Grooved Fittings: Match pipe, ASTM A47, galvanized malleable iron or ASTM A 536, galvanized ductile iron.

7. Grooved Couplings: ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron, non-deflecting type with ASTM D2000 slip-on rubber gaskets and coupling bolts and nuts.

a. Gaskets for cold water shall be EPDM rubber.

b. Lightweight, snap lock, side outlet or plain end type couplings, and mechani-cal tees are prohibited.

c. Couplings that require drilling of holes into pipe are prohibited.



1) Anvil International, Inc.: Gruvlok Fig. 7401.

2) Victaulic: Zero-Flex, Style 07 and Style 107H.

3) Star Pipe Products: C-4 Rigid Coupling.


K. Type BS-1, Black Steel Pipe.

1. Pipe.

a. 4 inches and smaller: Schedule 40, ASTM A53, black steel.

2. Fittings, Screwed: 125 pound, ASTM A126, cast iron.

3. Fittings, Butt Welded: Standard, ASTM A234, black steel.

4. Screwed Unions: 250 pound, ASTM A197, malleable iron ground joint, brass to iron.

5. Screwed Couplings: Extra heavy, ASTM A53, black steel with tapered threads.

6. Flanges: 150 pound, ASTM A181, forged steel.

L. Type BS-2, Black Steel Pipe.

1. Pipe.


2. Fittings, Screwed: 150 pound, ASTM A197 and ASME B16.3, malleable iron, banded.

3. Fittings, Socket Weld: 2000 pound, ASTM A105, forged steel.

4. Fittings, Butt Weld: Standard, ASTM A234, black steel.







5. Unions, Screwed: 250 pound, ASTM A197, malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat.

6. Couplings, Screwed: Extra heavy, ASTM A53, black steel with tapered threads.

7. Couplings, Socket Weld: 2000 pound, ASTM A105, forged steel.

8. Flanges, 2-1/2 inches and larger: 150 pound, ASTM A181, forged steel.

9. Grooved Fittings: Match pipe, ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron.

10. Grooved Couplings: ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron, non-deflecting type with ASTM D 2000 slip-on rubber gaskets and coupling bolts and nuts.

a. Lightweight, snap lock, side outlet or plain end type grooved couplings, and mechanical tees are prohibited.




1) Anvil International, Inc.: Gruvlok Fig. 7401 or 7004 HPR.

2) Victaulic: Zero-Flex, Style 07 and 107H or Style 177 and 77.

3) Star Pipe Products: C-4 Rigid Coupling.


M. Type COP-1, Copper Tubing.

1. Tubing: Type L, ASTM B88, copper tubing, hard drawn. Furnish annealed tubing where flared or compression fittings are indicated.

2. Socket Fittings: 150 pound, ASME B16.22, wrought copper.

3. Flared Fittings: ASME B16.26, cast copper alloy.

4. Compression Fittings: Brass.


1) Hoke.

2) Parker-Hannifin.

3) Swagelok.

4) Tylok.


N. Type COP-3, Copper Tubing.

1. Tubing: Type K, ASTM B88, copper tubing, hard drawn. Concealed aboveground tubing may be annealed.

2. Socket fittings: 150 pound, ASME B16.22, wrought copper.

O. Type COP-DWV, Copper Drainage Tubing.

1. Tubing: Type DWV, ASTM B306, copper drainage tube.

2. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper drainage type or ANSI B16.23, cast brass drainage type.


A. Mechanically Attached Fittings.

1. May be used instead of screwed or welded joints on black steel pipe sized 3 inch-es and smaller.

2. Qualified to ASME B31.1 and B31.3 codes, and meeting API 607.







3. Metal to metal seal.

4. Fitting body and swage rings manufactured from hot rolled micro alloyed 15V24 carbon steel conforming to ASTM A675.

5. Corrosion resistant coating.


a. Lokring, MAS-3000 Series.


B. Pressure Gauges.










C. Thermometers.

1. Standard cast aluminum case, with manufacturer's standard finish, and complete with liquid filled tube and 9 inch indicating scale.

2. Scale and stem shall be completely adjustable.

3. Furnish brass thermometer wells for thermometers in services with temperatures less than 350 degrees F. Others to be ANSI Type 18-8 stainless steel.


a. Ashcroft: Every Angle No. 200.

b. Taylor: Multi-Angle No. 30E.

c. Trerice: Adjustable Angle No. BX9.

d. Weiss Instruments: Vari-Angle 9VS.


D. Electric Heat Tracing Systems.

1. Electrical heating cable.

a. Flat, flexible, electrical resistance, heater strips with electrically conductive core material between 2 copper bus strips, flexible, abrasion resistant, and electrically insulating outer sheath and wiring connections with end seals.

b. Electrical conductivity of core material shall decrease with increasing temper-ature.

c. Furnish and install heater strips suitable for operation at maximum mainte-nance temperature of 120 degrees F and maximum continuous exposure temperature of 185 degrees F.

d. Refer to drawings for operating voltage.

e. Acceptable products.

1) Raychem: Chemelex Auto-Trace Type BTV.

2) Thermon: Type HSX/TSX.








2. Select circuit length to prevent inrush current at 0 degree F from exceeding circuit breaker rating.

3. Controls.

a. Outdoor thermostat set at 40 degrees F complete with sensing bulb and capil-lary tubing.

b. Furnish each individual tracing circuit with pipe sensing thermostat and con-trol relay.

4. Control panel.

a. NEMA 12 enclosure housing main breaker, branch breakers, magnetic con-tactor, control transformer (if required), push buttons, selector switches, indi-cating and alarm lights, and alarm horn.

b. Enclosure to have flange mounted operator.

c. Refer to drawings for contactor and breaker sizes.

5. Main breaker.

a. 10 KA minimum interrupting, 480 VAC or 240 VAC, 3 pole, bolt-on type.


1) General Electric: E150, Type TEB.

2) Square D: Types EH, FA, and IF.

3) Westinghouse: Types EB, EHD, and FD.

6. Branch breakers.

a. 10 KA minimum interrupting, 240 VAC or 120 VAC, single pole, bolt-on type having ground leakage interruption (30 MA trip) with auxiliary contact.


1) Square D: Type QOB-EPD.

7. Magnetic contactor.

a. Industrial, heavy-duty, 600 VAC, 3 pole, electrically held type, with 100 per-cent resistance load rating, and one normally open and one normally closed contact, rated 5A at 102 VAC, for external use.


1) Allen-Bradley: Bulletin 500L.

2) Culter-Hammer: Series C-30.

3) Square D: Class 8903, Type S.

8. Control transformer.

a. 50 VA minimum, sized to operate auxiliaries, and having 120 VAC secondary, primary voltage indicated, and individually fused primary and secondary wind-ings.


1) Allen-Bradley: Bulletin 1497.

2) Cutler-Hammer: Series C-340.

3) Square D: Class 9070, Type K.

9. Push buttons and selector switches.

a. Heavy-duty, oiltight type, contact rated 10A continuous, 600 VAC maximum, and having legend plate inscription indicated.


1) Allen-Bradley: Bulletin 800T.

2) Cutler-Hammer: Series 10250-T.








10. Indicating lights.

a. Heavy-duty, oiltight type with 6 volt lamp, integral 120 to 6 VAC transformer, push-to-test feature, color cap, and legend plate inscription as indicated.


1) Allen-Bradley: Bulletin 800T.

2) Cutler-Hammer: Series 10250-T.


11. Alarm light.

a. Incandescent, enclosed and gasketed type with red glass globe and guard, 25 watt lamp, porcelain socket, and mounted invertedly on top of enclosure.


1) Appleton: Stylemaster.

E. Strainers.

1. Bronze, cast iron, or cast steel strainers to match material of system in which strainers are installed. Strainers tapped for installation of blowdown valve. Pres-sure rating equal to system's pressure rating.

2. Screen's free hole area: Twice internal area of pipe minimum.

3. Sizes 2 inches and smaller: Y type with threaded inlets and outlets.

4. Sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger: Basket and Y type with flanged inlets and outlets.

5. Furnish 3/4 inch blowdown valves on strainers size 4 inches and larger.

6. Screens for water service: Bronze or monel metal. Maximum openings of 0.033 inch for sizes 2 inches and smaller and 3/64 inch for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.

7. Screens for air or gas service: Stainless steel with maximum openings of 0.006 inch for sizes 2 inches and larger and 0.009 inch for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.


a. Mueller Steam Specialty.

b. Spence.

c. Spirax/Sarco.


F. Floor and Wall Sleeve Materials.




4. Furnish and install steel, nonseepage type sleeves for underground exterior wall and pit penetrations.


1) Metraflex.

2) Thunderline.


5. Size sleeves for pipe lines 4 inches and smaller: Not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than pipe passing through.

6. Size sleeves for pipe lines larger than 4 inches: Not less than one pipe size larger than pipe passing through.
















G. Caulking.







H. Dielectric Fittings: Insulating dielectric unions, flanges, or waterways.


a. Epco.

b. Victaulic

c. Watts.


I. Flashing/Counterflashing Materials.

1. Sheet copper: 16 ounces per square foot, in accordance with ASTM B370.

2. Lead flashing: 4 pound sheet lead in accordance with FS QQ-L-201F(2).

J. Floor and Ceiling Plates.

1. Pipes sized 2 inches and smaller: Chromium plated, cast brass, adjustable plates.

2. Pipes sized 2-1/2 inches and larger: Adjustable cast iron or pressed steel plates.

K. Flange Gaskets and Bolting.





3) Klinger.


2. Bolting, Type BOLT1: Machine bolts in accordance with ASTM A 307, Grade B and hex nuts in accordance with ASTM A 563.

L. Pipe Thread Compounds.








2. Compounds for potable water shall be USDA and FDA approved.


M. Copper Jointing Material.

1. Hard solder.

a. Meeting requirements of ASTM B 32.

b. Alloy containing less than 0.2 percent lead.

c. Minimum melting point: 400 degrees F.

d. Acceptable products.

1) J.W. Harris: Bridgit.

2) Engelhard Corp.: Silvabrite 100.


2. Mechanical fittings.

a. Conform to material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22.

b. EPDM O-rings.

c. Acceptable product.

1) Ridgid/Viega: ProPress System.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Earthwork for Underground Systems.

1. Exclude excavation, shoring, and dewatering from this section.

B. Pipe Bedding.

1. For granular bedding, Class B.

a. Use material as specified in Section 31 0000.

b. Spread and compact in accordance with Section 31 0000.

C. Initial Backfill.

1. Material, as specified in Section 31 0000.

2. Do not place around concrete for at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

3. Do not disturb or cause damage to fresh concrete.

4. Protect pipe and joints from disturbance.

5. Place in trenches after pipe is in place and tested.

6. Place within 10 feet of end of last pipe section laid.

7. Push material from filled end of trench into partially filled section of trench, allow-ing material to roll down an incline onto covered pipe.

8. Do not push material over side of open trench, allowing clear fall onto partially covered pipe.

9. Install from pipe bedding to 12 inches above top of highest pipe in trench after compaction.

10. Spread and compact in accordance with Section 31 0000.

D. Exclude backfill from top of initial backfill to grade from this section.







E. Furnish and install bedding and initial backfill for existing pipe exposed during excava-tion.

F. Underground Pipe Corrosion Protection.

1. Mill wrap.

a. Pipe 3 inches and smaller, and in lengths greater than 300 linear feet.

b. Pipe 4 inches and larger, and in lengths greater than 100 linear feet.

c. Factory mill wrap pipe according to the following sequence.

1) Thoroughly machine clean pipe.

2) Apply uniform prime coat of coal tar pipeline primer.

3) Apply uniform coat, 3/32 inch thick, of plasticized pipeline enamel.

4) Spiral wrap fiberglass wrapper.

5) Apply uniform coat, 1/32 inch thick, of plasticized pipeline enamel.

6) Spiral wrap perforated pipeline felt wrapper.

7) Spiral wrap kraft paper wrapper.

8) Perform electrical holiday inspection test for flaw detection.

2. Tape wrap.

a. Pipe 3 inches and smaller, and in lengths of 300 linear feet or less.

b. Pipe 4 inches and larger, and in lengths of 100 linear feet or less.

c. Read manufacturer's instructions before tape is applied.

1) Clean corroded pipe, then prime with primer recommended by tape or sheath manufacturer.

2) Apply tape under warm weather conditions to ensure proper adhesion and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3) Spirally wrap pipe segments, fittings, valves, and connections.

4) Overlap, on successive wrapper passes, minimum of 1/2 width of tape.

5) Cover welded joints with 1 wrap prior to spiral wrapping.

6) Electrical holiday inspection is required for all types.

3. Hot tape wrap.

a. For mill wrapped pipe, apply hot tape wrap to fittings and field joints, compati-ble with millwrap bitumen, and suitable for specified ambient service condi-tions.

b. May be applied under all weather conditions in accordance with manufactur-er's published instructions.

4. Pipe sheath.

a. As option to mill wrapping or tape wrapping, use pipe with factory or field in-stalled sheathing, in conformance with manufacturer's published instructions.

b. Apply sheath over pipe material specified for the service.

c. Bond sheath by adhesives or heat seal.

d. Bond pipe end and fittings with thermally fitted heat shrink sleeves.

e. Electrical flaw detection testing at factory shall require 10,000 volts to be im-pressed across sheath.

f. Sheath breakdown voltage shall be not less than 13,000 volts.

5. Pipe joint sheath.

a. Material compatible with sheath, mill wrap, or tape wrap.

b. Field applied using propane torch.

c. Suitable for use up through 200 degrees F.







G. Underground Pipe.

1. General.

a. Check each pipe for cracks and defects before placing into position for laying.

b. Clean jointing surfaces of pipe free from material that may have an injurious effect on joint material used.

c. Check preplaced joint material for proper position and state required for type of joint specified.

d. Lay pipe in selected bedding to required line and grade to have firm, even bearing throughout, with close joints and smooth inverts.

e. Make recesses in bedding, shaped to receive pipe joint or fitting.

f. Clean foreign matter from interior of each section of pipe before adjoining pipe is laid.

g. After each section of pipe is laid and joint has been made, fill space between pipes and trench sides with selected bedding.

h. Protect pipe and joints from disturbance.

i. Plug open ends of pipe at close of each day's work and when pipes are not being laid.

j. Bituminous coat exposed ferrous surfaces, including bolts and clamps, before burying.

k. Where underground piping crosses existing sewers, utility pipes, or conduits, take special precautions and protective measures to avoid damage to existing facilities.

l. Offset pipes where indicated or where required to avoid interference with oth-er work.

m. Make offsets to deeper elevation to avoid pipe freezing.

2. Where mechanical joints are allowed, joints utilizing retainer gland with setscrews into pipe surface are prohibited.

3. Where openings are furnished, install piping through prepared foundation wall openings.

4. Where necessary to install piping below angle of repose of earth support of foun-dations, encase pipe and backfill with concrete to line of angle of repose.

5. For pressure pipe, bends, offsets, tees, crosses, and dead ends, including flange and spigot pieces, shall be suitably rodded and clamped or blocked with concrete thrust blocks.

6. Rods and clamps shall receive one field coat of bituminous coating after installa-tion.

H. Aboveground Pipe.




4. Piping in finished rooms shall be concealed.


6. Fluids shall circulate freely, without noise, and without evidence of leaks, trapping, or air binding.










10. Length of pipe used in offsets between risers and mains: Sufficient to facilitate expansion and pitched back to main to furnish proper drainage at all times.

11. Offset piping to avoid interferences, increase headroom, improve appearance of pipe work, and to properly drain piping, in manner acceptable to Owner's Field Representative.





a. Make branch connections with tees, weldolets, or threadolets, where main exceeds branch by two pipe sizes or more.





18. Flanges: True faced and placed perpendicular to axis of pipe.





23. Install dielectric fittings where dissimilar metal pipes are joined.




I. Plastic Pipe.

1. Make up joints and install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instruc-tions.

2. Use fittings for offsets and changes in direction.

3. Bending of pipe and mitered end pipe joints are prohibited.

4. Furnish adapters where connections to metallic pipe are required.

J. Cast Iron Soil Pipes.

1. Install cast iron soil pipe in accordance with CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, except where otherwise specified.







2. Join no-hub cast iron soil pipe with couplings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Lead for oakum and lead packed joints shall not recess more than 1/8 inch below rim of hub.

K. Mechanical Fittings for Copper Tubing.

1. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Cut tubing square and deburr ends.

3. Fully insert tubing into fitting and mark at shoulder of fitting.

4. Check fitting alignment against mark to ensure full engagement.

5. Press joint using manufacturer approved tool.

L. Pipe Welding.






d. Clean each bead thoroughly before starting the following pass.






M. Grooved Joints.

1. Install grooved fittings and couplings as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Use only those grooved couplings specified. Substitution of other model, style, size, or rating of couplings or fittings is prohibited.

3. Roll grooving of piping is prohibited for use in galvanized steel pipe systems.

N. Strainers.

1. Install strainers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At tapped open-ings, install nipple and general service ball valve.

O. Pressure Gauges and Thermometers.

1. Install pressure gauges and thermometer well connections in fittings. Drilling and tapping of pipe wall for connections is prohibited.

2. Locate gauges and thermometers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in visible locations for easy reading from normal operating levels.

P. Electric Heat Tracing.

1. Install electric heat tracing cable in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Owner's Field Representative reviewed installation drawings.

2. Route cable to prevent crushing, fraying, tearing, breaking, or shearing under forces and motions expected during installation and operation.







3. Straighten kinks in cable prior to installation.

4. Tape cable to ensure continuous contact between cable and pipe.

5. Terminate leads in junction boxes. Locate and seal junction boxes to prevent en-try of moisture. Furnish one junction box for each piping system.

6. Electrical power supply is specified under Division 26.

7. Limit maximum cable circuit length so starting inrush current at 0 degree F does not exceed 20 amperes circuit breaker rating.

Q. Sleeves and Seals.








8. For underground wall and pit penetrations, and on grade floor penetrations, and where indicated, seal space between pipe sleeves watertight with mechanically expandable, segmented neoprene inserts. Install in accordance with manufactur-er's instructions. Bituminous coat all exposed bolt heads.

9. Caulking.





e. Use of general purpose, oil base, caulking compounds, of putties and of plas-ter will not be accepted for sealing of pipe penetrations.

R. Flashings/Counterflashings.



3. For plumbing vent pipe flashing, extend sleeve up inside bottom of either inverted hub connection or reviewed and accepted vent fitting.



S. Welding to Building Structure.











1) Tension or compression : Same as base metal.


c. Surfaces to be welded: Free from loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, or other foreign material.



f. Weld transmitting calculated stress: Not less than 3 inches in length, and in-termittent welds shall not be less than 2 inches in length.

g. Do not apply welds to flanges of tension members perpendicular to direction of stress.

h. Turn side and end fillet welds around corners for minimum length of twice nominal size of weld.

i. To ensure compliance, detail shall be indicated on shop drawings.

j. Length of end returns is not be included in calculated weld length.

k. Welding or other operation involving use of flame, arcs, or sparking devices will not be allowed without written permission of Owner's representative.

l. Welds found be in nonconformance to requirements of AWS D1.1 shall be repaired or replaced according to Workmanship section of AWS D1.1 without cost to Owner.

T. General Pipe Testing Requirements.

1. Prior to acceptance of work, test completed piping systems, in accordance with applicable governing codes, and in presence of Owner's Representative.




d. Removal of system component, including plugs and caps, to ascertain whether or not test media has reached all parts of system if purging or vent valves are not installed during construction, may be required by Owner's Rep-resentative.




















7. Upon completion of work, but before final acceptance, operate systems for period of two days, for purpose of testing and satisfying requirements, when directed by Owner's Representative.

8. Prepare and maintain test records of all piping systems tests.


b. Deliver two record copies of acceptance tests to Owner after acceptance.


U. Flushing and Purging General Requirements.



3. After flushing and purging, all valves and strainers shall be removed and cleaned of debris before replacing.

4. Coordinate cleaning of connections to existing systems through Owner's Repre-sentative.




B. Check scale ranges of individual instruments. Expected normal reading shall be near middle of scale. Replace instruments not conforming to this requirement.










END OF SECTION





PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 0720 - 1


SECTION 22 0720 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 22 0513 - Common Work Results for Plumbing.

B. Section 22 0600 - Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.

C. Section 22 1008 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.


A. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Ma-terials.

C. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. For Information.

1. Product data.

a. Each product and component.

1.04 WARRANTY


1.05 SCHEDULES

A. Plumbing Piping Insulation.

1. Sanitary drainage, outdoor.

a. Type PP-1 with FF-1, or PP-1 with FF-3, all plus JJ-1.

b. Thickness: 2 inches on all size pipe.

2. Domestic cold water, indoor.

a. Type PP-1 with FF-1, or PP-1 with FF-3. Vapor barrier required.

b. Thickness: 1 inch on all size pipe.

3. Domestic cold water, outdoor.

a. Type PP-1 with FF-1, or PP-1 with FF-3, all plus JJ-1. Vapor barrier required.

b. Thickness: 2 inches on all size pipe.

4. Domestic hot water, indoor.

a. Type PP-1 with FF-2, or PP-1 with FF-3.


5. Rainwater conductors, nonvertical portions and vertical leaders (maximum 7 feet) at roof drains.







a. Type PP-1 with FF-1 or PP-1 with FF-3. Vapor barrier required.


6. Underside of roof drains.

a. Type FF-5. Vapor barrier required.

b. Thickness: 1 inch.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Drawings indicate equipment locations, related layouts, and general design of systems specified under Division 22.

B. Include thermal insulation for scheduled systems.

C. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, insulate surfaces in accordance with insulation schedules specified.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. General.

1. Include insulating materials having maximum flame spread rating of 25 and max-imum smoke developed rating of 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Preformed fiberglass pipe insulation, in accordance with ASTM C547.

3. Insulating materials UL labeled.

4. Adhesives fire resistant in their dry states and UL listed.

B. Pipe Insulation.

1. Type PP-1, rigid, molded fiberglass.

a. Minimum density: 3-1/2 pounds per cubic foot.

b. Thermal conductivity: Not more than 0.26 Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F, per inch, at mean temperature of 75 degrees F.

c. Jacket: Factory applied vapor barrier, with self-sealing laps.

d. Laminate: White kraft paper facing exterior.

e. Glass fiber reinforcing scrim.

f. Aluminum foil facing, with vapor permeance of not more than 0.02 perm when measured in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A.

g. Acceptable products.

1) Knauf, Fiber Glass ASJ-SSL.

2) Manson, Alley K-SSL.

3) Manville, Micro-Loc 650 AP-T.

4) Owens-Corning, Fiberglas 25 ASJ-SSL-II.


C. Fittings Insulation.

1. Type FF-1, fiberglass blanket or preformed segmented.

a. Density: 1 pound per cubic foot.








c. Vapor barrier coating.




3. Type FF-3, premolded, one-piece, PVC insulated fitting covers.

a. Factory precut fiberglass insulation segments.

b. Flexible, self-extinguishing PVC cover: Flame spread classification, not more than 25. Fuel contribution, not more than 25, as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.


1) Accessible Products, 300 Series Thermazip.

2) Ceel Company, Ceel-Tite 300.

3) Coverite, S-800.

4) Knauf, Proto.

5) Manville, Zeston.


4. Type FF-5.

a. Insulating cement and a final layer of vapor barrier coating with embedded fi-berglass cloth.

D. Jacketing.

1. Type JJ-1, 3003 or 5005 aluminum roll.

a. Protect insulating material. Integral vapor barrier coating on insulation side.

b. Round jacketing, minimum thickness, 0.016 inch.

1) Locked longitudinal seams.

2) Butt circumferential joints.

3) Butt straps and stainless steel draw bands.

4) Include butt straps with high temperature resistant weatherproof sealant.

c. Rectangular jacketing, minimum thickness, 0.032 inch.


1) Childers, Lock-On, Ell-Jacs and Tee-Jacs.

2) Pabco, Surefit.


E. Cements, Adhesives, and Coatings.

1. Insulating and finishing cement.


1) Celotex, MW-1.

2) Pabco, Pabcote.

3) Fibrex, FBX Superkote.


2. Lap adhesive and finish coating for nonvapor barrier applications.


1) Childers, CP-50A.

2) Foster, 30-04.

3) Marathon, 102.








3. Vapor barrier lap adhesive and surfacing adhesive.


1) Childers, CP-82.

2) Foster, 85-20.

3) Marathon, 225.


4. Vapor barrier coatings.


1) Marathon, 501.

2) Childers, CP-30 or CP-32.

3) Foster, 30-35.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements.

1. Install to present a neat, clean appearance.

2. Apply only after surfaces have been cleaned, inspected, and tested.

3. Apply neatly, tightly, with unbroken lengths, and with ends of sections firmly butt-ed together.

4. At joints, lap insulating jackets and cement in position.

5. Sectional covering shall be uniform.

6. Where required material thickness is not available, layer insulation, staggering butt joints.

7. Do not dilute surface finishes and adhesives.

8. Apply surface finishes and adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instruc-tions.

9. Do not apply sealing coats until volatiles have dissipated, and until cements and adhesives have thoroughly dried.

10. Unless otherwise specified, do not apply second or multiple coats until previous coats have thoroughly dried.

11. Do not use flame or spark producing equipment in areas where adhesives, mas-tics, sealants, or coatings containing volatiles are stored or being applied.

12. Maintain integrity of vapor barriers. Do not use fasteners to secure vapor barrier insulation, which penetrate or damage vapor barrier.

13. Butt insulation to building construction and to angle iron stops. Where vapor seals or similar facings are required, extend and seal to building construction or angle.

14. Surfaces to be insulated shall be considered concealed where located in furred spaces or above suspended ceilings, other work shall be considered exposed.

15. Restore to original likeness existing insulation damaged during progress of the work.

B. Pipe and Fittings Insulation.

1. General application notes.







a. Insulate each pipe individually. Gang insulation of piping groups is unac-ceptable.

b. Place longitudinal joints on the least conspicuous side of pipe.

c. Extend insulation on piping through sleeves.

d. Install insulation to conform to a uniform diameter.

e. Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves to a thickness equal to the insulation on adjacent piping.

f. Omit insulation on rubber expansion joints and rubber vibration isolation joints of hot water services.

g. At uncovered joints and fittings: Taper ends of insulation with cement before wrapping. Construct tapered ends adjacent to bolted joints to permit removal of bolts without damaging insulation.

h. Seal insulation and jacketing cut during installation of pipe anchors, with insu-lating cement.

i. Electric heat tracing is specified in Section 22 0600. Do not install pipe insula-tion until heat tracing cable is completely installed. Where leads of electric heat tracing cable pass through metal jacketing of insulation, install jacket openings sized to prevent chafing of wire during installation and under operat-ing conditions. Seal jacket openings with weatherproof mastic to prevent penetration of moisture into layer of thermal insulation. Where electric heat tracing is indicated, avoid trapping of heat tracing cable in hinge slots or longi-tudinal joints of sectional pipe covering.

2. Type PP-1 insulation.

a. Install insulation and seal longitudinal, self-sealing laps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

b. Where vapor barrier is required, wrap circumferential joints with vapor barrier pressure sensitive adhesive tape, overlapping insulation by 2 inches.

3. Type FF-1 insulation.

a. Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves to a thickness equal to covering on adja-cent piping.

b. Where preformed, segmented pipe type insulation is used, secure insulation with 20 gauge galvanized steel wire.

c. Cover blanket or segmented insulation with a smooth coat of insulating ce-ment.

d. Over the coat of insulating cement, apply a layer of open weave glass cloth fabric, embedded between 2 flood coats of vapor barrier coating.

e. Overlap fabric not less than 2 inches onto adjacent pipe insulation.


a. Insulate fittings, flanges and valves to thickness equal to covering on adjacent piping.


c. Cover blanket or segmented insulation with smooth coat of insulating cement.

d. Cover with smooth coat of insulating cement. Apply finish coat.


a. Where insulation system requires a vapor barrier: Seal edges of cover with vapor barrier coating. Wrap circumferential joints with vapor barrier pressure







sensitive adhesive tape. Overlap adjacent pipe insulation by at least 2 inch-es.

b. Where insulation system does not require vapor barrier: Apply adhesive. Staple, tack fasten, or tape cover to adjacent pipe covering as recommended by manufacturer. Overlap adjacent pipe insulation by at least 2 inches.


a. Insulate underside of roof drains with insulating cement.

b. Finish with fiberglass cloth embedded in vapor barrier coating.

C. Jacketing.

1. Type JJ-1.

a. Install round jacketing and attach butt straps and draw bands in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

b. Lap rectangular jacketing not less than 2 inches on longitudinal and trans-verse joints. Lap top jacketing over side jacketing. Seal joints with manufac-turer's standard weather and heat resistant sealant. Attach jacketing with stainless steel sheet metal screws and lead washers, or galvanized angle iron hoops.

END OF SECTION





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 1008 - 1


SECTION 22 1008 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. AISC (COMM) - Commentary on the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design.

B. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping ; 2007 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).

C. ASTM A 575 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M Grades ; 1996 (Reapproved 2007).

D. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel ; 2008.

E. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.

F. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. For Review.

1. Shop drawings.



c. Where pipe hangers cannot be hung from building structure, submit proposed method of installing additional structural steel that connects to the building structure.


A. Qualifications.



3. Examination shall have been within the past six months, unless welder has been making this type of weld after passing test within two years, as specified under qualification procedures of AWS D1.1.


A. See Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and han-dling requirements.







PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS



2. Furnish hanger and supporting materials meeting seismic requirements of local codes and governing authorities. See Section 01 4100 - Regulatory Require-ments - Seismic Control.









B. Clevis Hangers.














D. Single-Rod Roller Hanger.

1. Steel frame, cast iron roller, and steel roller rod.



b. Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 140.



E. Two-Rod Roller Hanger.

1. Cast iron roller, steel roller rod, and malleable iron or cast iron sockets, without hanger rod.












F. Adjustable, Two-Rod Roller Hanger.

1. Cast iron roller, steel roller rod, malleable iron or cast iron sockets, and threaded hanger rods with nuts.






G. Protection Shields.

1. Minimum 18 gauge thick, 180 degree, galvanized steel shield with flared ends and centering ribs.

H. Preinsulated Hanger Inserts.

1. Hanger inserts consist of two 180 degree segments of 100 psi average compres-sive strength insulation of same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation.

a. Where manufacturer recommends or drawings indicate, include wedge shaped insert in bottom half, consisting of 600 psi minimum compressive strength calcium silicate.

b. Length of hanger insert is scheduled on drawings.

2. Protect each half of hanger insert by adhering galvanized sheet metal shield to saddle.

a. Shield length and gauge thickness is scheduled on drawings.

b. Where indicated or recommended by manufacturer, include heavy-duty load bearing plate on bottom of metal shield.

c. Area of high density insert and pipe bearing support surface of shield shall be as scheduled on drawings or as recommended by manufacturer.


1) American Mechanical Insulation Sales Inc.: AMIS 200 Calmax.

2) B-Line: Figures B3380 through B3384.

3) Carpenter and Paterson: 465 CVB.

4) Pipe Shields Incorporated: Series A1000 through A9000.

5) Value Engineered Products, Inc.: Pro-Shield Series.


3. For insulated copper pipe with Type PP-2 insulation, use preinsulated hanger in-serts as manufactured by Klo-Sure.

I. Trapeze Hangers.





J. Beam Clamps for Pipe 2 Inches and Smaller.

1. Side type.











2. Side I type.



2) B-Line.


3. Adjustable type.





K. I-Beam Clamps.






L. Hanger Rods.

1. Threaded, hot rolled, steel rod conforming to ASTM A 36 or A 575.



M. Hanger Rod Anchors.

1. Suitable for supporting hanger rods in reinforced concrete construction.

a. For plumbing system piping and equipment.

1) Mechanical expansion type.

2) Acceptable manufacturers.

(a) Hilti: Kwik Bolt TZ.

(b) Power Fasteners: Power-Stud + SD2.

(c) Simpson Strong Tie: Strong-Bolt.

(d) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION











D. Support piping from building structural frame, not from roof deck, permanent metal forms for concrete floors, concrete slab (unless indicated otherwise), or from other pipe, duct, or equipment.

E. Install hangers for nonvertical conductors, sized to accommodate future installation of 1 inch minimum insulation.

1. Hanger rods shall be long enough to allow lowering of hangers by 1 inch during insulation installation.

F. Contractor's attention is directed to drawing details and building structural framing lay-out that may require hanger spacing more frequently than spacings shown in table be-low.




Grooved end steel pipe (liquid or vapor)

Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Minimum Rod Size 1/2 to 1 inch 8 feet 3/8 inch 1-1/4 through 2 inches 10 feet 3/8 inch 2-1/2 to 3 inches 12 feet 1/2 inch 4 inches 12 feet 5/8 inch 6 inches 12 feet 3/4 inch 8 inches 12 feet 7/8 inch 10 and 12 inches 12 feet 7/8 inch

Copper tubing

Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Minimum Rod Size 1 inch and smaller 5 feet 3/8 inch 1-1/4 and 1-1/2 inches 7 feet 3/8 inch 2 inches 10 feet 3/8 inch 2-1/2 through 3 inches 10 feet 1/2 inch 4 inches 10 feet 5/8 inch







Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe Maximum 100 degrees F (carried fluid temperature)

Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Minimum Rod Size 1-1/4 inches and smaller 4 feet 3/8 inch 1-1/2 through 2 inches 5 feet 3/8 inch 2-1/2 through 3 inches 6 feet 1/2 inch 4 inches 6 feet 5/8 inch 6 inches 7 feet 3/4 inch 8 inches 8 feet 7/8 inch

Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe Maximum 140 degrees F (carried fluid tem-perature)

Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Minimum Rod Size 1-1/4 inches and smaller 3 feet 3/8 inch 1-1/2 through 2 inches 3 feet 3/8 inch 2-1/2 through 3 inches 4 feet 1/2 inch 4 inches 4 feet 5/8 inch

Cast iron soil pipe

Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Minimum Rod Size 2 inches Support at each bell or joint 3/8 inch 3 inches but not more than 10 feet 1/2 inch 4 inches centers for all sizes 5/8 inch 6 inches 3/4 inch 8 through 12 inches 7/8 inch

G. Alternate Hangers.

1. As option to hanging horizontal polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and chlorinated pol-yvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe at short intervals, use continuous angle iron support with V-clevis hanger, spaced as specified for steel pipe.

H. Uninsulated Piping.



I. Insulated Piping.

1. Smaller than 4 inches: Install adjustable swivel ring or clevis type hangers with preinsulated hanger insert.

2. Cold pipe 4 inches and larger: Install clevis type hangers with preinsulated hanger insert.

3. Hot pipe 4 and 5 inches: Install single-rod roller type hangers with preinsulated hanger insert.

4. Hot pipe 6 inches and larger: Install 2-rod roller type hangers with preinsulated hanger insert.







5. On roof, sized 1 inch and larger: Install pipe rolls with preinsulated hanger insert.

J. Pipes Supported Individually From Structural Steel.



a. Side beam clamp.



3. Beam clamp size required for given pipe size is scheduled on drawings.


K. Trapeze Supports.



3. As an option to hanging piping from trapeze support using hanger devices speci-fied, trapeze support below piping may be used as means of support.

4. When this option is used, uninsulated pipe shall be secured to trapeze support with standard U-bolts and locknuts.

5. Install insulated cold pipe with an insulating saddle and shield, and secure it to trapeze support with standard U-bolt and locknut.

6. Cradle insulated hot pipe in an adjustable cast iron roller support.

L. Vertical Pipe Supports.

1. Support vertical runs of uninsulated or insulated cold pipe not subject to apprecia-ble expansion with wrought steel clamps securely clamped to risers.

2. Support insulated hot pipe subject to vertical expansion by same wrought steel clamp, securely clamped to riser and attached to springs to absorb vertical deflec-tion without appreciable loss of supporting effort.


M. Where necessary for proper system functioning, brace piping and supports against re-action sway and vibration.

N. For concentrated loads, e.g., valves, reduce allowable span proportionately.

O. Vertical risers shall be supported independently of connected horizontal piping when-ever practical, with fixed or spring supports at base and at intervals to accommodate system range of load and thermal conditions, and shall be guided for lateral stability.


2. For horizontal piping contiguous to moving risers, two supports nearest to riser shall be spring supports, unless otherwise indicated.







P. After piping systems have been installed, tested, and placed in satisfactory operation, firmly tighten hanger rod nut and jam nut and upset threads to prevent the movement of fasteners.

Q. Welding to Building Structure.





1) Tension or compression, same as base metal.

(a) Shear, 15,800 pounds per square inch.

R. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, or other foreign material.

S. Before welding, painted surfaces shall have paint removed to expose clean steel sur-face.


T. No welds transmitting calculated stress shall be less than 3 inches in length, and no in-termittent welds shall be less than 2 inches in length.

U. No welds shall be applied to flanges of tension members perpendicular to direction of stress.

V. Turn side and end fillet welds around corners for minimum length of twice nominal size of weld.

W. Length of end returns is not to be included in calculated weld length.

X. No welding or other operation involving use of flame, arcs, or sparking devices will be allowed without written permission of Owner's Field Representative.

Y. Welds found to be in nonconformance to requirements of AWS D1.1 shall be repaired or replaced according to workmanship section of AWS D1.1 at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION





PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND SPECIALTIES 22 1010 - 1


SECTION 22 1010 – PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Division 03, Concrete

B. Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

C. Section 22 0513 - Common Work Results for Plumbing.

D. Section 22 0600 - Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.

E. Section 22 0720 - Plumbing Insulation.

F. Division 31, Earthwork.


A. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers ; 2005 (ANSI/ASSE 1013).

B. ASSE 1016 - Performance Requirements for Automatic Compensating Valves for Indi-vidual Showers and Tub/Shower Combinations ; 2005.

C. ASTM A48/A 48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ; 2003.

D. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construc-tion ; 2003.

E. ASTM C32 - Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale) ; 2009.

F. ASTM C139 - Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes ; 2005.

G. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry ; 2007a.

H. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sec-tions ; 2007.

I. ASTM D 448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction.

J. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains ; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651).

K. FS QQ-L-201 - Lead Sheet ; Revision F, 1965, and Amendment 2, 1970.

L. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters ; 2006.

M. IAPMO PS 80-2006 - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) Material and Property Standard for Grease Interceptors and Clarifiers

N. PEI RP 100 - Recommended Practices for Installation of Underground Liquid Storage Systems.

O. UL 58 - Standard for Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liq-uids.







P. UL 1746 - Standard for External Corrosion Protection Systems for Steel Underground Storage Tanks.

Q. SSPC-SP 6 - Specification for Commercial Blast Cleaning

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 3000 – for submittal procedures.

B. For Information.

1. Product data.

a. Water pressure regulating valve.

C. For Closeout.


2. Certificates.

a. PDI Standard WH 201 Certification of water hammer absorber.

3. Test Reports.

a. Potable Water System Disinfection Report.

b. Backflow Prevention Device Test Report.


A. Quality control provisions of Division 01, General Requirements, apply to this Section.

B. Reviews and acceptance, except as required for field installation, field applications, and field tests shall be obtained before delivery of items of material, equipment, or sys-tems to project site.

C. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged, for past 5 years, in manufacture of underground protected steel gravity grease interceptor of similar type to that specified.

D. Installer's Qualifications:

1. Installer regularly engaged, for past 5 years, in installation of underground pro-tected steel gravity grease interceptors, oil/water separators, or steel storage tanks of similar type to that specified.

2. Employ persons trained for installation of underground protected steel gravity grease interceptors, oil/water separators, or steel storage tanks.


A. Deliver, store, and handle underground protected steel gravity grease interceptors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Protect underground protected steel gravity grease interceptors, including corrosion control system, during delivery, storage, handling, and installation to prevent damage.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 01 7800 – Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Warranty Period: 30 years.







1. Warrant underground protected steel gravity grease interceptors against failure due to exterior corrosion when used as originally intended.

C. Warrant underground protected steel gravity grease interceptor against failure due to exterior corrosion when used as originally intended for 30 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEMS

A. Underground Piping.

1. Storm drainage.

a. Pipe.

1) Type CISP-HS, cast iron soil pipe, hub and spigot, for pipe sized 3 inch-es and larger.

2) Type CISP-NH, cast iron soil pipe, no hub, for pipe sized 3 inches and larger.

3) Type CISP-NH, no hub, or Type CISP-HS, hub and spigot, cast iron soil pipe, for pipe sized 3 inches and larger.

2. Sanitary drainage.

a. Pipe.

1) Type CISP-HS, hub and spigot, or Type CISP-NH, no hub, cast iron soil pipe for pipe sized 3 inches and larger.

2) Type CISP-HS, cast iron soil pipe, hub and spigot, for pipe sized 3 inch-es and larger.

3) Type CISP-NH, cast iron soil pipe, no hub, for pipe sized 3 inches and larger.

B. Aboveground Piping.

1. Storm drainage.

a. Pipe.

1) Type GS-DWV, galvanized steel drainage pipe, screwed or with grooved fittings and couplings.

2) Type CISP-NH, cast iron soil pipe, no hub.

3) Type CISP-HS, cast iron soil pipe, hub and spigot.

4) Type PVC, polyvinyl chloride pipe or Type PVC-DWV, polyvinyl chloride drainage pipe, socket welded.

2. Sanitary drainage and vents.

a. Pipe.

1) Type COP-DWV, copper drainage tubing with soldered joints using hard solder.

2) Type GS-DWV, galvanized steel drainage pipe, screwed.

3) Type CISP-NH, cast iron soil pipe, no hub.

4) Type CISP-HS, cast iron soil pipe, hub and spigot.

3. Cold water.

a. Pipe.

1) Type COP-1, copper tubing for pipe sized 2 inches and smaller.

2) Type GS-1, galvanized steel pipe for pipe sized 2-1/2 inches and larger.







3) Type CPVC, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride pipe.

b. Joints.

1) Copper: Soldered, using hard solder.

2) Galvanized steel.

(a) Screwed and flanged using Type GASK2 gasketing and Type BOLT1 bolting.

(b) Grooved end type fittings and couplings.

3) Plastic (CPVC).

(a) Solvent welded or screwed for pipe sized 2 inches and smaller.

(b) Solvent welded or flanged for pipe sized 2-1/2 inches and larger.

(c) Use Type GASK2 gasketing and Type BOLT1 bolting.

c. Valves: Type GSV-1, general service valves.

4. Hot water.

a. Pipe.

1) Type COP-1, copper tubing for pipe sized 2 inches and smaller.

2) Type GS-1, galvanized steel pipe for pipe sized 2-1/2 inches and larger.

3) Type CPVC, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride pipe.

b. Joints.

1) Copper: Soldered, using hard solder.

2) Galvanized steel.

(a) Screwed and flanged using Type GASK1 gasketing and Type BOLT1 bolting.

(b) Grooved end type fittings and couplings.

3) Plastic (CPVC).

(a) Solvent welded or screwed for pipe sized 2 inches and smaller.

(b) Solvent welded or flanged for pipe sized 2-1/2 inches and larger.

(c) Use Type GASK1 gasketing and Type BOLT1 bolting.

c. Valves: Type GSV-1, general service valves.

5. Miscellaneous drain, waste, and vents.

a. Pipe.

1) Type GS-DWV, galvanized steel drainage pipe.

2) Type COP-DWV, copper drainage tubing.


A. Manhole or catch basin frames, covers, and grates: Cast iron, in accordance with ASTM A 48, Class 35. Completely coat ferrous metal surfaces with bituminous or coal tar epoxy coating. Frames shall include anchor bolts and bolt holes, and covers with lettering identifying service. Seating faces on covers, grates, and frames shall be ma-chine finished. Covers and grates shall not rock or tilt.

1. Manhole or catch basin frames, covers and grates.

a. Type MH-1: Heavy-duty, round type with neoprene gasket and bolted lid.


(a) East Jordan Iron Works, No. 1045 PT.

(b) Neenah, R-1915-G-Type L or R-1916-D.

(c) Vulcan Foundry.








B. Miscellaneous Underground Materials.

1. Epoxy bonding compound.

a. Two-component epoxy-modified-polysulphide adhesive.

b. Initial curing shall be accomplished within 48 hours at temperatures as low as 40 degrees F.


1) Copolymer Chemicals, Crete-tac.

2) Emerson and Cuming (W.R. Grace), Cryovac.

3) Master Builders (American Metaseal), Meta-crete Gel.


2. Prefabricated joint sealers.

a. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) rings.


1) Can-Clay Industries, C-T Adapters.

2) Fernco Corp., PVC Donut.

3) Joints Incorporated, Caulder.

4) Mission Rubber.


3. Manhole adapters.

a. Elastomeric plastic rings.

b. Include stainless steel bands for pipe sized 14 inches and larger.

c. Acceptable manufacturer.

1) Fernco, CMA for pipe sized 4 inches through 12 inches and Large Diam-eter Waterstops for pipe sized 14 inches and larger.


C. Water Hammer Absorbers.

1. Air chamber type.

a. Upright, capped pipe extensions, minimum 18 inches long and one pipe size larger than the connected pipe.

2. Mechanical type.

a. Precharged and permanently sealed, expansion bellows type absorbers with Type 18-8 stainless steel, or spun seamless Type L copper shell and corro-sion resistant bellows.

b. Absorbers sized 1 inch and smaller certified in accordance with PDI WH 201.


1) Metraflex, Surgemaster.

2) Mifab, MWH Series.

3) J.R. Smith, Hydrotrol Series.

4) Sioux Chief Mfg., Hydra-Rester, Mega-Rester, and Mini-Rester.

5) Zurn, Shoktrol Series.


D. Backflow Prevention Devices.

1. Reduced pressure zone type.

a. In accordance with ASSE 1013, consisting of two check valves, two shutoff valves, relief valve, and test cocks, having maximum working pressure rating of 150 psi.








1) Cla-Val, RP Series.

2) Conbraco, Series 40-200.

3) Febco, Model 825.

4) Hersey-Beeco, Aergap Series.

5) Watts, 909 Series.


E. Hose Bibbs.

1. Angle pattern, with rough chrome plated cast brass body, 3/4 inch female thread-ed inlet, 3/4 inch outlet with hose coupling male thread, rising stem, renewable washer, removable tee handle, lock shield cap, and vacuum breaker.


a. Chicago Faucet, No. 387 LF with E27.

b. Mifab, MHY-9141.


F. Wall Hydrants.

1. Key-operated nonfreeze type, complete with vacuum breaker, wall box suitable for wall thickness, and union elbow.

2. Wall hydrants include bronze hydrant head casing and valve housing, complete with vacuum breaker, 3/4 inch hose outlet, and enclosed in flush mounted, bronze box with polished nickel bronze face and cover.


a. J.R. Smith, 5509.

b. Mifab, MHY-20 Series.

c. Wade, W-8625.

d. Zurn, Z-1300.


G. Air Gap Fittings.

1. Painted cast iron fitting with female threaded inlet or inlet including setscrew, and spigot or female threaded outlet.


a. J.R. Smith, 3951 or 3955.

b. Wade, W-2490.

c. Zurn, Z-1025.


H. Hub Outlets.

1. Hub end of cast iron soil pipe with hub exposed above finished floor.

2. Furnish with deep-seal cast iron trap where indicated on drawings.

I. Water Pressure Regulating Valves.

1. Pressure regulating valves of size and capacity indicated on drawings, pilot oper-ated, single seat, equipped with composition disc and shall close tight on dead-end shutoff.

2. Valve capacities, in accordance with scheduled inlet pressure and set outlet pres-sure.

3. 200 pound wog, cast iron body with flanged ends, bronze trim, and Hycar dia-phragm or bronze piston.








a. Spence Type C-34.

b. GA Industries Fig. 4500-D.


J. Point-of-Use 3-Way Mixing Valve.

1. In accordance with ASSE 1016.

2. With temperature adjustment range from 60 degrees F to 115 degrees F, and having.

a. Brass body with polished chrome finish.

b. Wax or liquid filled thermostatic motor.

c. Tamper-resistant temperature adjustment control.

d. Self-aligning bronze trim.

e. Combination strainer/checkstops.

f. Acceptable manufacturers.

1) Powers, Hydroguard Series 430.

2) Conbraco, 34D Series.


K. Floor Drains.

1. Drains shall include seepage flanges, weepholes, and flashing collars or clamps.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, drains include traps and bottom outlet caulk connec-tions.

3. Manufacturer series numbers for following floor drains represent basic style re-quired and do not necessarily include all modifications for sizes or options speci-fied.

4. Series FD-1, light duty floor drains: Consist of painted cast iron bodies with re-versible flashing collars, and grates, strainers, and accessories as specified.

a. Type FD-1B, floor drain.

1) Adjustable, 6 inch square, nickel bronze strainer with hinged grate.

2) Trap primer connection.


(a) J.R. Smith, 2010-B-H.

(b) Wade, W-1100-N.

(c) Zurn, Z-415-SH.

(d) Josam, 30000-T.

(e) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

5. Type FD-2, floor drain.

a. Heavy duty type drain with bottom outlet.

b. Painted cast iron body.

c. 12 inch round, slotted, deep flange tractor grate of heel proof design with pol-ished bronze top.

d. Trap primer connection.


1) J.R. Smith.

2) Wade.

3) Zurn, Z-505 (Basis of Design).

4) Josam.









a. 12 inch round top drain, coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, seepage pan and combination membrane flashing clamp for heavy duty cast iron loose slotted heel proof grate with suspended sediment bucket.

1) J.R. Smith.

2) Wade.

3) Zurn, Z-541 (Basis of Design)

4) Josam.



a. Multisection trench type with painted cast iron body and grates, end plates, and gaskets between sections and end plates.


1) J.R. Smith, 2710-F.

2) Wade, W-2920.

3) Zurn, Z-665-SB.

4) Josam, 76010.



a. Floor sink type drain with shallow cast iron round body, acid resistant interior coating, domed secondary strainer, and nickel bronze round top rim and grate.


1) J.R. Smith, 3020-C.

2) Wade, W-9000-2A.

3) Zurn, ZN-1970-KC.

4) Josam, 49200.


L. Trap Primer System.

1. Furnish trap primer system, consisting of trap primer valve, trap primer distribution units, and manifold piping as required.


a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

b. Mifab.

c. J.R. Smith.


M. Cleanouts.

1. Size cleanouts for aboveground piping.

a. Sized 4 inches and smaller, same as pipe they serve.

b. For larger size piping, size cleanout 4 inches minimum.

2. Size cleanouts for underground piping.

a. Sized 6 inches and smaller, same as pipe they serve.

b. For larger size piping, size cleanout 6 inches minimum.

3. Furnish cleanouts having painted cast iron bodies and bronze plugs with tapered threads.







4. Cleanouts on grade shall include spigot outlets and flashing flange device.

5. Cleanouts in upper level floors shall include inside caulk outlets, flashing flange device, and flashing clamp.

6. Manufacturer series numbers for following cleanouts represent basic style re-quired and do not necessarily include all modifications for sizes or options speci-fied.

7. Type CO-W1, wall cleanout.

a. Cleanout tee with countersunk head plug, and square cover and frame.

b. Cleanouts installed in tiled wall shall include chrome plated covers.


1) J.R. Smith, 4558.

2) Wade, W-8460-S.

3) Zurn, Z-1447.

4) Josam, 58770.


8. Type CO-S1, stack cleanout.

a. Cleanout tee with raised, square head plug.


1) Wade, W-8560-A.

2) Zurn, Z-1445-A.

3) Josam, 58910-20.


9. Type CO-F2, floor cleanout.

a. Heavy-duty cleanout with adjustable, round, nickel bronze, scoriated tractor top.


1) J.R. Smith, 4243/4248.

2) Wade, W-6000-Z/W-6010-Z.

3) Zurn, ZN-1400-HD NH.

4) Josam, 56050-1-Z.


10. Type CO-F4, floor cleanout.

a. Heavy-duty cleanout with round, nickel bronze, adjustable top, recessed for tile.


1) J.R. Smith, 4143/4148.

2) Wade, W-6000-T/W-6010-T.

3) Zurn, ZN-1400-X NH.

4) Josam, 56010-12-Z.


N. Roof Drains.

1. Increase depth of roof drain assembly with extension sleeves to accommodate roof insulation thickness.

2. Manufacturer series numbers for following roof drains represent basic style re-quired and do not necessarily include all modifications for sizes or options speci-fied.

3. Type RD-1, roof drain.







a. Free flow type with painted cast iron body, caulked bottom outlet, deck clamp, and cast iron large dome strainer with combined clamping collar and gravel stop.


1) J.R. Smith, 1010-C.

2) Wade, W-3000-53.

3) Zurn, Z-100-C.

4) Josam, 21500-1.


4. Type RD-2, roof drain.

a. Free flow type with painted cast iron body, threaded side outlet, deck clamp, and cast iron large dome strainer with combined clamping collar and gravel stop.


1) J.R. Smith, 1330.

2) Wade

3) Zurn

4) Josam


5. Type RD-6 roof drain.

a. Water collar overflow type with painted cast iron body, caulked bottom outlet, deck clamp, and cast iron large dome strainer with clamping collar.


1) J.R. Smith, 1080-C.

2) Wade, W-3000-D.

3) Josam, 21500-17-1.


O. Downspout Nozzle.

1. Sized as indicated on drawings.

2. Cast bronze body with loose wall flange and threaded inlet connection.


a. Josam, 25010 Series.

b. J.R. Smith, 1770.

c. Mifab, R1940 Series.

d. Wade, W-3940.

e. Zurn, Z-199.


P. Passive Grease Interceptors.

1. Manufacturer.

a. A. Highland Tank & Manufacturing Company, Inc.

b. Areo Power United Fueler Inc.

2. Undergoring Protected Steel Gravity Grease Interceptor

a. Horizontal, Single-Wall, Polyurethane-Coated, Gravity Grease Interceptors: Single-Walled Construction. Sizing and construction of interceptor is con-sistent with industry protocols for complying with sewer pretreatment regula-tions, therefore an interceptor of smaller volume or multiple, interconnecting vessel construction is not permissible.







1) Conformance: UL 58, Single-Walled Construction using high-strength, mild carbon steel.

2) Nominal Interceptor Capacity: 1,500 gallons.

3) Nominal Inside Diameter: 5 feet 4 inches.

4) Nominal Inside Length: 9 feet 0 inches.

5) External Corrosion Control System:

(a) Polyurethane Coating System:

(1) Surface Preparation: Grit blasted with steel grit.

(2) DFT, Head and Shell: 75 mils minimum.

(3) Conformance: UL 1746, Parts II and IV.

6) Internal Corrosion Control System:

(a) Epoxy Coating System: Full Immersion, High Temp, Acid-resistant Epoxy Lining.

(1) Surface Preparation: Grit blasted with steel grit.

(2) DFT, Head and Shell: 30 mils minimum.

7) Manholes:

(a) Quantity: 2

(b) Diameter: 24 inches.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Piping Schedules and Accessories.

1. Refer to Section 22 0600 for pipe schedules, general service valves, and related accessory requirements for plumbing systems specified.

B. Bedding and Backfill.

1. Refer to Division 31 for earthwork, bedding, and backfilling requirements.

C. Manhole Materials.

1. Precast concrete.

a. Risers, in accordance with ASTM C 478, with eccentric cone tops.

b. Include mastic compound jointing for concrete risers.

c. Factory cast openings for pipes in riser sections.

2. Concrete block, solid concrete radius block, in accordance with ASTM C 139.

3. Cast-in-place, reinforced concrete, in accordance with Section 03 3000.

4. Brick, solid clay, in accordance with ASTM C 32, Grade MS.

a. Cement mortar, 1 part portland cement and 3 parts clean mortar sand, in ac-cordance with ASTM C 270.

b. Manhole steps.

1) Nonslip steps conforming to OSHA and ASTM C 478.

5. Base slab.

a. Reinforced, poured-in-place, or precast concrete.

b. Minimum slab thickness shall be 8 inches, with minimum No. 5 reinforcing bars at 8 inches on center each way.

c. Precast slabs shall have reinforcing in accordance with ASTM C 478.

d. Compressive strength of concrete: 4000 psi at 28 days.

D. Flashing Materials.

1. Lead: 4 pound sheet lead in accordance with FS QQ-L-201F(2).







2. Plastic: Sheet form nonplasticized chlorinated polyethylene, 0.040 inch thick min-imum.

a. Acceptable manufacturer.

1) Noble Co., Chloraloy 240.


3. Copper: Sheet copper, 16 ounces per square foot, in accordance with ASTM B 370.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Underground Systems.

1. Refer to Section 22 0600 for additional underground piping systems installation requirements.

2. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, underground gravity drainage pipe speci-fied in this Section includes pipe inside building and runs to 5 feet outside building perimeter.

B. Joint Seals.

1. Use epoxy bonding compound or prefabricated joint sealers when joining combi-nations of cast iron, vitrified clay, and concrete pipe, or when connecting into ex-isting pipe lines.

2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Prefabricated Joint Sealers.

1. Use prefabricated joint sealers when joining combinations of cast iron, vitrified clay, and concrete pipe, or when connecting into existing pipe lines.

2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Manholes.

1. Install precast concrete risers and tops for cast-in-place concrete manholes where indicated.

2. Extend cast-in-place construction 18 inches above highest incoming sewer pipe.

3. If more than 2 openings are required in 1 riser section, construct lower section of concrete block from the base to a point 18 inches above highest incoming sewer pipe.

4. Cast poured-in-place base slabs on earth subgrade.

5. Place precast concrete base slabs on compacted leveling course of sand, not less than 3 inches thick.

6. Level manhole frames, anchor and grout them to top of manholes.

7. Set manhole tops flush with finished grade, floor, or pavement.

8. Install 3 courses of brick between cone and frame.

9. Lay up brick with sand-cement mortar.

10. Lay up concrete blocks with cement mortar.

11. Plaster and trowel outside of walls with 1/2 inch thick cement mortar.

12. Fill annular air spaces at pipe openings with manhole adapters and nonshrink mortar.







13. Where plugged openings for future connections in manholes are indicated, install 3 foot length of pipe, fitted with bulkhead cap equal in strength to side walls of pipe.

E. Aboveground Piping Systems.

1. Refer to Section 22 0600 for additional aboveground piping systems installation, testing, and flushing requirements.

2. Pitch horizontal drainage lines downward in direction of flow, not less than 1/8 inch per foot.

3. Align eccentric reducers in water lines so pipe sections are flush at top.

4. Exposed chrome plated piping around fixtures shall not show tool marks or threads at fittings.

5. Regulate flow of water to each fixture so faucets operate satisfactorily without waste of water or objectionable noise.

6. Where possible, recess vertical conductors within channels of building columns, or set them tight against building walls.

7. Install vent piping required by code, as shown on drawings, or necessary to pre-vent siphonage or back pressure on traps.

8. Make offsets in vent pipes at angle of not less than 45 degrees to horizontal, where possible.

9. Extend vent pipes 2 feet above roof.

10. Increase vent pipes less than 4 inches in diameter to 4 inches, below roof surface.

F. Piping Specialties.

1. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Mechanical type absorbers.

a. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for size, location, and method of installation. Allow for servicing access.

b. Submit Shop Drawings showing details of installation and location for review.

G. Wall hydrants: Neatly grout into place, hydrants installed in masonry or precast con-crete walls.

H. Floor Drains.

1. Unless noted on Drawings, coordinate floor drain top elevations with Owner's Representative prior to pouring concrete floor slabs.

2. Set floor drains at proper elevations to attain satisfactory floor drainage.

3. Set tops of floor drain strainers approximately 3/8 inch below level of finished floor, cast drains into concrete or terrazzo when floors are poured, and make wa-tertight.

4. Maintain drain's position during pour.

5. Locate floor drains where they receive sufficient water to maintain seals in traps.

6. Upon demand of plumbing inspector, install water connection for renewing trap seals.

I. Roof drains.

1. Install and connect roof drains in strict accordance with requirements of manufac-turer.

2. Coordinate installation with roof installation work to ensure proper drain eleva-tions.







3. After flashing has been installed, make certain clamping collar is properly installed and secured.

J. Cleanouts.

1. Install cleanouts where indicated and as required by applicable codes.

2. Aesthetically locate cleanouts with respect to tile patterns, masonry bond, and alignment. Coordinate installation with concrete and masonry work.

3. Install cleanouts at ends of main and branch runs, at traps, in horizontal drainage lines changing direction 45 degrees or more, and at or near base of each vertical waste, soil stack, or conductor.

4. Where stack cleanouts are installed within walls, extend cleanout to back of wall and conceal with removable wall cover.

5. In straight trunk line sewers, sized 6 inches and smaller having no change in di-rection, install cleanouts on 50 foot centers maximum.

6. Install manholes for pipe sized 8 inches and larger at minimum 400 feet intervals and at every change in direction, grade elevation, and size.

7. Take below grade cleanout connections off top of drainage lines at angle of 45 degrees to pipe axis.

8. Install cleanouts in accessible locations and with minimum of 18 inches clearance.

9. Remove each threaded plug from cleanout assembly and make free turning.

10. Prior to acceptance of system, demonstrate that cleanout plugs are easily remov-able and that cleanouts can be easily rodded with standard rodding tools, if re-quested by Owner's Representative.

K. Flashing.

1. Extend flashing minimum of 6 inches beyond outside edge of drainage specialty, or not less than 24 inches square.

2. Fit flashing into flashing clamp and flange, work outside edge into floor construc-tion and make watertight.

3. Flashing shall not obstruct weepholes.

4. Flashing not required for floors on grade.

5. Plastic waterproofing membrane may be used instead of sheet lead for flashing floor drains, hub outlets, or cleanouts. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

6. Set roof drain flashing loosely in place, ready for installation under Division 07.

7. Pipe flashing, refer to Section 22 0600 for pipe flashing requirements.


A. Plumbing Systems Testing.

1. In accordance with applicable general testing requirements specified in Section 22 0600 and as specified in this Section.

2. Test pressure systems at 1-1/2 times systems operating pressure, or at test pres-sures indicated below, whichever is greater.

3. Use hydro pressure test at 1-1/2 times system operating pressure or 150 psig whichever is greater for not less than 2 hours.

a. Allowable Pressure loss.

1) Potable Water: Not more than 0 psig.

B. Drainage, Waste, and Vent Piping Testing.







1. Test piping hydrostatically at static head of 10 feet. No leakage is acceptable.

2. Air tests may be substituted for hydrostatic tests by forcing air into closed system at uniform pressure sufficient to equalize column of mercury 10 inches in height or pressure of 5 psi.

3. Test aboveground piping by closing openings in piping system, except highest opening above roof, and by filling to point of overflowing.

4. Test pressure shall remain constant, after stabilization, for not less than 15 minutes without further addition of water or air.

5. Maintain test pressure in aboveground systems for one hour.

6. Maintain test pressure in underground systems for one hour.

C. Testing of Backflow Prevention Devices.

1. Performed by certified tester.

2. Assure performance within limits of local Department of Public Health cross con-nection rules

D. Plumbing Systems Flushing.

1. Flush in accordance with applicable general flushing requirements specified in Section 22 0600 and as specified in this Section.

2. Flush potable and nonpotable water systems after successful hydrostatic and leak tests, and cleaning operations.

3. Prior to testing, thoroughly flush piping with water for period of 15 minutes or longer, to ensure removal of dirt, scale, oil, cuttings, and other foreign matter from piping system.

E. Potable Water Systems Disinfection.

1. Disinfecting of complete water systems shall be in accordance with AWWA C651, and in accordance with requirements of state or local authorities.

2. Disinfection process shall be done only by company specializing in water treat-ment, having experienced operators, and appropriate equipment.

3. Conduct work under supervision of governing local or state authorities.

4. Disinfect completed potable water supply lines and distribution systems, with chlo-rine, before being placed in operation.

5. Chlorine dosage: Not be less than 50 parts per million.

6. Flush chlorinated water from system, following contact period, with clear water un-til residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 part per million.

7. Open and close valves in disinfected water lines at least four times during sterili-zation period.

END OF SECTION





COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513 - 1


SECTION 23 0513 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions.

B. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels.

C. Section 09 9100 - Painting.

D. Division 26.


A. ASTM C109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars; 2005.

B. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes; 2005.

C. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes ; 2001.

D. ASTM C827 - Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementi-tious Mixtures; 2001a (Reapproved 2005).

E. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) MG 1 - Motors and Generators ; 2003.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) ; 2008.

H. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act, latest edition.

I. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).


A. Coordinate installation of piping and ductwork including associated support systems with existing systems and supports and other building trades, equipment, and systems, so as to avoid interferences between individual trades and between trades and build-ing construction.

B. Design of mechanical and electrical systems in ceiling space and truss space has been coordinated to avoid interferences between major components of each system.

1. Final coordination of components shall be performed by installation contractors.

2. Contract documents include suggested ceiling space and truss space zoning con-cepts to assist contractors in final coordination.

C. Prepare piping and ductwork installation drawings for purpose of coordination with other trades. Sheet metal contractor shall be responsible for collecting installation







documentation from mechanical, electrical, and information technology (IT) trades and create coordination drawings.

D. General Contractor shall distribute final coordination drawings to all contractors.

1. General Contractor shall schedule periodic coordination meetings to resolve inter-ferences.

2. Upon mutual agreement to overall coordination by contractors involved, contrac-tors shall revise their installation drawings to reflect agreed upon location of their respective services.

3. Mechanical contractor shall revise coordination drawings after interferences have been resolved.

4. Fabrication and installation of piping and ductwork shall not commence until coor-dination drawings have been finalized.

E. Piping and ductwork that is not installed according to final coordination drawings shall be corrected at Contractor’s expense.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. For Information.

1. Certificates.

a. Motors for motor operated equipment.

C. For Closeout.


a. Power and control circuits of assembly, including ladder type elementary schematic diagrams, and interconnection wiring diagrams, having numbered terminal and wire numbers corresponding to designations on terminal strips and control components.

b. Complete electrical sequence of operation corresponding to control diagrams.

2. Operation and Maintenance Data.

a. Equipment operation and maintenance instructions, each set separately bound in hard cover, 3-ring binder containing same type paper sheets for all items, and consisting of following sections.

1) Description of system.

2) Installation and operating instructions.

3) Maintenance requirements for equipment.

4) Controls and adjustments.

5) Parts lists.

6) System electrical wiring diagrams.

b. Obtain information from manufacturers of major equipment and control sys-tems on firms that are factory authorized for maintenance and repair services.

c. List containing following information.

1) Type of equipment or system.

2) Name, address, and telephone number of authorized service organiza-tion, including phone number designated for receiving service calls dur-ing nonbusiness hours.







3) Names of personnel responsible for receiving or responding to requests for service calls.


A. Use vendors and equipment manufacturers capable of furnishing local support.

B. Materials and equipment shall be purchased for this project with manufacturer's full warranty, and certified as specified manufacturer's products. Unacceptable are surplus materials from other projects, obsolete or discontinued products, and products rebuilt, remanufactured, or altered in materials, markings, labels, or nameplates.

C. Furnish equipment that is listed and labeled.

1. Listed and Labeled as defined in NEC Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications, a Nationally Recognized Testing La-boratory (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. While Owner's Field Representative's drawings and Specifications propose to be com-plete in all respects as to layout, type of equipment, and materials, drawings and Spec-ifications are not intended to serve as detailed system or equipment location drawings.

E. Prepare detailed piping, duct, sleeve, or insert installation drawings, and equipment lo-cation drawings.

F. Submit detailed pipe, duct, and equipment supports indicating location of miscellane-ous steel and building steel connections.

G. System drawings shall locate each system in relation to other systems, to electrical work, and to building structure.

H. Mark drawings to identify function of each item, location, and proposed system where item is to be installed.

I. Include Contract drawing on which item is shown and page in Specifications where item is described.

J. If code designation letters are used to identify the specific design of submitted equip-ment and components, and if code designations are not clearly defined in manufactur-er's published literature, submit glossary identifying in complete detail the meaning of code designations used.

K. Factory furnished equipment and controllers shall be designed to prevent power line disturbances, such as spikes, harmonics, and other irregularities in sine wave configu-ration of fundamental.

L. Furnish filters or other devices that limit back feeding of disturbances into power sup-ply system and limiting harmonics content to not more than 3 percent of fundamental.

M. Voltage spikes shall not exceed 150 percent of peak system voltage.

N. If equipment is found to destabilize building power supply, furnish, install, and inter-wire, at no change in Contract price, manufacturer accepted devices and circuits to re-store power system stability.









B. Deliver.

1. To site in original unopened containers and pallets bearing manufacturer's name and brand.

2. Affix labels to products, pallets, and containers.

3. Delivered products and containers without complete labels may be rejected.

C. Store.

1. On level, aboveground platforms.

2. Keep containers dry and free from dust and other airborne contaminants.

3. Protect stored absorptive material from moisture damage.

4. Promptly remove adhesives and adhesive tapes from material and equipment sur-faces, where prolonged contact could damage surfaces.

D. Piping Systems.

1. Cover threaded pipe, fitting, and valve ends with thread protectors.

2. Support stored pipe to prevent permanent deformation from ovalizing, crushing, or sagging.

3. Protect machined surfaces from nicks, dents, scratches, and abrasions, and pro-tect valve yokes, stems, handwheels, operators, and linkage from undue stresses.

4. Protect piping from dust and moisture.

E. Equipment.

1. Deliver in cartons, crates, or on sleepers.

2. Hoist, transport, rig, and store equipment to prevent damage.

3. Seal openings to prevent entry of dust, dirt, water, and other contaminants.

4. Store boxed equipment on shelves.

5. Crated equipment and equipment mounted on sleepers may be stored on ground, if no part of equipment comes in contact with ground or with water.

F. Instrumentation.

1. Deliver in original containers and packed to withstand shocks of anticipated han-dling.

2. Store instrumentation in dry locations, off floor and protect from dirt, moisture, dust, and other contaminants.

1.07 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Electrical System Characteristics.

1. Electrical supply.

a. Power: 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, and 120 volts, single phase, 60 hertz.







b. Control: 120 volts and lower, single phase, 60 hertz, and 24 volt direct cur-rent.

2. Furnish and install for package, self-contained equipment.

a. Electrical components.

1) Factory mounted.

2) Factory piped.

3) Factory wired.

(a) Wiring mounted on external surfaces of equipment factory installed within conduit.

4) Totally interconnected.

b. Load side power connections.

c. Mechanical and electrical controls.


A. Motors.

1. Motor characteristics.

a. Ball bearing type.

b. Rating equal to or greater than brake horsepower of connected load.

c. Service factor: 115 percent of nameplate rating when operated in 40 degrees C ambient.

d. Deliver rated load continuously from 10 percent below to 10 percent above rated voltage without decrease in expected motor life.

e. Supply standard fractional size, single phase motors with resilient base mounting.

f. Open, dripproof motors for.

1) General application within the building.

2) Enclosed applications within unit housing (not in airstream).

g. Totally enclosed fan-cooled motors.

1) For outdoor installation where exposed to weather.

2) Where located within the air stream of supply or exhaust fans.

h. Motors Used With Variable Speed Drives.

1) Coordinate with variable speed drive manufacturer.

2) Class F or Class H insulation and Class B minimum temperature rise.

3) Sized to reflect extra duty required by high harmonic content of variable speed drive output waveform.

4) Shaft voltage.

(a) Verify compatibility with drive by measuring shaft voltage upon commissioning and start-up.

(b) Furnish shaft grounding system installed on each motor.

2. Motors rated.

a. 3/4 horsepower and larger: 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz.

b. Under 3/4 horsepower: 115 volt, single phase, 60 hertz.

3. T-frame, integral horsepower motors rated 200 hp and less.

a. Severe-duty, high-efficiency design.

1) When tested in accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, rated in ac-cordance with NEMA, MG1-12.53A.







2) Show nominal efficiency on motor nameplates.

3) Nominal efficiencies defined by NEMA, MG1-12.53B and following table.

T-Frame Motors


Nominal Efficiency


Nominal Efficiency

1/8 - 15 92.4 1/6 - 20 93 1/4 - 25 93.6 1/3 - 30 93.6 1/2 - 40 94.1 3/4 - 50 94.5 1 85.5 60 95 1-1/2 86.5 75 95.4 2 86.5 100 95.4 3 89.5 125 95.4 5 89.5 150 95.8 7-1/2 91.7 200 96.2 10 91.7 300 96.2


a. A.O. Smith Century.

b. Baldor.

c. General Electric Co.

d. Howell Electric Motors.

e. Lincoln.

f. Reliance Electric.

g. Siemens.

h. Toshiba.

i. U.S. Electrical Motors.

j. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Housekeeping Pads.

1. Furnish and install anchor plates, foundation bolts, nuts, and washers for setting of equipment.

2. Construct of 2500 psi concrete mixture, shaped to accommodate equipment it supports, with smooth top surface and 1 inch beveled edges, sized not less than 4 inches above floor level and 2 inches beyond perimeter of supported equipment or equipment bedplate.

3. Furnish anchor plates, bolts, nuts, washers, and bolt inserts required for secure mounting of equipment.

4. Locate anchor bolt inserts in pouring forms prior to pouring concrete foundations and concrete housekeeping pads.

5. Maintain inserts in position and in proper alignment during pouring and setting of concrete.







6. Anchor bolts shall be screwed into inserts prior to concrete pour in order to main-tain insert bolt holes free of concrete.

7. Wood, fiber, or lead insert plugs are prohibited.

B. Grouting.

1. Furnish and install grout for setting of equipment bases, rails and bedplates, and pipe supports located on building floors, concrete slabs, foundations, inertia blocks, and housekeeping pads.

2. Cementitious grout.

a. Consist of premixed, prepackaged materials supplied by manufacturer, re-quiring only the addition of potable water.

b. Performance criteria (high-flow epoxy grout).



3) Compressive strength of not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109.

4) Containing no metallic particles, aluminum powder, or expansive cement.


1) L and M Construction Chemicals, Crystex.

2) Master Builders, Masterflow 928 and 713.

3) U.S. Grout, Five Star Grout.

4) Dayton Superior, Sure-Grip High Performance Grout.


3. Epoxy-based grout.

a. Pourable, 100 percent solids epoxy system consisting of 3 premeasured, prepackaged components.

b. Performance criteria (regular epoxy grout).

1) Suitable for installation in annular spaces of 2 inches and greater.







c. Acceptable products (regular epoxy grout).

1) Dayton Superior, Sure-Grip Epoxy Grout.

2) L and M Construction Chemicals, Epo Grout.

3) Master Builders Technologies, Brutem 19 Grout.

4) Philadelphia Resins, Chockfast Orange Grout.

5) U.S. Grout, Five Star Epoxy Grout.


4. High-flow epoxy grout

a. Performance criteria.

1) Suitable for installation in annular spaces of less than 2 inches.













b. Acceptable products (high flow epoxy grout).

1) Master Builders Technologies, 650 High Flow and Brutem 19-HF.

2) Philadelphia Resins, Chockfast Gray Grout.

3) U.S. Grout, Five Star Speed Epoxy Chock.


C. Safety Cables.

1. Furnish 3/16 inch steel rope safety cables for motors on suspended air handling equipment.

2. Attach cables to motors and to building construction by clamps or other accepta-ble means.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Disposal of Removed Materials and Equipment.

1. Refer to Section 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions, for removal and disposal of hazardous materials.

2. Take possession of and remove from Owner's premises, materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not reinstalled.

B. Equipment Rigging Over Roof Areas.

1. Protect building structure against damage during equipment rigging.

2. Make provisions to distribute load of equipment to main roof structure and crib, and to prevent damage to metal roof decking, roofing, or purlins.

C. Painting.

1. Include Section 09 9100 for painting mechanical work.

2. Equipment shall be either factory prime coated or factory finish painted.

3. Perform touch up where factory prime coat or factory finish have been scratched, abraded, dulled, or otherwise damaged or rendered unsightly.

4. Touch up shall restore original finish as to color, texture, and gloss, and shall be indistinguishable from original finish.

D. Openings in Building Structure.

1. Openings for air handling system, equipment, components, and ducts.

a. Specified in other Sections.

b. Cut required metal deck openings for ductwork.

2. For new piping, tubing, and conduit openings in existing concrete.

a. Locate reinforcing bars prior to coring hole by x-ray or other approved means.







b. Do not cut reinforcing bars.

c. Furnish and install pipe sleeves and caulk sleeves in position.

d. Cut piping, tubing, and conduit openings in existing masonry by coring or with drill points and chisels.

3. For piping, tubing, and conduit openings in new concrete.

a. Furnish and install sleeves in concrete formwork and maintain their position during pouring and setting of concrete.

b. Where concrete floors incorporate permanent metal forms, cut forms and in-stall sleeves to penetrate metal forms.

4. For piping, tubing, and conduit openings in new masonry.

a. Furnish sleeves to jobsite, for installation in other Sections.

b. Coordinate location of sleeves with masonry work.

E. Cut Openings for Piping and Ducts.

1. In smoke baffles, draft curtains, or vertical metal deck closures neat and straight, without dents or jagged edges.

2. Opening sizes shall not be larger than piping and ducts passing through them.

3. Reinforce edges of duct openings with angle iron frames.

4. Close unused openings with metal siding or sheet metal, securely fastened to baf-fle faces.

F. Work on Existing Ceilings.

1. Remove, protect from damage or soiling, and store components of existing sus-pended ceilings that interfere with work in existing ceiling spaces.

2. After completion of work inside of ceiling spaces, restore removed ceilings to orig-inal condition.

3. Furnish and install new ceilings and suspension systems, where existing ceilings are damaged or marred.

4. Perform work to minimize damage and to leave ceilings in best possible condition.

5. Work shall be done by experienced personnel regularly employed as installers by manufacturers of suspended ceiling systems.

G. Access Doors in Walls and Ceilings.

1. Coordinate installation of access doors with other trades where required to main-tain serviceability of mechanical system components.

2. Refer to Section 08 3100, Access Doors and Frames.

H. Systems and Equipment.

1. Where Contract requires work to exceed standards required by applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or other statutory provisions, perform and complete work in accordance with Contract requirements.

2. Install systems and equipment in accordance with Shop Drawings reviewed by Owner's Field Representative.

3. Coordinate installation of piping, ductwork, and mechanical equipment with work of other Sections to avoid interferences.

4. To minimize interference with Owner's operations, consult with Owner's Repre-sentative as to methods of carrying on work.

5. Resolve interferences with other work.

6. Avoid system intrusion into occupied space, unsightliness, and clutter.







7. Maintain clearances for installation, operation, expected motion, actuation, servic-ing, removal, and reinstallation of system components and equipment.

8. Arrange piping systems for uniform specified pitch, for complete drainability, and for ready ventability.

I. Grouting of Equipment Bases, Rails and Bedplates, and Pipe Supports.

1. Perform grouting in accordance with requirements of grout manufacturer.

2. Cure concrete surfaces for minimum of 14 days prior to placing grout.

3. Clean and roughen surfaces to ensure bond of grout to concrete.

4. Clean anchor sleeves of debris and moisture.

5. Furnish and install forms, including chamfer edge strips around perimeter of equipment prior to placing grout.

6. After equipment has been set in place, leveled, shimmed, and anchored, grout anchor bolt sleeves and allow to set 24 hours before completing grouting of equipment base.

7. Apply grouting to base to ensure support for entire contact area of base.

8. Work grout with push rods or link chains until air pockets are eliminated.

9. After grout has acquired initial set, remove shim plates and jacking bolts and fill voids with grout.

10. After grout has cured, remove forms and trim grout to ensure smooth finish.

11. Tighten anchor bolts prior to start of equipment and retighten following initial equipment operation.


A. General.

1. Upon completion of work, prior to testing, conduct final inspection and ensure fix-tures, equipment, and piping have been cleaned and placed in complete and sat-isfactory working order.

B. Equipment.

1. Furnish manufacturer's factory authorized service for adjustments and start-up, where required for preservation of guarantees.

2. Do not jog or start equipment until completion of factory authorized service.

3. Clean and degrease equipment.

4. Check nameplates for readability.

a. Remove paint smears.

b. Where nameplates are illegible, arrange for replacement by equipment manu-facturer.

5. Motor driven equipment.

a. Start equipment and make sure thermal overload protection will not shut down motor during acceleration period.

b. Check motors for direction of rotation.

c. Obtain assistance where required to reverse motor rotation.

d. Check identification, instruction, and warning labels.

e. Prepare lubrication schedule and deliver this schedule to Owner.

f. Schedule for each piece of equipment to include.

1) Locations for lubricant application.

2) Type of lubricant.







3) Lubricating device.

4) Quantity of lubricant to be dispensed during each application.

5) Frequency of lubrication.

g. Check for factory applied lubrication and add lubricant where required.

h. In particular, make sure extended lubricating lines are completely filled.

i. Check bearing seals.

1) Replace blown seals with seals complying with Contract criteria.

2) Check associated bearings for foreign matter and damage.

3) Flush and relubricate, or furnish and install seals complying with Contract criteria.

j. Turn equipment shafts by hand to check for binding or rough bearing action.

1) Investigate causes of binding and rough bearing action.

2) Repair, adjust, or furnish and install components complying with Contract criteria to achieve proper operation.

3) In particular, furnish and install roller and ball bearings complying with Contract criteria if bearings exhibit evidence of race pitting, brinelling, rust, or discoloration.

k. Check rotating equipment for smooth operation.

l. Rebalance or replace rough running equipment.

m. Confirm shaft voltages are 3 volts or less to ground for all motors used with variable speed drives.

6. Flush out corrosion inhibiting compounds, where applied by manufacturer to pre-vent deterioration in transit and storage.

7. Witness and certify Acceptance Document for each piece of equipment and each system.

END OF SECTION





VALVES 23 0523 - 1


SECTION 23 0523 – VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 23 0513 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment.

B. Section 23 0720 – HVAC Insulation.

C. Section 25 5001 – Building Management System


A. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping ; 1996 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. For Information.

1. Product Data.

a. For each product and component.


A. Unless otherwise specified, welding procedures and welder or welding operator per-formance shall be qualified in accordance with ASME B31.9.


A. Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for transportation, storage, and handling requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. All HVAC valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America,

B. Type GSV-1, General Service Valves.

1. Figure numbers specified, are for the purpose of establishing style and quality re-quired.

2. Valves through 2 inches.

a. Ball valves: Screwed 150 pound bronze body and ball with Teflon seat and seals, lever handle, Apollo 70-100 Series.

1) Other acceptable manufacturers.

(a) Anvil International, Inc.

(b) Neles-Jamesbury.





VALVES 23 0523 - 2


(c) Watts.

(d) Milwaukee.

(e) Nibco.

(f) Kitz.

(g) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

b. Ball Valves:ANSI Class 150 flanged carbon steel body, standard port stain-less steel ball with Teflon seat and seals, lever handle, Apollo 88-100 Series.


(a) Anvil International, Inc.

(b) Neles-Jamesbury.

(c) Watts.

(d) Milwaukee.

(e) Nibco.

(f) Kitz.

(g) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

c. Gate valves: Screwed 150 pound bronze body with solid wedge disc and ris-ing stem, Nibco T-134.


(a) Apollo.

(b) Watts.

(c) Crane.

(d) Anvil International, Inc.

(e) Milwaukee.

(f) Stockham.

(g) Powell.

(h) Kitz.

(i) Red-White Valve Co.

(j) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

d. Globe valves: Screwed 150 pound bronze body with oilproof composition disc and rising stem, Nibco T-235-Y.


(a) Apollo.

(b) Watts.

(c) Crane.


(e) Milwaukee.

(f) Stockham.

(g) Powell.

(h) Kitz.



e. Angle valves: Screwed 150 pound bronze body with oilproof composition disc and rising stem, Nibco T-335-Y.


(a) Apollo.

(b) Watts.

(c) Crane.





VALVES 23 0523 - 3



(e) Milwaukee.

(f) Stockham.

(g) Powell.

(h) Kitz.



f. Check valves: Screwed 200 pound bronze body, swing type, regrindable seat, Nibco T-453-B.


(a) Apollo.

(b) Crane.

(c) Keystone.

(d) Apco.

(e) Anvil International, Inc.

(f) Stockham.

(g) Powell.

(h) Milwaukee

(i) Kitz.


g. Note, use of solder joint valves is acceptable for copper piped systems.

h. Disassemble valves when soldering, as recommended by the manufacturer, to prevent damage to internal parts.

3. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger.

a. Ball valves (sizes 2-1/2 inches through 4 inches).

1) Bronze, standard port, screwed, 2-piece body style, stainless steel ball and stem, TFE seats, seals with packing suitable for service, lever han-dle, Watts Series B-6000.


(a) Apollo.

(b) Milwaukee.

(c) Crane.

(d) Nibco.


b. Ball valves (sizes 2-1/2 inches through 6 inches).

1) Carbon steel, full port, flanged, split body style, ANSI Class 150, stain-less steel ball and stem, 15 percent glass filled TFE seats, seals with packing suitable for service, lever handle, Nibco F515-CS-R-66/FS.


(a) Apollo.

(b) Watts.

(c) Milwaukee.

(d) Crane.


c. Gate valves: Flanged 125 pound iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, renewable seat, wedge disc, Nibco F-617-O.

1) Other acceptable manufacturers





VALVES 23 0523 - 4


(a) Watts.

(b) Crane.

(c) Anvil International, Inc.

(d) Stockham.

(e) Powell.

(f) Milwaukee.

(g) Kitz.

(h) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

d. Globe valves: Flanged 125 pound iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, Nibco F-718-B.


(a) Apollo.

(b) Watts.

(c) Crane.


(e) Stockham.

(f) Powell.

(g) Milwaukee

(h) Kitz.

(i) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

e. Check valves: Flanged 125 pound iron body, bronze trim, renewable seat, Nibco F-918-B.


(a) Apollo.

(b) Crane.

(c) Keystone.

(d) Apco.

(e) Anvil International, Inc.

(f) Stockham.

(g) Powell.

(h) Milwaukee

(i) Kitz.


C. Butterfly Valves (General Service).

1. Full lug type with ductile iron or semisteel (cast iron) body, aluminized bronze disc, stainless steel shaft, bronze or stainless steel shaft bushings, O-ring shaft seal, and phenolic or steel ring reinforced seat.

2. Seat designed for bubbletight shutoff to 175 psig and replaceable.

3. Lugs drilled and tapped for dead-end service.

4. Furnished with extended stems to accommodate 2 inches of insulation.

5. Seat material: Resilient EPDM seats where specified, for systems where con-veyed liquid has an elevated temperature.

6. Seat material: Resilient Buna-N, EPDM, or filled Teflon seats where specified.

7. Except where electric operators are indicated, furnish notch plate, self-locking, lever handle operator for valves 5 inches and smaller and grease lubricated worm gear operator with handwheel, for valves 6 inches and larger.






VALVES 23 0523 - 5


a. Bray, Series 31.

b. Center Line, Series 200.

c. Crane, Monarch 23N or Quartermaster.

d. Demco, NE.

e. Dezurik, 632LB.

f. Durco (Duriron), RS 500 Series.

g. Grinnell, Series 8000.

h. Keystone, HS2 or 129.

i. Milwaukee, Series 223.

j. Nibco, LD-2000-1.

k. Norris/O'Bannon, R3000.

l. Stockham, LD711.

m. Watts, BF-03 Series.

n. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Silent Check Valves.

1. Double-guided, silent check valves, noiseless and complete with semisteel (cast iron) bodies, renewable bronze disc and seat ring, stainless steel spring, and suit-able for 125 pound working pressure.


a. Apco, Series 300 or 600.

b. Durabla, Excalibur.

c. Anvil International, Inc.

d. Mueller Steam Specialty, Style 101M-DT or 105M-DT.

e. Streamflo.


E. Drain Valves.

1. General system drain valves.

a. Angle pattern, cast brass valve with 3/4 inch iron pipe size female threaded inlet, 3/4 inch outlet with hose-coupling male thread, rising stem, renewable washer, and removable tee handle.


1) Conbraco, No. 31-200.

2) Nibco, Fig. 73.

3) Watts, BD-4F.


2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Valve Tags.

1. 1 inch diameter minimum brass tags fastened to valve by ring and No. 16 brass jack chain, consecutively numbered with 3/8 inch steel stamp.

B. Valve Chain Wheel Operators.

1. Wheel includes malleable iron adjustable sprocket rim and guide arm, and re-quired length of chain.

C. Floor stands





VALVES 23 0523 - 6


1. Cast iron, 32 inches tall, painted, floor stands with painted cast iron handwheels and indicators.

2. Extension stem shall include universal joint, slip coupling, wheel stem couplings, and valve stem couplings.

3. For outside screw and yoke design valves, substitute yoke sleeve couplings for valve stem couplings.


a. Crane: Floor Stands.

b. Nibco: Floor Stands

c. Powell: Fig. 319.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Valves.

1. Valve stems and other packed joints shall be tight under conditions of actual op-eration.

2. Repack those found to be leaky with best grade packing.


1) John Crane.

2) Garlock Packing Company.


3. Install valves at service connections, at locations indicated on Drawings for sec-tionalizing purposes, and as close to mains as possible.

4. Install pipe nipple and cap on outlet of valves used for sectionalizing.

5. Install stop valves and unions at individual connections to equipment, accessibly located, and arranged to allow easy removal of equipment.

6. Install drain valves at low points of water systems and where water pockets may occur.

7. Where indicated, install chain wheel operators on valves mounted more than 6 feet above working floor level.

8. Label each valve with a tag, unless service or function is obvious, as determined by Owner's Representative.

9. Furnish and install framed and glass covered directory of valves, giving number, location, and function of each valve tagged, to Owner.

10. Where it is necessary to operate more than 1 valve in order to control a section of piping, this fact and numbers of secondary valves shall be noted on directory.

END OF SECTION





VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0548 - 1


SECTION 23 0548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 23 0600 - Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.

B. Section 23 2100 - Hydronic Piping.

C. Section 23 2123 - Pumps.

D. Section 23 2200 - Steam and Condensate Systems and Specialties.

E. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.

F. Section 23 7400 - Packaged HVAC Equipment.


A. ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications ; 2007.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. For Review.

C. For Information.

1. Product data.

a. Vibration isolators indicating.

1) Equipment requiring isolation.

2) Spring outside diameters.

3) Free, operating, and solid heights.

2. Design data.

a. Weight of equipment.

b. Distribution of weight to support points.

c. Report of air mount pressure test.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Selection Criteria.

1. Select vibration isolators for actual load imposed, and in accordance with Table, Selection Guide for Vibration Isolation, in the Sound and Vibration Control chapter of the ASHRAE HVAC Applications.

2. Scheduled or specified static deflection requirements relate to actual static deflec-tion of individual mounts under their particular loads.







3. Unacceptable vibration isolator mounts include.

a. Vibration isolator mounts selected on the basis of cataloged, nominal static, deflection, while ignoring decrease in isolation efficiency due to loadings to less than those of nominal rating.

b. Isolator mounts loaded in excess of their rated load capacity.

c. Isolators selected by equally dividing total weight of equipment by proposed number of isolators.

1) Except where supported equipment is symmetrical about its vertical axis.

4. Isolator springs shall have ratio of horizontal to vertical spring constants of not less than 0.8, be horizontally unrestrained, of diameter not less than 80 percent of height at rated load and allow reserve travel of 50 percent of rated deflection from height at rated load to shorted turns condition.

5. Elastic limit of springs shall not be exceeded at shorted turns conditions.

6. Equip isolator mounts having steel springs with means for leveling suspended equipment.

7. Floor mounts.

a. Equip with leveling bolts and locknuts.

b. Select for convenient bolting of base plates to building structure.

8. Hanger mounts.

a. Furnish positioning type hanger isolators that allow installation of equipment and piping at fixed elevation independent of load changes and subsequent transfer of suspension load to springs.

b. Option, preloaded hanger isolators may be furnished with preloading devices being backed off after installation.

B. Dip coat steel elements of outdoor isolators with weather resistant paint.

C. Vibration Isolator Mountings.

1. Type D, Spring Floor Mount.

a. Individual steel spring mounts supported on elastomer pads.


1) Korfund Dynamics, Type WS Bolt Down Design.

2) Mason Industries, Type SLFH.

3) Kinetics, Model FDS Bolt Down Mounts.

4) Vibration Eliminator, Type OST.

5) Vibration Mountings and Controls, Type AWH.

2. Type H, Combination Spring and Neoprene-in-Shear Hanger Mount.

a. Hanger isolators with steel springs mounted in series with elastomer ele-ments.


1) Korfund Dynamics, Type VSPL.

2) Mason Industries, Type PC30N.

3) Kinetics, Model SRHPL.

4) Vibration Eliminator, Type PCSR.

5) Vibration Mountings and Controls, Series RSHP.

3. Type J, Neoprene-in-Shear Hanger Mount.

a. Hanger isolators with elastomer elements.


1) Korfund Dynamics, Type H.







2) Mason Industries, Type HD.

3) Kinetics, Model RH.

4) Vibration Eliminator, C Series.

5) Vibration Mountings and Controls, Series RHDC.

4. Type K, Thrust Restraint.

a. Thrust restraint, having spring with elastomer element mounted in series, housing, rods, brackets, and means for presetting thrust force.


1) Korfund Dynamics, Thrust Restraints.

2) Mason Industries, Type WB.

3) Kinetics, Thrust Restrainer.

4) Vibration Eliminator, Thrust Restraints.

5) Vibration Mountings and Controls, SH-27.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General.

1. Install vibration isolation materials and equipment bases in accordance with man-ufacturer's written instructions.

2. Level mountings so each mount carries assigned load.

a. Mounts showing evidence of insufficient or excessive loading, buckling, squirming, totally collapsed springs, making permanent contact with lift or sag restraints, or shorted springs and elastomer elements will not be accepted.

3. Install hanger type isolators so shorting will not occur via contact between upper and lower hanger rods or via contact between lower hanger rods and isolator boxes.

4. Locate floor vibration isolator mounts so base plates are supported in horizontal position by floor slabs, beams, or other structural elements.

5. Isolator placements resulting in overhanging or tilted base plates or in bending stresses in steel plate or bar grate flooring are unacceptable.

6. Bolt base plates to supporting structure.

7. Level vibration isolator mounts and bases, to attain fully floating equipment sus-pension under loading conditions of actual operation and adjust restraints.

8. Adjust or replace defective elements as required.

9. After installation of isolation materials and before start up of equipment, clear de-bris from areas surrounding and beneath isolated equipment.

10. No rigid connections between equipment and building structure shall be made that degrades noise and vibration isolation system.

11. Electrical conduit connections to isolated equipment shall be installed with slack to allow free motion of isolated equipment.

B. Application of Mounting Types.

1. Mountings: Types scheduled on drawings.

2. Static deflection requirements: Where not indicated, defined in ASHRAE Hand-book - HVAC Applications.







3. Ductwork located within 50 feet of connections to air handling units: Support with Type H vibration isolators selected for a static deflection of 0.75 inch.

4. Fans and air handling units: At flexible connections install Type K thrust re-straints, where developed aerodynamic thrust exceeds 10 percent of weight, and where fan static pressure exceeds 5 inches water gauge.

5. Door heater air curtains: Suspend with Type H vibration isolators selected for a static deflection of not less than 1.5 inch.

6. Piping to vibration isolated equipment located within 3 hanger spacings of connec-tion: Support with Type H vibration isolators selected for a static deflection of not less than 1 inch.

7. Steam piping, within 100 feet downstream of steam pressure regulating valve and 50 feet upstream: Support with Type H vibration isolators selected for a static de-flection of 1 inch.

END OF SECTION





IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 1


SECTION 23 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. ANSI A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems ; 1981 (R1993).

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. For information.

1. Product data.

a. Pipe markers.

b. Equipment identification labels.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Pipe Markers.




2) For piping, ductwork and diffusers exposed in the Ballroom, Atrium and Prefunction Ceiling refer to architectural Room Finish Schedules for spe-cific direction on painting and labeling






A. Mechanical Identification (Piping and Ductwork).

















3) Emed.


5) Seton, Setmark.









3) Emed.




B. Ceiling Identification Markers.

1. Celluloid covered, 5/8 inch diameter marking tacks suitable for ink notation on colored face.

2. Color code indicating.

a. Yellow for HVAC valves and cocks.

b. Aluminum for orifices and air modulating devices in ductwork.

c. Red for fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, and fire protection valves.

d. Green for plumbing valves.


a. Moore.

b. Seton.

c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements

C. Valve Tags.

1. Circular brass tags identifying service and suspended by means of brass jack chains.

a. Legends shall be largest type which can be accommodated.










3) Emed.




D. Equipment Identification and Duplicate Motor Nameplate Data.

1. Laminated white plastic nameplates with black engraved letters.


a. W.H. Brady.

b. Craftmark Identification Systems.

c. Emed.

d. Marking Services, Inc.

e. Seton.

f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mechanical Identification (Piping and Ductwork).
















9. Label ductwork to indicate service, associated fan number, and direction of air-flow.

10. Label ductwork after completion of associated insulation and painting.

B. Ceiling Identification Markers.

1. Install marking tacks in ceiling at points over which mechanical items requiring service or adjustments are located.

2. Familiarize Owner's maintenance personnel with location and function of markers.







C. Mechanical Equipment.

1. Label in accordance with Owner's requirements.

2. When electric motor location renders nameplate data inaccessible, install dupli-cate motor nameplate data in easily accessible location on equipment.






END OF SECTION





TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 1


SECTION 23 0593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR

HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 23 0513 - Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment.

B. Section 23 0900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.

C. Section 23 2100 - Hydronic Piping and Specialties.

D. Section 23 2123 - Hydronic Pumps.

E. Section 23 3400 - HVAC Fans.

F. Section 23 3600 - Air Terminal Units.

G. Section 23 5701 - Heat Transfer Equipment.

H. Section 23 6000 - Air Conditioning Equipment.

I. Section 23 7400 - Packaged HVAC Equipment.


A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance ; 2002.

B. ACGIH (IV) - Industrial Ventilation, A Manual of Recommended Practice ; 2007, 26th edition.

C. ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications ; 2007.

D. ASHRAE Guideline 1 - The HVAC Commissioning Process ; 1996.

E. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems ; 1988 with 1997 Errata.

F. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems ; 2005, Seventh Edition.

G. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ; 2002.

1.03 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

A. Test, Adjust, Balance, and Perform Commissioning Work.

1. Air distribution systems, including.

a. Air handling units.

b. Fans.

c. Ductwork.

d. Air terminal units.

e. Kitchen exhaust hoods.

f. Door heaters.

2. Hydronic systems, including.







a. Heating coils.

b. Cooling coils.

c. Cabinet Unit Heats.

d. Fin tube radiation.

e. Pumps.

f. Heat exchangers.

g. Boilers.

h. Hot water converters.

B. Drawings indicate equipment locations, layouts, and general design of systems to be adjusted and balanced. Where only equipment is listed, test, adjust, and balance as-sociated systems.

C. Air distribution systems shall be tested, balanced, and adjusted to meet following crite-ria.

1. Plus or minus 5 percent of design flow rates for air handling equipment and out-lets.

2. Where terminal units serve 6 or more outlets within a common room, individual outlets may vary up to plus or minus 10 percent of design flow rates if overall room supply is within plus or minus 5 percent.

D. Hydronic systems shall be tested, balanced, and adjusted to meet following criteria.

1. Plus or minus 5 percent of design flow quantities for hydronic systems.

2. Plus or minus 5 percent of terminal heat transfer for balance by temperature dif-ferentials.

E. Systems shall be started and tested for functional performance in all modes of opera-tion including, Summer/Winter, occupied/unoccupied, warm up/cool down, day/night, full load/part load, recording concurrent performance and weather data in each mode.

F. Systems and equipment shall be commissioned for operation in accordance with de-sign intent, documented for performance, and certified before signing over to Owner.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. For Information.

1. Test Reports.

a. Completed test data forms.

b. Completed test and balance report forms.

c. Complete commission and acceptance documentation forms.


A. Furnish services of independent test and balance agency which meets one of 2 sets of qualifications specified below, and is accepted by Owner and Owner's Field Repre-sentative.

B. Assign to this agency responsibility for balancing, adjusting, and testing of systems necessary for attaining flow rates, pressures, pressure differentials, and pressure rela-tionships indicated.







C. Furnish and install additional items required for testing, adjusting, and balancing as recommended by the agency.

D. Agency shall perform Work in accordance with requirements specified in this Section.

E. Qualification Set No. 1.

1. Agency shall be known to offer services limited to balancing, adjusting, and test-ing of air systems.

2. Agency shall assign engineer or manager as job supervisor with full job responsi-bilities.

3. Agency shall be certified member in good standing of AABC or NEBB, and be cer-tified for systems test and balance Work specified.

F. Qualification Set No. 2.

1. Agency shall be fabricator and installer of mechanical systems similar to mechan-ical systems that shall be tested, but shall not be a party to Contract for manufac-ture, fabrication, installation, processing, sale or lease of materials, supplies, ac-cessories, equipment, or devices associated with Work of this Project.

2. Agency shall be certified member in good standing of NEBB, and be certified for systems test and balance Work specified.

G. Test Reports.

1. Test data forms shall be forms prepared by agency listed under heading, Refer-ences, and shall be submitted completely filled out.

2. If computers are used for calculations and data printouts, standard computer test data forms may be used, if all required information is included.

3. These forms and explanation of computer program shall be submitted for ac-ceptance prior to use.

4. Prior to final acceptance, submit 6 copies of test and balance report forms for re-view by Owner's Field Representative.

5. Reports shall be neatly typed or printed.

6. Final test reports, accepted and signed, shall be submitted for each system, in-cluding as a minimum.

a. Table of contents.

b. Summary report.

c. Identify each system for type and location.

d. Identify and list type, size, location, flow factor, and manufacturer of inlets, outlets, flow measuring devices, and equipment, as well as associated design and actual flow rates, both at maximum, minimum, and partial airflow rates where applicable.

e. Performance data sheets shall be furnished for equipment, including curves and operating information.

f. Obtain data prior to start of Work and mark operating setpoints for record.

g. Design and actual temperatures, pressures or differential pressures for each piece of equipment and for each section of system.

h. Applicable test data forms completely filled out.

i. Operating conditions of systems.

j. Atmospheric conditions or conditions of building or associated systems that have had effect on results of Work.

k. Modes of operation, if more than one.







l. Measurements and checks used to ensure accuracy of data obtained and that tolerances were met.

m. Methods or formulas and references used for correcting measured readings.

n. Information useful in analysis of test results.

o. Certified documentation of instrument calibrations.

H. Definitions.

1. Testing, to determine quantitative performance of equipment.

2. Balancing, to establish specific volumes of flow within distribution system.

3. Adjusting, to regulate specified flow rates and air patterns.

I. Identification Tags.

1. Brass tags, not less than 1 inch diameter, or 1 inch by 2 inch rectangular, secured with ring and No. 16 brass jack chain.

1.06 ADJUSTING

A. General Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Requirements.

1. Perform testing and balancing methods and procedures in accordance with one or more standards specified under heading, References, and in presence of Owner's Representative.

2. Additionally, perform testing and balancing recommended by product manufactur-ers.

3. Unless otherwise specified, furnish labor, materials, test instruments, ladders, scaffolding, extension cords, tools, and equipment necessary for complete testing, balancing, and adjusting of systems or equipment in the Contract Documents.

4. Prepare and submit test and balance report.

5. Wherever possible, cross-check readings with additional readings to ascertain that required flow rate is attained.

6. Prior to start of Work, review drawings and Specifications, and if systems may present difficulties in achieving required balanced flow conditions, notify Owner's Field Representative.

7. If, during course of Work, criteria cannot be met, immediately advise Owner's Field Representative prior to proceeding with Work.

8. Use of orifice plate to balance airflow in air distribution systems instead of air bal-ancing dampers is prohibited.

9. This does not preclude the use of perforated plates to attain uniform air distribu-tion.

10. Use of orifice plates to balance flow capacities in liquid systems is prohibited, un-less indicated on the drawings.

11. Instruments used shall have unexpired calibration dates.

12. Calibration date and date of expiration shall be noted on tag affixed to each in-strument.

13. Submit letter of certification of instrument calibrations as part of final report.

14. Furnish sufficient number of each type of instrument, in order to avoid delays.

15. Recalibrate instruments that are dropped or subjected to severe jarring.

16. In systems with redundant equipment, independently test and adjust each piece of equipment to operate within design criteria.







17. Owner's Field Representative will determine primary mode of operation in sys-tems with 2 or more operating modes.

18. After final adjustment in primary mode, secondary modes shall be tested and sys-tem data recorded.

19. Owner's Field Representative will determine whether additional balancing and ad-justing is necessary to meet secondary mode requirements.

20. Coordinate systems test and balance Work with the systems installation.

21. After final adjustment, permanently mark position of balancing devices equipped with external means of setting the position.

B. Requirements for Testing and Balancing Air Distribution Systems.

1. Test, balance, and adjust air distribution systems, equipment, components, and system related items to accomplish design objectives.

2. Note air mixing dampers regarding operation, location, and damper blade orienta-tion for compliance with information on drawings.

a. Check air flow within intake plenums and mixing boxes of air handling units for uneven flow and temperature stratification and prepare a report with pro-file elevations (temperature and velocity) on each coil or filter face for Owner's Field Representative.

b. In some cases, direction of nonducted air movement from rooms under posi-tive or negative pressure is more relevant than exact airflow rates.

c. These cases will be determined by Owner's Field Representative.

d. Direction of nonducted air flows, including air distribution pattern over the en-tire door opening, shall be verified by use of smoke tubes with results record-ed on data sheets.

e. Coordinate installation and replacement of dampers or devices required for balancing.

f. Mark final fix setting of volume dampers by drilling and pinning the handles with sheet metal screws.

3. Perform testing and adjusting of terminal units and devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions or in accordance with procedures established by one or more of system's test and balance standards at maximum, minimum, and in-termediate load conditions.

4. Mark terminal units calibration curve to indicate minimum and maximum setpoints.

5. Attach identification tags to terminal units identifying box size, room served, and date of test.

6. Air distribution systems shall be tested, balanced, and adjusted under following operating conditions.

a. Tests shall be conducted with supply, return, and exhaust systems operating.

b. Doors, windows, hatches, and similar openings shall be closed or in position to reflect projected operating conditions.

c. Systems that may affect system being tested shall be operating at near de-sign flow and temperatures.

d. Whenever possible, final readings and settings shall be made with coils oper-ating (wet).

e. Systems shall operate at design airflow rates with simulated air resistance for 75 percent of dirty filter condition.

f. Furnish blankoff panels over filters as required to achieve simulation.







7. Comply with equipment manufacturer's published recommendations and proce-dures in testing, balancing, and adjusting of device or system.

8. Obtain manufacturer's data on installed air handling equipment.

9. Nameplate data only shall be recorded for nonducted fans with design capacity of less than 1000 cfm.

10. Adjust total system airflow rates by changing fan speed, inlet vane position, or fan blade position.

a. Use fan speed as primary adjustment to ensure maximum system efficiency.

b. Where it is impossible to adjust total system air quantities by methods out-lined above, total may be reduced by use of volume dampers if noise level does not increase beyond acceptable limits, in opinion of Owner's Field Rep-resentative.

c. Select required sheave sizes and advise installing contractor to change drive sheaves accordingly.

d. Retest system after fan speed changes or adjustments have been made.

11. Systems with economizer cycles shall be adjusted with winter as primary mode, and with economizer at 100 percent outside air as secondary operating mode.

12. Systems with different outside air capacities for winter and summer operating modes shall be adjusted with winter as primary operating mode, and summer as secondary operating mode.

13. Balance branch duct airflow rates with volume dampers.

14. Use dampers that are integral with terminal devices for minute final adjustments only.

15. Outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers shall be adjusted by using direct flow readings.

16. Where direct flow readings are impossible or of questionable accuracy, use mixed air temperature method.

17. Measured readings shall be corrected in following cases.

a. For air temperatures exceeding 120 degrees F or less than 20 degrees F, measured readings shall be corrected to flow rate at 70 degrees F.

b. For installations located at elevations of 2000 feet above sea level or more, measured flow readings shall be corrected for actual flow rate.

C. Air Distribution Systems Measurements.

1. Measurement and adjustment of airflow rates, temperatures, and pressures for duct systems and components shall be performed in accordance with the follow-ing requirements.

a. Air flow in main ducts, branch ducts carrying 10 percent or more of total sys-tem capacity, or individual outlets where manufacturer's outlet factor is un-known, shall be measured by pitot tube, micromanometer, or hot wire ane-mometer traverses of duct.

b. For velocities below 500 fpm, use micromanometer with minimum resolution 0.001 inch water gauge.

c. Drill test holes in ducts and seal them with removable, leaktight plugs, suita-ble for 30 inch water gauge positive or negative pressure.

d. Pitot traverses shall be made with pitot tube and inclined manometer or cali-brated differential pressure gauge.







e. Make traverses in duct sections having minimum of 4 diameters in length from nearest transition or obstruction.

f. For pitot traverses in square or rectangular ducts, mark off duct cross section in square areas of equal proportions and insert pitot tube in center of each square.

g. Number of squares need not be more than 64.

h. For less than 64, use maximum of 6 inch square.

i. Record gauge readings for each area and average velocity determined by averaging velocities or averaging square root of velocity heads.

j. For pitot traverses in round or oval ducts, follow same procedure except mark off duct in equal concentric areas and insert pitot tube in center of each con-centric area.

k. Traverses shall be made in 2 diameters at right angles to each other.

l. In round ducts with diameter of 4 inches or less, take one pitot reading in cen-ter of duct, and resultant velocity calculation shall be adjusted by multiplying by 0.9.

m. For ducts with diameter of 4 to 10 inches, measure 6 points in each diameter.

n. For ducts larger than 10 inches, measure 10 points in each diameter.

o. For pitot traverses in flat-oval ducts, combination of rectangular and round procedures shall be followed.

p. In cases where it is impossible to obtain velocity traverses in duct, difference of 2 traverses in adjoining ducts of branch or sum of individual diffuser vol-umes shall be used to determine total duct volume.

2. Measure air flow from supply or return outlets by one or more of following meth-ods.

a. By measuring velocities at locations recommended by outlet manufacturer.

b. Apply manufacturer's area or K factor to determine flow.

c. Apply calibrated hood or cone and measuring velocity at outlet of hood or cone.

d. Size hoods or cones to limit their outlet velocity to maximum of 650 fpm.

e. Apply hood or cone correction factor to determine flow.

f. By averaging anemometer readings taken in sections across outlet face.

g. Mark off outlet in sections, and take stationary readings in front of each sec-tion.

h. Apply manufacturer's area factor to determine flow.

3. Measure air flow through device as follows.

a. Measurement of flow through a coil, filter, louver, damper, or similar device shall be made by a velocity traverse, or measuring pressure drop across the device.

b. Device: Clean of dirt or obstructions before measurements are taken.

c. Manufacturer's data on free area or pressure drop should be known or care-fully calculated to determine actual flow.

d. Determine average velocity by individual readings at set intervals.

e. Make measurements for hoods after room air balance has been completed.

f. Make measurement of flow through exhaust hood or fume hood by velocity traverse.







g. Make adjustments to hood interior baffle settings to establish uniform face ve-locity under both open and closed positions of hood sash.

h. Make velocity traverses with hot wire type or 4 inch vane type anemometer attached to long handle.

i. For velocities below 100 fpm, use hot wire anemometer.

j. Individual spot readings at set intervals shall be to establish the average ve-locity.

k. To obtain flow rate, multiply velocity by free area of device or by total area and free area factor.

l. Flow determined by these methods may be used as check against pitot traverses or as actual flow delivered when it is impossible to obtain proper pi-tot traverse.

4. Measure air quantities for nonducted fans with design capacities of 1000 cfm or greater by one of the following methods.

a. By use of calibrated hoods.

b. By measuring pressure drop across coils or filter.

c. By a velocity traverse of inlet or outlet.

5. Make static or total pressure measurements as follows.

a. To determine static or total pressures in ductwork, plenum chambers, fans, fil-ters, coils, and similar devices, use inclined manometer or calibrated differen-tial pressure gauge in conjunction with appropriate pressure tips.

b. Take 2 or more readings.

c. Pressures shall be measured and recorded to the nearest 0.01 inch water gauge.

d. Use inclined manometer or calibrated differential pressure gauge of proper range to measure differential pressures between spaces or between space and fixed reference pressure.

e. Differential pressures shall be measured and recorded to nearest 0.01 inch water gauge.

6. Measure temperatures with electronic thermometer, calibrated dial thermometer of one percent accuracy, or glass stem, liquid filled thermometer with minimum of one degree graduations.

7. Measure air temperatures at single point well within airstream or, if stratification is present, by averaging readings of multiple point traverse.

8. Measure and record temperatures to nearest degree F.

9. Measure amperage with clamp-on meter.

a. Measure voltages across the line.

b. On 3 phase devices, take readings on all 3 legs.

c. Where available, make readings at open terminals of operating device.

10. Measure fan and motor rpm with automatic tachometer or stroboscopic tachome-ter, taking minimum of 2 readings.

D. Requirements for Testing and Balancing Hydronic Systems.

1. Test, balance, and adjust hydronic systems, equipment, components, and system related items to accomplish design objectives.

2. Adjust and balance hydronic systems after leak testing, flushing, and chemical cleaning have been completed.

3. Test, balance, and adjust hydronic systems under following operating conditions.







a. Supply liquid temperatures or pressure shall be at or near design.

b. Automatic control valves shall be positioned to furnish full flow through termi-nal device.

c. Balancing of air distribution system shall precede testing of hydronic system by temperature difference method.

4. Coordinate with system installation Work, installation of devices required for per-manent measuring or balancing hydronic system flow rates.

5. Performance of system component may be calculated by determining liquid flow accurately, and measuring liquid inlet and outlet temperatures.

6. Obtain manufacturer's data on installed equipment.

7. Where possible, perform primary balancing and adjusting of hydronic system by flow measurements.

E. Hydronic Systems Measurements.

1. Use gauges or manometers for measuring pressure differentials.

2. Do not use gauges permanently mounted on system, unless gauges have been calibrated.

3. Use differential pressure gauge or single pressure gauge to measure high and low pressure sides.

4. Record readings and quantity of error at permanent gauges, on test data sheet under remarks.

5. Measure and record pressures to nearest 0.5 psi.

6. Make temperature measurements with electronic thermometer, calibrated dial thermometer with 1 percent accuracy, or glass stem, liquid filled thermometer with minimum of 1 degree graduations.

7. Avoid use of surface temperature readings.

8. Flow of liquids through control valves or system components may be determined and adjusted by using flow coefficient (Cv) of device and measured pressure drop.

9. Determine cooling coil air side performance by accurately measuring cfm and wet bulb temperature of air entering and leaving coil under simulated design condi-tions.

10. Use enthalpy to determine total heat.

11. Determine heating coil air side performance by accurately measuring cfm and dry bulb temperature of air entering and leaving coil under simulated design condi-tions.

12. Relate power and rpm readings, and differential head readings across pump, with pump curve to determine flow.

13. Measure and record pressure and temperature at each heating device where pressure taps or gauges are furnished.

14. Measure pressure upstream of automatic control valves.

15. Determine flow through flow indicators or metering elements, from actual readouts or by measuring differential pressures and referencing appropriate flow curve.

F. Systems Commissioning.

1. Following completion of construction, implement commissioning plan generally in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 1.

2. Prepare guideline plan for commissioning, including following.

a. Witness pressure tests on piping and ductwork.







b. Witness system and equipment start-up.

c. Witness flushing and cleaning activities.

d. Review design drawings and equipment schedules.

e. Review Construction Documents.

f. Review control diagrams.

g. Review operating and maintenance instructions.

h. Develop, complete, witness, and certify acceptance documents for each piece of equipment, and for each system.

3. Complete commissioning work including.

a. Document and certify equipment start-up and testing.

b. Complete airflow and hydronic system adjusting and balancing.

c. Complete functional performance tests and record concurrent weather data for each system in all modes of operation including.

1) Summer/winter.

2) Occupied/unoccupied.

3) Warm up/cool down.

4) Day/night.

5) Full load/part load.

4. Performance tests shall include measurement of flow, pressure, speed, tempera-ture, velocity, noise, vibration, and other data required to establish operation of equipment and systems.

5. Cycle controls and activities through complete range and operating sequence.

6. Test, calibrate, and verify control component operation.

7. Record design and operating sequence test.

8. If operating equipment, control element, control sequence, or operating mode fail to meet original design intent, notify Owner's Field Representative.

9. Furnish maintenance instruction and training for Owner's personnel in conjunction with equipment manufacturer and controls suppliers.

10. Furnish complete documentation and report on final system operation, including signed certificates of completion for turn over of equipment and systems.

END OF SECTION





BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0600 - 1


SECTION 23 0600 – BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 23 0513 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment.

B. Section 23 0720 – HVAC Insulation.

C. Section 23 0523 – Valves.

D. Section 23 1008 – Hangers and Supports for HVAC.

E. Section 23 2100 – Hydronic Systems and Specialties.

F. Section 23 2200 – Steam and Condensate Systems and Specialties.


A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300 ; 2006.

B. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes ; 2006.

C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping ; 2004 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ; 2007.

E. ASTM A105/A105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Ap-plications ; 2005.

F. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ; 2004.

G. ASTM A181/A181M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General-Purpose Piping ; 2006.

H. ASTM A197/A197M - Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron ; 2000 (Reap-proved 2006).

I. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service ; 2007.

J. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength ; 2007b.

K. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ; 2007a.

L. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galva-nized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ; 2004a.

M. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal ; 2004.

N. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construc-tion ; 2003.

1.03 SUBMITTALS








B. For Review.

1. Shop drawings.

a. Pipe anchor installation.

C. For Closeout.



A. Qualifications.


2. For supplemental steel welding procedures.

a. In accordance with section, Qualification, of AWS D1.1.

b. Only welders who have successfully passed an examination for this class of work shall be employed to execute structural strength welds.

c. Examination shall have been within past 6 months, unless welder has been making this type of weld after passing test within 2 years, as specified under qualification procedures of AWS D1.1.



1.06 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Pressure Gauges.










B. Thermometers.







1. Standard cast aluminum case, with manufacturer's standard finish, and complete with liquid filled tube and 9 inch indicating scale.

2. Scale and stem shall be completely adjustable.

3. Furnish brass thermometer wells for thermometers in services with temperatures less than 350 degrees F. All others to be ANSI Type 18-8 stainless steel.


a. Ashcroft: Every Angle No. 200.

b. Taylor: Multi-Angle No. 30E.

c. Trerice: Adjustable Angle No. BX9.

d. Weiss Instruments: Vari-Angle 9VS.


C. Strainers.

1. Bronze, cast iron, or cast steel strainers to match material of system in which strainers are installed. Strainers tapped for installation of blowdown valve. Pres-sure rating equal to system's pressure rating.

2. Screen's free hole area: Twice internal area of pipe minimum.

3. Sizes 2 inches and smaller, Y type with threaded inlets and outlets.

4. Sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger, basket and Y type with flanged inlets and outlets.

5. Furnish 3/4 inch blowdown valves on strainers size 4 inches and larger.

6. Screens for water service: Bronze or monel metal. Maximum openings of 0.033 inch for sizes 2 inches and smaller and 3/64 inch for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.

7. Screens for steam service: Stainless steel with maximum openings of 0.033 inch for sizes 2 inches and smaller and 3/64 inch for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.


a. Mueller Steam Specialty.

b. Spence.

c. Spirax/Sarco.


D. Floor and Wall Sleeve Materials.




4. Furnish and install steel, nonseepage type sleeves for underground exterior wall and pit penetrations.


1) Metraflex.

2) Thunderline.


5. Size sleeves for pipe lines 4 inches and smaller, not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than pipe passing through.

6. Size sleeves for pipe lines larger than 4 inches, not less than one pipe size larger than pipe passing through.
















E. Caulking.







F. Automatic Air Traps.

1. Size: 3/4 inch.

2. Iron body.

3. Copper or stainless steel float.

4. Heat-treated chrome steel or stainless steel valve and seat.


a. Armstrong Machine Works, AV Series.

b. Wright-Austin, No. 90.


G. Dielectric Fittings: Insulating dielectric unions, flanges, or waterways.


a. Epco.

b. Victaulic

c. Watts.


H. Pipe Roof Penetration Enclosure, Prefabricated.

1. Sheet steel, 18 gauge, formed to shape indicated on drawings.

2. Zinc coat steel in accordance with ASTM A653, G 90.

3. Reinforce side walls 36 inches and greater in length with T-bars spaced not more than 18 inches apart and attach T-bars at top and bottom with welds.

4. Top surface of enclosure: Horizontal.

5. Fabricate enclosure base to conform with roof deck slope of curb. Continuous weld seams and joints.

6. Insulate enclosure with 1-1/2 inch thick, 3 pound density, rigid fiberglass insula-tion.

a. Insulation in contact with abutting materials.

b. Cover inboard surfaces of insulation with sheet metal, except at pipe penetra-tions.

7. Insulate sleeves for penetrating pipe or conduit with preformed, fiberglass, pipe insulation, 3 pound density.







8. Factory applied decay retardant treated wood nailer.

a. Impregnated with waterborne preservatives in accordance with Koppers Company Specifications, or equivalent by Osmose Wood Preserving Compa-ny.

b. Chemical injected: 0.35 pound per cubic foot of wood.

9. Fabricate and install removable sheet metal cover over enclosure side wall pipe penetration openings.

a. Cross brake sheet metal cover.

b. Attach Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves to cover.

c. Attach insulation to inboard surfaces of cover.

d. Attach cover to enclosure with galvanized bolts, washer under bolt head, and watertight gasket under washer.

e. Form watertight gasketed seal between enclosure and cover with gaskets 1/2 inch thick minimum.

10. Seal watertight joints formed where pipe and conduit penetrate top of enclosure with caps and boots.

a. Caps, molded acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) plastic, with integral pan-eled edges and sleeve openings.

b. Boots, polyvinyl chloride, secured in place with stainless steel clamps and worm drive draw bands.


a. Pate: PCA-5 or IPCA-5.

b. Roof Products Systems: Pipe Portal System.

c. Thycurb.


I. Flashing/Counterflashing Materials.

1. Sheet copper: 16 ounces per square foot, in accordance with ASTM B370.

2. Lead flashing: 4 pound sheet lead in accordance with FS QQ-L-201F(2).

J. Floor and Ceiling Plates.

1. Pipes sized 2 inches and smaller: Chromium plated, cast brass, adjustable plates.

2. Pipes sized 2-1/2 inches and larger: Adjustable cast iron or pressed steel plates.

K. Flange Gaskets and Bolting.





3) Klinger.


2. Bolting, Type BOLT1: Machine bolts in accordance with ASTM A307, Grade B and hex nuts in accordance with ASTM A563.

3. Bolting, TYPE BOLT2:

L. Pipe Thread Compounds.









M. Copper Jointing Material.

1. Hard solder.

a. Meeting requirements of ASTM B32.

b. Alloy containing less than 0.2 percent lead.

c. Minimum melting point: 400 degrees F.


1) J.W. Harris: Bridgit.

2) Engelhard Corp.: Silvabrite 100.


N. Pipe Anchors.

1. Refer to drawings for anchor location.

2. Anchors in truss spaces: Channel iron welded to pipe.

O. Pipe Alignment Guides.

1. Steel, factory fabricated unit with bolted spider and bolted guiding cylinder with mounting legs welded to guide cylinder.


a. Adsco: Model H.

b. B-Line: Fig. B3281 through B3287.

c. Carpenter and Paterson: Fig. 1007.


2.02 MATERIALS

A. Type BS-1, Black Steel Pipe.

1. Pipe.


b. 5 through 10 inches: Schedule 40, ASTM A53, black steel, seamless or ERW, Grade B.

c. 12 inches and larger: Standard weight, ASTM A53, black steel, seamless or ERW, Grade B.

2. Fittings, screwed: 125 pound, ASTM A126, cast iron.

3. Fittings, butt welded: Standard, ASTM A234, black steel.

4. Screwed unions: 250 pound, ASTM A197, malleable iron ground joint, brass to iron.

5. Screwed couplings: Extra heavy, ASTM A53, black steel with tapered threads.

6. Flanges: 150 pound, ASTM A181, forged steel.

B. Type BS-2, Black Steel Pipe.

1. Pipe.


b. 5 through 10 inches: Schedule 40, ASTM A53, black steel, seamless or ERW, Grade B.

c. 12 inches and larger: Standard weight, ASTM A53, black steel, seamless or ERW, Grade B.

2. Fittings, screwed: 150 pound, ASTM A197 and ASME B16.3, malleable iron, banded.

3. Fittings, socket weld: 2000 pound, ASTM A105, forged steel.







4. Fittings, butt weld: Standard, ASTM A234, black steel.

5. Unions, screwed: 250 pound, ASTM A197, malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat.

6. Couplings, screwed: Extra heavy, ASTM A53, black steel with tapered threads.

7. Couplings, socket weld: 2000 pound, ASTM A105, forged steel.

8. Flanges, 2-1/2 inches and larger: 150 pound, ASTM A181, forged steel.

9. Grooved Fittings: Match pipe, ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron.

10. Grooved Couplings: ASTM A47, malleable iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron, non-deflecting type with ASTM D 2000 slip-on rubber gaskets and coupling bolts and nuts.

a. Lightweight, snap lock, side outlet or plain end type grooved couplings, and mechanical tees are prohibited.


C. Type COP-1, Copper Tubing.

1. Tubing: Type L, ASTM B88, copper tubing, hard drawn. Furnish annealed tubing where flared or compression fittings are indicated.

2. Socket fittings: 150 pound, ASME B16.22, wrought copper.

3. Flared fittings: ASME B16.26, cast copper alloy.

4. Compression fittings: brass.


1) Hoke.

2) Parker-Hannifin.

3) Swagelok.

4) Tylok.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Aboveground Pipe.




4. Conceal piping in finished rooms.


6. Fluids shall circulate freely, without noise, and without evidence of leaks, trapping, or air binding.










10. Length of pipe used in offsets between risers and mains: Sufficient to facilitate ex-pansion and pitched back to main to furnish proper drainage at all times.

11. Offset piping to avoid interferences, increase headroom, improve appearance of pipe work, and to properly drain piping, in manner acceptable to Owner's Repre-sentative.




15. Install expansion pipe bends where shown or where necessary to allow for proper pipe expansion.

a. Construct bends as shown on drawings.

b. Spring bends apart during erection approximately 1/2 length of expected ex-pansion.

c. Construct bends so that original cross sections are round and true, without flat spots or buckles.

d. Mitered bends in steel pipe systems will not be accepted.


a. Make branch connections with tees, weldolets, or threadolets, where main exceeds branch by 2 pipe sizes or more.





19. Flanges: True faced and placed perpendicular to axis of pipe.





24. Install dielectric fittings where dissimilar metal pipes are joined.




B. Pipe Welding.












d. Clean each bead thoroughly before starting following pass.






C. Strainers.

1. Install strainers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At tapped open-ings, install nipple and general service ball valve.

D. Air Traps.

1. Install automatic air traps at high points in water systems where air pockets may occur and where shown on drawings.

2. Run drain piping from trap to nearest drain.

E. Pressure Gauges and Thermometers.

1. Install pressure gauges and thermometer well connections in fittings. Drilling and tapping of pipe wall for connections is prohibited.

2. Locate gauges and thermometers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in visible locations for easy reading from normal operating levels.

F. Sleeves and Seals.








8. For underground wall and pit penetrations, and on grade floor penetrations, and where indicated, seal space between pipe sleeves watertight with mechanically expandable, segmented neoprene inserts. Install in accordance with manufactur-er's instructions. Bituminous coat exposed bolt heads.

9. Caulking.











e. Use of general purpose, oil base, caulking compounds, putties, and plaster will not be accepted for sealing of pipe penetrations.

G. Pipe Roof Penetration Enclosures.

1. Coordinate delivery of roof penetration enclosures to jobsite. Locate and set curbs on roof.

2. Curb framing, flashing, and attachment to roof structure are specified under other Divisions of these Specifications.

3. Braze sleeves to sheet metal sides watertight.

a. Sleeve insulation for penetrating pipe or conduit shall run through sleeve.

b. Seal visible edges of insulation, and joints between insulation and sleeve, wa-tertight with accepted sealant.

c. Thread and cap unused sleeves on outdoor ends.

4. Attach cap to curbs, cut pipe boots to fit pipe, and clamp boots to caps and pipe or conduit.

H. Flashings/Counterflashings.





I. Pipe Anchors.

1. Install anchors to support risers, maintain pipes in position, and control motion due to thermal expansion.

2. Anchor in truss spaces.

a. Weld, bolt, or clamp anchors to top chords of 2 trusses at panel points, to roof purlins, or to floor beams.

J. Pipe Alignment Guides.

1. Select guides to accommodate insulation specified in Section 23 0720 with clear-ance of not less than 1/8 inch between inside of guide cylinder and outside sur-face of insulation.

2. Align guides carefully to avoid cocking, binding, and undue pipe deflection.

3. Lubricate guide contact surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommenda-tions.

K. Welding to Building Structure.





1) Tension or compression: Same as base metal.








c. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, or other foreign material.



f. Welds transmitting calculated stress shall not be less than 3 inches in length, and intermittent welds shall not be less than 2 inches in length.

g. Do not apply welds to flanges of tension members perpendicular to direction of stress.

h. Turn side and end fillet welds around corners for minimum length of twice nominal size of weld.

i. To ensure compliance, indicate detail on shop drawings.

j. Do not include length of end returns in calculated weld length.

k. Welding or other operation involving use of flame, arcs, or sparking devices will not be allowed without written permission of Owner's representative.

l. Repair or replace welds found be in nonconformance to requirements of AWS D1.1 according to Workmanship section of AWS D1.1 without cost to Owner.

L. General Pipe Testing Requirements.

1. Prior to acceptance of work, test all completed piping systems, in accordance with applicable governing codes, and in presence of Owner's Representative.




d. Removal of system component, including plugs and caps, to ascertain whether or not test media has reached all parts of system if purging or vent valves are not installed during construction, may be required by Owner's Rep-resentative.




















7. Upon completion of work, but before finally acceptance, operate systems for peri-od of 2 days, for purpose of testing and satisfying requirements, when directed by Owner's Representative.

8. Prepare and maintain test records of piping systems tests.


b. Deliver 2 record copies of acceptance tests to Owner after acceptance.


M. Flushing and Purging General Requirements.



3. After flushing and purging, remove and clean valves and strainers of debris before replacing.

4. Coordinate cleaning of connections to existing systems through Owner's Repre-sentative.




B. Check scale ranges of individual instruments. Expected normal reading: Near middle of scale. Replace instruments not conforming to this requirement.




END OF SECTION





HVAC INSULATION 23 0720 - 1


SECTION 23 0720 – HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Section 23 0600 - Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.

C. Section 23 1008 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC.

D. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.


A. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products; 2003.

B. ASTM C36/C36M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 2001.

C. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal In-sulation ; 2004.

D. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form ; 2003.

E. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation ; 2003.

F. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2002.

G. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insu-lation ; 2004.

H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Ma-terials ; 2005.

I. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ; 2000.

J. NFPA 258 - Standard Research Test Method for Determining Smoke Generation of Solid Materials ; 2001.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. For Information.

1. Product data.

a. Each product and component.

1.04 WARRANTY








1.05 SCHEDULES

A. Heating and Cooling Piping Insulation.

1. Steam (0 to 15 psi), indoor.

a. Type PP-1 with FF-2, or PP-1 with FF-3, or PP-7.

b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches on 2 inch and smaller pipe. 2 inches on 2-1/2 inch and larger pipe.

2. Steam (16 to 60 psi), indoor.


b. Thickness: 2 inches on 1 inch and smaller pipe. 2-1/2 inches on 1-1/4 inches through 4 inch pipe. 3 inches on 5 inch and larger pipe.

3. Steam pressure regulating valves (and specific portions of associated piping).

a. Same type as specified for service, plus JJ-3.

4. Steam drip, condensate, and pumped condensate, indoor.


b. Thickness: 1 inch on 1 inch and smaller pipe. 1-1/2 inches on 1-1/4 inch through 2 inch pipe. 2 inches on 2-1/2 inch and larger pipe.

5. Hot water heating (200 degrees F and lower), indoor.


b. Thickness: 1 inch on 2 inch and smaller pipe. 1-1/2 inches on 2-1/2 inch and larger pipe.

6. Chilled water, indoor.

a. Type PP-1 with FF-1, or PP-2 only, or PP-7. Vapor barrier required.

b. Thickness: 1/2 inch on 1 inch and smaller pipe. 1 inch on 1-1/4 inch through 8 inch pipe. 1-1/2 inches on 10 inch and larger pipe.

7. Refrigeration piping (suction only), indoor.

a. Type PP-2.

b. Thickness: 1 inch on 1 inch and smaller pipe. 1-1/2 inches on 1-1/4 inch and larger pipe.

8. Refrigeration piping (suction only), outdoor.

a. Type PP-2 with JJ-1.

b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches on 1 inch and smaller pipe. 2 inches on 1-1/4 inch and larger pipe.

B. Equipment Insulation.

1. Hot equipment, including domestic hot water heaters, hot water storage tanks, converters, boiler feed units, condensate receivers, and separator bodies of steam jet humidifiers.

a. Type VV-2 with FF-2.

b. Thickness: 2 inches.

C. Ductwork Insulation.

1. Ducts for intake of outdoor air.

a. Type DD-1.

b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.

2. Mixed air plenums and coil housings.

a. Type DD-1.


3. Air conditioning supply ducts (concealed).







a. Type DD-2.


4. Air conditioning supply ducts (exposed).

a. Type DD-1.


5. Return air ducts (concealed).

a. Type DD-2.


6. Return air ducts (exposed).

a. Type DD-1.


7. Round ducts (exposed).

a. Type DD-11.

b. Option 1: Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. Flanges and angle rings fully enclosed in 1-1/2 inch thick insulation.

c. Option 2: Insulation to afford residual thickness of not less than 1/2 inch over outside circumference of flanges and angle rings. Thickness: Not less than 2 inches.

8. Sheet metal blankoff panels for unused portions of louvers.

a. Type DD-1.


9. Sound isolating duct cover, indicated on drawings.

a. Type DD-5.

10. Exhaust duct from kitchen range hood to underside of roof (1-hour fire rating).

a. Type DD-7.

11. Exhaust duct from kitchen range hood to underside of roof (2-hour fire rating).

a. Type DD-8.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Drawings indicate equipment locations, related layouts, and general design of systems specified under Division 23.

B. Include thermal insulation for scheduled systems.

C. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, insulate surfaces in accordance with insulation schedules specified.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. General.

1. Include insulating materials having maximum flame spread rating of 25 and max-imum smoke developed rating of 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Closed cell, foamed elastomeric insulation.

a. In accordance with ASTM C534.

b. Maximum flame classification of 25, in accordance with ASTM E84.







c. Maximum, average, specific optical smoke density of 270, in accordance with NFPA 258.

3. Preformed fiberglass pipe insulation, in accordance with ASTM C547.

4. Preformed calcium silicate block and pipe insulation, in accordance with ASTM C533.

5. Rigid fiberglass board insulation, in accordance with ASTM C612.

6. Fiberglass blanket insulation, in accordance with ASTM C553.

7. Insulating materials UL labeled.

8. Adhesives fire resistant in their dry states and UL listed.

B. Pipe Insulation.

1. Type PP-1, rigid, molded fiberglass.

a. Minimum density, 3-1/2 pounds per cubic foot.

b. Thermal conductivity, not more than 0.26 Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F, per inch, at mean temperature of 75 degrees F.

c. Jacket, factory applied vapor barrier, with self-sealing laps.

d. Laminate, white kraft paper facing exterior.

e. Glass fiber reinforcing scrim.

f. Aluminum foil facing, with vapor permeance of not more than 0.02 perm when measured in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A.


1) Knauf, Fiber Glass ASJ-SSL.

2) Manson, Alley K-SSL.

3) Manville, Micro-Loc 650 AP-T.

4) Owens-Corning, Fiberglas 25 ASJ-SSL-II.


2. Type PP-2, flexible foamed elastomeric.

a. Fire retardant, closed cell.


c. Vapor permeability, not more than 0.2 perm-inch when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.


1) Armacell, AP/Armaflex SS.

2) Halstead, Insultube NP-77.

3) Manville, Aerotube II.

4) Rubatex, R-180-FS.


3. Type PP-2, (optional material) flexible polymer foam.

a. Fire retardant.


c. Vapor permeability, not more than 0.0 perm-inch when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.

d. Continuous service temperature limits of minus 110 degrees F to 210 de-grees F.


1) Armacell, Tubolit and Tubolit SS.







2) Imcoa, Imcolock and Imcoshield.

3) Nomaco, Nomalock and Nomagard.


4. Type PP-7, fiberglass radial fiber.

a. For large diameter pipes or equipment.

b. Thermal conductivity: 0.27 Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F, per inch, at 75 degrees F.

c. Jacket: Factory applied kraft paper/aluminum foil vapor barrier.


1) Manson AK Flex.

2) Owens-Corning, Pipe Wrap Insulation.

3) Manville, Pipe and Tank Insulation.


C. Fittings Insulation.




c. Vapor barrier coating.




3. Type FF-3, premolded, one-piece, PVC insulated fitting covers.

a. Factory precut fiberglass insulation segments.

b. Flexible, self-extinguishing PVC cover: Flame spread classification, not more than 25. Fuel contribution, not more than 25, as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.


1) Accessible Products, 300 Series Thermazip.

2) Ceel Company, Ceel-Tite 300.

3) Coverite, S-800.

4) Knauf, Proto.

5) Manville, Zeston.


D. Jacketing.

1. Type JJ-1, 3003 or 5005 aluminum roll.

a. Protect insulating material. Integral vapor barrier coating on insulation side.

b. Round jacketing, minimum thickness, 0.016 inch.

1) Locked longitudinal seams.

2) Butt circumferential joints.

3) Butt straps and stainless steel draw bands.

4) Include butt straps with high temperature resistant weatherproof sealant.

c. Rectangular jacketing, minimum thickness, 0.032 inch.


1) Childers, Lock-On, Ell-Jacs and Tee-Jacs.







2) Pabco, Surefit.


2. Type JJ-3, sound isolation type cover.

a. Straight pipe and cylindrical surfaces.

b. Lead sheet laminated to outer jacket.

c. For steam pressure regulating station piping.

1) Density of lead sheet: 1 psf minimum.

2) Jacket: Aluminum.

d. Acceptable product.

1) Childers, Muffl-Jac.


e. For fittings and warped and irregular surfaces.

1) 1 psf density lead sheet.

2) Proprietary adhesive.

3) Proprietary tack coat and finish coat.

4) Glass cloth scrim.

5) Proprietary caulking.

f. Acceptable products.

1) Childers, Adhesive, Chil-Stix CP-82.

2) Childers, Caulking, Chil-Joint CP-70.

3) Childers, Glass Cloth, Chil-Gloss No. 5.

4) Childers, Tack Coat and Finish Coat, VT-CRYL CP-11.


E. Equipment Insulation.

1. Type VV-2, hydrous, asbestos free, calcium silicate.

a. Sectional, mitered, in segmental or block form. Formed to fit shape and con-tour of equipment.

b. Density: Approximately 12.5 pounds per cubic foot.

c. Suitable for applications up to 1200 degrees F.

d. Thermal conductivity: Not more than (Btu per hour, per square foot, per de-gree F, per inch, at mean temperature).

1) 0.38 Btu at 100 degrees F.







1) Manville, Thermo 12.

2) Owens-Corning, Kaylo 10.

3) Pabco, Super Caltemp.


F. Ductwork and Sheet Metal Insulation.

1. Type DD-1, rigid fiberglass board.

a. Density: 6 pounds per cubic foot.







b. Jacket: UL rated, factory applied, flame retardant, foil-faced reinforced, kraft vapor barrier.

c. Thermal conductivity: Not more than 0.22 Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F, per inch, at 60 degrees F.


1) Knauf, Insulation Board 6 PCF with FSK.

2) Manson, AK Board with FSK.

3) Manville, Type 817 with FSK.

4) Owens-Corning, 705 Series with FRK.


2. Type DD-2, flexible, fiberglass duct blanket covering.

a. Thermal conductivity: Not more than 0.26 Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F, per inch, at 75 degrees F.

b. Jacket: UL rated, factory applied, vapor barrier.

c. Laminated, reinforced aluminum foil faced with flame resistant kraft paper.

d. Maximum vapor permeability rating: 0.02 perm.


1) CertainTeed, Standard Duct Wrap with FSK.

2) Knauf, Duct Wrap 1.0 PCF with FSK.

3) Manville, R-Series Microlite with FSKL.

4) Owens-Corning, Faced Duct Wrap Insulation, Commercial Grade Type 100.


3. Type DD-5, acoustic.

a. Semirigid board fiberglass.

1) Thickness: 2 inches.

2) Density: 3 pounds per cubic foot.

3) Externally lagged by one of the following systems.

(a) 2 layers of 1/2 inch thick gypsum wallboard.

(b) Single layer of 2 pound lead sheet laminated to 5/8 inch thick gyp-sum wallboard.

(c) Gypsum wallboard, in accordance with ASTM C 36.

(d) Lead sheet, in accordance with ASTM B 749.

b. Acceptable fiberglass insulation manufacturers.

1) Knauf, Rigid Plenum Liner.

2) Manville, Linacoustic R Liner Board.

3) Owens-Corning, Duct Liner Board.


4. Type DD-7, 1 hour fire-rated, built-up, 3 layered, sandwich type enclosure.

a. First layer, 3/8 inch thick, paper or vinyl surfaced gypsum wallboard with bev-eled, square, or tapered edges.

b. Second layer, 2 sheets of 1/2 inch gypsum coreboard, laminated to each oth-er with casein or vinyl joint compound.

c. Third layer, 3/8 inch thick, paper or vinyl surfaced gypsum wallboard with beveled, square, or tapered edges.

d. Gypsum wallboard, in accordance with ASTM C 36.

5. Type DD-8, 2 hour fire-rated, built-up, 3 layered, sandwich type enclosure.







a. First layer, 1/2 inch thick, paper or vinyl surfaced gypsum wallboard with bev-eled, square, or tapered edges.

b. Second layer, 2 sheets of 1/2 inch gypsum coreboard, laminated to each oth-er with casein or vinyl joint compound.

c. Third layer, 1/2 inch thick, paper or vinyl surfaced gypsum wallboard with beveled, square, or tapered edges.

d. Gypsum wallboard, in accordance with ASTM C 36.

6. Type DD-8, (alternate material) 2 hour fire rated duct wrap.

a. Meeting requirements of UL and NFPA as alternate method of providing fire protection in lieu of traditional shaftwall.

b. Tested in accordance with UL 263 and 1978, and ASTM E-119.

c. High temperature glass fiber core material.

d. Core material completely encapsulated in UL Classified aluminum foil, fiber-glass reinforced scrim.


1) Unifrax, FyreWrap Duct Insulation.

2) 3M Fire Protection Products, FyreMaster Duct Wrap.

3) Premier Refractories International, Pyroscat FP Duct Wrap.

4) Manville, Firetemp Wrap


7. Type DD-11, fiberglass radial fiber.

a. For large diameter pipes, ductwork, or equipment.

b. Thermal conductivity: 0.27 Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F, per inch at 75 degrees F.

c. Jacket: Factory applied kraft aluminum foil vapor barrier.


1) Manville, Pipe and Tank Insulation.

2) Owens-Corning, Pipe and Tank Insulation.


G. Cements, Adhesives, and Coatings.

1. Insulating and finishing cement.


1) Celotex, MW-1.

2) Pabco, Pabcote.

3) Fibrex, FBX Superkote.


2. Lap adhesive and finish coating for nonvapor barrier applications.


1) Childers, CP-50A.

2) Foster, 30-04.

3) Marathon, 102.


3. Contact adhesive manufacturer shall be same as insulation manufacturer.


1) Armacell, 520.

2) Halstead, Instant Bonding Adhesive.

3) Manville, J-M 57.







4) Rubatex, 373.


4. Vapor barrier lap adhesive and surfacing adhesive.


1) Childers, CP-82.

2) Foster, 85-20.

3) Marathon, 225.


5. Vapor barrier coatings.


1) Marathon, 501.

2) Childers, CP-30 or CP-32.

3) Foster, 30-35.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


1. Install to present a neat, clean appearance.

2. Apply only after surfaces have been cleaned, inspected, and tested.

3. Apply neatly, tightly, with unbroken lengths, and with ends of sections firmly butt-ed together.

4. At joints, lap insulating jackets and cement in position.

5. Sectional covering shall be uniform.

6. Where required material thickness is not available, layer insulation, staggering butt joints.

7. Do not dilute surface finishes and adhesives.

8. Apply surface finishes and adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instruc-tions.

9. Do not apply sealing coats until volatiles have dissipated, and until cements and adhesives have thoroughly dried.

10. Unless otherwise specified, do not apply second or multiple coats until previous coats have thoroughly dried.

11. Do not use flame or spark producing equipment in areas where adhesives, mas-tics, sealants, or coatings containing volatiles are stored or being applied.

12. Maintain integrity of vapor barriers. Do not use fasteners to secure vapor barrier insulation, which penetrate or damage vapor barrier.

13. Butt insulation to building construction and to angle iron stops. Where vapor seals or similar facings are required, extend and seal to building construction or angle.

14. Surfaces to be insulated shall be considered concealed where located in furred spaces or above suspended ceilings, other work shall be considered exposed.

15. Restore to original likeness existing insulation damaged during progress of the work.

B. Pipe and Fittings Insulation.







1. General application notes.

a. Insulate each pipe individually. Gang insulation of piping groups is unac-ceptable.

b. Place longitudinal joints on the least conspicuous side of pipe.

c. Extend insulation on piping through sleeves.

d. Install insulation to conform to a uniform diameter.

e. Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves to a thickness equal to the insulation on adjacent piping.

f. Omit insulation on rubber expansion joints and rubber vibration isolation joints of hot water services.

g. At uncovered joints and fittings: Taper ends of insulation with cement before wrapping. Construct tapered ends adjacent to bolted joints to permit removal of bolts without damaging insulation.

h. Seal insulation and jacketing cut during installation of pipe anchors, with insu-lating cement.


a. Install insulation and seal longitudinal, self-sealing laps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

b. Where vapor barrier is required, wrap circumferential joints with vapor barrier pressure sensitive adhesive tape, overlapping insulation by 2 inches.


a. Install closed cell, flexible, foamed elastomeric pipe insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

b. Seal butt joints and seams by joining cut edges with contact adhesive.

c. Adhere additional insulation layers with 100 percent coverage of contact ad-hesive on each layer.

d. Finish paint with manufacturer's standard finish coating.


a. Seal joints with 3 inch wide strips of kraft aluminum foil with vapor barrier lap adhesive.

b. Butt joint sealing strips, with self-sealing adhesive, are acceptable.


a. Insulate fittings, flanges, and valves to a thickness equal to covering on adja-cent piping.



d. Over the coat of insulating cement, apply a layer of open weave glass cloth fabric, embedded between 2 flood coats of vapor barrier coating.

e. Overlap fabric not less than 2 inches onto adjacent pipe insulation.


a. Insulate fittings, flanges and valves to a thickness equal to covering on adja-cent piping.









d. Over the coat of insulating cement, apply a finish coat.


a. Where insulation system requires a vapor barrier: Seal edges of cover with a vapor barrier coating. Wrap circumferential joints with a vapor barrier pres-sure sensitive adhesive tape. Overlap adjacent pipe insulation by at least 2 inches.

b. Where insulation system does not require a vapor barrier: Apply adhesive. Staple, tack fasten, or tape cover to adjacent pipe covering as recommended by manufacturer. Overlap adjacent pipe insulation by at least 2 inches.

C. Jacketing.

1. Type JJ-1.

a. Install round jacketing and attach butt straps and draw bands in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

b. Lap rectangular jacketing not less than 2 inches on longitudinal and trans-verse joints. Lap top jacketing over side jacketing. Seal joints with manufac-turer's standard weather and heat resistant sealant. Attach jacketing with stainless steel sheet metal screws and lead washers, or galvanized angle iron hoops.

2. Type JJ-3.

a. Straight pipe and cylindrical surfaces.

1) Install jacketing with 2 inch overlap at longitudinal and transverse joints.

2) Seal joints with manufacturer's standard sealant and secure transverse joints with stainless steel straps.

b. Irregular surfaces.

1) Apply, at 100 percent coverage, brush coat of proprietary adhesive over thermal insulation.

2) Cut sheet material into shapes affording full coverage of insulation sur-face with 2 inch overlap at joints.

3) Apply shapes to adhesive covered surface of insulation.

4) Upon setting of adhesive, apply proprietary tack coat over lead sheet shapes at rate of 4 gallons per 100 square feet.

5) Embed glass cloth scrim with 2 inch overlap over wet tack coat.

6) Apply proprietary finish coat over tack coat at rate of 6 gallons per 100 square feet.

7) Caulk joints between sound insulating covers over straight and irregular surfaces with proprietary caulking.

c. At steam pressure regulating valves.

1) Apply sound isolating cover over: Steam pressure regulating valve, by-pass piping and bypass valves, insulated piping 50 feet upstream of pressure regulating valve, and insulated piping 75 feet downstream of steam pressure regulating valve. On upstream piping less than 50 feet to tee in main, terminate sound isolating cover at tee. Terminate down-stream pipe cover at first branch connection if branch takeoff is less than 75 feet from valve. Valve bypass lines are not considered as tees and takeoffs.







D. Equipment Insulation.

1. Type VV-2.

a. Hold blocks in place with lacings of No. 14 soft-annealed steel wire or impale on welded pins with speed washers.

b. Cover entire surface with 1 inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh, tightly stretched in place, and wired to lacing wires or pins.

c. Over mesh, apply two 1/4 inch thick coats of insulating cement.

d. Trowel second coat smooth and finish with presized glass cloth jacket ad-hered in place with lagging adhesive.

E. Ductwork and Sheet Metal Insulation.

1. General.

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, insulation for ductwork includes insu-lation for plenums, adapters, transitions, collars, boots, standing seams, stiff-eners, angle rings, flanges, and similar components not factory insulated or lined.

b. Prior to installation of thermal insulation to faces of sheet metal fabrication in-accessible once installed, install jacket flaps on exposed edges, for overlap-ping onto accessible portions of insulation.

c. At sheet metal joints, maintain vapor barrier on inaccessible insulation by re-turning and cementing insulation jacketing to sheet metal.

d. Where insulation is specified for sheet metal construction located adjacent to lined or covered system portions, overlap lining or lagging by not less than 24 inches.

2. Type DD-1.

a. Install angle iron frames, or approved stops, at doors in plenums or similar openings.

b. Finish edges and seams at visible locations in a neat manner.

c. Impale insulation on pins. Secure insulation mechanically to sheet metal work in an approved manner. On underside ductwork greater than 24 inches wide space fasteners on not greater than 18 inch centers. Hold insulation in place with speed nuts or clips in accordance with manufacturer's recommen-dations. Cut off protruding ends of fasteners flush with speed clips.

d. Cover insulation joints with 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape, sealed with vapor barrier lap adhesive.

e. Treat punctures in facing of insulation in same manner as joints.

f. After insulation is installed on indoor ductwork seal and cover joints and punc-tures with tack coat of vapor barrier coating at coverage rate of 40 to 50 square feet per gallon. Embed into wet tack coat, layer of fiberglass reinforc-ing cloth overlapping by 2 inches at seams. Smooth cloth, eliminating wrin-kles. Apply final vapor barrier coating using same coverage rate not later than 1 hour after tack coat.

3. Type DD-2.

a. Attach insulation to sheet metal work with surfacing adhesive using approxi-mately 50 percent coverage of adhesive, or impale insulation on pins, me-chanically secured to sheet metal work in an approved manner.

b. Hold in place with speed nuts or clips in accordance with manufacturer's rec-ommendations.







c. At joints: Cut fiberglass mat back by 4 inches, on 1 of 2 abutting sections of insulation. Fold remaining vapor barrier jacket flap to double thickness. Ap-ply full coverage of vapor barrier lap adhesive to vapor barrier jacket of ad-joining insulation section and staple.

d. Apply a 4 inch wide brush coat of vapor barrier lap adhesive over joint.

1) Center over folded edge of jacket flap.

2) Apply additional vapor barrier lap adhesive where staple penetrations remain exposed or where fishmouths are evident.

4. Type DD-5 sound isolating duct cover.

a. Acoustically isolate ductwork indicated on drawings.

b. Extend covering over entire duct perimeter and over duct lengths indicated.

c. Butt and seal adjoining edges of laminates with a nonhardening sealant.

d. On ducts requiring thermal insulation: Extend vapor barrier over duct lengths enclosed by sound isolating duct cover.

e. When using lead sheet instead of gypsum board: Overlap sheets 2 inches at seams. Spot burn and seal with duct tape. Secure with steel straps on 1 foot centers.

5. Type DD-7 fire-rated (1 hour) insulation.

a. Attach first layer to duct. Install second layer, staggering vertical joints by 1 inch.

b. Secure ends to roof and ceiling with full length galvanized steel angles on 1 face and 6 inch long angles, 24 inches on center, on opposite face.

c. Install third layer vertically with adhesive and nail temporarily to coreboard. Stagger vertical joints with joints in coreboard and joints on opposite face. Cover joints with joint tape and joint compound.

6. Type DD-8 fire-rated (2 hour) insulation.

a. Attach first layer to duct. Install second layer, staggering vertical joints by 1 inch.

b. Install outer layer vertically with adhesive, and nail temporarily to the core-board. Stagger vertical joints with joints in coreboard and joints on opposite face. Cover joints with joint tape and joint compound.

c. Point corners of exterior with 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 1/8 inch galvanized steel angles.

d. Apply 16 gauge galvanized steel wire on 6 inch centers around duct, angles, and insulation.

7. Type DD-8 (alternate material) fire rated duct wrap.

a. Attach first layer to duct following manufacturer's recommendations. On spans greater than 24 inches, impale insulation on pins mechanically secured to sheet metal. Hold in place with speed nuts or clips. Secure with filament tape on 10-1/2 inch centers.

b. Install second layer, staggering joints 10-1/2 inches, and with minimum 3 inch longitudinal overlap. Secure with filament tape and Type 302 stainless steel bands on 10-1/2 inch centers.

8. Type DD-11 insulation.

a. Seal joints with 3 inch wide strips of kraft aluminum foil with vapor barrier lap adhesive.







b. Butt joint sealing strips, with self-sealing adhesive, are acceptable.

END OF SECTION





COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 0800 - 1


SECTION 23 0800 – COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section covers the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning; each subcon-tractor or installer responsible for the installation of a particular system or equipment item to be commissioned is responsible for the commissioning activities relating to that system or equipment item.

B. The Commissioning Authority (CA) directs and coordinates all commissioning activities and provides Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Contractor's use.

C. The entire HVAC system is to be commissioned, including commissioning activities for the following specific items:

1. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Docu-ments as requiring commissioning.

D. The Prefunctional Checklist and Functional Test requirements specified in this section are in addition to, not a substitute for, inspection or testing specified in other sections.


A. ASHRAE Guideline 1 - The HVAC Commissioning Process ; 1996

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Updated Submittals: Keep the Commissioning Authority informed of all changes to control system documentation made during programming and setup; revise and re-submit when substantial changes are made.

B. DRAFT Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Control System: Detailed written plan indicating the procedures to be followed to test, checkout and ad-just the control system prior to full system Functional Testing; include at least the fol-lowing for each type of equipment controlled:

1. System name.

2. List of devices.

3. Step-by-step procedures for testing each controller after installation, including:

a. Process of verifying proper hardware and wiring installation.

b. Process of downloading programs to local controllers and verifying that they are addressed correctly.

c. Process of performing operational checks of each controlled component.

d. Plan and process for calibrating valve and damper actuators and all sensors.

e. Description of the expected field adjustments for transmitters, controllers and control actuators should control responses fall outside of expected values.

4. Copy of proposed log and field checkout sheets to be used to document the pro-cess; include space for initial and final read values during calibration of each point







and space to specifically indicate when a sensor or controller has “passed” and is operating within the contract parameters.

5. Description of the instrumentation required for testing.

6. Indicate what tests on what systems should be completed prior to TAB using the control system for TAB work. Coordinate with the Commissioning Authority and TAB contractor for this determination.

C. Startup Reports, Prefunctional Checklists, and Trend Logs: Submit for approval of Commissioning Authority.

D. HVAC Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentation specified elsewhere, compile and organize at minimum the following data on the con-trol system:

1. Specific step-by-step instructions on how to perform and apply all functions, fea-tures, modes, etc. mentioned in the controls training sections of this specification and other features of this system. Provide an index and clear table of contents. Include the detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms.

2. Full as-built set of control drawings.

3. Full as-built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment.

4. Full points list; in addition to the information on the original points list submittal, in-clude a listing of all rooms with the following information for each room:

a. Floor.

b. Room number.

c. Room name.

d. Air handler unit ID.

e. Reference drawing number.

f. Air terminal unit tag ID.

g. Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID.

h. Minimum air flow rate.

i. Maximum air flow rate.

5. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system.

6. Full as-built print out of software program.

7. Electronic copy on disk of the entire program for this facility.

8. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and HVAC drawings with their control system designations.

9. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and methods by sensor type, etc.

10. Control equipment component submittals, parts lists, etc.

11. Warranty requirements.

12. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not commissioning tests).

13. Organize and subdivide the manual with permanently labeled tabs for each of the following data in the given order:

a. Sequences of operation.

b. Control drawings.

c. Points lists.

d. Controller and/or module data.







e. Thermostats and timers.

f. Sensors and DP switches.

g. Valves and valve actuators.

h. Dampers and damper actuators.

i. Program setups (software program printouts).

E. Project Record Documents: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements.

1. Submit updated version of control system documentation, for inclusion with opera-tion and maintenance data.

2. Show actual locations of all static and differential pressure sensors (air, water and building pressure) and air-flow stations on project record drawings.

F. Draft Training Plan: In addition to requirements specified in Section 01 7900, include:

1. Follow the recommendations of ASHRAE Guideline 1.

2. Control system manufacturer's recommended training.

3. Demonstration and instruction on function and overrides of any local packaged controls not controlled by the HVAC control system.

G. Training Manuals: See Section 01 7900 for additional requirements.

1. Provide three extra copies of the controls training manuals in a separate manual from the O&M manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required functional performance testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become the property of Owner.

B. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are re-quired in order to accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the property of Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in development of the Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures.

B. Furnish additional information requested by the Commissioning Authority.

C. Prepare a preliminary schedule for HVAC pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and testing, adjusting, and balancing start and completion for use by the Commissioning Authority; update the schedule as appropriate.

D. Notify the Commissioning Authority when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, startup of each piece of equipment and testing, adjusting, and balancing will







occur; when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction notify ahead of time and be proactive in seeing that the Commissioning Authority has the scheduling information needed to efficiently execute the commission-ing process.

E. Put all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continue operation during each working day of testing, adjusting, and balancing and commissioning, as required.

F. Provide test holes in ducts and plenums where directed to allow air measurements and air balancing; close with an approved plug.

G. Provide temperature and pressure taps in accordance with the contract documents.

3.02 INSPECTING AND TESTING - GENERAL

A. Submit startup plans, startup reports, and Prefunctional Checklists for each item of equipment or other assembly to be commissioned.

B. Perform the Functional Tests directed by the Commissioning Authority for each item of equipment or other assembly to be commissioned.

C. Provide two-way radios for use during the testing.

D. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:

1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the control system readout.

2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode.

3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as required.

4. Command valve/damper open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required.

5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions.

6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics).

E. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not by coils.

1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed.

2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.

F. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to Owner.

3.03 TAB COORDINATION

A. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC.

B. Coordinate commissioning schedule with TAB schedule.

C. Review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system toward com-pleting TAB.

D. Provide all necessary unique instruments and instruct the TAB technicians in their use; such as handheld control system interface for setting terminal unit boxes, etc.







E. Have all required Prefunctional Checklists, calibrations, startup and component Func-tional Tests of the system completed and approved by the Commissioning Authority prior to starting TAB.

F. Provide a qualified control system technician to operate the controls to assist the TAB technicians or provide sufficient training for the TAB technicians to operate the system without assistance.

3.04 CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Prefunctional Checklists for control system components will require a signed and dated certification that all system programming is complete as required to accomplish the re-quirements of the Contract Documents and the detailed Sequences of Operation doc-umentation submittal.

B. Do not start Functional Testing until all controlled components have themselves been successfully Functionally Tested in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building, execute the Functional Testing of the control system as required by the Commissioning Authority.

D. Functional Testing of the control system constitutes demonstration and trend logging of control points monitored by the control system.

1. The scope of trend logging is partially specified; trend log up to 50 percent more points than specified at no extra cost to Owner.

2. Perform all trend logging specified in Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test procedures.

E. Functionally Test integral or stand-alone controls in conjunction with the Functional Tests of the equipment they are attached to, including any interlocks with other equip-ment or systems; further testing during control system Functional Test is not required unless specifically indicated below.

F. Demonstrate the following to the Commissioning Authority during testing of controlled equipment; coordinate with commissioning of equipment.

1. Setpoint changing features and functions.

2. Sensor calibrations.

G. Demonstrate to the Commissioning Authority:

1. That all specified functions and features are set up, debugged and fully operable.

2. That scheduling features are fully functional and setup, including holidays.

3. That all graphic screens and value readouts are completed.

4. Correct date and time setting in central computer.

5. That field panels read the same time as the central computer; sample 10 percent of field panels; if any of those fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail test all remaining units at no extra cost to Owner.

6. Functionality of field panels using local operator keypads and local ports (plug-ins) using portable computer/keypad; demonstrate 100 percent of panels and 10 per-cent of ports; if any ports fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail, test all remaining units at no extra cost to Owner.

7. Power failure and battery backup and power-up restart functions.

8. Global commands features.

9. Security and access codes.







10. Occupant over-rides (manual, telephone, key, keypad, etc.).

11. O&M schedules and alarms.

12. Occupancy sensors and controls.

13. All control strategies and sequences not tested during controlled equipment test-ing.

H. If the control system, integral control components, or related equipment do not re-spond to changing conditions and parameters appropriately as expected, as specified and according to acceptable operating practice, under any of the conditions, sequenc-es, or modes tested, correct all systems, equipment, components, and software re-quired at no additional cost to Owner.

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements.

B. Add design intent documentation furnished by Owner's Field Representative to manu-als prior to submission to Owner.

C. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.

D. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to Owner.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. See Section 01 7900 for additional requirements.

B. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of HVAC system to Owner' personnel; if dur-ing any demonstration, the system fails to perform in accordance with the information included in the O&M manual, stop demonstration, repair or adjust, and repeat demon-stration. Demonstrations may be combined with training sessions if appropriate.

C. These demonstrations are in addition to, and not a substitute for, Prefunctional Check-lists and demonstrations to the Commissioning Authority during Functional Testing.

D. Provide classroom and hands-on training of Owner's designated personnel on opera-tion and maintenance of the HVAC system, control system, and all equipment items indicated to be commissioned. Provide the following minimum durations of training:

E. TAB Review: Instruct Owner's personnel for minimum 16 hours, after completion of TAB, on the following:

1. Review final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type.

2. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may af-fect the proper delivery of air or water.

3. Identify and discuss any terminal units, duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that are close to or are not meeting their design capacity.

4. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not finished.

5. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB.

F. HVAC Control System Training: Perform training in at least three phases:







1. Phase 1 - Basic Control System: Provide minimum of 40 hours of actual training on the control system itself. Upon completion of training, each attendee, using appropriate documentation, should be able to perform elementary operations and describe general hardware architecture and functionality of the system.

a. This training may be held on-site or at the manufacturer's facility.

b. If held off-site, the training may occur prior to final completion of the system installation.

c. For off-site training, Contractor shall pay expenses of up to two attendees.

2. Phase 2 - Integrating with HVAC Systems: Provide minimum of 24 hours of on-site, hands-on training after completion of Functional Testing. Include instruction on:

a. The specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this facility and specific instruction for operating the installed system, including interfaces with other systems, if any.

b. Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage and restart routines, changing setpoints and alarms and other typical changed parame-ters, overrides, freeze protection, manual operation of equipment, optional control strategies that can be considered, energy savings strategies and set points that if changed will adversely affect energy consumption, energy ac-counting, procedures for obtaining vendor assistance, etc.

c. Trend logging and monitoring features (values, change of state, totalization, etc.), including setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular and graphically and printing trends; provide practice in setting up trend logging and monitoring during training session.

d. Every display screen, allowing time for questions.

e. Point database entry and modifications.

3. Phase 3 - Post-Occupancy: Six months after occupancy conduct minimum of 24 hours of training. Tailor training session to questions and topics solicited before-hand from Owner. Also be prepared to address topics brought up and answer questions concerning operation of the system.

G. Provide the services of manufacturer representatives to assist instructors where nec-essary.

H. Provide the services of the HVAC controls instructor at other training sessions, when requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equip-ment being discussed.

END OF SECTION





INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900 - 1


SECTION 23 0900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR

HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Section 23 7400 - Packaged HVAC Equipment.

C. Section 25 5001 - Building Management System

D. Division 26, Electrical Sections.


A. ASHRAE Guideline 1 - The HVAC Commissioning Process; Latest Version

B. ASHRAE Std 135 - BACNET - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automa-tion and Control Networks ; 2008.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).

D. Instrument Society of America (ISA).

E. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code ; 2008.

H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. For Information.

1. Product data.

a. Damper position switch.

b. Air flow switch (explosionproof).

c. Freezestat (thermostatic type).

d. Room temperature sensor.

e. Direct digital electronic control equipment.

f. Temperature sensor, indoor type.

g. Temperature sensor, outdoor type.

h. Temperature sensor, insertion, bulb sensing instrument.

i. Humidity sensors.

j. Pressure sensors.

k. Carbon dioxide sensors.

l. Occupancy sensors.

m. Airflow monitoring station.

n. Flow meters.







o. Automatic control valve.

p. Damper.

q. Valve and damper operator.

r. Local control panel.

s. Smoke detector system.

2. Control system hardware and software documentation.

a. Schematic diagrams, including all components.

b. Wiring diagrams, including terminal block numbers.

c. Layout of panels and auxiliary devices.

d. Complete sequence of operation, including setpoints and alarm settings.

e. Complete bill of materials.

f. Nameplates and associated wording.

g. Testing procedures.

h. Training plan.

i. Operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Test reports.

a. Control system test and adjustment.

C. For Closeout.

1. Project record documents.

2. Operation and maintenance data.

a. Extra materials.

b. Spare parts lists.


A. Refer to Section 23 0513 - Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment.


A. Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, and Section 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC, for transportation, storage, and handling requirements.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Components, parts and assemblies herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. Equipment proved to be de-fective in workmanship or material within 12 month period from date of Owner ac-ceptance shall be replaced or repaired without expense to Owner.

C. Furnish services, materials and equipment necessary for successful operation during Warranty period. Minimize impact on facility operation while performing scheduled ad-justments and nonscheduled work.

D. Adjustment and repair of control systems shall include all equipment, software up-dates, field equipment, transmission and communications network equipment, all sen-sors, and all control devices. Furnish qualified personnel to accomplish all work







promptly and satisfactorily. Owner shall be advised as to name and telephone number of designated service representative.

E. Furnish 2 inspections at 6 month intervals. Inspections shall be conducted so as to re-view and test seasonal aspects of control functions such as heating, cooling, humidifi-cation, dehumidification, and economizer.

F. Inspection shall include visual checks, operational tests and required adjustments of all direct digital controllers and communications network, plus following work.

1. Clean control equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces.

2. Perform signal, voltage and system isolation checks of control equipment and communications network.

3. Check and calibrate each control panel. Check and calibrate all analog input and output points during each inspection.

4. Run all system software diagnostics and correct all diagnosed problems.

5. Run diagnostics on all communication network devices and entire communica-tions network system.

6. Resolve all outstanding problems uncovered during inspection.

G. Performance of scheduled adjustments and repairs shall verify operation of control system.

H. Emergency Service - Owner shall initiate service call when control systems are not functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available at site to furnish repair service to control systems within 24 hours of service call. Owner shall be furnished with telephone number where Contractor's service supervisor can be reached at all times.

I. Keep records and logs of each task performed and shall organize these cumulative records for each major component. Maintain record of all real and calculated devices in control systems. Record shall contain all initial analog span and zero calibration values and all digital points. Maintain complete logs and make them available for in-spection on-site, demonstrating that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have been accomplished for control systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEMS

A. Provide labor, materials, and equipment to provide control systems indicated on draw-ings, including all accessories required for a complete and fully operational system.

B. Drawings indicate material and equipment locations, related piping and ductwork lay-outs, and general design of control systems.

C. Furnish following type(s) of control systems.

1. Electric.

2. Direct digital electronic.

2.02 EQUIPMENT








1. Furnish and install electrical wiring and conduit in accordance with Division 26.

2. Obtain electric control power from load side of starter fuses.

3. Furnish and install control transformers, conduits, and wiring for interconnecting starters, control transformers, and local control panels.

4. Control transformers.

a. Select size to satisfy requirements 25 percent in excess of those associated with particular system which it is expected to serve.

b. Isolated dual secondary winding and fused primary and secondary windings.

c. Locate transformer within associated local control panel.

5. Control system and components shall be designed, furnished, and installed by firms with a successful history of providing similar system installations, with mini-mum 3 years documented experience.

6. Installation of control components shall be by qualified control personnel.

7. Acceptable control systems manufacturers.

a. Johnson Controls Metasys Building Management System with Model DX-9100 control panels.

B. Electric Control Components.

1. Room thermostats (Type T).

a. Key operated, equipped with mercurial thermometer having accuracy of 2 de-grees plus or minus.

b. Adjustment range: 50 degrees F to 90 degrees F.

c. Manufacturer's standard cover, color, white.

d. Adjustment by maintenance personnel with key device designed to open tamperproof cover on thermostat.

2. Damper position switch.

a. Arranged to initiate fan starting after air intake damper is fully open.

b. Includes trip lever, switching mechanism, adjustable setpoint, overtravel pro-tection, electrical terminals, casing, and mounting flange.

c. Single pole-double throw rated for 115 volt, 4 amperes.

3. Current sensing relay.

a. Current sensor with donut type transformers capable of monitoring AC cur-rent.

b. Input current range from 20 amp to 300 amp.

c. Digital output signals with adjustable high and low current trips.

4. Airflow switches.

a. Arranged to close circuit on air flow based on differential pressure.

b. Field adjustable setpoint range of 0.05 inch to 12 inches of water gauge.

c. Includes trip lever, switching mechanism, adjustable setpoint, electrical termi-nal, casing, and mounting flange.

d. Switch shall be single pole-double throw, rated for 115 volts.

e. Suitable for operation at ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 de-grees F to 180 degrees F.

f. Housed in NEMA 7 or NEMA 9 enclosures for explosionproof applications.

5. Water flow switches.

a. High pressure metal paddle switch arranged to close circuit on water flow of 0.5 feet per second, minimum.

1) Stainless steel paddle and spring.







2) Rated for 150 percent of operating pressure or 150 psig minimum.

b. Trim paddle prior to installation for desired flow rate.

c. Maximum pressure drop of 3 psig at full flow.

6. Freezestats (thermostatic type).

a. Averaging type with 20 feet of capillary, 2 sets of double pole-double throw contacts, manual reset, 120 volts, single phase.

b. Opens electrical circuit on a fall in temperature below setpoint.

c. Furnish 1 freezestat for each coil in bank.

C. Direct Digital Electronic Control Equipment.

1. General.

a. At Contractor's option, control drives, including valve and damper actuators, may be electronic or electric, fitted with transducers and positioners where required for proper operation.

b. Capable of direct interface with Owner's existing Johnson Controls Metasys Building Management System specified in Section 25 5001.

c. Capable of communicating on BACNET communications protocol to head end equipment and communicating on LonMark or LonWorks communication protocol to intelligent local devices.

1) BACNET communication shall be via Ethernet connection. Provide doc-umentation for each device.

(a) BACNET Device: MAC address, name, type and instance number.

(b) BACNET Objects: Name, type, and instance number.

2) Equip all LonWorks and LonMark devices with FTT-10A LonWorks communications transceivers.

d. Direct digital controllers shall include.

1) Microprocessor based programmable control system of modular con-struction, including

(a) Computer module.

(b) Power supply module.

(c) Communications module for network communications.

(d) Input/output modules.

(1) Capable of adding future input/output modules to existing rack without modification.

2) Panel mounted local user interface device.

3) Computer module.

(a) Fully programmable.

(b) Executes all control and monitoring functions.

(c) Included all microprocessor and application program memory.

(d) Battery back-up for 30 days for data retention.

(e) LEDs to indicate.

(1) Normal operation.

(2) System errors.

(3) Operator terminal transmit and receive status.

(4) System communications network transmit and receive status.

4) Power supply module.

(a) Provides low-voltage power to all control modules.

(b) Includes uninterrupted system power from rechargeable batteries.







(c) LED's indicate presence of supply voltage and battery operation.

(d) Alarm message generated on low battery voltage.

5) Communications module.

(a) Direct interface to computer module.

(b) Communication rate to meet communications requirements indicated in Section 25 5001 - Building Management System.

6) Local user interface device.

(a) Allows building operators to locally monitor and control equipment.

(b) Back lit LCD display with 30 characters with key pad.

(c) Communicates directly with direct digital controller.

(d) Password protected providing same privileges and access rights provided by Building Management System.

7) Input/output modules.

(a) Input/output modules shall include any combination of digital input (DI), digital output (DO), analog input (AI), and analog output (AO) modules required to configure system.

(b) Digital input modules.

(1) Digital input modules shall accept 2-state data indication, such as from relay or other similar device with dry contacts.

(2) Each digital input signal shall be alarmable.

(3) Furnish isolation and protection against input voltage surges.

(c) Analog input modules.

(1) Analog input modules shall monitor each analog input point, perform analog to digital conversion and shall retain digital val-ue in buffer for interrogation by control panel.

(2) Individually calibrate all analog inputs for zero and span, in both hardware and software.

(3) Verify all analog signals in the field prior to connection to control panel

(d) Analog output modules.

(1) Analog output modules shall accept digital data from control panel, perform digital to analog conversion and shall output analog signal to control analog devices.

(2) Individually calibrate all analog outputs for zero and span, in both hardware and software.

(3) Verify all analog signals in the field prior to connection to control panel.

8) Direct digital controller shall be capable of receiving 4-20 mA analog sig-nals for monitoring.

(a) Temperatures.

(b) Relative humidities.

(c) Pressures.

(d) Carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide concentrations.

(e) Airflow rate.

(f) Damper positions.

(g) Equipment status.

(h) Status of safety devices.







(i) Other devices as indicated in control diagrams and sequence of op-erations.

9) Direct digital control loops, allow for remote setpoint adjustments from Building Management System including, but not limited to, following.

(a) Temperature set points.

(b) Humidity set points.

(c) Static pressure set points.

(d) Airflow rate set points.

(e) Other set points as indicated in control diagrams and sequence of operations.

e. Wire inputs and outputs from each control panel to individual terminal block for interfacing with Building Management System.

f. Input/output terminal voltage shall be 24 volt DC.

g. Locate terminal block in control panel of each system.

h. Furnish and install transformers, power supplies, control wiring, transducers, control linkage, and similar devices as required for proper operation.

i. Direct digital control panels.

1) Install direct digital controller, input/output modules and all auxiliary and ancillary devices in NEMA 1 enclosure with user interface module on panel face.

2) Direct digital control panel selection shall be subject to total control logic requirements and capacity.

3) In no case shall direct digital control panel control more than 2 air han-dling units.

4) Units shall be fully interchangeable modular design, self-contained, real-time computer with integral power supplies, communication channels, clocks, analog and digital inputs and outputs, and local user interface.

5) Unit shall be microcomputer with integral data base stored in random-access memory and with operating and application programs stored in EPROM memory.

6) Units shall allow floating point energy calculations to be performed inde-pendent of Building Management System and shall have real time clock, resettable from Building Management System.

7) Units shall be self-diagnostic and shall automatically report malfunctions to Building Management System.

8) Resident memory shall be capable of being reprogrammed from Building Management System if direct digital control panel loses memory.

9) Controllers shall be capable of performing assigned control and energy management functions as stand-alone units.

10) Failure of communications interface shall not result in default or backup control but shall permit continued full control function, including control algorithms, energy management functions, display and alarm indication.

11) Failure of 1 controller or loop within direct digital control panel shall only affect directly related control circuit.

12) Units shall include LED display output, field control interface module, and communications interface module.

13) Provisions shall be made for self-diagnostic trouble shooting test proce-dure for analog and digital circuits.







14) Unit shall allow for minimum of eight 2 or 3 wire analog inputs, eight 2 wire digital inputs for eight 2 wire digital outputs and eight analog out-puts, with expanded control I/O for each control application.

15) Unit selection shall incorporate not less than 25 percent spare capacity to allow future control applications and supplementing.

2. Power packs shall be furnished for each local processing unit in conjunction with 30 hours battery backup.

a. Power packs shall incorporate 120 VAC to 24 VDC rectification with integral isolation and fuse protection, operating automatic charging circuitry.

b. Output shall be filtered and fitted with solid-state pilot lamp monitoring.

3. Low voltage control wiring.

a. Not less than 18 gauge, 2 or 3 wire, stranded, twisted, shielded pairs with copper braided shield and PVC or Teflon outer jacket.

b. Except as indicated, wiring and electrical work shall comply with Division 26.

c. Install wiring conduits or wireways.


1) Alpha.

2) Belden.

3) Manhattan Wire and Cable.


4. Equipment shall be UL listed and manufactured in accordance with ISA and IEEE standards.

a. Control panel enclosures shall be NEMA rated, arranged for wall mounting.

b. Field sensor wiring connections shall be fitted with plug-in connectors to facili-tate maintenance.

c. Overall installation shall comply with applicable NEC and NFPA standards.

5. Preprogrammed system software.

a. For control circuiting and functions required for building management and control by direct digital control panel.

b. Basic control logic and functions shall be resident in direct digital control pan-els, including adaptive algorithms, trending, binary logic, relational logic, and fixed formulas.

c. Control functions include.

1) Entire sequence of operations indicated in control diagrams and system schematics.

2) Scheduled time of day start-stop.

3) Start-stop optimization.

4) Lead-lag sequence/alternating controls.

5) Event-initiated commands.

6) Time-based commands.

7) Building equipment restart.

8) Analog and digital based control.

9) Proportional integral and derivative closed control loop.

10) Direct and reverse action.

11) Square root and error squared control.

12) Cascade and feed-forward control.

13) Economizer control and override.







14) Enthalpy optimization.

15) Zone control-occupied-setback-dead band.

16) Temperature, humidity, and outside air point reset.

17) Minimum outside air control and reset.

18) Heating/cooling differential control and lockout.

19) Status indication on/off, temperature, humidity, pressure.

20) Manual override with bumpless transfer automatic/manual.

21) Deviation alarm.

22) Interlocking sequence smoke/fire zone control.

23) Keyboard functions.

6. Status readout through minimum 6 character LED display.

a. Provide readout for all servers and control devices indicated in control dia-grams and system schematics, including.

1) Temperature.

2) Humidity.

3) Pressure.

4) Carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide concentration.

5) Airflow rate.

6) Status.

7) Control panel devices.

8) Reset analog device setpoint.

9) Operating mode - Daytime, setback, out of service.

10) Operating/communications failure or alarm.

D. Direct digital electronic Control Components.

1. Temperature sensors.

a. Indoor.

1) Platinum RTD or precision thermistor material, paintable button style flush mount wall sensors.

2) Sensor should be viryually invisible once it is painted to match the decor

3) Unit operating range: 10 degrees F to 230 degrees F with accuracy of plus or minus 0.36 degree F over full range.

4) 4-20 mA, 2-wire transmitter.

5) Manufacturer - Precon ST-BP Series or other approved.

b. Outdoor.

1) Platinum resistance type, rigid bulb type, 1000 ohm, for mounting through wall.

2) Surface mounted in weather resistant enclosure.

3) Operating range: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 240 degrees F with accura-cy of plus or minus 0.5 degree F over full range.


5) Complete with standard gasketed electrical box mounting.

c. Insertion, bulb sensing instrument.

1) Platinum resistance type, rigid bulb type, 1000 ohm.

2) Duct mounted.

3) Unit operating range: Minus 40 degrees F to 240 degrees F with accura-cy of plus 0.5 degree F over full range.








5) Complete with standard gasketed electrical box mounting with duct mounting flange and gasket.

d. Insertion, averaging element.

1) Platinum resistance type, flexible capillary type, 1000 ohm.

2) Duct mounted, with 25 foot stainless steel capillary.

3) Unit operating range: Minus 40 degrees F to 240 degrees F with accura-cy of plus or minus 0.5 degree F over full range.


5) Complete with standard electrical box mounting.

e. Liquid immersion, bulb type.

1) Platinum resistance type, rigid bulb type, 1000 ohm.

2) Pipe mounted in 2-1/2 inch welded stainless steel immersion well.

3) Unit operating range: Minus 40 degrees F to 240 degrees F with accura-cy of plus 0.5 degree F over full range, minimum, depending on system served.


5) Complete with standard electrical box mounting.

2. Humidity sensors.

a. Indoor.

1) Bulk polymer sensor, 0 to 100 percent relative humidity range with plus or minus 2 percent RH accuracy between 20 to 95 percent relative hu-midity.

2) Suitable for commercial HVAC applications.


4) Manufacturer's flush mounted room humidity sensor, color white.

b. Duct mounted.

1) Bulk polymer sensor, 0 to 100 percent relative humidity range with plus or minus 2 percent RH accuracy between 20 to 95 percent relative hu-midity.

2) 7 inch long duct probe.


4) Complete with standard gasketed electrical box mounting with duct mounting flange and gasket.

c. Outdoor.

1) Bulk polymer sensor, 12 to 99 percent relative humidity range with plus or minus 2 percent accuracy.

2) 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire transmitter.

3) Manufacturer's standard enclosure for exterior installation.

3. Pressure sensors.

a. Thin film and diffused semiconductor type.

b. Stainless steel construction with 1/4 inch NPT male connection.

c. Shock resistant.

d. Sensing range to suit application and 1.5 times maximum anticipated pres-sure.

e. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent over full range.

f. 4-20 mA, 2-wire transmitter.

g. Complete with standard electrical box mounting.







4. Occupancy sensors.

a. Passive ultrasonic detectors as specified in Section 26 0923.

b. Interface to control panel to provide signal for both lighting control and start/stop control of air handling equipment.

5. Carbon dioxide sensors.

a. Photoacoustic type with heated stannic dioxide semiconductor.

b. Less than 1 percent drift in first year of operation and minimal drift thereafter.

c. Flush mounted sensors with color to match decor, without LED indicators.

d. Duct mounted sensors shall be provided with LED indicators in a dust proof plastic housing with transparent cover.

e. Sensing range: 0 to 2,000 ppm.

f. Accuracy: plus or minus 5 percent.

g. Output signal: 4 to 20 mA.

h. Complete with manufacturer's enclosure.

6. Carbon monoxide sensors.

a. Solid state metal oxide semiconductor

b. Less than 10 percent drift over a two year period.

c. Wall mounted without LED indicators.

d. Sensing range: 0 to 200 ppm.

e. Accuracy: plus or minus 5 percent.

f. Output signal: 4 to 20 mA.

g. Operating temperature: minus 4 F to 185 F.

h. Complete with manufacturer's standard enclosure.

7. Differential and static pressure transmitters.

a. Single pipe transmitters comparing difference between 2 static pressures and converting this differential to 4-20 mA output signal.

b. Sensing range 0 to 0.5 inch water gauge low pressure, 0 to 2.0 inches water gauge medium pressure, and 0 to 4.0 inches water gauge high pressure.

c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of span.

d. Complete with standard electrical box mounting.

8. Analog current transmitter.

a. Split core 2-wire design.

b. Span to match current requirements of motor.

c. Current limiting feature to prevent false reading on motor start-up.

d. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent for all scales.

e. 4-20 mA, 2-wire transmitter.

f. Complete with standard electrical box mounting.

E. Fan Inlet Airflow/Temperature Measurement Sensor.

1. Assemblies of stationary components to be mounted on fan inlet. Provide 2 sen-sors on double inlet fans.

2. Capable of sensing air flow within range of error of not more than 5 percent plus or minus.

3. Thermal dispersion type airflow measurement sensor.

4. Stainless steel probe assembly and mounting brackets.

5. Sized for fan inlet diameter.

6. Calibrated range: 0 to 10,000 fpm.

7. Convert velocity to airflow rate in cfm.







8. Temperature range: 30 degrees F to 160 degrees F with 0.5 percent accuracy over entire range.

9. Mounting plates suitable for positioning monitoring stations within fan inlet.

10. 4-20 mA, 2-wire transmitter.

F. Outside Airflow Meters.

1. Assemblies of stationary components to be mounted in outside air intake section.

2. Capable of sensing air flow within range of error of not more than 5 percent plus or minus.

3. Thermal dispersion type airflow measurement sensor.

4. Stainless steel probe assembly and mounting brackets.

5. Sized for outside air intake section.

6. Calibrated range: 0 to 5,000 fpm.

7. Convert velocity to airflow rate in cfm.

8. Mounting plates suitable for positioning airflow meter in outside air intake.

9. 4-20 mA, 2-wire transmitter.

G. Airflow Monitoring Stations.

1. Assemblies of stationary components.

2. Capable of sensing average velocity pressure within range of error of not more than 2 percent plus or minus.

3. Self-equalizing, equal area velocity pressure traverse type.

4. Incorporate static pressure sensors and velocity pressure sensors mounted in combination with collimator tubes.

5. Tubing for transmission of sensor signals to taps for averaged static pressure and averaged velocity pressure.

6. Means for locating sensors on an equal area basis within cross sectional area of duct.

7. Mounting plates or duct sections suitable for positioning monitoring stations within respective ducts.

8. Equip each station with 1 collimator-sensor probe team for every 36 square inch-es of cross sectional duct area.

9. Select stations for exact size and shape of duct where located, constructed of metal, and suitable for operation at temperatures of up to 400 degrees F with no perceptible vibration at applicable air velocities.

10. Pressure drop resulting from insertion of airflow monitoring stations shall not be more than 15 percent of velocity head.


a. Air Monitor, Volu-Probe.

b. Brandt Industries, Beta FLP 1000 air flow sensors.

c. Farr, Air Sentinel Type FMS-D.

d. Tek-Air.


H. Flow Meters.

1. Ultrasonic Type.

a. Carbon steel body with flanged end connection and nozzles suitable for in-line installation.

b. Two path transducers.







c. Compatible for the service indicated on the Drawings.

d. Accuracy:

1) Plus or minus 1.5 percent of reading at flow rates greater than 1.5 feet per second.

2) Plus or minus 1.0 percent of reading at flow rates greater than 3.0 feet per second.

e. Repeatability:

1) Liquids: Plus or minus 0.1 to 0.3 percent of reading.

2) Gases: Plus or minus 0.2 to 0.5 percent of reading.

f. Turndown ratio:

1) Liquids: 400:1.

2) Gases: 150:1.

g. Power: 120 volt, 60 herz, single phase.

h. Analog output signal: 4 to 20 mA.

i. Operating temperature up to 600 F.

j. Operating pressure to match rating of piping system, but in no case less than 150 psig.

k. Furnish with manufacturer's enclosure.

l. Locate and install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with respect to upstream and downstream conditions and distances.

I. Automatic Control Valves.

1. Install electrically operated valves, as indicated on drawings.

2. 2-way type.

3. Single-seated.

4. Equip with renewable hardened metal seats (or discs) and plugs to minimize wire-drawing.

5. Valves shall furnish characterized flow of equal percentage nature over at least 20 to 1 range of flow rates.

6. Characterizing of flow may be accomplished by means of V-port plugs or similar specially contoured throttling plugs or nuts.

7. Include valves rated for service temperature and pressure.

8. Include screwed valves for sizes 2 inches and smaller.

9. Include flanged valves for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.

10. Select steam valves to close against maximum steam pressure of respective sys-tems, but in no case less than 30 psig.

11. Select water valves to operate against maximum differential pressure of their re-spective systems, but in no case less than 30 psig.

J. Dampers.

1. Low-leakage louver type with blade edge and flexible metal compressible jamb seals.

2. Hexagonal shaped damper axles with molded synthetic bearings.

3. Damper frames shall be 5 inch by 1 inch by 1/8 inch 6063T5 extruded aluminum channel with mounting flanges.

4. Dampers over 48 inches in height, 48 inches in width, or over 25 square feet in area shall be built in 2 or more sections with interconnections on every other blade.







5. Airfoil type damper blades, aluminum, with interlocking edges and maximum blade width of 8 inches.

6. Equip dampers with spring loaded side seals which extend full width of damper.

7. Parallel blade type for outside air and return air mixing, and opposed blade for other applications, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Damper leakage rate shall not exceed 3.0 cfm per square foot of damper face ar-ea at 1 inch water gauge differential pressure and 8 cfm per square foot at 4 inch-es water gauge differential pressure.

9. Damper drive torque shall not exceed 6.0 inch pounds per square foot.

10. Damper performance shall be AMCA certified. Damper shall be constructed for operation at maximum static pressure differential of 6.0 inches water gauge and at maximum working temperature of 250 degrees F.

11. Install dampers used for mixing 2 airstreams with blade orientations shown on drawings

12. Furnish and install operators for each damper section.

a. Face area controlled by each operator shall not exceed maximum area rec-ommended by operator manufacturer for each specific application.

b. Maximum damper face area per operator is 25 square feet.

c. Operator drive torque shall match damper manufacturer's requirements.


a. Johnson Controls.

b. Honeywell.

c. Siemens Building Technologies Group.

d. Louvers and Dampers Incorporated.

e. American Warming and Ventilating.

f. Ruskin Manufacturing, Model CD 50.

g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

K. Valve and Damper Operators.

1. Furnish and install electric operators as indicated on drawings.

2. Capable of smooth, proportional control under operating conditions normal to sys-tem.

3. Furnish and install spring return operators for 2-position control, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Furnish and install spring returns on reversible operators where required for fail-safe operation.

5. Operators shall not require lubrication.

6. Furnish operators capable of operating at ambient temperatures ranging from mi-nus 20 degrees F to plus 160 degrees F and capable of closing off to ensure tight seal against maximum pressures in system.

7. Furnish and install positioners where required for proper control sequence opera-tion.


a. Belimo

b. Johnson Controls.

c. Honeywell.

d. Siemens Building Technologies Group.








9. Equip operators which operate in sequence with similar operators, with adjustable setpoints and operating ranges.

L. Local Control Panels.

1. Install adjacent to each system.

2. Construct of not less than 16 gauge sheet steel and complete with hinged, locking cover.

3. Key panel locks alike.

4. Furnish and install NEMA 1 enclosures for panels located indoors.

5. Furnish and install NEMA 3R enclosures for panels located outdoors or where wet conditions exist indoors.

6. Panels shall be modular in design, of manufacturer's standard size and configura-tion to allow flexibility in changes or additions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Control System.

1. Install control components as indicated on temperature control diagrams and sys-tem schematics.

2. Install motorized dampers.

a. Install associated operators.

B. Installation of steam automatic control valves is specified in Section 23 2200. Install strainers on upstream side of valves.

C. Installation for water automatic control valves is specified in Section 23 2100.

D. Install damper operators and associated linkage for dampers furnished and installed in air handling equipment specified in Section 23 7400.


A. Tests and Adjustments.

1. After completion of installation, test, regulate, and adjust components of systems.

2. These adjustments shall be made during heating and cooling seasons.

3. Place systems in complete operating condition subject to acceptance of Owner's Representative.

4. Special attention is directed to necessity for proper orientation, direction of rota-tion, and adjusting of motorized mixing dampers of mixed outside air, return air systems.

5. Stratification of outside air through unit may cause control system malfunctions, common manifestation being hunting preheat coil control valve or consequent nuisance freezestat shutdowns.

6. Strict attention shall be directed toward requirement for parallel (not opposed) blade mixing dampers, and placement of them as indicated on drawings.

7. After completion of original test of installation and acceptance by Owner's Repre-sentative, furnish service incidental to performance of temperature control system for period of 1 year.







B. System Initialization.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for start-up and initialization of control systems.

2. Install following minimum data into control system data base for each point. Point tag format shall be established by Owner.

a. Building description.

b. System description.

c. Device description.

d. Data access code description.

e. Hardware address.

f. Associated alarm messages.

g. Alarm reporting device.

h. Point display position in the color graphic display.

3. Analog points shall require following additional minimum information.

a. Engineering units.

b. Setpoint.

c. High and low alarm limits.

d. High and low alarm dead band.

e. Proportional gain constant.

f. Integral gain constant.

g. Control dead band.

h. Associated analog output (as required).

4. Digital points shall require following additional minimum information.

a. On/off status or open/close status, depending on point type.

b. Normal status and alarm condition.

5. Pulsing digital points shall require following additional minimum information.

a. High and low alarm limits.

b. Indication per pulse.

C. Calibration and Checkout Test.

1. Calibrate and verify operation of control system and all input and output devices, including sensors and control devices resident and network after installation is complete. Test each sensor by making comparison between actual measured value at sensor and value displayed at control panel. Submit for review results of functional and diagnostics test and calibration of devices, listing all problems en-countered.

2. Demonstrate that all software modules function as specified along with verification of operator interface displays and reports. Software checkout shall include all op-erating system software and all applications software.

3. Furnish Owner with 1 set of all calibration equipment required to calibrate all sen-sors and control devices.

3.03 SYSTEM MANUALS

A. Furnish to Owner 3 copies of each manual, bound in hard-cover, loose leaf binders, af-ter system acceptance. Each binder shall identify manual's contents on cover. Manu-als shall also include name, address and telephone number of nearest service repre-sentative for each item of equipment and each system. Manuals shall have table of







contents and tab sheets for easy access of material. All manuals shall include modifi-cations made during installation and system acceptance.

B. Operator's manual - Operator's manual shall contain all procedures and instructions for operation of system, including.

1. Control equipment panels, sensors, and control devices.

2. System start-up procedures.

3. Use of system, command and applications software.

4. Data base revision and system generation.

5. Automatic restart procedures.

6. Fail-safe operations.

C. Engineering manual - Engineering manual shall include general description of control system installation, checkout and operating procedures, physical details of equipment, electrical requirements of equipment, alignment and calibration procedures and parts list. Engineering manual shall also describe all operating system software and applica-tions software.

D. Maintenance manual - Maintenance manual shall include general description of control system installation, checkout and operating procedures, physical details of equipment, electrical requirements of equipment, alignment and calibration procedures and parts list. Maintenance manual shall also describe inspection procedures, periodic preven-tative maintenance routines, diagnostics, and repair or replacement of defective com-ponents for all equipment furnished.

3.04 SOFTWARE UPDATES

A. Furnish all software updates and verify system operation during Warranty period. These updates shall be accomplished in timely manner, coordinated with Owner. New software updates shall be incorporated into appropriate system manuals and software documentation.

3.05 SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS

A. Furnish recommendations for system modifications to Owner, but do not make any system changes. Any modifications, including changes to operating parameters and control settings, shall be made only with prior approval by Owner. Reconfigure all ex-isting applications software required by system modifications during upgrade. Any modifications to system shall be incorporated into appropriate system manuals and software documentation.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Training.

1. Furnish training program which shall prepare Owner's operating, maintenance, and engineering personnel in efficient operation, upkeep and repair of control sys-tem. Training program shall utilize services of competent instructors to give full instruction in operation, adjustment, maintenance and programming of control system. Complete training program consisting of multiple courses shall be fur-nished in programming, operation and maintenance.







2. Analyze control system to identify tasks to be learned and knowledge required to successfully operate, maintain and repair control system. Analysis shall include all hardware devices, including control panels, operator interface terminals, sen-sors, actuators and any other hardware devices. Software analysis shall include alarm annunciation, automatic restarts, command overrides, calculations, equip-ment monitoring, local loop controls and all software programming and interfaces.

3. Operator training shall include, but shall not be limited to.

a. Operation of control panels, sensors, and control devices.

b. System initialization procedures.

c. Operator commands.

d. Operator diagnostics.

e. Failure, recovery procedures.

f. Alarm formats.

g. Operation of color graphic display screens.

4. Maintenance training shall include, but shall not be limited to.

a. Equipment layout.

b. Trouble shooting and diagnostics.

c. Repair instructions.

d. Preventative and periodic maintenance.

e. Calibration of sensors and control devices.

5. Furnish all materials required for successful completion of training course. Mate-rials shall include, but not be limited to.

a. Course outlines by topic and schedule.

b. Lesson plans.

c. Handouts and transparencies.

d. Visual media.

e. Instructor guides.

f. Course objectives.

g. Knowledge and performance checks.

h. System manuals.

6. Training courses, lesson plans and materials shall be submitted to Owner for re-view and approval. Materials used to teach courses shall become property of Owner.

B. Demonstration

1. After installation, completely adjust control equipment furnished under this Con-tract, place system in operation and instruct operating personnel in operation of control system.

a. Two return inspection trips shall be made to project, 1 near heating design conditions and 1 near air conditioning design conditions for purpose of check-ing out and final calibration of control systems.

b. Make additional adjustments at this time.

END OF SECTION





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC 23 1008 - 1


SECTION 23 1008 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. AISC (COMM) - Commentary on the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design ; 1989.

B. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping ; 2007 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).

C. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel ; 2008.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. For Review.

1. Shop drawings.



c. Where pipe hangers cannot be hung from building structure, submit proposed method of installing additional structural steel that connects to the building structure.


A. Qualifications.



3. Examination shall have been within the past six months, unless welder has been making this type of weld after passing test within two years, as specified under qualification procedures of AWS D1.1.



PART 2 PRODUCTS













c. Anvil International Inc. (Grinnell), Fig. 70.

d. Michigan Hanger Co., No. 100.


B. Clevis Hangers.














c. Michigan Hanger Co., No. 104.


D. Single-Rod Roller Hanger.

1. Steel frame, cast iron roller, and steel roller rod.



b. Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 140.




E. Two-Rod Roller Hanger.

1. Cast iron roller, steel roller rod, and malleable iron or cast iron sockets, without hanger rod.







F. Adjustable, Two-Rod Roller Hanger.

1. Cast iron roller, steel roller rod, malleable iron or cast iron sockets, and threaded hanger rods with nuts.













G. Protection Shields.

1. Minimum 18 gauge thick, 180 degree, galvanized steel shield with flared ends and centering ribs.

H. Preinsulated Hanger Inserts.

1. Hanger inserts consist of two 180 degree segments of 100 psi average compres-sive strength insulation of same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation.

a. Where manufacturer recommends or drawings indicate, include wedge shaped insert in bottom half, consisting of 600 psi minimum compressive strength calcium silicate.

b. Length of hanger insert is scheduled on drawings.

2. Protect each half of hanger insert by adhering galvanized sheet metal shield to saddle.

a. Shield length and gauge thickness is scheduled on drawings.

b. Where indicated or recommended by manufacturer, include heavy-duty load bearing plate on bottom of metal shield.

c. Area of high density insert and pipe bearing support surface of shield shall be as scheduled on drawings or as recommended by manufacturer.


1) American Mechanical Insulation Sales Inc.: AMIS 200 Calmax.

2) B-Line: Figures B3380 through B3384.

3) Carpenter and Paterson: 465 CVB.

4) Michigan Hanger Co.: Nos. 126 and 127.

5) Pipe Shields Incorporated: Series A1000 through A9000.

6) Value Engineered Products, Inc.: Pro-Shield Series.


3. For insulated copper piping with Type PP-2 insulation, use preinsulated hanger inserts as manufactured by Klo-Sure.

I. Trapeze Hangers.





J. Beam Clamps for Pipe 2 Inches and Smaller.

1. Side type.




3) Supply Sales (Grinnell): Fig. 217.

4) Michigan Hanger Co.: No. 367.








2. Side I type.





3. Adjustable type.





4) Michigan Hanger Co.: No. 363.


K. I-Beam Clamps.




2) Michigan Hanger: Model 361.


4) Supply Sales (Grinnell): Fig. 133 and 134.


L. Beam Clamps.

1. For pipe sized 24 and 30 inches, with weldless eye nuts.


1) B-Line: Fig. B3291 through Fig. B3297.




M. Hanger Rods.

1. Threaded, hot rolled, steel rod conforming to ASTM A 36 or A 575.



N. Hanger Rod Anchors.

1. Suitable for supporting hanger rods in reinforced concrete construction.

a. For HVAC piping systems, ductwork and equipment.

1) Mechanical expansion type.

2) Acceptable products.

(a) Hilti: Kwik Bolt TZ.

(b) Powers Fasteners: Power-Stud + SD2.

(c) Simpson Strong Tie: Strong-Bolt.


2.02 MATERIALS









PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION





D. Support piping from building structural frame, not from roof deck, permanent metal forms for concrete floors, reinforced concrete slab (unless indicated otherwise), or from other pipe, duct, or equipment.

E. Contractor's attention is directed to drawing details and building structural framing lay-out that may require hanger spacing more frequently than spacings shown in table be-low.




F. Uninsulated Piping.



G. Insulated Piping.

1. Smaller than 4 inches: Install adjustable swivel ring or clevis type hangers with preinsulated hanger insert.

2. Cold pipe 4 inches and larger: Install clevis type hangers with preinsulated hanger insert.

3. Hot pipe 4 and 5 inches: Install single-rod roller type hangers with preinsulated hanger insert.

4. Hot pipe 6 inches and larger: Install 2-rod roller type hangers with preinsulated hanger insert.

5. On roof, sized 1 inch and larger: Install pipe rolls with preinsulated hanger insert.

H. Pipes Supported Individually From Structural Steel.









a. Side beam clamp.



3. Beam clamp size required for given pipe size is scheduled on drawings.


I. Trapeze Supports.



3. As an option to hanging piping from trapeze support using hanger devices speci-fied, trapeze support below piping may be used as means of support.

4. When this option is used, uninsulated pipe shall be secured to trapeze support with standard U-bolts and locknuts.

5. Install insulated cold pipe with an insulating saddle and shield, and secure it to trapeze support with standard U-bolt and locknut.

6. Cradle insulated hot pipe in an adjustable cast iron roller support.

J. Vertical Pipe Supports.

1. Support vertical runs of uninsulated or insulated cold pipe not subject to apprecia-ble expansion with wrought steel clamps securely clamped to risers.

2. Support insulated hot pipe subject to vertical expansion by same wrought steel clamp, securely clamped to riser and attached to springs to absorb vertical deflec-tion without appreciable loss of supporting effort.


K. Where necessary for proper system functioning, brace piping and supports against re-action sway and vibration.

L. For concentrated loads, e.g., valves, reduce allowable span proportionately.

M. Vertical risers shall be supported independently of connected horizontal piping when-ever practical, with fixed or spring supports at base and at intervals to accommodate system range of load and thermal conditions, and shall be guided for lateral stability.


2. For horizontal piping contiguous to moving risers, two supports nearest to riser shall be spring supports, unless otherwise indicated.

N. After piping systems have been installed, tested, and placed in satisfactory operation, firmly tighten hanger rod nut and jam nut and upset threads to prevent the movement of fasteners.

O. Welding to Building Structure.











1) Tension or compression, same as base metal.

(a) Shear, 15,800 pounds per square inch.

P. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose slag, scale, rust, grease, paint, or other foreign material.

Q. Before welding, painted surfaces shall have paint removed to expose clean steel sur-face.


R. No welds transmitting calculated stress shall be less than 3 inches in length, and no in-termittent welds shall be less than 2 inches in length.

S. No welds shall be applied to flanges of tension members perpendicular to direction of stress.

T. Turn side and end fillet welds around corners for minimum length of twice nominal size of weld.

U. Length of end returns is not to be included in calculated weld length.

V. No welding or other operation involving use of flame, arcs, or sparking devices will be allowed without written permission of Owner's Representative.

W. Welds found to be in nonconformance to requirements of AWS D1.1 shall be repaired or replaced according to workmanship section of AWS D1.1 without cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION





HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2100 - 1


SECTION 23 2100 – HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Section 23 0600 - Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.

C. Section 23 0720 - HVAC Insulation.

D. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.


A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping ; 2007 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 3000 – for submittal procedures.

B. For Information.

1. Product data.

a. Balancing fittings, flow probes, and balancing valves.


A. Quality control provisions of Division 01, General Requirements, apply to this Section. Reviews and acceptance, except as required for field installation, field applications, and field tests, shall be obtained before delivery of items of material, equipment, or systems to project site.

B. Certificates of Conformance - Before delivery of piping and materials, certificates of conformance or compliance, or certified test reports, in triplicate, attesting that piping and materials listed meet requirements specified, shall be accepted by Owner's Field Representative.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEMS

A. Hot Water Heating System.

1. Aboveground pipe.

a. Type BS-2, black steel pipe.

b. Type COP-1, copper pipe, for sizes 2 inches and smaller.







2. Joints, black steel pipe.

a. Screwed for piping 2 inches and smaller.

b. Butt welded for piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, except at flanged equipment connections.

c. Use Type GASK1 gasketing and Type BOLT2 bolting for flanged joints.

3. Joints, copper.

a. Hard soldered.

4. Valves.

a. Type GSV-1, General service valves.


A. Balancing Fittings, Flow Probes, and Balancing Valves.

1. Furnish with metal tags showing design flow rate, meter reading at design flow rate, fluid measured, pipe size, and identification.

2. Include calibration charts for size and type of balancing fitting furnished.

3. Furnish portable meter with manometer, 12-foot long connecting hoses, shutoff valves, and required accessories in carrying case.

4. Portable meter shall become property of Owner.

5. Balancing fitting and flow probe shall include.

a. Pressure probe with orifice centered on the pipe axis and oriented to face one of pipe ends.

b. Identical probe with orifice facing opposite end of pipe.

c. Valves for shutting off probe taps.

d. Connections for attachment of instrument tubing.

6. Balancing fittings for pipes sized 1/2 and 3/4 inch.

a. Straight pipe body made of rough cast brass with smooth machined bore and including drilled and tapped bosses for the insertion of probe valves, press-fit inserted brass probes, drilled, faced, and tapped female ends for mounting of the unit screwed ends.

b. Balancing cock: Ball type, may be integral part of balancing fitting, or sepa-rate ball valve.

c. Probe valves: Bar stock design with flared tubing connector on free end.


1) Gerand Engineering Co., Balvalve-Indicator.

2) Taco, Sentinel Nos. 7100 and 7101.


7. Flow probes for pipes sized 1 inch through 2 inches.

a. Similar in design to balancing fittings, except fabricated of steel or brass pipe, with threaded ends and not including balancing valves.


1) Gerand Engineering Co.

2) Taco, Sentinel Nos. 7112 through 7115.


8. Flow probes for pipes sized larger than 2 inches.







a. Tube-within-tube design, bushing with packing gland, calibrated ports located to afford accurate sensing of velocity and static pressure when inserted transversely into pipe, connections for instrument tubing and shutoff cocks.

b. Bushing: Steel, suitable for welding into pipe wall.

c. Packing gland: Brass, 3 piece water tube connector.


1) Gerand Engineering Co.

2) Taco, Sentinel Nos. 7026 through 7038.


2.03 MATERIALS

A. Pipe Schedules and Accessories.

1. Refer to Section 23 0523, Section 23 0600 and Section 23 1008 for pipe sched-ules, general service valves, and related accessory requirements for hydronic sys-tems specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Installation.

1. Install piping, including valves, hangers, and accessories, as specified in Section 23 0523, Section 23 0600 and Section 23 1008 and as specified in this Section.

2. Pitch pressurized, horizontal water lines upward in direction of flow, approximately 1 inch per 40 feet of pipe run.

3. Pitch gravity horizontal water lines downward in direction of flow, approximately 1 inch per 40 feet of pipe run.

4. Avoid downward bends and dips.

5. Unless indicated otherwise, take branches on water systems from bottom of mains.

6. Install eccentric reducers in water lines so pipe sections are aligned flush at top.

7. Maintain hydronic systems in operation during testing, adjusting, and balancing work specified in Section 23 0593.

B. Install manual air vent or air chamber where indicated.

C. Refer to Section 23 2500 for chemical treatment system and equipment requirements.


A. Tests and Acceptance.

1. Test piping systems in accordance with applicable requirements specified in Sec-tion 23 0600 and as specified in this Section.

2. Hydrostatically test water systems at 1-1/2 times system operating pressure, or at test pressures indicated on Table below, whichever is greater.

System Test Pressure (psig)

Hot Water Heating Hydrostatic 150







No pressure loss of the systems under test shall be allowed.

B. Upon completion of work, but before final acceptance, operate systems for 2 days for purpose of testing and satisfying requirements, when directed by Owner's Representa-tive.

C. Pipe Cleaning.

1. After successful pressure testing, clean and flush hydronic systems as specified in Section 23 2500.

END OF SECTION





HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3100 - 1


SECTION 23 3100 – HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General HVAC Ductwork Classification.

1. Low pressure ductwork, maximum positive or negative pressure of 2 inches water gauge with maximum duct velocity of 2500 feet per minute.

2. Medium pressure ductwork, maximum positive pressure of 4 inches water gauge or maximum negative pressure of 3 inches water gauge with maximum duct ve-locity of 4000 feet per minute.


A. ACGIH (IV) - Industrial Ventilation, A Manual of Recommended Practice ; 2007, 26th edition.

B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ; 2005.

C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ; 2005.

D. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip ; 1999 (Reapproved 2004).

E. ASTM A181/A181M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General-Purpose Piping ; 2006.

F. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength ; 2007b.

G. ASTM A312/A312M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes ; 2007.

H. ASTM A336/A336M - Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High Pressure Parts ; 2009.

I. ASTM A403/A403M - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings ; 2007a.

J. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galva-nized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ; 2007.

K. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry ; 2007.

L. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements ; 2004.

M. ASTM E477 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Perfor-mance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers ; 2006a.

N. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code ; 2007.







O. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ; 2002.

P. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

Q. SMACNA (AIP) - Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction ; 1975.

R. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible ; 2005.

S. SMACNA (RIDC) - Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards ; 2004.

T. SMACNA (ROUND) - Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards ; 1999.

U. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning ; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

V. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory ; current edition.

W. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors ; 2005.

X. UL 214 - Standard for Tests for Flame Propagation of Fabrics and Films ; 1997.

Y. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ; 2003.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. For Review.

1. Shop Drawings.

a. Plan views.

b. Elevations.

c. Duct system sizes.

d. Duct hanger installation including details and locations of seismic bracing.

C. For Information.

1. Product Data.

a. Acoustical duct lining.

b. Flexible connections.

c. Rectangular duct system access doors.

d. Round duct system access doors.

e. Prefabricated duct silencers.

f. Acoustical plenum or equipment housing.

g. Fire dampers.

h. Gravity backdraft dampers.

i. Diffusers, registers, and grilles.

j. Air intake and relief hoods.

k. Prefabricated roof curbs.

2. Design Data.

a. Calculations used for selecting sheet metal gauges, stiffener profiles, stiffener spacing, and flanged connections for applicable spacing of supports, internal pressures, dead loads, and live loads for outdoor ductwork.

b. Manufacturer's Layout Drawings for acoustical plenums, drawn to scale and showing associated apparatus and equipment.

3. Test Reports.







a. Factory test reports required in referenced standards or as specified with test-ing performed by manufacturer or accepted independent laboratory.


A. Do not fabricate ductwork and other sheet metal work prior to receipt of associated fabrication drawing submittals, marked reviewed, and initialed by Owner's Field Repre-sentative.



B. See Section 23 0600 for further requirements.

1.07 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Proprietary Duct Connections.

1. Slip-on, flange type, transverse joint duct connection with integral duct wall mastic sealant flange gaskets, bolted corner pieces, and metal cleats for retaining mating flange sections.

2. Medium pressure ducts.

a. Withstand internal pressures of plus or minus 10 inches water gauge without leaking or permanently deforming.


1) Ductmate Industries, Ductmate System.

2) Exanno Products, Nexus Duct Connection System.


3. TDC/TDF formed on transverse flanges, or T-24 formed on transverse flanges are acceptable only for low pressure systems in sizes not requiring tie rods.

B. Acoustical Duct Lining.

1. Fiberglass board liner, 3 pound density, 2 inches thick.

2. In accordance with NFPA 90A.


a. Schuller/Manville.

b. Linacoustic.


C. Sealants and caulking.







1. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with following limits for VOC content when calculated according to South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.

a. Sealants: 250 g/L.

b. Sealant primers for nonporous substrates: 250 g/L.

c. Sealant primers for porous substrates: 775 g/L.

2. Water based.

3. Duct Joint Sealant.

a. In accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 181.

b. Furnish permanently flexible, elastic type sealant systems that do not creep or relax.

c. Furnish hard-setting activator/adhesive and mineral impregnated woven tape sealant systems that retain their adhesion and shrinkage stresses permanent-ly, do not turn brittle, and do not dust.


1) United McGill, United Duct Sealer (Water Based).

2) Hardcast Incorporated, Hardcast Versa-Grip 181.


4. Caulking.

a. Permanently flexible, heat resistant caulking compound.

b. General purpose, oil base, caulking compounds will not be accepted.


1) Tremco, JS-779 Acoustical Sealer.

2) Foster, Elastolar Sealant No. 95-44.

3) United States Gypsum Company, Acoustical Sealant.


D. Touch-Up Paint.

1. Zinc rich paint, suitable for touching up galvanized sheet metal.


a. Brite Products Company, Brite Zinc.

b. ZRC Products Company, Galvilite or Cold Galvanizing Compound.

c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements

E. Flexible Connections.

1. Standard service.

a. UL listed, flexible connections constructed in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 214.

b. Neoprene coated fiberglass fabric weighing approximately 30 ounces per square yard.

c. Metal collar frames.

d. Suitable for continuous temperatures up to 200 degrees F.

e. Sized not more than 4 inches and not less than 2 inches in width.

f. Allow not less than 1 inch slack for each connection.


1) Ventfabrics, Metaledge Ventglas.

2) Duro-Dyne, Metal-Fab with Specification grade neoprene/glass fabric.

3) Elgen Manufacturing, SDN.








F. Rectangular Duct System, Access Doors.

1. General.

a. Stamped sheet metal of insulated double pan construction.

b. Loose pin or continuous pin hinges.

c. Compression latches.

1) One latch on doors sized 12 inches by 12 inches and under.

2) Two latches on doors sized larger than 12 inches by 12 inches.

d. Sponge neoprene gaskets.

e. Wire mesh glass observation windows, where Drawings indicate, largest standard size, but not larger than 10 inches by 10 inches.


1) Ventfabrics, Ventlok.

2) Cesco, Model 10.

3) Air Balance, Fire/Seal.

4) Duro-Dyne, Insulated Access Doors.


2. For low pressure ducts.

a. Furnish access doors with gaskets between access door frame and duct.

b. Hold door frame in place by peening notched knockover edges tightly to duct.

c. Where obstructions do not allow complete opening of access doors, furnish and install access doors with cam latches.


1) Ventfabrics, Ventlok Sash-Type, Series 90.

2) Duro-Dyne, Draw-Tite Sash Lock.


G. Round Duct System, Access Doors.

1. Access section designed for installation in round ducts, consisting of:

a. Ductwork mounted barrel section.

b. 20 gauge housing saddle welded to barrel section.

2. Gasketed, framed opening.

3. Double wall insulated access door, held by pressure sensitive release clips, cali-brated to open inwardly under negative pressure.

4. With handle and retaining chain.


a. United McGill, Sheet Metal Division.

b. Semco, Type D-3.


H. Turning Vanes.

1. Airfoil type.

2. Field installed on matching factory made side pieces prepunched for vane spacing of not more than 3-1/4 inches.

3. Single radius, single sheet type and shop fabricated turning vanes are prohibited.


a. Duro Dyne, VR-2.








I. Prefabricated Duct Silencers.

1. Outer Casings: 18 gauge minimum galvanized steel sheets.

2. Interior Baffles or Splitters: 26 gauge minimum galvanized perforated steel sheets.

3. Where aluminum construction is required, use sheets not less than 50 percent thicker than specified for steel construction.

4. Refer to drawings for silencer performance requirements.

5. Scheduled air flow and acoustical performance requirements shall be met when silencers are tested in accordance with ASTM E477.

6. Silencers composed of 2 or more sections assembled in series, or not cataloged by manufacturer, will not be accepted.

7. Acoustical fill.

a. Inert, verminproof and moistureproof, bacteria and fungus resistant, inorganic glass or mineral fiber minimum 4 pound density, packed behind partitions or splitters, under not less than 5 percent compression.

b. Completely wrap acoustical fill of each sound absorbing baffle with heat sealed polyethylene, mylar, or tedlar film bags, approximately 1.5 mils thick.

c. Furnish noncombustible, corrosion resistant spacers between film bags and perforated face of acoustical fill.

d. Scheduled performance data for silencers are derated for application of film bags and spacers.

e. Do not match these data to catalog ratings for conventional silencers.

f. Silencers furnished without specified spacers and using corrugated baffles as compensation for spacer absence, will not be accepted.


a. Price

b. Industrial Acoustics Company.

c. Vibro-Acoustics.


J. Single Wall Equipment Housings and Plenums.

1. Furnish rigid, airtight, equipment housings or plenums in accordance with SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

2. Construct ceiling, roof, or top panels to support a concentrated load of 300 pounds, applied at single point on panel.

3. Construct walls, roof, ceiling, or top panels not to deflect more than 1/200 of their span.

4. Where fans, coils, and filters, are installed within plenum, fabricate and install spacer sheets with structural support, gaskets, and caulking as required for tight seal.

5. Where equipment is located adjacent to wall or another plenum and cannot be in-sulated as specified in Section 23 0720, furnish double wall, 18 gauge, galvanized sheet metal construction, filled with 1-1/2 inch thick, 2-1/2 pound density fiber-glass insulation secured with recommended adhesive.

K. Acoustical Plenum or Equipment Housing.

1. Factory built, rigid, self-supporting, airtight, sound absorbing, noise attenuating, and thermally insulating panels, assembled, braced, and sealed, matched rolled steel joiner and connector elements, and equipped with necessary factory built walk-in access doors and large air flow openings.







2. Product of manufacturer supplying acoustical plenums for at least five years prior to this installation.

3. Ceiling or top panel construction shall be capable of supporting concentrated load of not less than 300 pounds, applied at single point of top panel area.

4. Where fans, coils, and filters, are installed within a plenum, fabricate and install 18 gauge safing sheets with structural support, gaskets, and caulking to obtain tight seal.

5. Furnish 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel roof channels and aprons, wall and corner joiners, and floor channels, formed to prevent direct path of sound or air leakage.

6. Panel accessories may be field cut to required dimensions.

7. Caulk joints airtight with nonhardening sealing compound.

8. Furnish rectangular wall openings larger than 1 square foot with manufacturer's standard trim channels.

9. Extend safing sheets to panel joiners to prevent bypassing of air through thick-ness of panels.

10. Acoustical panels.

a. Sandwich type, 4 inch thick panels.

b. Perforated, 22 gauge minimum, galvanized steel sheets on interior side.

c. 18 gauge minimum galvanized steel sheets on exterior side.

d. 18 gauge galvanized steel internal and perimeter reinforcing.

e. Packed under slight compression with plastic wrapped fill material.

f. Space internal and perimeter reinforcing to limit spans to 2 feet maximum length.

g. Secure reinforcing to face sheets with rivets or spot welds on maximum 2 inch centers.

h. Space wrapped fill material 1/4 inch from interior perforated plate with corro-sion resistant spacers.

i. Maximum allowable flame spread rating: 20.

j. Maximum allowable smoke developing rating: 20.

k. Maximum allowable fuel contribution rating: 30, in accordance with UL 723 Fire Hazard Classifications.

l. Minimum absorption coefficients for composite panel assembly, when tested in accordance with ASTM C423 and minimum allowable transmission loss of panel, including components, when tested in accordance with ASTM E90 shall be as follows:

1) At 125 hertz: Absorption Coefficient of 0.65 and Transmission Loss of 21.

2) At 250 hertz: Absorption Coefficient 0.99 of and Transmission Loss of 27.



5) At 2000 hertz: Absorption Coefficient of 95 and Transmission Loss of 58.

6) At 4000 hertz: Absorption Coefficient of 90 and Transmission Loss of 67.







m. Heat transfer coefficient for panels shall not exceed 0.1 British thermal unit per hour per square foot per degree F.

11. Fill material.

a. Noncombustible, NFPA approved, inert, mildew resistant, and verminproof, sound absorbing fill.

b. No settling under vibration or shock encountered during shipping and han-dling.

c. Enclose sound absorbing fill inside panel with not less than 1-1/2 mils thick film of polyethylene, mylar, or tedlar, suitable for environmental temperatures up to 170 degrees F.

12. Doors.

a. Factory assembled, overlapping seal type, 4 inch thick door.

b. Constructed of 18 gauge minimum galvanized steel sheets.

c. Packed with fill material.

d. Equipped with single, continuous air acoustic seal around sill, jambs, and head.

e. Furnish 2 hinges for each door, designed for door size and weight.

f. Furnish 2 wedge lever type latches and an inside release handle for each door.

g. Arrange doors to open against air pressure.


a. Industrial Acoustics Company.

b. Vibro-Acoustics.


L. Coil Drip Pans.

1. Construct coil drain pans and pan drain piping system.

2. Drain pans.

a. 12 gauge galvanized steel.

b. Long sides brake formed.

c. Brazed joints.

d. With threaded coupling for drain piping.

3. Drain piping.

a. Schedule 40 galvanized steel.

b. Cast iron drainage fittings.

M. Fixed Louver Blank-Off Panels.

1. Galvanized sheet metal, 18 gauge, insulated in accordance with requirements specified in Article, Ductwork Material.

N. Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers.

1. Furnish UL555 and UL555S classified combination fire and smoke floor dampers as indicated, with interlocking blades and having 1-1/2 hour fire rating.

2. Leakage Class II.

2. Material shall be identical to that of associated ductwork.

3. Fusible links: 165 degrees F melting point.

4. Rated static pressure 4" and maximum velocity 4000 fpm (to exceed design air-flow).







5. Mounting sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit floor application.


a. Air Balance.

b. Greenheck.

c. National Controlled Air.

d. Nailor Industries.

e. Ruskin Manufacturing.

f. or equal

O. Manual Volume Dampers.

1. General.

a. Furnish factory made or field fabricated volume dampers.

b. Field fabricated dampers, in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construc-tion Standards - Metal and Flexible.

c. Factory fabricated dampers in accordance with specified requirements.

2. Rectangular.

a. Multiple opposed blade type damper with 18 gauge galvanized steel airfoil blades.

b. 16 gauge galvanized steel channel frames.

c. Full length galvanized steel shafts.

d. Self-lubricating bearings of nylon or sintered metal.


1) American Warming and Ventilating, Model VC-30.

2) Arrow United Industries, Model 1770 Special.

3) Vent Products, Model 5613.


3. Round (16 inch diameter and smaller).

a. Single blade type with double sheet, galvanized steel blade and 1-piece shaft.

b. Suitable for operation at velocities not less than 3000 feet per minute and pressures not less than 4 inches water gauge.

c. Stainless steel or sintered metal self-lubricating bearings.


1) American Warming and Ventilating, Model VC-25.

2) Arrow United Industries, Model 1770 Special.

3) Ruskin Manufacturing, Model CDRS 25.

4) Vent Products, Model 5301.


4. Round (larger than 16 inches).

a. Multiple opposed blade type damper.

b. Suitable for operation at velocities not less than 3000 feet per minute and pressures not less than 4 inches water gauge, with 16 gauge galvanized steel blades.

c. 14 gauge galvanized steel sheet bands or channel frames, 1/2 inch diameter.

d. 1-piece steel shafts.

e. Nylon or sintered metal self-lubricating bearings.


1) Arrow United Industries, Model 85 (Aluminum).







2) Vent Products, Model 5300 (Steel).


5. Concealed operators.

a. Complete with sleeve extending to bottom face of ceiling, operating key, and spring-friction held cap not exceeding 7/8 inch in diameter.

b. Furnish miter gears where required for horizontal damper shafts.

c. Acceptable product.

1) Young Regulator, No. 896.


6. Concealed operators.

a. Concealed damper controller and cable with die cast aluminum housing, cov-er plate, rack and pinion operator, stainless steel bowden cable control wire in flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath, D style flatted 1/4 inch diameter control shaft with graduations, positive locking and control.

b. Control kit designed to be embedded in the ceiling flush with finished surface. Unit shall be manually operated with wrench. Unit shall be capable of control-ling up to 9 square feet of damper area.

c. Provide unit complete with wrenches and all hardware for installation with dampers provided by others. Units for barrier ceiling shall be provided with adjustable cover plate.

d. Acceptable product.

1) Young Regulator, No. 27.


7. Accessible operators for uninsulated ducts.

a. Quadrant type, adjustable locks.

b. Acceptable manufacturer.

1) Ventfabrics, 555 or 560.


8. Accessible operators for insulated duct

a. Self-locking type suitable for 1 inch thick duct insulation.


1) Duro-Dyne.

2) Perfecto Company.

3) Ventfabrics, No. 555.

4) Young Regulator.


P. Gravity Backdraft Dampers.

1. Air flow-actuated gravity dampers with gang linked blades pivoting on common frame.

2. Designed for one directional air flow.

3. Arranged to open under slight air pressure and close when air flow stops.

4. Pressed steel, mill-rolled steel, or extruded aluminum frames.

5. Blades: Aluminum sheet, maximum width of 30 inches, equipped with felt or vinyl edge gaskets, and steel hinge pins.

6. Bronze bearings, rods shall be steel or aluminum.

7. Prime coated and finish painted with weather resisting enamel..








a. Aerovent, Automatic Shutters.

b. Air Balance, Air/Dynamic Backdraft Dampers.

c. Ruskin, BD2 Backdraft Dampers.


Q. Motorized Dampers.

1. Refer to Section 23 0900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.

R. Air Inlet and Outlet Data.

1. Supply, return, and exhaust air inlets and outlets and required sizes and capaci-ties are scheduled on drawings.

2. Manufacturers and model numbers scheduled on Drawings are given to set standard, other acceptable manufacturers.

a. MetalAire.

b. Price.

c. Titus.

d. Tuttle and Bailey.


S. Guy Wires and Accessories.

1. Galvanized wire rope of regular lay, on fiber core with galvanized drop-forged steel, open or closed type rope sockets, forged steel, galvanized eye-end type turnbuckles, and eyebolts.

2. Select guy wires to withstand stress resulting from wind load of not less than 30 pounds per square foot of projected vertical surface of guyed structure.

3. On circular plan configuration structures, load may be reduced to 20 pounds per square foot.

4. Safety factor: Not less than 3, relative to ultimate strength of rope material.

T. Goosenecks.

1. Galvanized steel, 18 gauge minimum, with 12 gauge, 3/4 inch mesh, outlet wire screen and designed to withstand wind loads of not less than 30 pounds per square foot.

U. Prefabricated Roof Curbs.

1. Coordinate size and load carrying capacity of roof curb supports for roof mounted equipment.

2. Design and fabricate supports to carry, within conventional design limits, weight of equipment plus snow load, taking into account eccentric loadings and additional loads imposed by wind pressure.

3. Wind load pressures: As stated in governing codes, but not less than 30 pounds per square foot of equipment surface

4. Where uplift forces are greater than 100 pounds per linear foot of support, furnish means of directly fastening support to support steel below.

5. Request details of metal deck and support steel.

6. Supports.

a. Zinc-coated sheet steel, in accordance with ASTM A653, G 90, 16 gauge minimum, formed to cross section indicated on drawings, with continuous welded seams at corners, and factory applied wood nailers.

b. Furnish heavier gauge material and internal stiffeners when load conditions require.







c. Top surface of curb shall be horizontal with continuous, neoprene weather-tight seal.

d. Build deck slope into base of curb.

7. Internal insulation: Rigid fiberglass, 3 pound density.

8. Wood nailers.

a. Wolmanized treated lumber, impregnated with waterborne preservatives in accordance with Koppers Company Specifications.

b. Quantity of chemical injected: 0.35 pound per cubic foot of wood.

c. Treatment of equal quality by Osmose Wood Preserving Company is ac-ceptable.


a. Pate.

b. Thybar.

c. Uni-Curb.


2.02 MATERIALS

A. Ductwork and Piping.

1. Galvanized steel.

a. Steel sheet or roll stock, lock forming quality, in accordance with ASTM A653.

b. Coating, G 90 zinc-coated (galvanized), in accordance with ASTM A653.

2. Stainless steel.

a. Duct, in accordance with ASTM A167, Type 304, stainless steel sheet metal with stainless steel companion angles, and finish as specified for service.

b. Pipe, Type 304 stainless steel, Schedule 10 pipe, in accordance with ASTM A312 and ASTM A403 fittings, matching pipe wall.

B. Ductwork Hanger and Support Materials.

1. Building attachments for steel frame structures.

a. Supplemental structural steel members.

b. Acceptable I-beam or channel clamps.

c. Beam clamps designed to impose an eccentric load (twisting moment) on building steel, and C-clamps without restraining straps or heat-treated spring steel type fasteners that bite into beam flanges, are prohibited.

2. Building attachments for reinforced concrete structures.

a. Cast-in inserts or drilled, driven shields.

b. Inserts and shields shall be of load ratings consistent with suspension loads.

3. Furnish hanger rods, straps, band hangers, angle iron or channel iron, screws, and nuts, bolts and washers, required for supporting ductwork as indicated on drawings.

4. Furnish hanger assemblies for ductwork of a width more than 48 inches designed to support the additional weight of water filled sprinkler branch piping of nominal 2 inch size.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. HVAC Ductwork Systems.







1. General.

a. Construct in accordance with drawings.

b. Where not indicated on Drawings, construct low and medium pressure duct-work in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Met-al and Flexible.

2. Rectangular low pressure ductwork.

a. Construct to pressure class of 2 inches water gauge, with Class B seals.

b. Paragraph S1.4 on Page 1-7 of SMACNA Standard shall not apply.

3. Rectangular, medium pressure ductwork.

a. Construct to pressure class of 4 inches water gauge, with Class A seals.

b. Paragraph S1.4 on Page 1-7 of the SMACNA Standard shall not apply.

4. Round or flat oval ductwork.

a. Construct to pressure class of 10 inches water gauge, with Class B seals.

b. Furnish factory made duct branch fittings.


1) Semco.

2) United McGill, Sheet Metal Division.

3) Foremost Duct, Inc.

5. Indoor galvanized steel ductwork: Not less than 24 gauge, unless otherwise specified on drawings.

6. Air transfer duct sections.

a. Galvanized steel: Not less than 16 gauge, constructed same as specified for acoustically lined ductwork.

7. Use of button-punch snap lock and flat-drive slip joints is prohibited.

8. As option, transverse joints may be made with proprietary duct connection sys-tems.

9. Plenums - Intake, exhaust and return.

a. Pressure classification: Intake and exhaust 2 inch W.G.; return fan plenum minimum 0.5 inch W.G. higher than return fan static pressure. Plenum shall withstand 133 percent of rated pressure without structural failure.

b. Joints, seams, connections, abutments to building structure shall be sealed per pressure classification.

c. Material shall be same as duct materials.

d. Casing drains shall be provided with 2 inch minimum water seal greater than operating pressure in plenum.

e. Refer to SMACNA.

4. No. 4 satin finish, where exposed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Ductwork, General.







1. Do not fabricate ductwork and sheet metal work prior to receipt of associated fab-rication drawing submittals reviewed and initialed by Owner's Field Representa-tive.

2. Coordinate locations and space requirements of sheet metal work and equipment with work of other sections.

3. Install required supports and bracing to prevent ductwork and accessories from visibly swaying or vibrating.

4. Install offsets and transitions in sheet metal work, whether specifically shown on drawings or not, where necessary to increase headroom or to avoid interference with building construction, Owner's services, equipment, and work of other sec-tions.

5. Install ducts in neat manner, plumb to building construction, free from apparent sag, warping, and racking.

6. Preserve servicing access space for equipment and clearances for service aisles or catwalks.

7. Paint, with flat black paint, dampers and interior surfaces of duct visible through grilles, registers, and diffusers.

8. Make final duct connections to fixed louvers.

9. For duct penetration requirements in fire-rated walls and floors, refer to Division 07.

10. Caulking.

a. Caulk ducts passing through walls and floors, airtight around complete cir-cumference, and on both sides of wall.

b. Apply caulk between wall opening and exterior surface of duct or duct insula-tion.


d. Unless manufacturer's instructions state otherwise, caulking beads, shall be 1/8 inch thick minimum, or 3/8 inch thick maximum.

11. Batt insulation.

a. Peripheral space between duct and construction opening around ducts pass-ing through masonry walls or floors, and not requiring fire dampers, shall be packed with batt type insulation and installed with hemmed sheet metal, formed or welded box angle closures to completely seal openings.

12. Touch-up painting.

a. Repair galvanizing or aluminizing coat of sheet metal, damaged during instal-lation, by preparing affected area for painting in accordance with SSPC SP 3 and touching up with two coats of zinc rich touch-up paint.

b. Discolored or dulled galvanized or aluminized sheet metal surfaces do not re-quire touch-up.

13. Smoke detectors.

a. Receive, handle, and install ionization type smoke detectors specified in Sec-tion 28 3100.

b. Install in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's instructions.

c. Power wiring is specified under Division 26.

14. Motorized dampers.

a. Receive, handle and install motorized dampers specified in Section 23 0900.

B. General HVAC Ductwork.







1. Round or flat oval ductwork

a. Install branch fittings at changes in direction.

b. Tap collars or saddle tap type branch connections are prohibited.

2. Except as indicated on drawings, install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

C. Ductwork Hanger and Support.

1. Steel frame structures.

a. Suspend ductwork from beams, purlins, and panel points of trusses.

b. Where suspension locations do not coincide with locations of beams, purlins, and panel points of trusses, install additional structural steel members to transfer loads.

c. Make attachments to steel work with reviewed and accepted I-beam or chan-nel clamps.

d. Cutting, drilling, and burning of structural steel members is prohibited, except where accepted, in writing, by Owner's Field Representative.

2. Reinforced concrete structures.

a. Suspend ductwork by means of cast-in inserts or drilled, driven shields.

b. Wood plugs and expansion bolts using lead or plastic inserts are prohibited.

c. Do not cut reinforcing bars in beams and slabs.

3. Attachments to metal roof deck, cellular floor deck, or steel forms of concrete floor slabs are prohibited.

4. Suspended rectangular ductwork.

a. Bolt, rivet, or screw band hangers to duct sides.

b. Suspend trapeze hangers with rods, fastened by nuts with washers.

5. Cradled rectangular ductwork.

a. Weld or bolt bottom horizontal support members to risers.

b. Attach duct sides to risers with sheet metal screws or bolts.

c. Anchor base plates to floor or structural supports.

d. Prime paint cradle assemblies.

6. Suspended round ductwork.

a. Bolt hanger rods or straps to duct support clamps.

7. Cradled round ductwork.

a. Weld or bolt bottom horizontal support members and duct support rings to riser.

b. Anchor base plates to floor or structural support.

c. Prime paint cradle assemblies.

8. Locate hangers at every cross joint and at intervals not exceeding 8 feet.

9. Install additional structural steel where required to maintain 8 feet spacing.

10. Hanger assemblies for ductwork and drip pans of width greater than 48 inches shall be designed to support additional weight of water-filled sprinkler branch pip-ing of nominal 2 inch size.

11. Furnish lateral bracing to resist seismic forces dictated by local codes and govern-ing authorities, and minimum forces listed.

a. Design bracing to resist these forces with maximum lateral deflection of L/180.

1) All round ductwork 28 inches in diameter and larger.







2) Rectangular ductwork with a minimum cross sectional area of 6 square feet with hanger lengths greater than 12 inches

b. Submit typical details and locations to Owner's Field Representative for re-view.

D. Turning Vanes.

1. Install on vane manufacturer's prepunched sidepieces and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Trim heel ends of sidepieces to allow end vane to seat firmly in heel of duct el-bow.

3. Cut individual turning vanes exactly to required length.

4. Cuts: Neat and square.

5. Turning vanes will not be accepted if cut short, are cut on bias, or exhibit jagged cuts.

6. Spacing of vanes shall be defined by sidepiece punching.

7. Practice of omitting every second vane will not be accepted.

E. Flexible Connection.

1. Install where ductwork connects to fans, to package type air handling equipment, or where indicated.

2. Install connections with visible slack.

3. Align connections carefully.

4. Visible misalignment of flexible connection duct collars will not be accepted.

F. Dampers.

1. Splitter dampers are prohibited, unless called for on drawings.

2. Manual volume dampers.

a. Install additional volume dampers where required for test and balance work specified in Section 23 0593.

b. Install dampers downstream of branch take-offs from supply ductwork, and upstream of branch connections to return and exhaust main ductwork sys-tems.

c. Dampers installed above lay-in type ceilings shall be considered as installed in an accessible place.

d. Install quadrant type adjustable locks for dampers located in accessible plac-es.

3. Fire dampers.

a. Install Type B fire dampers in low pressure systems, unless otherwise indi-cated.

b. Installation shall furnish air leakage resistance as required for duct systems to pass air leakage test specified.

c. Install in accordance with requirements of Owner's insurance underwriters and authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Fire dampers, mounting and fastening fabrications, accessories, appurte-nances, and duct connections shall be identical to those used for UL test.

e. Install access doors within reach of damper linkage for inspection and re-placement of fusible links.

f. Mechanical rooms, utility rooms, closets, or areas of nonconstant user occu-pancy, are preferred locations for access to fire dampers.







g. Access doors accessible through lay-in tile ceilings are preferred to access doors above plaster ceilings.


A. Perform walk-down and inspection of air handling ductwork and accessories to sub-stantiate air handling ductwork and accessories comply with Contract Documents.

B. Confirm.

1. Setting and operation of dampers and ductwork accessories comply with manu-facturer's recommendations and Contract criteria.

2. Flexible duct connections are aligned.

C. Repair Air Handling Ductwork and Accessory Defects, Including.

1. Racking of damper frames.

2. Leaking seals at access doors and panels.

D. Adjust Air Handling Ductwork and Accessories to Ensure.

1. Setting and operation of damper complies with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Alignment of flexible duct connections.

3. Operation and function of access doors and panels conform with Contract criteria.

3.03 DUCTWORK SEALING, INSPECTING, AND LEAKAGE TESTING

A. Seal, inspect and test ductwork in accordance with SMACNA 1985, prior to insulating or otherwise concealing ductwork

B. Seal ductwork to meet following SMACNA seal classifications:

1. Class A (seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations.

C. Visually inspect ductwork: Place fan system in operation, or pressurize ductwork with portable fan. Inspect ductwork for audible leaks, and leaks perceptible to hand 2 inch-es from duct. Reseal perceptible leaks

D. Duct leakage testing:

1. Conduct ductwork leak testing for ductwork with pressure classification of more than 2 inch WG, positive or negative

2. Prior to fabrication and installation, develop and submit for approval ductwork test-ing plan, indicating locations of temporary caps, square feet of ductwork, test pressure, leakage class and allowable leakage

3. Notify Owner’s representative at least 2 days prior to each test

4. Provide necessary test apparatus. Provide, and later remove temporary caps or seals necessary to complete leak testing

5. After completing visual inspection, conduct ductwork leakage tests at specified pressure class for duct. Leakage shall not exceed SMACNA Leakage Class 3. Reseal and retest as required to achieve specified leakage

6. Submit leakage test report for approval, using SMACNA or other approved form.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Protect open ductwork from construction dust and debris.







B. Clean assembled ductwork by subjecting main and branch interior surfaces to air streams moving at velocities twice specified working velocities, and at static pressures within maximum ratings.

C. Furnish suitable means of trapping dust dislodged from ductwork being cleaned.

END OF SECTION





AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3600 - 1


SECTION 23 3600 – AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Glossary of terms defining maximum allowable sound generation requirements, as used in terminal unit schedule on drawings.

1. DB third: Maximum allowable sound power level in third octave band (250 hertz center frequency), radiated from unit discharge opening, based on.

a. Unit operation at scheduled airflow rate, at differential pressure of 3 inches water gauge.

b. No credit taken for attenuator section.

c. Data in decibel, referenced to 1 picowatt.

2. NC Out: Maximum allowable room NC level associated with unit discharge sound only, based on.


b. Presence of attenuator section.

c. Room effect of 10 decibels.

3. NC Rad: Maximum allowable room NC level associated with unit casing radiation, based on.


b. Presence of suspended ceiling rated STC-39.

c. Room effect of 10 decibels.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. For Information.

1. Certificates.

a. Air terminal units.


A. Factory leak test coils at 250 psig.

B. Factory test proposed air terminal units and furnish test reports certifying tested prod-uct is same type, quality, manufacturer, and make as that proposed for this project.

C. Test may be performed by manufacturer or by accepted independent laboratory.


A. Conform to requirements specified in Section 23 0500.







B. Protect finned surfaces of coils from damage by crushing, denting, flattening, nicks, punctures, and buckling.

C. Furnish caps over coil nozzles for protection of threads and to prevent entry of foreign matter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Electronically (DDC) controlled units.

1. Pressure independent having.

a. Casing plenum, incorporating.

1) Inlet duct collar, flow sensor, butterfly damper, damper operator and link-age.

2) Logic system, sensing and processing: Inlet velocity, inlet pressure, and thermostat signal.

3) UL listed, fire retardant interconnecting tubing.

4) Attenuator section including acoustical lining or baffles.

b. Where indicated on drawings.

c. Flow sensor.

1) Cross shaped, multipoint averaging.

2) Amplifying pressure pickup points.

3) Duct velocity pressure signal factor: Not less than 1.75.

d. Butterfly damper: Galvanized sheet metal, round or oval. Solid continuous shaft rotating in self-lubricating bearings. Visual position indicator. Closed cell foam gasket. Stroke limit stop.

e. Logic systems.

1) Suitable for operation with control air at pressure ranging from 15 to 25 psig.

2) Factory preset.

3) Field adjustable.

4) Airflow rate adjustment by means of dial setting.

f. Casing plenum.

1) Galvanized sheet metal, 22 gauge minimum.

2) Acoustically lined.

(a) 3/4 inch thick, 1-1/2 pound density fiberglass.

(b) Lining in compliance with UL 181 and NFPA 90A.

(c) Lining coated to prevent fiber erosion.


a. Krueger: Model LMH Series.

b. Titus: ESV-3000 Series.

c. Tuttle & Bailey: SDV Series.

d. Metalaire: 400 TH Series.

e. Nailor Industries.

f. Price Company.

g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.







PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Variable Volume Terminal Units (Supply Air Service).

1. Arrange units so, in response to decrease in thermal load, rate of supply air flow is reduced.

2. Wherever zone served by unit is also served by associated variable volume ter-minal return air unit, supply air terminal unit shall also incorporate means for transmitting to relay controller signal identical to that transmitted to own damper operator.

3. Logic system shall integrate thermostat signal, supply duct branch static pressure, and velocity pressure, and shall afford coordinated modulation of damper.

4. Logic system shall maintain air flow rate within range extending from preset mini-mum to preset maximum.

B. Variable Volume Terminal Reheat Units (Supply Service).

1. Arrange units so rate of supply air flow is reduced in response to decrease in thermal load.

2. Upon reduction of air flow to preset minimum percentage of rated capacity, preset minimum percentage units shall function in terminal reheat mode.

3. Logic system shall integrate thermostat signal, supply duct branch static pressure, and velocity pressure, and shall afford coordinated modulation of damper.

4. Wherever zone served by unit is also served by associated variable volume ter-minal return air unit, supply air terminal unit shall also incorporate means for transmitting to relay controller, signal identical to that transmitted to own damper operator.

5. After having throttled damper to preset minimum percentage of rated capacity, system shall compensate for further reductions in thermal load by modulating re-heat coil water valve.

C. Constant Volume Terminal Reheat Units (Supply Service).

1. Arrange units so that preselected supply air flow rate remains constant, regard-less of fluctuations in supply air pressure.

2. Logic system shall integrate supply branch static pressure and velocity pressure and shall modulate damper accordingly.

3. Compensate for reductions in thermal load by modulating reheat coil water valve.

D. Constant Volume Fan Powered Terminal Units.

1. Furnish and install constant volume fan powered terminal units of sizes and ca-pacities shown on drawings.

2. Primary air assemblies: Pressure independent and reset to any air flow between zero and maximum cataloged air volume.

3. Design, install and field adjust if necessary, to maintain controlled pressure inde-pendent airflow.

4. Sound ratings of air distribution assemblies: Not exceed 45 NC.

5. Incorporate single point electrical and control connection for entire unit.

6. CSA certified, ETL listed and AHRI certified.

7. Air flow sensor: Cross configuration located at inlet of assembly.







a. Twelve total pressure sensing ports and center averaging chamber designed to accurately average flow across inlet of assembly and amplify sensed air flow signal.

b. Accuracy within 5 percent with 90 degree sheet metal elbow directly at inlet of assembly.

8. Assembly Casing.

a. Construct of 20 gauge zinc coated steel, with reinforced lock formed longitu-dinal edges internally lined with 1 inch thick, fiberglass insulation which com-plies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Coat cut edges of fiberglass exposed to airstream with NFPA 90A compliant sealant.

b. Incorporate primary inlet equalization baffle to reduce noise.

c. Reversible so right or left hand inlet/motor configurations can be achieved in field by simply flipping factory supplied unit upside down.

d. Discharge opening: Centered.

e. Enclose electrical components in single control box with access panel mount-ed on side of assembly.

9. Access Panels.

a. Four gasketed access panels, top, bottom and each side.

b. Each large enough to remove or service motor/blower assembly.

c. Equip with quick-access, tool-free snap latches that can be manually opened.

d. Not blocked by accessories like electric coils, controls enclosures, sound at-tenuators, etc.

10. Primary Air Valve Damper.

a. Heavy gauge metal, with peripheral gasket, and solid steel shaft, pivoted in self-lubricating bearings.

b. In full closed position, air leakage not to exceed 2 percent of nominal catalog rating at 3 inches w.g. inlet static pressure, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 130.

11. Motor/Blower Assembly.

a. Direct couple motor to blower.

b. Mount with 16 gauge support panel for added structural integrity and vibration isolation.

c. Provide isolation between motor and blower assembly.

12. Motors.

a. GE, ECMTM DC brushless style complete with and operated by single phase integrated controller / inverter that operates wound stator and sensor motor position to electronically commutate stator

b. Design for synchronous rotation.

c. Motor rotor: Permanent magnet type with near zero rotor losses.

d. Utilize permanently lubricated ball bearings.

e. Maintain minimum of 70 percent efficiency over entire operating range.

f. Provide manual fan speed control for field adjustment of fan air flow setpoint. Speed control shall accept as standard 0 - 10VDC 0 - 20mA signal for remote fan adjustment from building management system.

13. Water Heating Coils.

a. 1-row and 2-row coils, capacities as scheduled.







b. Construct coils of 0.500 inch diameter 0.017 inch thick copper tube with 0.0045 inch thick aluminum fins in sine wave configuration.

c. Contain in 0.030 inch thick galvanized steel casing.

d. Pressure test to 349 PSIG at 300 degrees F tube surface temperature.

e. Tested and certified according to AHRI Standard 410.

f. Coil connections: Right hand or left hand as detailed on drawings.

g. Control valves, automatic air vents and drain vents, if required: Supplied and field installed by others.

14. Accessories.

a. MERV 8 filter boot with 2-inch filter media.

15. Electronic Digital Controller (PEDC).

a. VAV mounted controller shall house differential pressure flow transducer, electric actuator and peripheral terminations (such as fan, reheat, perimeter radiation).

b. Electric actuator: 24 VAC bi-directional, directly coupled to damper shaft, ca-pable of operating in stalled position without overheating or mechanical dam-age.

c. Components: Factory wired, calibrated and pre-tested to ensure fully func-tional unit.

d. Dedicated, microprocessor-based, pressure independent VAV proportional-integral controller mounted in occupied zone.

1) Include zone temperature sensor complete with custom LCD display, 4-button keypad and service port.

2) Configurable LCD and keypad combination to allow for following on-screen functions/modes:

(a) Customer Mode.

(1) Space temperature/setpoint display.

(2) Setpoint adjustment.

(3) Occupied/unoccupied override.

(4) Outdoor air temperature display.

(b) Service and Commissioning/Balancing Mode (password protected).

(1) Control sequence diagnostics.

(2) VAV box calibration.

(3) Control of VAV damper position over entire stroke (manual force to minimum/maximum flow, or minimum/maximum position / au-tomatic mode).

(4) Override and sequencing of VAV peripheral stages (such as, fan, box reheat, perimeter radiation valve).

(5) Sensor calibration.

(6) Balancing.

(c) Configuration Mode (password protected).

(1) Sequence of operation programming.

(2) VAV box configuration modification.

(3) Network configuration.

(4) Display option configuration.

e. Used in either stand-alone operation or peer-to-peer building automation net-worked architecture.







f. On-board RS485 network port allows plug in connection onto BACnet MS/TP LAN.

g. Service Port (RJ11) allows for connection of personal computer for full display of VAV control parameters and inputs/outputs. If networked, service tool port will display complete Building Automation Architecture.

h. Calibrate and factory set for maximum and minimum flow rates as scheduled on drawings.

i. Mount control components inside protective metal enclosure.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install terminal units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Verify factory setting of design airflow rates and adjust calibration dials if found to be set incorrectly.

C. Locate terminal units so access for adjustment and servicing of controls clears grid members of suspended ceiling systems, piping, conduit, light fixtures, and neighboring ducts.

D. Install attenuator sections on return air terminal units, where duct silencer is not shown in ductwork upstream of unit.

E. Coordinate requirements for relays with work of Section 23 0900.

F. Coordinate extent of work required in furnishing control systems for electronically con-trolled terminal units with work of Section 23 0900.

G. Power supply for control instruments is specified in Section 23 0900.

H. Install and interwire control system portions that form an integral part of units.

I. Install and wire other portions of control system.

J. Furnish, install, and wire the input/output modules as required for control of terminal reheat valves, if thermostats are furnished by terminal unit manufacturer and are not compatible with valve operators proposed to be used.

K. Terminal units' manufacturer to receive and install controller furnished by building management system manufacturer.

END OF SECTION





MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 0501 - 1


SECTION 26 0501 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

B. Report discrepancies to Owner's Field Representative before disturbing existing installation.

C. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely

disabling system. 2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Notify local fire service. 3. Make notifications at least 24 hours in advance.

F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Notify Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.







2. Notify telephone utility company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.

3. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.

E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.

G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.

H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified to keep the existing equipment and fixtures to remain in service.

3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

C. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps , ballasts and broken electrical parts.







END OF SECTION





LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 1


SECTION 26 0519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single conductor building wire.

A. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable.

B. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.

C. Service entrance cable.

D. Armored cable.

E. Metal-clad cable.

F. Wiring connectors.

G. Electrical tape.

H. Heat shrink tubing.

I. Oxide inhibiting compound.

J. Wire pulling lubricant.


A. Section 07 8413 - Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.

B. Section 26 0127 - Acceptance Inspection.

C. Section 26 0501 - Minor Electrical Demolition: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension of existing electrical conductors and cables.

D. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.

E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

F. Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system conductors and cables.








A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft ; 2011.

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes ; 2010.

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation ; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).

E. ASTM B800 - Standard Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical Purposes - Annealed and Intermediate Tempers ; 2005.

F. ASTM B801 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conductors of 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Subsequent Covering of Insulation ; 2007.

G. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape ; 2010.

H. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes ; 2008.

I. FS A-A-59544 - Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation); Federal Specification ; Revision A, 2008.

J. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2010.

K. NECA 104 - Recommended Practice for Installing Aluminum Building Wire and Cable; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2006 (NECA/AA 104).

L. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2006.

M. NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM-B) and Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF); National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2007.

N. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658).

O. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association ; 2009.

P. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.







Q. UL 4 - Armored Cable ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

T. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

U. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

V. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

W. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

X. UL 719 - Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Y. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Z. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; current edition.


A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under

other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Owner's Field Representative of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals: Not Required.

B. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.

D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.








A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Owner's Field Representative and obtain direction before proceeding with work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.

C. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.

D. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway, armored cable, or metal clad cable.

E. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.

F. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway, direct burial cable, or service-entrance cable.

G. Underground Installations: Use only service-entrance cable.

H. Use single conductor unless multiconductor is indicated on drawings.

I. Use stranded conductors for 8 AWG and larger.







J. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.

K. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

L. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.

M. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.

N. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.

O. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Aetna Insulated Wire Company.

B. AFC Cable Systems.

C. American Insulated Wire Corporation.

D. General Cable

E. Houston Wire and Cable Company.

F. The Okonite Company.

G. Pirelli Cable Corporation.

H. Service Wire Company.

I. Southwire Company.

J. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated.

C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.

D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

E. Comply with NEMA WC 70.







F. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

G. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

H. Conductors and Cables Installed in Cable Tray: Listed and labeled as suitable for cable tray use.

I. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled as sunlight resistant.

J. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return air plenums.

K. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated

copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

L. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

a. Exceptions: 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

M. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority

having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. 3. Color Code:

a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.

b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. 240/120 V, 1 Phase, 3 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red.







3) Neutral/Grounded: White. d. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

2.04 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

D. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2 , except as

indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2. b. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with

labeled maximum temperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type for luminaires with labeled maximum temperature greater than 90 degrees C.

E. Conductor: Copper. 1. For Sizes Smaller Than 1/O AWG: Copper.

F. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

G. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2.

2.05 NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type NM multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 719, Type NM-B.

B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.


D. Description: NFPA 70, Type NMC.

E. Conductor: Copper. 1. For Sizes Smaller Than 1/O AWG: Copper.

F. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.







2.06 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE

A. Conductor Stranding: Stranded.

B. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

C. Description: NFPA 70, Type USE.

D. Conductor: Copper. 1. For Sizes Smaller Than 1/0 AWG: Copper.

E. Insulation: Type RHW.

2.07 ARMORED CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.



D. Insulation: Type THHN.

E. Grounding: Combination of interlocking armor and integral bonding wire.

F. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.

G. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC.

H. Conductor: Copper.

I. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

J. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C dry.

K. Insulation Type: THHN

L. 16 AWG aluminum bond wire.

M. Conductor Assembly Covering: Aluminum Interlocked Armor.

2.08 BRANCH CIRCUIT METAL CLAD

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.

B. Conductor: Copper. 1. For Sizes Smaller Than 1/OAWG: Copper.







C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry / 75 degrees C wet.

E. Insulation Type: THHN/THWN.

F. Conductors individually identified and assembled with binder tape.

G. Green insulated copper ground wire.

H. Armor Material: Aluminum.

I. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.

2.09 FEEDER SIZE METAL CLAD

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.

B. Conductor: Copper.


D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry / 75 degrees C wet.

E. Insulation Type: THHN/THWN.

F. Conductors individually identified and assembled with binder tape.

G. Bare copper ground wire.

H. Armor Material: Aluminum.

I. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.

2.10 INDUSTRIAL METAL CLAD (INTERLOCKED ARMOR CABLE)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.



D. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.

E. Provide oversized neutral conductors where indicated or required.







F. Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required.

G. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.

H. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.

I. Jacket: PVC .

J. Insulation Type: XHHW.

K. Conductors individually identified, assembled, and cabled round with fillers and binder tape.

L. Multiple stranded copper ground wires having total cross sectional area in compliance with requirements of ICEA-NEMA and UL 1277 in interstices of cable.

2.11 TRAY CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type TC, for installation in cable tray.

B. Conductor: Copper.


D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.

E. Insulation Type: THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW.

F. Conductors individually identified, assembled, and cabled round with fillers and binder string.

G. Multiple stranded copper ground wires having total cross sectional area in compliance with requirements of ICEA-NEMA and UL 1277 in interstices of cable.

H. Jacket: PVC.

2.12 NONMETALLIC UNDERGROUND CONDUIT WITH CONDUCTORS

A. Description: UL Listed as Cable In Conduit.

B. Plastic Duct in accordance with NEMA TC7 and ASTM D 2447.

C. Plastic duct and wire in common assembly shipped on reels.

D. For underground use to light pole bases.

E. Size and number of conductors as indicated on contract documents.

F. Wire type as specified in this section.







G. Acceptable Manufacturers. 1. Arnco, Perma-Guard CIC. 2. Draka Cableteq, Tamaqua CIC.

H. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.13 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS

A. Branch Circuit Wiring For. 1. Industrial lighting systems and office lighting systems, including switching.

B. Flexible metal clad cables, attached plugs and receptacles.

C. Construction. 1. UL listed. 2. In accordance with Article 604 of the National Electrical Code. 3. Tamperproof. 4. Five-wire system.

a. 3 phase conductors. b. 100 percent neutral conductor. c. Single ground conductor.

5. Conductors. a. 90 degrees C rated. b. THHN insulation. c. Solid copper conductors. d. 105 degrees C rated conductor drops to fixtures.

6. Plugs and receptacles. a. Load break. b. Polarized by voltage class to prohibit connection of 480/277 volt system to

208/120 volt system. c. Metal case. d. Copper pin and sleeve or spade type contacts with minimum 0.6

conductivity. e. Able to remove a single element without affecting downstream devices.

7. Identification. a. Include labels for each component. b. Labels color coded by voltage class.

D. Components. 1. Distribution cable box. 2. Double-ended, five-wire extender cables in even increments. 3. Disconnect cord drop.

E. Coordination. 1. Coordinate installation of lighting fixture leads with fixture manufacturer. 2. Furnish complete set of installation drawings.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers. 1. AFC.







2. Day-Brite Electro/Connect. 3. Lithonia Reloc. 4. MWS Division of Cooper Lighting. 5. Walkerflex AWS by Wiremold. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.14 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.

B. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with

terminations designed for terminal lugs. 2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished

with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified. 3. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate

disconnection. 4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use compression connectors

where connectors are required. 5. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for

connections to terminal screws. 6. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.

C. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.

D. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made.

2.15 WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Tape: 1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M : www.3m.com. b. Plymouth Rubber Europa : www.plymouthrubber.com.

2. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

4. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for







continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

5. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.

6. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D. 1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M : www.3m.com. b. Burndy : www.burndy.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.tnb.com.

C. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy : www.burndy.com. b. Ideal Industries, Inc : www.idealindustries.com. c. Ilsco : www.ilsco.com.

D. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. 1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M : www.3m.com. b. American Polywater Corporation : www.polywater.com. c. Ideal Industries, Inc : www.idealindustries.com.

E. Spring Wire Connectors. 1. For conductors 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Product: Scotchlock by 3M. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Compression Connectors. 1. For conductors 6 AWG and larger. 2. Acceptable manufacturers.

a. FCI-Burndy. b. Ideal Electric Corporation. c. Ilsco. d. Thomas and Betts.

3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Lugs for Terminating Conductors. 1. For 8 AWG and smaller.

a. Material: Copper. b. Solderless type. c. Equipment manufacturer's standard, unless noted otherwise.

2. For 6 AWG and larger.







a. Material: Copper. b. Solderless compression type. c. One-hole for 6 AWG through 4/0 AWG inclusive. d. Two-hole for larger sizes. e. Acceptable manufacturers.

1) FCI-Burndy. 2) Ilsco. 3) Thomas and Betts Corporation.

f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. For control and switchboard wiring.

a. Solderless compression type with tinned ring tongue. b. Acceptable products.

1) Hydent by FCI-Burndy. 2) Sta-Kon by Thomas and Betts.


H. Interlocked Armor Splicing Sleeves. 1. Metal enclosed. 2. Air filled for indoor use, compound filled for outdoor use. 3. Acceptable manufacturers.

a. Adalet-PLM. b. G&W Electric Specialty Company.

I. Interlocked Armor Terminators. 1. Armor grounding type. 2. Non-watertight for indoor use, watertight for outdoor use. 3. Acceptable manufacturers.

a. Adalet-PLM. b. O-Z/Gedney. c. Thomas and Betts Corporation.


2.16 LUBRICATING COMPOUND

A. Acceptable Manufacturers. 1. American Polywater Corporation. 2. Greenlee Textron. 3. Ideal Industries Incorporated. 4. Thomas and Betts. 5. 3M.

B. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.17 INSULATING TAPE

A. Acceptable Products. 1. For general use: 33 Plus by 3M Company. 2. For high temperature use: 27 by 3M Company.







B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.

E. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact

routing required. 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location

shown. 5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling,

and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA

70. 7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are

shown as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.







C. Install conductors and cable securely in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

D. Install nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type NM-B) in accordance with NECA 121.

E. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120.

F. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.

G. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other

contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.

H. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

I. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

J. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Armored Cable (Type AC):

a. Use listed fittings and anti-short, insulating bushings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging

conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. 2. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):

a. Use listed fittings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging

conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.

K. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.

L. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack.

M. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.

N. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no

perceptible temperature rise. 2. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into

raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.







3. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

4. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 5. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove

corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

6. Connections for Aluminum Conductors: Fill connectors with oxide inhibiting compound where not pre-filled by manufacturer.

7. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

O. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

P. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

Q. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

R. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductors at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

S. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

T. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

U. Install in raceway, except where exposed wiring is indicated or specified.

V. Use wiring methods indicated.

W. Install conductors so bending radius is not less than minimum recommended by ICEA or manufacturer.

X. Install conductors continuous, without splices between devices.

Y. Where splices are required, use splice boxes, do not use fittings for splices.

Z. To terminate copper lugs on aluminum bus, use Belleville washer and two tin or cadmium plated washers, one on either side in combination with aluminum joint compound on contacting surfaces. Tighten bolts until Belleville washer is flat.

AA. Terminate armored cables at equipment with an armored cable terminator.

BB. Terminate ground conductors in cable systems on equipment ground bus.







CC. Insulate bare surfaces of conductors with four layers (half lap in two directions) of electrical insulating tape.

DD. Connect power wiring to equipment for phasing A-B-C-N left to right, top to bottom, and front to back, where possible, and permanently identify phasing on structure or housing adjacent to connection.

EE. Phase identification A-B-C is equivalent to transformer phase identification X1-X2-X3 and H1-H2-H3.

FF. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 0553. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

3.04 CABLE SYSTEMS

A. In Underground Duct. 1. Brush and swab ducts before pulling cable. 2. For cables of larger sizes, use flexible cable feeders of appropriate size to lead

cable from reel into duct mouth. 3. In manholes and handholes, install power cables and special systems wiring

exposed on cable racks. 4. When passing cables through manholes and handholes, avoid crossovers so

each cable is accessible when placed on racks. 5. Install cables in ducts in same relative position throughout underground system,

unless otherwise required or indicated. 6. Keep spare ducts accessible for future use.

B. In Cable Tray. 1. Use appropriate roller guides to control position of cable during installation. 2. Support guides from cable tray or supports to prevent forces from over stressing

or deforming cable tray or supports. 3. Repair or replace damaged or deformed items and tighten loose connections as

directed by Owner Field Representative. 4. When cables are pulled using powered winch, do not exceed tension limits

recommended by the cable manufacturer. 5. If, in opinion of Owner Field Representative, tension limits are being exceeded,

use dynamometer on remaining pulls. 6. Install cables in tray at locations indicated leaving spaces clear for addition of

future cables. 7. Install power cables with 1/2 cable diameter space between cables unless

otherwise indicated, and allow sufficient slack for cable expansion and contraction.

8. Clamp armored cables to tray at maximum of 10 feet in horizontal runs and 2 feet in vertical or sloping runs.

9. Do not splice armored cables except where cable lengths are limited by maximum reel capacity.







3.05 NONMETALLIC UNDERGROUND CONDUIT WITH CONDUCTORS

A. Direct bury in accordance with NEC and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make splices and taps in junction boxes or other enclosures.

C. Make bends manually in a manner that will not damage conduit or reduce internal diameter.


A. Perform acceptance testing as specified.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required. 1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high

potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION





GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1


SECTION 26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

A. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

B. Connectors for grounding and bonding.

C. Grounding and Bonding Components.

D. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of. 1. Existing metal underground water pipe. 2. Concrete-encased electrode. 3. Rod electrodes. 4. Electrical systems grounding and bonding.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2010.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

C. TIA-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications; Rev B, 2011.

D. UL(ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory ; current edition.

E. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.









PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system.

C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc.

(UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding , in addition to requirements of Section 26 0519: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct

contact with earth. 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not

in raceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the

conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

D. Cooper Power Systems, a division of Cooper Industries : www.cooperindustries.com.

E. Framatome Connectors International : www.fciconnect.com.







F. Lightning Master Corporation : www.lightningmaster.com.

G. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ELECTRODES

A. Rod Electrodes: Copper-clad steel. 1. Diameter: 3/4 inch.(19mm) 2. Length: 10 feet (3000mm) 3. Manufacturers.

a. Blackburn/Holub, Div. Thomas & Betts. b. Erico International.


B. Foundation Electrodes: 4/O AWG.

2.04 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers. 1. Blackburn/Holub, Div. Thomas & Betts. 2. Ilsco. 3. O. Z. Gedney.


C. Exothermic Connections. 1. Product: Cadweld manufactured by Erico International or ThermOweld

manufactured by Continental Industries, Inc. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Copper Compression Connectors. 1. Manufacturers.

a. Burndy. b. Ilsco. c. Thomas & Betts.


E. Fittings for Connecting to Water Pipes. 1. Product: GD or GG manufactured by Burndy or Series 2818 10 3821, 3824 and

3890 manufactured by Thomas & Betts. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Fittings for Bonding Grounding Conductor to Fence. 1. Product: Type GL or GD manufactured by Burndy. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Flexible Braid. 1. Electro tin-plated copper braids.







2. Seamless pure copper ferrules. 3. Bolted connections. 4. Manufacturers.

a. Ilsco. b. O. Z. Gedney. c. Thomas & Betts.


H. Wire: Bare or Insulated stranded copper: See Section 26 0519.

I. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

D. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

E. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. General use above and below grade: bare or insulated.

B. Underground ducts in duct banks: bare.

C. In conduit with phase conductors: insulated.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections

without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.







2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.

E. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.

F. Install 4/0 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated.

G. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated. Bond steel together.

H. Connections to ground electrodes and structural steel building framing: Exothermic type.

I. Connections to nonpermanently fixed equipment: Mechanical lugs.

J. Make ground connections to structural steel building framing exposed in web of columns.

K. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.

L. Bond ground conductor to conduit at each end of metallic conduit used for mechanical protection of ground conductor.

M. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.

N. For all supply and return fans equipped with variable speed drives, bond motor frame to building ground using flexible braid to relieve stresses from high frequency switching.

O. Install telecommunications grounding system as indicated in the contract documents.. 1. See TIA-607 for sizing of materials for telecommunications grounding. 2. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB).

a. Mount in Telecommunications Entrance Facility Room. b. Mount near telephone terminal board, if present. c. Mount on insulated stand offs with screw terminals 2 inches minimum from

wall and 18 inches minimum above finished floor. d. Bond to structural steel building framing with minimum 6 AWG conductor

where vertical framing is readily available in room. 3. Primary Protector Grounding Conductor.







a. Install continuous from building service equipment (power) ground to the TMGB.

b. Intended to conduct lightning and fault currents from the telecommunications primary protectors.

4. Telecommunications Grounding Bar (TGB). a. Install in each Telecommunications Room (TR). b. Bond to structural steel building framing with minimum 6 AWG conductor

where vertical framing is readily available in room. 5. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB).

a. Install continuous to all telecommunications rooms. b. Do not use water piping or cable shields as the TBB.

6. Install telecommunications Grounding Equalizers(GE) as required. 7. Label and mark with green color all telecommunications grounding conductors.

P. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.


A. Perform acceptance testing as specified in Section 26 0130.

B. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

C. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 1


SECTION 26 0529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work.

B. Conduit and equipment supports.

C. Anchors and fasteners.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 4110 - Regulatory Requirements - Seismic Control.


A. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements ; 2009.

B. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements ; 2006.

C. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements ; 2010.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for fastening systems.



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.







PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.

B. Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.tnb.com.

C. Threaded Rod Company : www.threadedrod.com.

D. Unistrut Corporation: www.unistrut.com.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.

B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.

C. Formed Steel Channel. 1. Minimum 1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches. 2. Hardware from same manufacturer as channel. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Threaded Steel Rod. 1. Minimum size.

a. General use, 1/4 inch minimum. b. In industrial areas, 3/8 inch minimum. c. Support of busway and cable tray, 1/2 inch minimum.

2. Finish. a. Indoor, self-colored, oiled finished. b. Outdoor, hot-dipped galvanized. c. In contact with aluminum, hot dipped galvanized.

E. Beam Clamps. 1. General use.

a. Material: Malleable iron or galvanized steel. 2. Industrial and utility areas.

a. Material: Malleable iron or wrought steel b. Integral hook rod to grip beam flange.

F. Steel Spring Clips. 1. For support of manufactured wiring assemblies.

a. Product: Caddy Fasteners manufactured by Erico International Corporation.








G. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Cooper Industries : www.cooperindustries.com.

b. PHP Systems/Design : www.phpsd.com. c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc : www.unistrut.com.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide seismic bracing for all supported items in accordance with Section 01 4100.

B. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3. Do not weld to structural members.

C. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

D. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of 4 anchors.

E. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall.

F. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

G. Use expandable column inserts for mounting equipment inside the web of building columns.

H. Repair and Refinish. 1. Clean damaged areas of prepainted materials and apply primer and finished coat

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 1


SECTION 26 0534 – CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC).

C. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

D. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

E. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

F. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

G. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

H. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.

I. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT).

J. Conduit fittings.

K. Accessories.


A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.


A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC) ; 2005.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) ; 2005.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 2


C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC) ; 2005.

D. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC) ; 2005.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2010.

F. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2006.

G. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2004.

H. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2003.

I. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2007.

J. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2005.

K. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2003.

L. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2004.

M. NEMA TC 13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT); National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2005.

N. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

O. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 3


T. UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

U. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

V. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

W. UL 1653 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed,

including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork,

piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve integrity of roofing system and do not void roof warranty.

5. Notify Owner's Field Representative of conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is

complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. No product submittals required.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.




A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 4


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use conduit types indicated for specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

D. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

E. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

G. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

H. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:

a. Where exposed below 8 feet , except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.

b. Where exposed below 20 feet in warehouse areas.

I. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

J. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

K. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 1. Service to Individual Recessed Fixtures: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Maximum Length: 6 feet.

L. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated. 4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 5


a. Transformers. b. Motors.

M. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for complete raceway system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose indicated.

C. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.

D. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 unless larger size is indicated on Contract Documents.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit : www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit : www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company : www.wheatland.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Locknuts: Malleable iron or steel, zinc or cadmium plated.

D. Bushings for 1 inch and smaller. 1. Rigid insulating plastic. 2. Bushings for 1-1/4 inch and larger.

a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc or cadmium plated. b. Flame retardant, thermosetting plastic insulating insert molded into

bushing. 3. Flame retardant, thermosetting plastic.

E. Fittings: 1. Malleable iron or steel, zinc or cadmium plated. 2. Taper treads. 3. Screw attached cover plates.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 6


4. Gaskets in damp, wet or industrial areas. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc : www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation :

www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

6. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

7. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

8. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

F. Expansion Fittings: Malleable iron or steel, zinc or cadmium plated. 1. Threaded end caps for receiving fixed and moveable conduits. 2. Metallic pressure packing. 3. Copper bonding jumper assembly. 4. Movement of conduit: 4 inch minimum.

2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)


B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A.

C. Locknuts: Aluminum or aluminum alloy.

D. Bushings for 1 inch and smaller. 1. Rigid insulating plastic. 2. Flame retardant, thermosetting plastic.

E. Bushings for 1-1/4 inch and larger. 1. Aluminum or aluminum alloy. 2. Flame retardant, thermosetting plastic insulating insert molded into bushing.

F. Fittings: 1. Cast aluminum bodies 2. Taper treads. 3. Screw attached cover plates. 4. Gaskets in damp, wet or industrial areas. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc : www.bptfittings.com.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 7


b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation : www.emersonindustrial.com.

c. Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


7. Material: Use aluminum. 8. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set

screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

G. Expansion Fittings: Aluminum or aluminum alloy bodies. 1. Threaded end caps for receiving fixed and moveable conduits. 2. Metallic pressure packing. 3. Aluminum bonding jumper assembly. 4. Movement of conduit: 4 inch minimum.

2.05 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)


B. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.

C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc.: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation :



3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set

screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.06 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Manufacturers. 1. Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.tnb.com. 2. Robroy Industries : www.robroy.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 8


B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.

D. PVC-Coated Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL

514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.

E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil.

2.07 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Manufacturers. 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. : www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company : www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose : www.metalhose.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Fittings: 1. Secured by clamping action around periphery of conduit. 2. Use of setscrews to anchor conduit is unacceptable. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc. : www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation :


4. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

5. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

2.08 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Manufacturers. 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. : www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company : www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose : www.metalhose.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 9


B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.


a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc.: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation :



3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

2.09 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Manufacturers. 1. Allied Tube & Conduit : www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit : www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company : www.wheatland.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.


a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc. : www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation :



3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or tap-on type.

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

2.10 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT

A. Manufacturers. 1. Cantex Inc. : www.cantexinc.com. 2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.carlon.com. 3. JM Eagle : www.jmeagle.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651 ; Schedule 40 unless





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 10


otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

C. Standard lengths with tapered ends and matching solvent-weld couplings.

D. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as

complying with UL 651; material to match conduit.

2.11 ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING (ENT)

A. Manufacturers. 1. Cantex, Inc. : www.cantexinc.com. 2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.carlon.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type ENT electrical nonmetallic tubing complying with NEMA TC 13 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1653.

C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of ENT to be connected. 2. Use solvent-welded type fittings. 3. Solvent-Welded Fittings: Rigid PVC fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and

listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; suitable for use with ENT. 4. Snap-on Fittings: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 651.

2.12 CONDUIT SLEEVES

A. Schedule 40 black steel.

B. Minimum Size: 2-1/2 inches.

C. Thread each end, cap unused sleeves.

2.13 ACCESSORIES

A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.

B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed.

C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 11


E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.

F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for conduits to be installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

D. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install conduit in neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.

D. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

E. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

F. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.

G. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

H. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer.

I. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.

J. Install electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) in accordance with NECA 111.

K. Conduit Routing: 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact

routing required. 3. Except where conduit runs are shown in exact detail, install pull points at

maximum of 200 foot intervals in straight runs. 4. Conceal conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 12


5. Conceal conduit in office and similar finished areas. 6. Conduits in following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms. b. Mechanical equipment rooms.

7. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed: a. Across floors. b. Across roofs. c. Across top of parapet walls. d. Across building exterior surfaces.

8. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

9. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. 10. Do not run conduit in concrete floors unless specifically indicated. 11. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 12. Arrange conduit to provide no more than equivalent of four 90 degree bends

between pull points. 13. Arrange conduit to present neat appearance. 14. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 15. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to

walls. 16. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and

at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 17. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other

systems. 18. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces.

This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters. b. Hot water piping. c. Flues.

19. Group parallel conduits in same area together on common rack. 20. Group related conduits; support using trapeze or conduit rack. Construct rack

using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. 21. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and

moisture.

L. Bends and Offsets. 1. Make changes in direction of conduit runs with symmetrical bends, fittings, or pull

boxes. 2. Do not use bends around outside corners, use fittings. 3. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use

hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

4. Minimum Radius of Curvature. a. 24 inches for 2 and 2-1/2 inch conduit. b. 36 inches for 3 inch and larger conduits.

M. Conduit Support:





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 13


1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

4. Support exposed conduit at minimum of. a. Every 8 feet for conduit smaller than 2 inches. b. Every 10 feet for conduit 2 inches and larger.

5. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. 6. Support single conduits using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in

adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. 7. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of

Section 26 0529. 8. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for

temporary supports. 9. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.

N. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of

galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use

three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to

another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquid-tight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage

of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or

double lock nuts for dry locations and rain-tight hubs for wet locations. 6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in

a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.

7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at conduit terminations to protect conductors.

8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

9. Do not use running threads on any part of conduit system. 10. Where conditions require joining two fixed conduits into continuous run, use

conduit union in place of running threads and coupling. 11. Provide conduit nipples with two independent sets of threads. 12. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe

nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

13. Where conduit joints occur in wet or damp locations, or in concrete encasement, make joints watertight by applying acceptable compound on entire thread area before assembling.

14. Paint conduit threads of PVC jacketed rigid steel conduit with UL listed electrically conductive corrosion protection compound.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 14


O. Double Locknuts and Bushings. 1. Install on rigid conduit terminations into threadless openings. 2. Increase length of conduit threads at terminations sufficiently to allow bushing to

be fully seated against end of conduit.

P. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings

and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate

installation. a. Install for exposed conduits or cables passing through walls, floors or other

masonry construction. b. Extend conduit sleeves 2 inches past outside surface of wall or floor. c. Fill void between sleeve and conduit with suitable caulking to maintain

rating of wall or floor. Fill void flush with end of sleeve. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible

point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exterior wall below

grade. 7. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain

integrity of membrane. 8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment

openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty . Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.

9. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view. 10. Install fire-stopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other

elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8413.

Q. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or

deflection. 2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. 3. As indicated on Contract Drawings. 4. In straight runs of aluminum conduit at maximum intervals of 80 feet.

R. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at accessible point near penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. 2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior

spaces.





CONDUIT 26 0534 - 15


S. Provide pull string in empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

T. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

U. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 0553.


A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

B. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.

3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8413.

END OF SECTION





SURFACE RACEWAYS 26 0535 - 1


SECTION 26 0535 - SURFACE RACEWAYS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface metal raceways.

A. Surface nonmetal raceways.

B. Multi-outlet assemblies.

C. Wireways.




C. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles.



B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

C. UL 870 - Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes, service condition requirements, and accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.









PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL), Intertek (ETL), or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

2.02 WIREWAYS

A. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 870.

B. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

C. Where wireway size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS

A. Lamson & Sessions (Carlon) : www.carlon.com.

B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products : www.schneider-electric.us.

C. Wiremold Company : www.wiremold.com.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install raceways in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install raceways plumb and level.







D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with NFPA 70, including but not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used as pullboxes. Increase size of wireway where necessary.

E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 0529 at intervals complying with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements.

F. Wireway Supports: Provide steel channel as specified in Section 26 0529.

G. Close unused raceway openings.

H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

END OF SECTION





CABLE TRAYS 26 0536 - 1


SECTION 26 0536 – CABLE TRAYS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cable trays and accessories.

B. Firestopping within (not around) cable trays.


A. Section 07 8413 - Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Firestopping around cable trays.

B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.


A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ; 2009.

B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ; 2010.

C. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel ; 2007.

D. NEMA VE 1 - Metallic Cable Tray Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2009.

E. NEMA VE 2 - Cable Tray Installation Guidelines ; 2006.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. TIA 568-1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1, General Requirements ; 2006.

H. TIA 569-B - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces ; 2004.







1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.



B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70B pertaining to Installation of cable tray systems.

C. For each cable tray system, provide all components from a single manufacturer.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

E. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Snake Tray: www.snaketray.com

B. Cablofil: www.cablofil.com.

C. Cooper B-line: www.b-line.com.

D. MP Husky: www.mphusky.com.

E. P-W Industries: www.pwindustries.com.

F. Square D : www.squared.com.

G. Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.tnb.com.

H. T. J. Cope Incorporated: www.alliedsupport.com.

I. Wiremold Company : www.wiremold.com.

J. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.







2.02 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAY

A. Description: NEMA VE1 Wire Basket Tray designed for safety factor of 1.5.

B. Material: Continuous rigid steel wire mesh, hot dipped galvanized or zinc electroplated. 1. 2 inch by 4 inch grid pattern. 2. Wires welded at the intersection points with UL classified splices.

C. Inside Width: As indicated.

D. Inside Depth: 2 inches minimum.

E. Field fabricate fittings from straight sections according to manufacturer's instructions.

F. Field fabricated components free from burrs and sharp edges.

G. Provide manufacturer's standard connector assemblies, clamps, connector plates and splice plates.

H. Products. 1. Wire Cable Tray by Cablofil. 2. VersaTray by Chalfant. 3. Wire Basket Support System by Cooper B-Line. 4. Flextray by GS Metals Corporation. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 WARNING SIGNS

A. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2 inch black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with the following wording: "WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!"

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Field verify areas to receive cable tray systems. Notify Owner's Field Representative of any condition affecting installation. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions are met.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2 and manufacturer's instructions.







1. Install bends, offsets, supports and fittings to avoid conflict with the work of other trades.

2. Install and connect sections, fittings and other components to provide a continuous rigid mechanical assembly.

3. Provide cable drop downs at all racks, cabinets, enclosures, and vertical pathways for cable protection and strain relief.

4. Provide sufficient working clearance for installation and maintenance of cables. 5. Install ventilated tray covers on vertical trays within 6 feet above finished floors.

B. Support trays in accordance with Section 26 0529. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between supports of 10 ft maximum.

C. Do not support cable tray from ductwork, piping or equipment hangers.

D. Provide lateral brace every 25 feet maximum.

E. Support vertical runs every 5 feet maximum.

F. Wire Basket Cable Tray. 1. Support ceiling mounted tray with trapeze hangers. 2. Support wall mounted tray with cantilevered wall brackets.

G. Use galvanized or cadmium plated supporting and retaining devices where in contact with aluminum.

H. Include neoprene spacers where aluminum surfaces are in contact with ferrous surfaces in wet, damp or outdoor locations to prevent contact between aluminum and ferrous surfaces. Secure spacers to prevent loss of spacers due to tray movement.

I. Do not install cable tray continuous through permanent walls. 1. Install through-wall barriers for power cables passing through fire-rated walls and

where indicated. 2. Install conduit sleeves for power cables in nonfire-rated walls and

communications cables in fire-rated walls. a. Duct seal sleeves after cable installation to match fire rating of partition. b. Ground sleeves to cable tray at both ends.

3. Install IT Wiring Pathways for communications cables were indicated.

J. Use expansion connectors where required. 1. Install at all building expansion joints. 2. Install where necessary to permit expansion or contraction of tray or supporting

structure. 3. Install additional expansion connectors in all straight runs of aluminum tray at

intervals not greater than 80 feet. 4. Anchor tray to rigid support at midpoint between expansion joints to control tray

movement. 5. Elsewhere, secure tray to supports with retaining clips designed to allow

longitudinal travel of side rails.







K. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of Section 26 0526. 1. Provide continuity between tray components. 2. Use antioxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before

assembly. 3. Ground all metallic cable tray systems according to NFPA 70.

a. Continuously bond ladder type cable trays for use as grounding conductor. b. Install splice plates to maintain resistance of less than 33 micro-ohms

across splice. c. Install stranded copper bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NFPA 70

Article 250. 1) Bolted to each side rail or center spine across through-wall barriers

and expansion fittings in steel tray. 2) Between cable tray and source equipment ground bus.

d. Install extra-flexible stranded aluminum bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 250. 1) Bolted to each side rail or center spine across through-wall barriers

and expansion fittings in aluminum tray. 2) Between cable tray and source ground bus.

4. Connections to tray may be made using mechanical connectors.

L. Install warning signs at 50 feet centers along cable tray, located to be visible.

END OF SECTION





BOXES 26 0537 - 1


SECTION 26 0537 – BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

B. Floor boxes.

C. Pull and junction boxes.


A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

B. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas.



B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2008.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; 2008.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents.



B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.





BOXES 26 0537 - 2


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Appleton Electric : www.appletonelec.com.

B. Arc-Co./Division of Arcade Technology : www.arc-co.com.

C. Unity Manufacturing : www.unitymfg.com.

D. FSR.

E. submit equals for approval

F. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment

supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.

B. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 2726.

2.03 FLOOR BOXES

A. Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable, 1-1/2 inches deep.

B. Material: Cast metal.

C. Shape: Rectangular.

2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:

1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover

screws.

C. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting:

1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Smooth cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.





BOXES 26 0537 - 3


3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC".

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.

C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 2717.

D. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.

E. Electrical boxes are shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

F. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 2726.

G. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.

H. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

I. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

J. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8413.

K. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.

L. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.

M. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

N. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.





BOXES 26 0537 - 4


O. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

P. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

Q. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

R. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

S. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

T. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation.

U. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.

V. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

W. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

X. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

Y. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

Z. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

AA. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

BB. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

CC. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.

DD. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.

EE. Set floor boxes level.

FF. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations.

GG. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.





BOXES 26 0537 - 5


B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION





IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 1


SECTION 26 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Wire and cable markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Floor marking tape.

F. Warning signs and labels.


A. Section 09 9100 - Painting.

B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.

C. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates.


A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs ; 2007.

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels ; 2007.


D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace ; 2009.

E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:







1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing: 1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended

ceilings, until identification products have been installed. 2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are

complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS





A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

B. Conform to requirements of Owner published standards.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are not already identified in accordance with specified requirements.

2.02 MANUFACTURER

A. Ideal Industries, Inc.: www.idealindustriesinc.com.

B. Panduit Corporation: www.panduit.com.

C. Thomas and Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

2.03 REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide single type for each application category.







B. Use manufacturer's standard products.

C. Minimum character size and length of color field: Comply with ASME A13.1, Table 3, unless noted otherwise.

D. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1 and NFPA 70

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Engraved Nameplates and Labels. 1. Laminated phenolic engraving stock. 2. Thickness: Not less than 0.062 inch 3. Legend: White background with black letters unless otherwise specified or

required by national, state or local codes. 4. Exceptions.

a. Use ring type nameplates for push buttons and pilot lights. b. Warning nameplates: Yellow background with black letters. c. Emergency operating signs: Red background with white letters.

2.05 IDENTIFICATION FOR EQUIPMENT

A. Identification: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and

control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. 2. Provide identification where specified, indicated and as required by OSHA and

NFPA 70. 3. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for

electrical identification with corresponding designations used in Contract Documents or required by codes and standards.

4. Use consistent designations throughout the project. a. Switchboards:

1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location . 4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective

device. 5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each

branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces. b. Panelboards:

1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not

within sight of equipment. 4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label

for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate.

5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.







6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.

c. Transformers: 1) Identify kVA rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location . 4) Identify load(s) served. Include location .

d. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1) Identify voltage and phase. 2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not

within sight of equipment. 3) Identify load(s) served. Include location .

e. Enclosed Contactors: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify configuration, e.g., E.O.E.H. (electrically operated, electrically

held) or E.O.M.H. (electrically operated, mechanically held). 4) Identify coil voltage. 5) Identify load(s) and associated circuits controlled. Include location.

5. Service Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any

combination of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction.

c. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify the available fault current and the date calculations were performed.

6. Emergency System Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency

system equipment in accordance with NFPA 70. b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify

type and location of on-site emergency power sources. c. Use identification nameplate to identify emergency operating instructions

for emergency system equipment. 7. Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of

electrical equipment. 8. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where

permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70. 9. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with

remote disconnecting means. 10. Use identification label on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required

NEMA fuse class and size. 11. Use identification label on inside of door at each motor controller to identify

nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage, and phase of motor(s) controlled.







12. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving fire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".

13. Use field-painted floor markings, floor marking tape, or warning labels to identify required equipment working clearances where indicated or where required by the authority having jurisdiction.

14. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches. b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the

word message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent.

15. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent.

16. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all buildings, vaults, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

17. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment, compartments, and enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

18. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the word message "DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be present; Disconnect all electric power including remote disconnects before servicing" or approved equivalent.

A. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26

0519. 2. Conductor identification scheme and color coding shall conform to Owner

standards. 3. For conformance with Owner standards before start of work, verify conductor

identification scheme and color coding with Owner's Field Representative. 4. Conductor insulation color.

a. Factory apply to entire length of conductors. b. Color code.

1) Line and load circuits, AC or DC, above 100 volts: Black. 2) AC control circuits, 150 volts and below: Red. 3) DC control circuits, 150 volts and below: Blue. 4) Equipment grounding conductors (noncurrent carrying): Green with

or without white stripe. 5) conductors (current carrying) 6 AWG and smaller: White.







5. Conductor phase identification. a. Unique color scheme for each system voltage. b. In the absence of an Owner standard or an existing site color scheme, use

the following. 1) 480/277 volt system.

a) Phase A: Brown. b) Phase B: Orange. c) Phase C: Yellow. d) Neutral: Gray. e) Ground: Green.

2) 208/120 volt system. a) Phase A: Black. b) Phase B: Red. c) Phase C: Blue. d) Neutral: White. e) Ground: Green.

3) Use color coding to identify phase and grounded conductors at each terminal and splice.

4) Use consistent method throughout installation. 5) Color coding system.

a) Colored adhesive tape. i. Width: 1 inch. ii. Half-lap turns for a distance of 3 inches from terminal points,

splices and taps. iii. Last two laps without tension to prevent unwinding. iv. Avoid obscuring cable identification markings.

b) Colored cable ties. i. Apply in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at

each terminal and splice. ii. Start 3 inches from terminal or splice. iii. Space 3 inches apart.

6. Circuit identification. a. Use a consistent system of tags or adhesive labels. b. Identify conductors at terminations and splices. c. Provide circuit identification for.

1) Conductors to be extended in the future. a) Indicate source and circuit numbers.

2) Multiple power and/or lighting circuits in the same enclosure. a) Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number

and phase. b) Use color coding for voltage and phase identification.

3) Multiple control and/or communications circuits in the same enclosure. a) Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation.

7. Power Cable Identification (15kV and 5kV Systems). a. Use aluminum marker bands or metal tags. b. Identify medium voltage cables and underground feeders. c. Identify cables at all of the following locations.

1) In vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes and manholes.







2) In switchgear, switchboards, substation rooms and enclosures. 3) At each splice or tap.

d. Legends. 1) Unique circuit designation. 2) Characters: 1/4 inch stamped or embossed.

8. Danger Signs. a. Provide danger signs.

1) Where required by OSHA. 2) At entrances to substation rooms. 3) On covers of pull and junction boxes of systems over 600 volts.

9. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables: Comply with Section 27 1005.

10. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

11. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations: a. At each source and load connection. b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present. c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave

the enclosure. d. In cable tray, at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

12. Use underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables.

B. Identification for Raceways: 1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits

at maximum intervals of 20 feet. 2. Identify raceways at.

a. Changes in direction. b. Penetrations of walls and floors. c. 50 feet maximum intervals in straight runs. d. 25 feet maximum intervals in congested areas.

3. Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal power system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet. a. Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape

to mark bands 3 inches wide. 1) Color Code:

a) Emergency Power System: Red. b) Fire Alarm System: Red.

2) Field-Painting: Comply with Section 09 9000. 3) Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 0519.

4. Use identification labels or plastic marker tags to identify circuits enclosed for accessible conduits at wall penetrations, at floor penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipment terminations when source is not within sight.

5. Use identification labels or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location.







6. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for wireways at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

C. Identification for Boxes: 1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present. 2. Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal

power system. 3. Paint covers of junction boxes to identify system with the following colors.

a. Telephone/Data: Light Blue. b. Security: Gray. c. Fire Alarm: Red. d. Normal Power (600 volts and below): Natural finish.

4. Use identification labels to identify circuits enclosed. a. For exposed boxes in public areas, use only identification labels.

5. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for boxes containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

D. Identification for Devices: 1. Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 1005. 2. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 2726. 3. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.

a. For devices concealed above suspended ceilings, provide additional identification on ceiling tile below device location.

4. Use identification label to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles. a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide

identification on inside surface of wallplate. 5. Use identification label to identify load controlled for wall-mounted control

devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.

6. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection, where permitted.

2.06 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc : www.brimar.com. b. Ideal Industries, Inc.: www.idealindustriesinc.com. c. Panduit Corporation: www.panduit.com. d. Thomas and Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use stainless steel or aluminum nameplates suitable

for exterior use.







3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is

greater than 4 inches. 4. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-

etched text. 5. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or

laser-etched text. 6. Engraved Nameplates and Labels.

a. Laminated phenolic engraving stock. b. Thickness: Not less than 0.062 inch. c. Legend: White background with black letters unless otherwise specified or

required by national, state or local codes. d. Exceptions.

1) Use ring type nameplates for push buttons and pilot lights. 2) Warning nameplates: Yellow background with black letters. 3) Emergency operating signs: Red background with white letters.

7. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Brady Corporation : www.bradyid.com. b. deal Industries, Inc.: www.idealindustriesinc.com. c. Brother International Corporation : www.brother-usa.com. d. Panduit Corp : www.panduit.com.

2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant.

3. Adhesive Labels. a. Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl. b. Laminate over legend with clear, and chemical weather resistant coating.

4. Colored Adhesive Tape. a. Self-adhesive vinyl tape. b. 1 inch wide by not less than 3 mils thick.

5. Tape Markers. a. Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive, wrap-around tape. b. Preprinted numbers and letters.

6. Colored Plastic Sleeves. a. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic bands. b. Pretensioned, wrap-around, to provide gripping action when placed in

position. c. Sized to suite diameter of line identified.

7. Aluminum Wrap-around Marker Bands. a. Cut from 0.014 inch thick aluminum sheet. b. Stamped or embossed legend. c. Slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or

around groups of conductors. 8. Plasticized Card Stock.







a. Vinyl cloth with eyelet for fastener. b. Preprinted and field printed legends. c. Orange background, except where indicated otherwise.

9. Aluminum-Faced Card Stock Tags. a. Weather resistant card-stock. b. Facing on both sides, embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inch thick. c. Laminated with moisture resistant acrylic adhesive. d. Preprinted legend. e. Punched for fastener.

10. Metal Tags. a. Brass or aluminum with stamped legend. b. 2 inches by 2 inches by 0.05 inch thick. c. Punched for fastener.

11. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated.

12. Danger Signs. a. Rigid type.

1) In compliance with OSHA standards. 2) Material: Fiberglass. 3) Thickness: 1/8 inch. 4) Nominal Size: 10 inches high by 14 inches wide. 5) Legend: Embedded. 6) Corners: Grommeted for fasteners.

b. Self-adhesive type. 1) In compliance with OSHA standards. 2) Preprinted, flexible self-adhesive vinyl.

13. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated, Fiberglass and Metal Signs. a. Self-tapping machine screws. b. No. 10/32 stainless steel with nuts, flat washers, and lock washers.

C. Format for Equipment Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. 2. Legend:

a. System designation where applicable: 1) Emergency Power System: Identify with text "EMERGENCY". 2) Fire Alarm System: Identify with text "FIRE ALARM".

b. Equipment designation or other approved description. c. Other information as indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height:

a. System Designation: 1 inch. b. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch. c. Other Information: 1/4 inch. d. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch for equipment located

more than 10 feet above floor or working platform. 5. Color:

a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. b. Emergency Power System: White text on red background. c. Fire Alarm System: White text on red background.







D. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. 2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper

and safe operation and maintenance. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch. 5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions: 1) Provide white text on red background for general information or

operational instructions for emergency systems. 2) Provide white text on red background for general information or

operational instructions for fire alarm systems.

E. Format for Caution and Warning Messages: 1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches. 2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper

and safe operation and maintenance. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch. 5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.

F. Format for Receptacle Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches. 2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch. 5. Color: Black text on clear background.

G. Format for Control Device Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches. 2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch. 5. Color: Black text on clear background.

H. Format for Fire Alarm Device Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches. 2. Legend: Designation indicated and device zone or address. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch. 5. Color: Red text on white background.

2.07 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation : www.bradyid.com. 2. HellermannTyton : www.hellermanntyton.com. 3. Panduit Corp : www.panduit.com.








B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use heat-shrink sleeve or plastic sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.

D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

2.08 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation : www.bradyid.com. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. : www.brimar.com. 3. Seton Identification Products : www.seton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl snap-around type markers.

C. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl type markers.

D. Minimum Size: 1. Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches. 2. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be

identified. 3. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches. 4. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.

E. Legend: 1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present. 2. Markers for System Identification:

a. Emergency Power System: Text "EMERGENCY".

2.09 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation : www.bradyid.com. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. : www.brimar.com. 3. Seton Identification Products : www.seton.com.








B. Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl or polyester tape with overlaminate, 3 inches wide, with alternating black and white stripes.

2.10 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brimar Industries, Inc. : www.brimar.com. 2. Clarion Safety Systems, LLC : www.clarionsafety.com. 3. Seton Identification Products : www.seton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

C. Warning Signs: 1. Materials:

a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive vinyl signs.

b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs. 2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners. 3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Warning Labels: 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or

self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant ; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. a. Do not use labels designed to be completed using handwritten text.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.







3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.

4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 7. Conduits: Legible from the floor. 8. Boxes: Outside face of cover. 9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. 10. Devices: Outside face of cover.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. 1. Do not use adhesives on exterior surfaces except where substrate can not be

penetrated.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.

G. Secure nameplates to equipment front using metallic drive screws except. 1. Where otherwise specified. 2. For devices subject to periodic replacement or removal for repair, mount

nameplates separate from and adjacent to the device.

H. Clean surfaces of dust, loose materials and oily films before applying adhesive identification products.

I. Fasten marker bands using integral ears.

J. Fasten metal tags with nylon cable ties.

K. Install cable ties with special tools or pliers. Tighten to snug fit and cut off excess.

L. Complete panel directory for each panelboard. 1. Clearly type directory and mount inside panel door. 2. Provide complete description of items controlled by each individual breaker.

M. Convenience Receptacle Labels. 1. Install on faceplate of receptacle where easily visible. 2. Install at consistent location throughout.


A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion.







END OF SECTION





LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 2200 - 1


SECTION 26 2200 – LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General purpose transformers.

A. K-factor transformers rated for nonlinear loads.

B. Shielded transformers.

C. Small power centers.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

D. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Flexible conduit connections.

E. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.


A. IEEE C57.94 - Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and Maintenance of Dry-Type General Purpose Distribution and Power Transformers ; 1982 (R2006).

B. IEEE C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers ; 1999 (R2004).

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction ; 2010.

D. NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers ; 2009.

E. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 1992 (R1997).

F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) ; 2008

G. NEMA TP 1 - Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers ; 2002.







H. NEMA TP 2 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution Transformers ; 2005.

I. NEMA TP 3 - Standard for the Labeling of Distribution Transformer Efficiency ; 2000.

J. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association ; 2009.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; 2008.

L. UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors required for mounting of transformers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class and rated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Vibration Isolators: Include attachment method and rated load and deflection. 2. K-factor Rated Transformers: Include K-factor ratings.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of transformers and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. 1. Small Power Centers: Include panel arrangements.

D. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA ST 20 as design and routine tests.

E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transformers.









B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Siemens Industry, Inc. : www.sea.siemens.com.

B. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products : www.eaton.com.

C. General Electric Company : www.geindustrial.com.

D. Schneider Electric; Square D Products : www.schneider-electric.us.


2.02 ALL TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according to IEEE C57.96 under following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 86 degrees F average or 104 degrees F

maximum measured during any 24 hour period.

C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, even at 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core







laminations to prevent plate movement and maintain consistent pressure throughout core length.

D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectively seal out moisture and other contaminants.

E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.

F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap.

G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.

H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload capacity based on rated winding temperature rise.

2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.

B. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 185 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C

average winding temperature rise. 2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C

average winding temperature rise.

C. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded.

D. Winding Taps: 1. Less than 3 kVA: None. 2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated

voltage. 3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and

four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. 4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two

2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

E. Energy Efficiency: Standard efficiency complying with NEMA TP 1. 1. Test efficiency according to NEMA TP 2. 2. Label transformer according to NEMA TP 3.

F. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20.

G. Mounting Provisions: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. 2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

H. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.







1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 2. b. Outdoor locations: Type 3R.

2. Construction: Heavy gage steel. a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated. b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

I. Accessories: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets. 2. Weathershield Kits: Provide for ventilated transformers installed outdoors to

provide a listed NEMA 250, type 3R assembly. 3. Lug Kits: Sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated on the

drawings.

2.04 K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS RATED FOR NONLINEAR LOADS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 1561, and designed to supply nonlinear loads to the degree designated by the UL defined K-factor; ratings as indicated on the drawings.

B. K-factor Rating: K-13, or higher.

C. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise.

D. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded. Individually insulate secondary conductors and arrange to minimize hysteresis and eddy current losses at harmonic frequencies. Size secondary neutral conductor at twice the secondary phase conductor ampacity.

E. Winding Taps: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

F. Neutral Bus: Sized to accommodate twice the rated secondary current.

G. Energy Efficiency: Standard efficiency complying with NEMA TP 1. 1. Test efficiency according to NEMA TP 2. 2. Label transformer according to NEMA TP 3.

H. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20.

I. Mounting Provisions: 1. Up to 45 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 2. Larger than 45 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.







J. Electrostatic Shield: Provide grounded copper electrostatic shield between primary and secondary windings to attenuate electrical noise.

K. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for

the following installation locations: 2. Construction: Heavy gage steel, ventilated. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

L. Accessories: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets. 2. Weathershield Kits: Provide for ventilated transformers installed outdoors to


drawings.

2.05 SHIELDED TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding, shielded isolation transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.




C. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded.

D. Winding Taps: 1. Less than 3 kVA: None. 2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated

voltage. 3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and

four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. 4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two

2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.



G. Winding Shield: Electrostatic, with separate insulated grounding connection.

H. Mounting Provisions: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.







2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

I. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for

the following installation locations: a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 2. b. Outdoor locations: Type 3R.

2. Construction: Heavy gage steel. a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated. b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

J. Accessories: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets. 2. Weathershield Kits: Provide for ventilated transformers installed outdoors to


drawings.

2.06 SMALL POWER CENTERS

A. Description: Factory assembled unit with integral primary circuit breaker, transformer, and distribution section with secondary main and branch circuit breakers; ratings and panel arrangements as indicated on the drawings.




C. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings.

D. Winding Taps: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.



G. Mounting Provisions: Suitable for wall mounting.

H. Unit Enclosure: 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Type 3R. 2. Construction: Heavy gage steel. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations.







4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 5. Provide lockable hinged door for compartment housing circuit breakers.

I. Secondary Distribution Panel: 1. Bus: Copper. 2. Branch Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on.


A. Factory test transformers according to NEMA ST 20.

B. Sound Level Tests: Perform factory test designated in NEMA ST 20 as "design" test on each production unit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that suitable support frames and anchors are installed where required and that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transformers.

C. Perform pre-installation tests and inspections on transformers per manufacturer's instructions and as specified in NECA 409. Correct deficiencies prior to installation.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

B. Install transformers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94.

D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 0534, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.

E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

F. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished by the manufacturer.







G. Mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.

H. Mount floor-mounted transformers using vibration isolators suitable for isolating the transformer noise from the building structure.

I. Mount trapeze-mounted transformers as indicated.

J. Provide seismic restraints.

K. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

L. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise transmission.

M. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as shown on the drawings.

N. Identify transformers in accordance with Section 26 0553.


A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 26 0127.


C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS Sections 7.2.1.1 and 7.2.1.2. Tests and inspections listed as optional are not required.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.

B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION





PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 1


SECTION 26 2416 – PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Power distribution panelboards.

B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

C. Load centers.

D. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.





D. Section 26 2200 - Low-Voltage Transformers: Small power centers with integral primary breaker, transformer, and panelboard.

E. Section 26 2813 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches and spare fuse cabinets.


A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification ; Revision D, 2006.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2010.

C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2009.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) ; 2008.

E. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2000 (R2005).

F. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2001 (R2006).







G. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2006.

H. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2007.

I. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association ; 2009.

J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; 2008.

K. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 67 - Panelboards ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,

equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted panelboards where indicated.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.


1.05 SUBMITTALS








B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. 1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device .

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent

equipment with all required clearances indicated. 2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections. 3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or,

where acceptable, series rated systems.

D. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA PB 1 as routine tests.

E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

G. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.





A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.







C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.


A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards: 1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104

degrees F. 2. Panelboards Containing Fusible Switches: Between -22 degrees F and 104

degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS






2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS

A. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature:

a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

b. Panelboards Containing Fusible Switches: Between minus 22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the

available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

D. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.







E. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.

G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for

each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection. 2. Provide 200 percent rated neutral bus and lugs where indicated, where oversized

neutral conductors are provided, or where panelboards are fed from K-rated transformers.

3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

4. Provide separate isolated/insulated ground bus where indicated or where isolated grounding conductors are provided.

H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

I. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for

the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be

installed. b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs,

gutter taps, or oversized lugs are provided. c. Provide removable end walls for NEMA Type 1 enclosures. d. Provide painted steel boxes for surface-mounted panelboards where

indicated, finish to match fronts. 3. Fronts:

a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to

conceal rough opening. c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless

otherwise indicated. 4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

J. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

K. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, Provide internally mounted surge protective devices as required, list and label panelboards as a complete assembly including surge protective device.







L. Panelboard Contactors: Where panelboard contactors are indicated, provide electrically operated, mechanically held magnetic contactor complying with NEMA ICS 2. 1. Ampere Rating: Not less than ampere rating of panelboard bus. 2. Short Circuit Current Rating: Not less than the panelboard short circuit current

rating. 3. Coil Voltage: As required for connection to control system indicated.

M. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053. 1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection

are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.

N. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination.

O. Multi-Section Panelboards: Provide enclosures of the same height, with feed-through lugs or sub-feed lugs and feeders as indicated or as required to interconnect sections.

P. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1. Feed-through lugs. 2. Sub-feed lugs.

2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or

copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum. 2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum.

D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints.

E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide trims to cover access to load terminals, wiring gutters, and other

live parts, with exposed access to overcurrent protective device handles.







2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper

conductors only. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent

protective devices. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. 3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to

overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

F. Provide column-width panelboards with accessory column-width cable trough and pullbox where indicated.

2.05 LOAD CENTERS

A. Description: Circuit breaker type load centers listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent

protective devices. 2. Bus Material: Copper.

C. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic plug-in type.

D. Enclosures: 1. Provide flush-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide cover without door to cover access to load terminals, wiring

gutters, and other live parts, with exposed access to overcurrent protective device handles.

3. Provide circuit directory label on inside of door or individual circuit labels adjacent to circuit breakers.







2.06 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Fusible Switches: 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front fusible switch units complying

with NEMA KS 1, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Fuse Clips: As required to accept indicated fuses. a. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to

prevent installation of fuses other than Class R. 3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.

Provide means for locking switch cover in the closed position. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

4. Conductor Terminations: a. Provide mechanical lugs where indicated. b. Provide compression lugs . c. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only. d. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum conductors as

noted on drawings

B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating

circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489 , and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the

short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity

not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs as noted on drawings. b. Provide compression lugs . c. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper

conductors. 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time

tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit

breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger. b. Provide interchangeable trip units where indicated.

5. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms sensing trip units. a. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:

1) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by setting dial.

2) Long time delay. 3) Short time pickup and delay. 4) Instantaneous pickup.







5) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.

b. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault sensing systems to control short time delay and ground fault delay functions for system coordination purposes.

c. Provide communication capability : Compatible with system indicated. 6. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 7. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:

a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel.

b. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for protection of equipment.

c. 100 Percent Rated Circuit Breakers: Listed for application within the panelboard where installed at 100 percent of the continuous current rating.

d. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Without using fusible elements, designed to limit the let-through energy to a value less than the energy of a one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current when operating within its current limiting range.

8. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip

actuator. b. Handle Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF

position. c. Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated

for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped or been turned off.


A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.








3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.

E. Install panelboards plumb.

F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered.

G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

H. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.

I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. 1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded

equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus. 2. Terminate branch circuit isolated grounding conductors on isolated/insulated

ground bus only. Do not terminate on solidly bonded equipment ground bus.

J. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.

K. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated.

L. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation.

M. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as indicated.

N. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.

O. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

P. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-energizing essential loads where indicated. Also provide for the following: 1. Emergency and night lighting circuits. 2. Fire detection and alarm circuits. 3. Communications equipment circuits. 4. Video surveillance system circuits.

Q. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 0553.








A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 26 0127.


C. Fusible Switches: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.

D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers. 1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. 2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.

E. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA 70. 1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.14. The

insulation-resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is required.

F. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

G. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.

H. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and assist in inspection, testing, and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality control submittals.

I. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.

C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.








END OF SECTION





EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 2717 - 1


SECTION 26 2717 – EQUIPMENT WIRING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical connections to equipment.


A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less).

B. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.


D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.

E. Section 26 2818 - Enclosed Switches.


A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 1999 (R 2005).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2002 (R2008).



A. Coordination: 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,

and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing: 1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is

required. 2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.







1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. 1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1. 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with

identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. 3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of

branch circuit overcurrent protection. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Disconnect Switches: As specified as noted on drawing. .

C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726.

D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534.

E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519.

F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537.

2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Terminate cable in conduit at equipment as suggested by equipment manufacturer. 1. Electrical Connection: Flexible conduit or as suggested by manufacturer. 2. Electrical Connection: Cord and plug (NEMA 6-20R) as noted on the drawing. 3. Provide field-installed disconnect switch.







PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.

3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

J. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings.

END OF SECTION





WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1


SECTION 26 2726 – WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall switches.

B. Receptacles.

C. Floor box service fittings.

D. Access floor boxes.



B. Section 26 0535 - Surface Raceways: Surface raceway systems, including multioutlet assemblies.


D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

E. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Devices for automatic control of lighting, including occupancy sensors, in-wall time switches, and in-wall interval timers.

F. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment.

G. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting


A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification ; Revision G, 2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification ; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2010.

D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association ; 2010.







E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 1999 (R 2005).

F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2002 (R2008).

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; 2008.

H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc.

installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical

requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face

block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 4. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work

covered under other sections. 5. Notify Owner's Field Representative of any conflicts or deviations from the

contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are

complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Screwdrivers for Tamper-Resistant Screws: Two for each type of screw.







3. Extra Keys for Locking Switches: Two of each type. 4. Extra Surge Protection Receptacles: Two of each type. 5. Extra Wall Plates: One of each style, size, and finish. 6. Extra Flush Floor Service Fittings: Two of each type.




1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell Incorporated : www.hubbell-wiring.com.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc : www.leviton.com.

C. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc : www.legrand.us

D. Not limited to above manufacturers, submit equals for approval.


2.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.

B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.

C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.

D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for all receptacles installed in dwelling units.

E. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.

F. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed in kitchen.







G. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.

H. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.

I. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.

J. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors.

2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

2.04 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated : www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc. : www.leviton.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc. : www.legrand.us 4. Substitution allowed for approval. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding

clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

C. Standard Wall Switches: Commercial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

D. Lighted Wall Switches: Commercial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load off; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

E. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Commercial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with red illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

F. Timer Switch: Spring wound Auto-Off Timer Switch shall be a mechanical spring wound timer that requires no electricity to operate the timing mechanism. Switch shall fit in single-gang outlet box. Timer contact shall break current at the end of the cycle. Timing range shall be 120 minutes, unless otherwise noted and shall be provided







'Hold' feature. Switch shall be rated 20 Amps at 125V AC, 10 Amps at 277V AC and 1HP at 125V AC.

2.05 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated : www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc. : www.leviton.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc. : www.legrand.us 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498 , and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding

clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,

NEMA 5-20R ; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. a. Configuration: NEMA 5-20R. b. Wiring: Back and side. c. All brass grounding strap, duplex only. d. Acceptable products.

1) Cooper: Duplex 5362 Series, Single 5361 Series. 2) Hubbell: Duplex 5362 Series, Single 5361 Series. 3) Leviton: Duplex 5362A Series, Single 5361 Series. 4) Pass & Seymour: Duplex 5362A Series, Single 5361 Series. 5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, , listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

3. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, , listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

4. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, , listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

D. GFI Receptacles: 1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate

ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A. a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.







2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R , rectangular decorator style. a. Duplex receptacle, 20 ampere, (GFCI) for 120V single phase service.

1) Configuration: NEMA 5-20R. 2) Performance standard: UL Standard 943 Class A GFCI. 3) Acceptable products: GFR5352A Series by Hubbell or equivalent

from acceptable manufacturer listed in Section 2.01. 3. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A,

125V, NEMA 5-20R , rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

E. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R , rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

F. Receptacles for Hazardous Locations. 1. 20 ampere straight blade, for 120 volt, single phase service.

a. Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D. b. Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F and G. c. Class III. d. Configuration: NEMA 5-20R. e. Angle cover and spring door. f. Matching plug for each receptacle. g. Acceptable products.

1) EFS receptacle by Appleton. (a) ECP-1523, 15 ampere plug. (b) ECP-2023, 20 ampere plug.

2) ENR receptacle by Crouse-Hinds. (a) ENP5151, 15 ampere plug. (b) ENP5201, 20 ampere plug.

3) UGRA/B receptacle by Hubbell or Killark. (a) UGP15231, 15 ampere plug. (b) UGP20231, 20 ampere plug.


G. Power Receptacles. 1. Combination switch and interlocked receptacle for 480V, 3 phase service.

a. 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding. b. Type: Fusible. c. Rated: 60 ampere, 600 volts AC as indicated on drawings. d. Receptacle Housing: Aluminum, angle type, weather resistant, with spring

door. e. Interlock with 3 pole, 600 volt safety switch.

1) Safety switch: NEMA HD heavy-duty, flange mounted, quick-make, quick break, visible blade, in NEMA 12 enclosure.

2) Interlock prevents switch closing until plug is fully inserted and allows plug to be removed only when switch is open.







f. UL listed, meets UL 98. g. Complete factory assembly. h. Plug: One matching for each assembly. i. Acceptable products - Fused.

1) 60 ampere. (a) WSRD6352 by Appleton or equivalent by Square D.

1) ACP6034BC plug. (b) WSRD6352 by Crouse-Hinds or equivalent by Square D.

1) APJ6485 plug. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

H. Special Straight Blade, Nonlocking Receptacles. 1. 15 ampere single, for 120 volt, single phase clock or appliance service.

a. Plate: Recessed for plug cap. b. Configuration: NEMA 5-15R. c. Clock hanger bracket. d. Acceptable products.

1) HBL5235 by Hubbell. 2) 5261-CH by Leviton. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. 20 ampere single, for 120 volt, single phase clock or appliance service. a. Plate: Recessed for plug cap. b. Configuration: NEMA 5-20R. c. Clock hanger bracket. d. Acceptable products.

1) 5361-CH by Leviton. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

3. 30 ampere single, for 120 volt, single phase service. a. Configuration: NEMA 5-30R. b. Matching plug for each receptacle. c. Acceptable products.

1) HBL9308 by Hubbell or equivalent from acceptable manufacturers listed in Section 2.01.

4. 30 ampere single, for 208 or 240 volt, single phase service. a. Configuration: NEMA 6-30R. b. Matching plug for each receptacle. c. Acceptable products.


5. 30 ampere single, for 208 or 240 volt, 3 phase service. a. Configuration: NEMA 15-30R. b. Matching plug for each receptacle. c. Acceptable products.

1) HBL8430A by Hubbell or equivalent from acceptable manufacturers listed in Section 2.01.

6. 50 ampere single, for 208 or 240 volt, single phase service. a. Configuration: NEMA 6-50R. b. Matching plug for each receptacle. c. Acceptable products.








2.06 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated : www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.tnb.com. 3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc. : www.legrand.us 4. FSR. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26 0537 with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

2.07 ACCESS FLOOR BOXES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated : www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation : www.tnb.com. 3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc. : www.legrand.us 4. FSR. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Metallic multi-service box suitable for mounting in access floor system as mentioned on drawings.

C. Configuration: 1. Power: Two standard convenience duplex receptacle(s). 2. Communications: Dual gang box with six data outlet unless otherwise indicated

on drawings.. 3. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1000. Also refer to drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete , including painting.







E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130 , including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

a. Wall Switches: 42 inches above finished floor. b. Wall Dimmers: 42 inches above finished floor. c. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.

2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.

3. Where multiple [] or timer switches are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate.

4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Owner's Field Representative to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.







H. Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

I. Where split-wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles.

J. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

K. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

L. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.

M. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use.

O. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 0553.



B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

C. Operate each wall switch and wall dimmer with circuit energized to verify proper operation.

D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.

E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.

F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by Owner's Field Representative.







3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION





FUSES 26 2813 - 1


SECTION 26 2813 – FUSES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. IEC 60947-4-1 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactors and Motor-Starters - Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-Starters; International Electrotechnical Commission ; 2009 .

B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2002 (R2007).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

D. UL 508E - Outline of Investigation for IEC Type 2 Coordination Short Circuit Tests ; 2006.

E. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

F. UL 489/NEMA AB 1 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures; Underwriters Laboratories ; 2002 (R2010) .

G. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories ; current edition.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide listing of manufacturer, type and size of fuses used.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cooper Bussmann, a division of Cooper Industries : www.cooperindustries.com.

B. Edison Fusegear: www.edisonfuse.com.





FUSES 26 2813 - 2


C. Mersen (formerly Ferraz Shawmut) : ferrazshawmut.mersen.com.

D. Littelfuse, Inc : www.littelfuse.com.


2.02 FUSES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system.

C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.

D. Comply with UL 248-1.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated.

F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.

B. Protect fuses from water damage before and after installation.

C. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

D. Torque fasteners to manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Listings. 1. Where fuses are used to provide short circuit protection of downstream circuit

breakers, specific fuse/breaker combination must be listed as series rated in accordance with UL 489.

2. Where fuses are used to provide Type 2 protection of starter, specific fuse/starter combination must be listed in accordance with UL508E.

END OF SECTION





ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2818 - 1


SECTION 26 2818 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Enclosed safety switches.





D. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.



B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) ; 2008.

C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2001 (R2006).

D. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association ; 2009.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; 2008.

F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:







1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.


1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed switches and adjacent

equipment with all required clearances indicated. 2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.





A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed switch internal components, enclosure, and finish.


C. Maintain ambient temperature between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and after installation of enclosed switches.







PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS






2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, enclosed safety switches complying with NEMA KS 1, type HD (heavy duty), and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between minus -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.

E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

F. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side

overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

2. Minimum Ratings: a. Heavy Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, Class L,

or Class T Fuses: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes. b. Double Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, or Class T Fuses:

100,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

G. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.

H. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches: As required to accept fuses indicated. 1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent

installation of fuses other than Class R.







I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

J. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.

K. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.

L. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA KS 1 and NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for

the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unless otherwise indicated.

M. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

N. Heavy Duty Switches: 1. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs when noted on drawings. b. Provide compression lugs . c. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

2. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of accepting three padlocks.

O. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1. Hubs: As required for environment type; sized to accept conduits to be installed. 2. Integral fuse pullers. 3. Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated, with

auxiliary contact operation before switch blades open and after switch blades close.

4. Viewing Window: Positioned over switch blades for visual confirmation of contact position with door closed.

5. Interlocked Receptacle: Integral pre-wired three phase, three wire, grounded type receptacle interlocked with switch mechanism to prevent insertion or removal of plug with switch in the ON position and to prevent switch from being placed in the ON position without matching plug inserted. Provide receptacle configuration as required to accept plug as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION








B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.

E. Install enclosed switches plumb.

F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated or as required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

I. Identify enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 0553.




C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated components.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.







3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.


END OF SECTION





INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100 - 1


SECTION 26 5100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Interior luminaires.

B. Exit signs.

C. Ballasts.

D. Lamps.

E. Luminaire accessories.

F. Refer to document by Illuminart "Lighting supplier and contractor general provisions" in Appendix.


A. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and re-quirements.

C. Section 26 0918 - Remote Control Switching Devices: Remote controls for lighting, in-cluding network lighting controls, programmable relay panels, and remote control switching relays.

D. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including occupancy sensors, outdoor motion sensors, time switches, outdoor photo controls, and daylighting controls.

E. Section 26 0943 - Network Lighting Controls - Lutron.

1. Includes fluorescent dimming ballasts.

F. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.

G. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting.


A. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluo-rescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements ; Consolidated-2002.

B. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits ; 2002 (R2008).

C. IESNA LM-63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Pho-tometric Data and Related Information ; 2002.

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electri-cal Contractors Association ; 2010.







E. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; Na-tional Electrical Contractors Association ; 2006.

F. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2004.

G. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufac-turers Association ; 2006.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; 2008.

I. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association ; 2009.

J. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts ; Current Edition, Including All Revi-sions.

L. UL 1598 - Luminaires ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. IESNA LM-79 - Approved method for the electrical and photometric meaurement of solid state lighting product.

O. IESNA LM-80 - Approved method for measuring lumen maintenance of LED light sources.

P. NEMA SSL1 - Electronic Drivers for LED devices, Arrays or systems.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, an-chors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and as-sociated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.

4. Notify Owner's Field Representative of any conflicts or deviations from the con-tract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.







C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets includ-ing detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary La-boratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IESNA LM-63 standard format for proposed substitutions.

2. Ballasts: Include wiring diagrams and list of compatible lamp configurations.

3. Driver: Include wiring diagrams and list of compatible lamp configurations.

4. Lamps: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and ini-tial and mean lumen output.

5. Provide photorealistic rendering for review, comment, and approval prior to full size sample.

6. Provide 10 percent spare power supplies and LED emitters.

7. Provide 10 percent spare lenses of each type for accent lighting.

D. Samples:

1. Provide one sample of each specified luminaire where indicated.

2. Provide one sample of each custom luminaire .

3. Provide one sample of each luminaire proposed for substitution upon request.

4. Provide one sample of each product finish illustrating color and texture upon re-quest.

E. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed.

F. Field Quality Control Reports.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of pro-ject.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Lenses and Louvers: Two percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than one of each type.

3. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type.

4. Extra Ballasts: Two percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than one of each type.

J. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components.









B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execu-tion requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Installer of lighting fixtures and associated equipment must be a certified installer with a minimum of five years of experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial light-ing) and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.


A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

1.09 WARRANTY


B. Provide two year manufacturer warranty with factory start up for all linear fluorescent fixtures and ballasts.

C. Provide ten year warranty for all LED lighting units and 5 years on associated drivers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acuity Brands, Inc. : www.acuitybrands.com.

B. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries : www.cooperindustries.com.

C. Hubbell Lighting, Inc. : www.hubbelllighting.com.

D. Philips: www.usa.lighting.philips.com

E. Not limited to above manufacturers, approved equal substitutions are allowed.

F. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. New Products: Specialized fixtures (sconces) and occupancy sensors.

2.03 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.








2.04 LUMINAIRES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Refer to fixture schedules on drawings.

2. Not limited to above manufacturers, approved equal substitutions are allowed.


B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where appli-cable.

D. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to posi-tion, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wir-ing, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a com-plete operating system.

G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service with-out any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

H. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suita-ble for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials.

3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapt-ers.

4. Air-Handling Recessed Fluorescent Luminaires: Suitable for air supply/return, heat removal, or combination as indicated.

a. Luminaires for Air Supply/Return: Provide air control blades where indicated.

b. Luminaires for Heat Removal: Provide heat removal dampers where indicat-ed.

I. Fluorescent Luminaires:

1. Provide ballast disconnecting means complying with NFPA 70 where required.

2. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Occupancy Sensors: Provide programmed start ballasts.

3. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Dual-Level Switching: Provide with two bal-lasts.

a. Luminaires with Two Lamps: Each ballast controls one lamp.

b. Luminaires with Three Lamps: One ballast controls two outer lamps and one ballast controls inner lamp.

c. Luminaires with Four Lamps: One ballast controls two outer lamps and one ballast controls two inner lamps.

J. HID Luminaires:







1. HID Luminaires with Quartz Restrike Systems: Factory-installed supplementary quartz lamp automatically switches on when power interruption causes primary HID lamp to drop out or during cold startup.

K. LED Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 8750.

1. LM79-08 and LM80-08 compliant.

2. Meet C78.377-2008 chromacity standard (includes a 4-step MacAdam ellipse range of standard deviation.

3. System components should be plug and play where possible, and replaceable by components as opposed to replacing whole system. That also allows for upgrad-ing.

4. Minimum CRI for white-light LED: 80 unless otherwise noted.

5. 5 year minimum warranty on system components.

6. 50,000 hour emitter life, minimum.

7. For DMX controlled white light LED luminaires, data control signal loss will result in the luminaire staying at the current level of dimming.

8. For DMX controlled white light LED luminaires, brown out conditions on board sensors will turn off the luminaires if input voltage falls outside of safe operating range to avoid damage to components.

L. Track Lighting Systems: Provide track compatible with specified track heads, with all connectors, power feed fittings, dead ends, hangers and canopies as necessary to complete installation.

M. Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length indicated, with all accessories required for joining and aligning.

2.05 EXIT SIGNS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Acuity Brands, Inc. : www.acuitybrands.com.

2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries : www.cooperindustries.com.

3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc. : www.hubbelllighting.com.

4. Not limited to above manufacturers, submit equal for approval.


B. All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.

2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.

3. Refer to fixture schedule on drawing.

C. Accessories:

1. Provide compatible accessory high impact polycarbonate vandal shields where indicated.

2. Provide compatible accessory wire guards where indicated.







2.06 BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting : www.gelighting.com.

2. Osram Sylvania : www.sylvania.com.

3. Philips Lighting Electronics/Advance : www.advance.philips.com.


B. All Ballasts:

1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applica-ble federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

C. Fluorescent Ballasts:

1. All Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency elec-tronic ballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935.

a. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent.

b. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 10 percent.

c. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95.

d. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P, with automatic reset for integral thermal protectors.

e. Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels.

f. Lamp Compatibility: Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no visible flicker.

g. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.7.

h. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s) without requir-ing resetting of power.

i. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut-down circuitry for T5 and smaller di-ameter lamp ballasts.

j. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location category A.

k. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 18, for Class A, non-consumer application.

l. Provide high efficiency T8 lamp ballasts certified as NEMA premium where indicated.

m. Provide lamp striation reduction circuitry where indicated.

n. Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections.

2. Non-Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts:

a. Lamp Starting Method:

1) T8 Lamp Ballasts: Program rapid start unless otherwise indicated.

2) T5 Lamp Ballasts: Program rapid start unless otherwise indicated.

3) Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless other-wise indicated.

b. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a mini-mum of 0 degrees F, and energy saving lamp(s) at a minimum of 60 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.







3. Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts - Network-Connected: Comply with Section 26 0943.

4. Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts:

a. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 10 percent rela-tive light output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker and with even tracking across multiple lamps.

b. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be in-stalled.

c. Lamp Starting Method: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated.

d. Dimmed Lamp Starting: Capable of starting lamp(s) at any dimmed preset without transitioning first to full light output.

5. Bi-Level Stepped Dimming Linear Fluorescent Ballasts:

a. Bi-Level Operation: Capable of being switched between full light output on all lamps, 50 percent of full light output on all lamps, and all lamps off.

b. Control Compatibility: Capable of being controlled by standard manual light switches or occupancy sensors unless otherwise indicated.

c. Lamp Starting Method: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated.

D. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: Complying with ANSI C82.4 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1029.

1. Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:

a. All Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:

1) Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent.

2) Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 15 percent.

3) Power Factor: Not less than 0.90.

4) Provide thermal protection with automatic reset.

5) Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels.

6) Lamp Operating Frequency: Less than 200 Hz or as required to avoid acoustic resonance in lamp arc tube.

7) Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.5.

8) Provide end of lamp life automatic shut-down circuitry.

9) Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges accord-ing to IEEE C62.41.2, location category A.

10) Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 18, for Class A, non-consumer application.

b. Dimming Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:

1) Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 50 percent relative light output, without flicker.

2) Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.

3) Lamp Starting: Integral delay to allow lamp to warm up for 15 minutes prior to dimming.

c. Bi-Level Stepped Dimming Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:

1) Bi-Level Operation: Capable of being switched between full light output, 50 percent of full light output, and off.







2) Control Compatibility: Capable of being controlled by standard manual light switches or occupancy sensors unless otherwise indicated.

3) Lamp Starting: Integral delay to allow lamp to warm up for 15 minutes prior to dimming.

E. LED Drivers: Provide LED drivers with a minimum of five years warranty.

1. For brown out conditions on board sensors will turn off the luminaire if input volt-age falls outside safe operating range to avoid damage to driver/ballast compo-nents.

2.07 LAMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting : www.gelighting.com.

2. Osram Sylvania : www.sylvania.com.

3. Philips Lighting Company : www.lighting.philips.com.


B. All Lamps:

1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each lumi-naire.

2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommen-dations.

3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards.

4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Re-place lamps that are determined by the Owner's Field Representative to be incon-sistent in perceived color temperature.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire.

1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste.

D. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as re-quired for luminaire.

1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste.

2. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps:

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated.

b. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.

c. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start.

3. T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps:

a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise indicated.

b. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.

c. Average Rated Life: Not less than 6,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start.







E. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: Wattage as indicated, with bulb type, burning position, and base type as required for luminaire.

1. Metal Halide Lamps:

a. Non-Reflector Type Metal Halide Lamps: Phosphor coated lamp finish unless otherwise indicated.

b. Provide ANSI type O-rated protected metal halide lamps where required for open luminaires provided with compatible exclusionary sockets.

c. Ceramic Metal Halide Lamps:

1) Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,000 K unless otherwise indicat-ed.

2) Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.

F. LED Lamps: Refer to fixture schedule on drawings.

2.08 ACCESSORIES

A. Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing , minimum 1/2" size , factory finished to match luminaire or field-painted as directed.

B. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel , minimum 1/4" size , field-painted as directed.

C. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.

D. Tube Guards for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Provide clear virgin polycarbonate sleeves with endcaps where indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connec-tion to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section.







B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

E. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:

1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.

2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling sup-port system is certified as suitable to do so.

3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or framing members or to building structure.

4. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.

5. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners.

6. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s) , minimum 12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire to building structure.

7. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements.

F. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.

2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and com-bustible materials according to listing.

3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and fire-stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.

G. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire.

2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accesso-ries as required for specified mounting height.

3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet in length, with no more than 4 feet between supports.

4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface.

5. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers.

6. Contractor responsible for proper sizing to provide stable mounting.

H. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire.

I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

J. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conduc-tor.

K. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Dual-Level Switching: Connect such that each switch controls the same corresponding lamps in each luminaire.

L. Exit Signs:







1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.

2. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.

M. Remote Ballasts: Install in accessible location as indicated or as required to complete installation, using conductors per manufacturer's recommendations not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length to luminaire.

N. Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system .

O. Install lamps in each luminaire.

P. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.

Q. Provide total package including:

1. Daylighting control

2. Low voltage relay control

3. Occupancy sensors interface with owner furnished wattstopper devices.

4. Complete dimmer system

5. Complete

R. Graphics package showing devices and locations and allow for display of lighting sta-tus.

S. Provide all interface software and support to communicate to Owner's metasys system

T. Provide name of light control system being proposed with Bid Document Submittal.

U. Provide mockup of lighting control system showing its ability to interface with Owner's metasys system.


A. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

C. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Re-pair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Owner's Field Representa-tive.

D. Provide a minimum of three days training with Owner's designated personnel. Provide additional training as directed by Owner.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated on drawings or as directed by design engineer. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumi-nation of egress path as required or as directed by Owner's Field Representative or authority having jurisdiction.

C. Focus adjustable luminaires according to plans and at direction of Owner's Field Rep-resentative.







D. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Owner's Field Representative or authori-ty having jurisdiction.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Owner's Field Repre-sentative, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

3.09 ATTACHMENTS

A. Luminaire schedule - refer to drawings.

END OF SECTION





DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT 27 2100 - 1


SECTION 27 2100 – DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 PRODUCTS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Ethernet LAN Switches for Data/VOIP, Audio\Visual and CCTV security cameras.

B. Unless otherwise specified, drawings and specifications are intended to include every-thing obviously requisite and necessary to proper completion of work.

1.02 UNIT PRICES

A. Provide Unit Price for additional 48 port 10/100/1000 LAN Switch with Fiber Gigabit backbone connection.

B. Provide Unit Price for additional 10\100\1000 48 Port PoE+ line card for 4506E Chas-sis Switch.

1.03 ALTERNATES

A. This section describes base bid products. Proposing other products that fulfill require-ments may be done by submitting voulantary alternate bid separately, notifying Con-struction Manager and supplying qualifying documentation.

B. The following manufactures are approved to submit an add\deduct alternate price. Voluntary alternate must include a general description of the proposed network solu-tion including any devations from the base specifcation.

1. Juniper Networks

2. Extreme Networks

3. Avaya (Nortel)

4. HP


A. IEEE 802.1x (PEAP, TLS, TTLS, FAST, SIM, LEAP).

B. IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T.

C. IEEE 802.3u 100-Base-TX.

D. IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet.

E. IEEE 802.3af Power Over Ethernet.

F. IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus

G. IEEE 802.11a Wireless Local Area Network 5 Ghz 54Mbps.

H. IEEE 802.11b Wireless Local Area Network 2.4 Ghz 11 Mbps.

I. IEEE 802.11g Wireless Local Area Network 2.4 Ghz 54 Mbps.

J. IEEE 802.11n Wireless Local Area Network. 2.4 Ghz and 5 Ghz 600 Mbps.







K. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).

L. IEEE 802.11i (WPA2, RSN).

M. WEP and TKIP-MIC: RC40, 104 and 128 bits (both static and shared keys).

N. Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and TLS: RC4 128-bit and RSA 1024 and 2048 bit.

O. AES: CCM, CCMP.

P. SNMP v1, v2c, v3.

Q. Lightweight Access Point Protocol (LWAPP).

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. For Review.

1. Shop Drawings: Rack elevation drawings installation position in racks/cabinets.

B. For Information.

1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Products shall be new and UL listed as suitable for purpose intended.

2. Performance Data: Manufacturer's technical data sheets showing equipment meets performance requirements for each product proposed.

3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Installation instructions and manuals for all equip-ment.

4. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of Network Infrastructure Equipment with part numbers, source of supply and operation and maintenance instructions.

5. Technician qualifications: Certification documentation for training on network equipment in this specification for installation and set-up technician(s).

C. Project Closeout Documentation.


a. Four copies each.

1) Updated rack elevation drawings and floor plan drawings for final location of Communication Equipment.

2) List of fiber and/or copper cable and patch cord connections at patch panels, LAN switches, Router, Firewall and servers, by equipment port in .xls format in 8-1/2 by 11 white plastic binder. Provide electronic file on CD also.

3) List of final equipment settings by device and setting in .xls format in 8-1/2 by 11 white plastic binder. Provide electronic file on CD also.

4) See section 3.02 E.

5) Operation Data:

(a) Network operation instructions and manual for normal and recovery operations.

(b) Equipment installation, set-up and operations manuals.

(c) Contact names and telephone numbers for equipment support.

(d) Contact names and telephone numbers for firmware/software sup-port.

6) Maintenance Data: Six copies each.

(a) Equipment maintenance manuals.







(b) Contact names and telephone numbers for repair and maintenance.

7) Extra materials.

(a) Product Data: Provide list of equipment model and serial numbers by location.

8) Certificates: Certify in writing that products of this section meet or ex-ceed specified requirements.

9) Equipment Guarantee/Warranty information: Documented proof of items requiring notification or registration being completed by Contractor.

2. Guarantee: Execute and deliver written one year guarantee, prior to issue of final certificate.

a. Should any defect develop during guarantee period due to improper materi-als, workmanship, or arrangement, it shall be made good to Owner without expense to Owner. Any work affected in correcting such defects shall also be made good. Changes requested by Owner to network configuration after ac-ceptance shall not be part of this guarantee.

3. Provide price for maintenance of equipment for four years beyond warranty peri-od.


A. Qualifications.

1. Contractor: Licensed and bonded with demonstrated experience in installation and operation of equipment proposed. Technicians to perform work must be certi-fied to install and maintain proposed equipment with three years' experience. Present certification documentation in submittals.

2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than 10 years of documented experience.

B. Preinstallation Meeting.

1. Set up for one month prior to start of installation.

2. Conduct meeting with Owner to establish Network requirements.

3. Obtain IP address and network configuration information.

4. Establish schedule for implementation.

5. Record and publish meeting results to all attendees and the Owner's Field Repre-sentative.


A. Provide off-site storage for equipment until installation.


A. Coordinate Network Infrastructure Equipment installation with structured telecommuni-cations cabling contractor, CCTV contractor, Audio\Visual, electrical contractor, Own-er's network representative and Construction Manager.

B. Sequence installation to ensure installation and network operation are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.







1.09 OWNER'S OPTIONS

A. Reference in Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form, or type of construction by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as estab-lishing standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition.

B. However, unless agreement contains statement or statements designating otherwise, following provisions shall apply.

1. Where Specification mentions names, makes, types or styles, employ one of these subcontractors, fabricators or processes and furnish such make, type or style so specified, regardless of any reference to phrase 'or other approved', or other words to that effect, which may appear in Specification.

2. Or other approved, shall be judged solely by Owner's Field Representative.

1.10 INQUIRIES REGARDING THE SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS

A. To Construction Manager.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective Work within one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. One year warranty plus two year Smart Net warranty extension for all network switch-es.

1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Provide service and maintenance of Network Infrastructure Equipment installed, in-cluding firmware/software for two years from Date of Substantial Completion. Provide pricing for one year continued maintenance after first two years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where products are listed, following requirements apply for product selection.

1. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufac-turers offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.02 SYSTEM

A. Local Area Network Infrastructure Equipment for Cobo Hall. LAN is to provide path-ways for data, VOIP, IP Security Cameras (CCTV), Audio\Visual, Wireless Acces Points and access to Internet services for Cobo Hall. Network Infrastructure Equip-ment will include 48 port 10/100/1000 VOIP capable Ethernet LAN Switches. VOIP







telephones and IP CCTV Cameras will be powered through LAN cabling from IDFs and MDF utilizing Power over Ethernet (PoE) from the network switch they are con-nected to. Wireless Access Points, IP Cameras, VOIP Servers, telephony equipment and associated items are not included in this specification. In the existing MDF, re-move and turn over to the owner equipment as shown to be replaced with new network switches. Re-patch new network switches to existing station drops using new patch cables. Use color coded patch cables as described in the structured cabling specifica-tion. Relocate existing network equipment and re-patch to the new core chassis switches using new patch cables. Use color coded patch cables as described in the structured cabling specification.

B. Include labor, materials, equipment, services and similar items to furnish complete and functional Local Area Network Infrastructure Equipment installation and configuration.

C. Design Requirements.

1. LAN requires 24 hour a day / 7 day a week operation.

D. Performance Requirements.

1. Network Infrastructure Equipment must:

a. Be of new manufacture and UL listed.

b. Meet applicable standards.

c. Be manageable locally or across network.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. MDF Core Switches, quantity two.

1. Catalyst 4500E 6 slot chassis, 240 maximum station drop port capacity, 10/100/1000 megabit Ethernet, Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) capable Ethernet LAN line cards. 10 Gigabit Ethernet backbone connectivity on the Su-pervisor 7E line card.

a. Two copper 10 Gigabit GIBICs in each supervisor line card. Cross-connect the two switches together with two copper patch cables.

b. Copper Gigabit GIBIC's in each supervisor line card. Up-link to customers exisiting internet and remote locations connections. These links are long-haul single mode fiber. Select proper GBIC to match fiber distance.

c. One fiber Gigabit GIBIC for each existing IDF fiber uplink. Select GBIC to match existing fiber.

d. One fiber Gigabit GIBIC for each new LAN switch in each new IDF for Laser optimized 50 micron OM3 multi-mode fiber.

e. Local or remote management. Redundant management.

f. Supervisor line cards shall be configured to be redundant to each other be-tween switches.

g. Network upgradeable.

h. Port by Port VLAN assignment.

i. Up to 8 VLAN support per line card.

j. Guest VLAN Port assignment.

k. SMTP capable.

l. Auto speed recognition and negotiation.

m. Port blocking by traffic type or threshold.

n. Multicast management.







o. Layer 2,3,4 capable.

p. IP Routing.

q. Quality of Service (QoS) control.

r. 64 Gbps full duplex back plane.

s. Hot swappable redundant cooling fans.

t. 19" rack mountable.

u. Catalyst 4500 Chassis WS-C4506-E-6.

v. Catalyst 4500 Supervisor Engine, one per chassis.

1) Supervisor 7E.

2) Latest IOS Software Release.

3) Provide quote for one year firmware and software updates.

4) Include enterprise services with permanent software activation.

5) Cisco WS-X45-SUP7E

(a) C4500E-LB LAN Based software license.

(b) L-C4500E-LB-ES LAN based to enterprise services upgrade license.

w. Catalyst 4500 40 Port SFP Gigabit Line Card, one per chassis.

1) 40 Ports with Gigabit SFP.

2) 80 Ports with Gigabit compact SFP.

3) Compatible only with a Supervisor 7E line card.

4) Cisco WS-X4640-CSFP-E.

x. Catalyst 4500 Ethernet Line Card, three per chassis.

1) 48 Port PoE E-Series Line card.

2) 10/100/1000 RJ 45.

3) Auto speed recognition and negotiation.

4) PoE+ power

5) Total average power capacity per line card 1,440 watt.

6) 30 watts per port up to 48 ports.

7) 60 watts per port up to 24 ports.

y. Catalyst 4500 Power Supplies, two per chassis.

1) 4,200 WAC per power supply.

2) 223 ports PoE @ 15 watts\port.

3) Dual 208V Input.

4) Dual Power Cords NEMA L6-20P to IEC-C19.

(a) Catalyst 4500 CAB-L620p-C19-US.

5) Catalyst 4500 PWR-C45-4200 AVC.

B. LAN Switches.

1. 48 port, 10/100/1000 megabit Ethernet, Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) ca-pable Ethernet LAN Switches with Gigabit Ethernet backbone connectivity.

a. Fiber GBICs, quantity one per LAN switch and one at the Core switch in the MDF.

b. Local or remote management. Redundant management.

c. Network upgradeable.

d. Port by Port VLAN assignment.

e. Up to 8 VLAN support.

f. Guest VLAN Port assignment.

g. SMTP capable.

h. Auto speed recognition and negotiation.







i. Port blocking by traffic type or threshold.

j. Multicast management.

k. Layer 2, 3, capable.

l. IP Routing.

m. IP Services: Enterprise Services

n. Quality of Service (QoS) control.

o. Four port GbE port network module.

p. One GBIC LAN backbone connection per switch (Gigabit Ethernet), for laser optimized 50 micron fiber. Coordinate with cabling installation contractor for exact fiber type.

q. Input power 120 - 240 VAC 50/60 hertz.

r. Single Power Supply. 1,100WAC. Available PoE Power 800W

s. Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+)

t. 15 watts PoE available at all 48 ports.

u. 19-inch rack mountable.

v. Provide firmware and software required for operation.

w. Provide quote for one year firmware and software updates.

x. One year warranty.

2. Acceptable Product.

a. CISCO WS-C3560X-48PF-S

C. LAN Router and Firewall.

1. Existing. Relocate to the new MDF and re-patch to the two new core switches.

D. KVM Switch\conslole

1. One for Rack 7 and one for Rack 8.

2. Combination 15" LCD, keyboard, touch pad and an 8-port KVM switch.

3. Suggested Product Chatsworth 35910-832.

E. Uninterruptable Power Source (UPS).

1. Provide and install Dual Conversion on-line Uninterruptable Power Source(s) (UPS) to support equipment in each rack. Coordinate with Security Access Sys-tem Contractor and Owner for equipment in these racks for total requirements. Owner will have some server equipment to mount in racks.

2. On-Line 4000 watts / 5000VA.

a. Input 208V. Nema L14-30P

1) 10 foot cord.

b. Output 120/208V.

1) (4) NEMA 5-20R

2) (1) NEMA L14-30R

3) (1) NEMA L6-30R

c. Rack PDU Extender.

1) 2U.

2) Input 30A., 200/208V NEMA L14-30P.

3) Output 208V. (4) NEMA L6-20R.

4) Suggested Product APC AP7581.

d. Interface Ports

1) RJ-45 10 Base-T SmartSlot

2) Control Panel with LED Status Display with load and battery bar-graphs.







3) Audible Alarm when on battery, low battery and overload.

e. Surge energy rating 365 Joules.

f. Rack height 3U.

g. Battery Type

1) Maintenance-free sealed lead acid battery with suspended electrolyte : leakproof

2) Minimum recharge time 2.5 hours.

h. Suggested Product APC Smart UPS On-line SURTD5000RMXLP3U.

3. On-Line 2100 watts / 3000VA.

a. Input 208V. Nema L6-30P

1) 10 foot cord.

b. Output 120/208V.

1) (12) NEMA 5-20R

2) (2) NEMA L6-20R

3) (1) NEMA L6-30R

c. Interface Ports

1) RJ-45 10 Base-T SmartSlot

2) Control Panel with LED Status Display with load and battery bar-graphs.

3) Audible Alarm when on battery, low battery and overload.

d. Surge energy rating 365 Joules.

e. Rack height 5U.

f. Battery Type

1) Maintenance-free sealed lead acid battery with suspended electrolyte : leakproof

2) Minimum recharge time 2.5 hours.

g. Suggested Product APC Smart UPS On-line SURTD3KRMXL3U-TF5.

4.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation and set up of materials with Construction Manager and Owner's network representative.

B. Make sure on-site equipment location will be secure prior to installation.

C. Schedule meeting to ensure equipment installation requirements including environ-mental requirements are met prior to installation.

D. Obtain necessary installation parameters from Owner's representative: IP addresses, back-up procedures to be used, etc.

E. Coordinate work with Voice/Data cabling contractor, Audio/Visual contractor, Video Surveillance contractor and Security Access System contractor to ensure equipment is installed in timely manner so all may operate and test each system without delays to schedule.







3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install Network Equipment in this Specification to include.

1. Physical installation in racks located in MDF and IDFs.

a. Provide hardware and accessories. (Racks will be provided by Communica-tion (Voice/Data) cabling contractor).

b. Follow manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations.

2. Power on and test individual units.

3. Set-up operational parameters for each unit, including IP addresses, virtual LAN requirements, firewall settings, router settings, etc as directed by the owner.

a. Minimum VLAN configurations:

1) VLAN 1 General Office Use.

2) VLAN 2 General Public and Exibitioner Use.

3) VLAN 3 Wireless Access Points.

4) VLAN 4 IP Telephony.

5) VLAN 5 CCTV.

6) VLAN 6 Audio\Visual.

7) Additional VLAN configurations as directed by the owner.

4. Provide on-site manufacturer certified representative assistance for problem reso-lution.

B. Install horizontal cable management above and below network equipment being in-stalled as shown on rack elevation drawings. Horizontal cable management is being provided by voice/data cabling installer.

C. Install fiber optic and copper patch cords for network equipment. Patch cords are be-ing provided by voice/data cabling installer. Coordinate with Owner's network repre-sentative and voice/data cabling installer.

D. Labeling.

1. Label each 48 port Ethernet LAN switch with rack number it is in (see rack eleva-tion drawings) and switch number. Example: Rack 2 switch at top. Label will be "2-SW1." Label shall be white, machine printed 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/2 inch high. (Example - Brady B-437)

E. Documentation.

1. Document following and supply six copies of each spreadsheet in 8-1/2 by 11 white plastic binder and CD electronic copy for closeout. Present proposed spreadsheet format for approval by Owner's Field Representative prior to doing work.

a. Record patch cable connections between Voice/Data copper patch panels and Ethernet LAN Switches by port for both ends in IDFs and MDF in spread-sheet format.

b. Record Optical fiber patch cord connections between enclosures for optical fiber and Ethernet LAN Switches by strand and port for both ends in spread-sheet format.

c. Record patch cord connections between Voice/Data copper patch panels, Power over Ethernet Midspan Injectors and Ethernet LAN Switches by port for four cable ends in IDFs and MDF in spreadsheet format.

d. Record connections for Router/Firewall and Ethernet LAN Switches or other units by port for both ends in spreadsheet format.








A. Inspect equipment received for shipping damage.

1. Procure replacements for damaged equipment without cost to Owner.

2. Store equipment at your site until agreed to installation date, without cost to Own-er.

3. Burn in Communication Equipment for one week minimum prior to turn over to Owner.

4. Verify Communication Equipment setup meets Owner's criteria for LAN operation.

5. Verify LAN connection for Internet accessibility is operating correctly. Coordinate with Owner's network representative.

a. Assist Owner with any problems until they are resolved.

b. Interface with Owner's Internet service provider and assist with problem reso-lution.

6. Coordinate with IP camera CCTV installers to ensure network is operational with cameras installed and operating. Assist in diagnosing any problems until they are resolved.

7. Provide diagnostic assistance for any problem with information transport on net-work until problem resolution. This will be for all devices attached to network.

B. Adjusting.

1. Set parameters on provided equipment to provide complete working network.

2. Coordinate with Voice/Data cabling installer, other network equipment installer's (servers, etc.) and Owner's representative to ensure proper network operation of devices.

a. Make necessary adjustments to network equipment parameters.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Commissioning.

1. Verify documents indicate specified products installed.

2. Submit manufacturer's cut sheets (not generic product distribution sheets) to Construction Manager.

3. Verify network equipment matches Bid Document Submittals.

4. Observe on-site installation to ensure conformance to Contract Documents.

5. Schedule network testing with Owner to demonstrate network operational status for final acceptance.

a. Connection of properly configured PC to cable outlets at 10 locations in dif-ferent building areas and demonstration of ability to access Internet.

b. Connection of properly configured PC to cable outlets at 10 locations in dif-ferent building areas and demonstration of the ability to access Owner's pro-grams and information. (Assumes Owner's network is available at time of test. If Owner's network is not set up and available, rescheduling and costs will be negotiated.)

1) Assist with problem resolution if Owner programs and information are not accessible on network until problems are resolved.

6. Coordinate tour of site for Owner's personnel to show equipment set-up and loca-tions and explain network operations.

7. Demonstrate and explain use of each piece of equipment.







8. Provide four hours of training each for two Owner's personnel for each network equipment device supplied in this work.

9. Submit all documentation in Section 1.04 C Project Closeout Documentation. Re-view will require 2 weeks minimum.

10. Submit certificate of acceptance to Construction Manager for final approval and sign off.

11. Acceptance will be based on complete network operation of devices connected to network, documentation being complete and submitted, and completed demon-stration and training.

END OF SECTION


Bollards 32 3913 - 1

ROSSETTI Issue 003

SECTION 32 3913 - BOLLARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Bollards. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM Testing Standards: 1. ASTM A 500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 2. ASTM A 513 – Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and

Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. 3. ASTM G 155 – Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Ex-

posure of Non-Metallic Materials. B. ISO Testing Standards: 1. ISO 1520 – Paints and Varnishes – Cupping Test. 2. ISO 2815 – Paints and Varnishes – Buchholz Indentation Test.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, storage and handling requirements

and recommendations, installation methods and available colors, styles, patterns and textures.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, including plans and elevations, indicating overall dimensions.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s samples of materials, finishes, and colors. D. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty.


A. Product Support: Products are supported with complete engineering drawings and design patents.

B. Production: Orders are filled within a 40-day schedule. C. Facility Operator: Welders and machine operators are certified.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and

packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer’s instruc-

tions. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging until installation.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent dam-age.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Information: -Products will be free from defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of three years from the date of Substantial completion. -The warranty does not apply to damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse, tampering, negligence, or abuse.



ROSSETTI Issue 003

-Purchasers should be aware that normal use of these high quality products can result in superficial damage affecting the finish. Scratches, nicks, and dents are to be con-sidered normal wear and tear, and are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Landscape Forms, Inc., 431 Lawndale Avenue, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048. Toll Free (800) 521-2546. Phone (269) 381-0396. Fax (269) 381-3455. Website www.landscapeforms.com. E-mail: [email protected].

2.2 BOLLARDS

A. “Annapolis” Bollards 1. Style:

a. Security Bollard – permanently embedded 2. Size:

a. 12-inch Nominal Diameter. -Outer Diameter Pipe Size: 12.750 inches. -Wall Thickness: 0.375 inches. -Height: 33 inches.

3. Mounting: a. Permanently embedded.

4. LED Lighting: a. Not for use within 10 feet of a fountain b. Luminaire: UL listed to U.S. and Canadian safety standards.

1) 12 inch Bollard: Driver input is 100-277vAC@ 47-63Hz; output current is 700mA, 3W.

c. Light Fixture Mounting Bracket: 3/4” x 1/8” formed aluminum bracket held in place with two #8-32 pan head machined screws. Mounting bracket is secured to mounting strap (3/4” wide 1/8” steel strap) using two #8-32 pan head machine screws. Mounting strap is welded inside bollard tube. d. Diffuser: 0.020” translucent white UV stabilized impact modified acrylic sheet, ends secured by white plastic “H” extrusion. e. LED Diffuser: LED diffuser lens is bonded to the aluminum mounting plate. f. LED Controller: LED controller board is thermally bonded to the aluminum

mounting plate and secured to bollard mounting bracket with two #8-32 pan head machine screws with lock-washers.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Bollard Tube: Structural steel tube, ASTM A 500, Grade B. B. Bollard Top: Aluminum casting.

C. Surface Mount Plate: 3/8” thick ASTM A36 steel plate with four 9/16” anchor holes on 8-3/4” dia. bolt circle. Fits inside 10.91” outside dia. cover.

D. Surface Mount Plate Cover Ring: 1. 12 inch nominal pipe

-Spun aluminum, Type 5052-H32. -Thickness: 0.160 inch. -Outside Diameter: 16.95 inches.

E. Color: 3 1. To be determined by Architect



ROSSETTI Issue 003

F. Fasteners:

1. Top Retaining Screw for Bollard without Plastic Sleeve: 5/16-18 by 1-inch hex-socket button, head cap screw, stainless steel.

2.4 NOT USED 2.5 FINISHES A. Finish on Metal: Landscape Forms, Inc. “Pangard II”.

1. Primer: Rust inhibitor. 2. Topcoat: Thermosetting TGIC polyester powder coat. UV, chip, and flake re-sistant. 3. Test Results: “Pangard II”.

a. Gloss Consistency, Gardner 60 Degrees, ASTM D 523: Plus or minus 5 per-cent from standard. b. UV Resistance, Color and Gloss, ASTM G 155, Cycle 7: Delta E less than 2 at 2.0 mils and less than 20 percent loss. c. Cross-Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D 3359, Method B: 100 percent pass. d. Flexibility Test, Mandrel, ASTM D 522: 3 mm at 2 mils. e. Erichsen Cupping, ISO 1520: 8 mm. f. Impression Hardness, Buchholz, ISO 2815: 95. g. Impact Test, ASTM D 2794: 60 inch-pounds at 2.5 mils. h. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: 2H minimum. i. Corrosion Resistance, 1,500-Hour Test, ASTM B 117: Max undercutting 1 mm. j. Humidity Resistance, 1,500-Hour Test, ASTM D 2247: Max blisters 1 mm.

B. Color: To be determined by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive bollards.

B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.

C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install bollards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on

the Drawings. B. Install bollards plumb. C. Embed bollards securely in concrete.

D. Do not install bollards with LED lighting within 10 feet of fountain.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Finish Damage: Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s in-

structions and as approved by Architect. B. Component Damage: Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be suc-

cessfully repaired as determined by Architect. 3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean bollards promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. 3.5 PROTECTION



ROSSETTI Issue 003

A. Protect installed bollards to ensure that, except for normal weathering, bollards will be

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 32 3913